Volume 5

CEYLON ELECTRICITY BOARD SRI LANKA CLEAN ENERGY AND ACCESS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
(ADB Loan No. 2518-SRI)
PART 1: SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE MODERNISATION PROJECT

PACKAGE A CONSTRUCTION OF NATIONAL SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE AND INSTALLATION OF SCADA AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
Procurement of Plant
Design, Supply and Install
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure BIDDING DOCUMENT for
Establishment of: National System Control Centre and SCADA System
VOLUME 5 of 8
Part II- REQUIREMENTS
Section 6-Employers Requirements Part B-Technical Specification
Issued on: February 2011 Invitation for Bids No: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/IFB/010 ICB No.: CEB/AGM/TR/2010/ICB/010 Employer: Ceylon Electricity Board Country: Sri Lanka Transmission Design Branch, CEB
Transmission Division Ceylon Electricity Board, P.O. Box 540, Colombo 2 Sri Lanka February 2011 Document-Revision 1
Contents - Summary Description

VOLUME 1 of 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES
Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders (ITB) ------------------------------------------------ 1-1
This section specifies the course of actions to be taken by Bidders in the preparation and submission of their Bids following a Single-Stage, Two-envelop bidding procedure. Information is also provided on the submission, opening, and evaluation of bids and on the award of contract.
Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS) --------------------------------------------------------- 2-1

This section consists of provisions that are specific to each procurement and supplement the information or requirements included in Section 1 - Instructions to Bidders.
Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC) -------------------------- 3-1

This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and qualify Bidders. In accordance with section 1-E (ITB 28-41), no other factors, methods or criteria shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms included in Section 4 (Bidding Forms).
VOLUME 2 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4A-1
Part A-Price Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.
VOLUME 3 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section 4 - Bidding Forms (BDF) -------------------------------------------------------- 4B-1
Part B-Technical Bid This Section contains the forms which are to be completed by the Bidder and submitted as part of his Bid.
Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC) ----------------------------------------------------- 5-1

This section contains the list of eligible countries.
VOLUME 4 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS

Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) ---------------------------------------- 6A-1
Part A-Scope of Works

Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6B-1
Part B-Technical Specification

Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6C-1
Part C-Drawings

Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6D-1
Part D-Supplementary Information,
Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6E-1

Part E-Bank Guarantees, Certificates and Change Orders
VOLUME 8 OF 8 PART III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS

Section 7 - General Conditions of Contract (GCC) ---------------------------------- 7-1
This Section contains the general clauses to be applied in all contracts. These Conditions are subject to the variations and additions set out in Section 8 (Special Conditions of Contract).
Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ----------------------------------- 8-1

This Section supplements the General Conditions of Contract (GCC). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GCC. The clause number of the SCC is the corresponding clause number of the GCC.
Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF) --------------------------------------------------------- 9-1

This Section contains the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement and Appendices to the Contract Agreement which, once completed, will form part of the Contract.
Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications
PART B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SCADA/EMS, TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, OUTSTATIONS, POWER SUPPLY AND NSCC BUILDING
CONTENTS CHAPTER No. 1. TITLE PAGE No.
INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................... 24 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION .................................................................................. 24 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE ........................................................... 25 OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ....................................... 26 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM ........................................................ 30 NSCC BUILDING ............................................................................................................ 31 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY ................................... 31 1.6.1 SCADA/EMS System ...................................................................................... 31 1.6.2 Telecommunication System ............................................................................ 32 1.6.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works ................................................. 32 1.6.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre ....................................................... 33 1.6.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System ............................................................. 33 1.6.6 NSCC Building................................................................................................. 33 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS ...................... 34
1.7 2.
NSCC SCADA/EMS ................................................................................................................. 35 2.1 2.2 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 35 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 35 2.2.1 General ............................................................................................................ 35 2.2.2 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 35 2.2.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing ................................................................................ 36 2.2.4 Reliability and Availability ................................................................................ 36 2.2.5 Risks ................................................................................................................ 36 SCADA APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1 Communication................................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.1 Data Acquisition........................................................................................ 37 2.3.1.2 ICCP Data Links ....................................................................................... 37 2.3.2 Data Processing .............................................................................................. 37 2.3.2.1 Measured Values...................................................................................... 38 2.3.2.2 Status Indications - Digital Points ............................................................. 39 2.3.2.3 Derived Data ............................................................................................. 40 2.3.2.4 Meter Values ............................................................................................ 41 2.3.2.5 Tap Position .............................................................................................. 41 2.3.2.6 Data Quality Attributes ............................................................................. 41 2.3.2.7 Controls .................................................................................................... 42 2.3.3 Alarm and Event Processing ........................................................................... 43 2.3.3.1 Definition ................................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.2 Event Handling ......................................................................................... 43 2.3.3.3 Alarm Management .................................................................................. 44 2.3.3.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists ................................................................. 46 2.3.3.5 Sequence of Events Processing .............................................................. 46 2.3.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring ............................................................................ 46
2.3
Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A
Page 6B- 1 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope
2.3.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI) .......................................................................... 46 2.3.4.1 General ..................................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.2 Access Control ......................................................................................... 46 2.3.4.3 Displays .................................................................................................... 47 2.3.4.4 Supervisory Control .................................................................................. 49 2.3.4.5 Sequence Control ..................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.6 Set Point Control ...................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.7 Manual Dressing....................................................................................... 51 2.3.4.8 Trending ................................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.9 Diagram Tagging ...................................................................................... 52 2.3.4.10 Printing ..................................................................................................... 53 2.4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM .............................................................................. 54 2.4.1 General Introduction ........................................................................................ 54 2.4.2 Transmission/Generation Network .................................................................. 54 2.4.3 EMS Database ................................................................................................ 55 2.4.4 Real-Time Network Analysis ........................................................................... 55 2.4.4.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 55 2.4.4.2 Network Topology..................................................................................... 56 2.4.4.3 State Estimation ....................................................................................... 57 2.4.4.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation .................................. 58 2.4.4.5 Security Assessment ................................................................................ 58 2.4.4.6 Bus Load Forecast ................................................................................... 59 2.4.4.7 Loss Penalty Factors ................................................................................ 59 2.4.4.8 Optimal Power Flow ................................................................................. 59 2.4.4.9 Save cases ............................................................................................... 60 2.4.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation ................................................................ 60 2.4.6 Study Mode Network Analysis ......................................................................... 60 2.4.7 Generating Plant Scheduling ........................................................................... 61 2.4.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 61 2.4.7.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data ..................................................................... 62 2.4.7.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs ......................................................................... 63 2.4.7.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes ................................................ 63 2.4.7.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring .................................................................. 63 2.4.8 Demand Forecasting ....................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 64 2.4.8.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts ................................................................ 64 2.4.8.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility ................................................... 64 2.4.9 Economic Load Dispatching ............................................................................ 65 2.4.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 65 2.4.9.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching ............................................. 65 2.4.9.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching ................................................................. 66 2.4.10 Reactive Power Scheduling ............................................................................ 66 2.4.10.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 66 2.4.10.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data ................................................................. 66 2.4.10.3 Reactive Power Calculation ..................................................................... 67 2.4.10.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs ..................................................................... 67 2.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant ............................................................ 67 2.4.11.1 General Requirements ............................................................................. 67 2.4.11.2 Automatic Generation Control .................................................................. 67 2.4.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations ..................................... 68 2.4.12.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 68 2.4.12.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules ..................................... 68 2.4.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays ........................................ 68 2.4.12.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control .......................................... 69 2.4.12.5 Embedded Generation Data ..................................................................... 69 OTHER APPLICATIONS ................................................................................................ 69 2.5.1 Switching Schedules ....................................................................................... 69 2.5.2 Job Management ............................................................................................. 69 2.5.3 Fault Detection, Location and Load Restoration (Option) ............................... 70 2.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option) ................................................................. 70
2.5
2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7
Under Frequency Load Shedding ................................................................... 70 Load Shedding Schedules .............................................................................. 70
HISTORICAL DATA ........................................................................................................ 70 REPORT GENERATION ................................................................................................ 71 2.7.1 Routine Reports............................................................................................... 71 2.7.2 Energy Reports ................................................................................................ 71 DATABASE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 72 2.8.1 General ............................................................................................................ 72 2.8.2 Data Entry........................................................................................................ 73 2.8.3 Data Manipulation Function ............................................................................. 73 2.8.4 Graphic Display Construction .......................................................................... 73 2.8.4.1 Configuration Responsibilities .................................................................. 74 2.8.5 Changes to Configuration Data ....................................................................... 75 2.8.6 Change Control ............................................................................................... 75 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES ..................................................................................... 75
2.8
2.9
2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR ........................................................................... 75 2.10.1 Objectives ........................................................................................................ 75 2.10.2 Simulation Functions ....................................................................................... 76 2.10.3 Relay modelling ............................................................................................... 77 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE .................................................................................. 78 2.11.1 Operating Systems .......................................................................................... 78 2.11.2 Antivirus Software............................................................................................ 78 2.11.3 Servers ............................................................................................................ 78 2.11.4 Data Acquisition Servers ................................................................................. 78 2.11.5 Operator Workstations .................................................................................... 79 2.11.6 Local Area Network (LAN) ............................................................................... 79 2.11.6.1 Ethernet switches ..................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.2 Routers ..................................................................................................... 79 2.11.6.3 LAN Management..................................................................................... 80 2.11.7 Printers ............................................................................................................ 80 2.11.7.1 General ..................................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.2 Laser Printers ........................................................................................... 80 2.11.7.3 Colour Printers .......................................................................................... 80 2.11.8 Video Wall ....................................................................................................... 80 2.11.8.1 Display Units ............................................................................................. 81 2.11.8.2 Controllers ................................................................................................ 81 2.11.8.3 Video Wall Construction ........................................................................... 81 2.11.8.4 Software ................................................................................................... 81 2.11.8.5 Management............................................................................................. 82 2.11.9 System Time.................................................................................................... 82 2.11.10 System Displays .............................................................................................. 82 2.12 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................ 82 2.12.1 Normal Activity Conditions .............................................................................. 82 2.12.2 High Activity Conditions ................................................................................... 83 2.12.3 Computer Start Up........................................................................................... 83 2.12.4 Transfer of Operation ...................................................................................... 83 2.12.5 System Response Times ................................................................................ 83 2.13 CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE................................................................................. 84 2.13.1 Operator Desks ............................................................................................... 84 2.13.2 Operator Chairs ............................................................................................... 85 2.13.3 Equipment Stands ........................................................................................... 85 2.13.4 Office Furniture ................................................................................................ 85
3.
TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 86 3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 86 3.1.1 Specification and Design Criteria .................................................................... 86 3.1.2 Reference Documents and Standards ............................................................ 86 3.1.3 Site and Environmental Conditions ................................................................. 87 3.1.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities ......................................... 87 3.1.5 Implementation Programme ............................................................................ 88 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 88 3.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................... 88 3.2.2 Design and Operational Philosophy ................................................................ 89 3.2.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ................................................................. 90 3.2.4 Telecommunication Network ........................................................................... 90 3.2.4.1 Configuration and Topology ..................................................................... 90 3.2.4.2 Network Design ........................................................................................ 91 3.2.4.3 Network Protection ................................................................................... 91 3.2.4.4 Fibre Optic Links....................................................................................... 92 3.2.4.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links .............................................................. 97 3.2.4.6 Communication Facilities ......................................................................... 97 3.2.4.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC ................................ 99 3.2.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations .............. 99 3.2.5 Telecommunication Management System .................................................... 100 3.2.5.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.5.2 Time Synchronisation ............................................................................. 101 3.2.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment ............................................................. 101 3.2.7 Telephone Network ....................................................................................... 102 3.2.7.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment ........................................................... 102 3.2.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment ................................................................... 102 3.2.8 Power Supply Requirements ......................................................................... 103 3.2.8.1 At NSCC ................................................................................................. 103 3.2.8.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations .......................................... 103 3.2.8.3 At Employers HQ Building ..................................................................... 103 3.2.9 Equipment Locations ..................................................................................... 103 3.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System ........................ 104 3.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment .................................................... 104 3.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 104 FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................................................... 106 3.3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 106 3.3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 106 3.3.2 Loss Budget Calculations .............................................................................. 106 3.3.3 Safety ............................................................................................................ 107 3.3.4 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 107 3.3.4.1 General ................................................................................................... 107 3.3.4.2 System Capacity and Performance ........................................................ 107 3.3.4.3 Service Channels ................................................................................... 108 3.3.5 SDH Equipment ............................................................................................. 108 3.3.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 108 3.3.5.2 Optical Line Interface ............................................................................. 109 3.3.5.3 Electrical Line Interface .......................................................................... 109 3.3.5.4 Tributary Module..................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.5 Switching Unit ......................................................................................... 110 3.3.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions .................................................................. 110 3.3.5.7 Engineer Order Wire............................................................................... 111 3.3.5.8 Service Data Interface ............................................................................ 111 3.3.5.9 Power Supply Unit .................................................................................. 111 3.3.5.10 Centralized Function............................................................................... 111 3.3.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment ....................................................... 111 3.3.6.1 General ................................................................................................... 111 3.3.6.2 Multiplexer .............................................................................................. 111 3.3.6.3 Alarm Indications .................................................................................... 112
3.2
3.3
3.3.6.4 User Interfaces ....................................................................................... 112 3.3.7 Cross Connection Equipment ........................................................................ 114 3.3.8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters ................................................................... 114 3.3.8.1 General ................................................................................................... 114 3.3.8.2 Alarm indications .................................................................................... 114 3.3.9 Power Supplies Requirements ...................................................................... 115 3.3.10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels ......................................... 115 3.4 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................................... 116 3.4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 116 3.4.2 Functional requirements ................................................................................ 116 3.4.2.1 General ................................................................................................... 116 3.4.2.2 System Architecture and Design Concept ............................................. 117 3.4.2.3 System Performance .............................................................................. 117 3.4.2.4 Management Functions .......................................................................... 117 3.4.3 Telecommunication Management System .................................................... 119 3.4.3.1 General ................................................................................................... 119 3.4.3.2 Central Computer System ...................................................................... 119 3.4.3.3 Software ................................................................................................. 121 3.4.3.4 System Functions ................................................................................... 122 3.4.4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture ...................................... 123 3.4.4.1 Control Desk ........................................................................................... 123 3.4.4.2 Chairs 123 3.4.4.3 Stands .................................................................................................... 123 DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM ............................................................... 124 3.5.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 124 3.5.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 124 3.5.1.2 Safety 124 3.5.2 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 124 3.5.2.1 General ................................................................................................... 124 3.5.2.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation .................................................................. 124 3.5.3 Digital PLC Equipment .................................................................................. 124 3.5.3.1 General ................................................................................................... 124 3.5.3.2 Design Characteristics ........................................................................... 125 3.5.3.3 Carrier Oscillators ................................................................................... 125 3.5.3.4 Automatic Gain Control .......................................................................... 125 3.5.3.5 Service Telephone.................................................................................. 126 3.5.3.6 Test Facilities .......................................................................................... 126 3.5.3.7 User Interfaces ....................................................................................... 126 3.5.3.8 Monitoring ............................................................................................... 126 3.5.3.9 Alarms .................................................................................................... 126 3.5.3.10 Power Supplies Requirements ............................................................... 126 TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 128 3.6.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 128 3.6.2 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 128 3.6.2.1 General ................................................................................................... 128 3.6.2.2 System Capacity..................................................................................... 129 3.6.2.3 System Performance .............................................................................. 129 3.6.2.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 129 3.6.2.5 Alarms indications .................................................................................. 129 3.6.2.6 Power Supplies Requirements ............................................................... 129 TELEPHONE SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 130 3.7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 130 3.7.2 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 130 3.7.2.1 General ................................................................................................... 130 3.7.2.2 System Performance .............................................................................. 130 3.7.2.3 Network Management Facilities ............................................................. 130 3.7.2.4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces ............................................................. 131 3.7.2.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment ............................................... 132
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.7.3 SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment .......................................................... 132 3.7.3.1 General ................................................................................................... 132 3.7.3.2 Switching Facilities ................................................................................. 133 3.7.3.3 System Facilities..................................................................................... 133 3.7.3.4 Extension Facilities ................................................................................. 133 3.7.3.5 Switching Capacity ................................................................................. 134 3.7.3.6 Transmission Performance .................................................................... 134 3.7.3.7 Software ................................................................................................. 135 3.7.3.8 Maintenance ........................................................................................... 135 3.7.3.9 Hardware ................................................................................................ 136 3.7.4 Synchronisation ............................................................................................. 136 3.7.5 Telephone Numbering Plan ........................................................................... 136 3.7.6 Telephone Signalling ..................................................................................... 136 3.7.7 Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities ................................... 137 3.7.8 Telephone System Management Console .................................................... 137 3.7.9 Telephone Handsets ..................................................................................... 137 3.7.10 Main Distribution Frame ................................................................................ 137 3.7.11 Voice Recording Equipment .......................................................................... 138 4. OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS ................................................ 139 4.1 4.2 4.3 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 139 DESIGN OBJECTIVES ................................................................................................. 139 OUTSTATIONS ............................................................................................................ 139 4.3.1 Initial Equipping of Outstations ...................................................................... 139 4.3.2 Expansion and Upgrade Capability ............................................................... 144 4.3.3 Functional requirements ................................................................................ 144 4.3.3.1 General ................................................................................................... 144 4.3.3.2 Time Synchronisation ............................................................................. 145 4.3.3.3 Communication Protocols ...................................................................... 145 4.3.4 Control Security ............................................................................................. 145 4.3.5 Hardware Requirements ............................................................................... 146 4.3.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 146 4.3.5.2 Digital Inputs ........................................................................................... 146 4.3.5.3 Analogue Inputs...................................................................................... 146 4.3.5.4 Pulse Counting ....................................................................................... 147 4.3.5.5 Command Outputs ................................................................................. 147 4.3.5.6 Digital Outputs ........................................................................................ 147 4.3.5.7 Analogue Outputs ................................................................................... 147 4.3.6 External Communications Interfaces............................................................. 147 4.3.6.1 Master Stations ....................................................................................... 147 4.3.6.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) ........................................................ 148 4.3.6.3 Configuration and Maintenance ............................................................. 148 4.3.7 Power supplies .............................................................................................. 148 4.3.8 Configuration and Maintenance .................................................................... 148 4.3.8.1 Configuration Tools ................................................................................ 148 4.3.8.2 Database Management System ............................................................. 148 4.3.8.3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities ................................................. 149 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL ....................................................................................... 149 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS ............................................... 149 4.5.1 General .......................................................................................................... 149 4.5.2 Overloads ...................................................................................................... 150 4.5.3 Burden ........................................................................................................... 150 4.5.4 Output ............................................................................................................ 150 4.5.5 Response time............................................................................................... 150 4.5.6 Power supply ................................................................................................. 150
4.4 4.5
4.6
RELAYS ........................................................................................................................ 150 4.6.1 General .......................................................................................................... 150 4.6.2 Control interposing relays .............................................................................. 151 4.6.3 Status indication repeat relays ...................................................................... 151 SAS GATEWAYS ......................................................................................................... 151
4.7 5.
POWER SUPPLIES ................................................................................................................ 152 5.1 5.2 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 152 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES ................................................................... 152 5.2.1 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 152 5.2.1.1 General ................................................................................................... 152 5.2.1.2 UPS Configuration .................................................................................. 152 5.2.2 Modes of Operation ....................................................................................... 153 5.2.2.1 Normal .................................................................................................... 153 5.2.2.2 Main Supply Failure ................................................................................ 153 5.2.2.3 Overload ................................................................................................. 153 5.2.2.4 Static Bypass .......................................................................................... 153 5.2.3 Performance .................................................................................................. 153 5.2.3.1 Rectifier .................................................................................................. 153 5.2.3.2 Battery and DC Circuit ............................................................................ 155 5.2.3.3 Inverter ................................................................................................... 155 5.2.3.4 Static by-pass switch .............................................................................. 156 5.2.3.5 Noise limits ............................................................................................. 156 5.2.4 Controls and Instrumentation ........................................................................ 156 5.2.5 Construction Requirements ........................................................................... 157 5.2.5.1 Enclosures .............................................................................................. 157 5.2.5.2 Converter components ........................................................................... 157 5.2.5.3 Battery cells and containers ................................................................... 157 5.2.5.4 Distribution Board ................................................................................... 158 DIESEL GENERATOR ................................................................................................. 158 5.3.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 158 5.3.2 Design Requirements .................................................................................... 158 5.3.3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions ......................................... 159 5.3.4 Fuel ................................................................................................................ 160 5.3.5 Bulk Fuel Storage .......................................................................................... 160 5.3.6 Daily Service Tank......................................................................................... 160 5.3.7 Fuel transfer Pump ........................................................................................ 160 5.3.8 Fuel boost Pump ........................................................................................... 160 5.3.9 Fuel Oil Piping ............................................................................................... 160 5.3.10 Engine Lubrication ......................................................................................... 160 5.3.11 Set Mountings ................................................................................................ 161 5.3.12 Crankshaft ..................................................................................................... 161 5.3.13 Governor ........................................................................................................ 161 5.3.14 Engine Protection .......................................................................................... 161 5.3.15 Starting System ............................................................................................. 161 5.3.16 Cooling System ............................................................................................. 162 5.3.17 Safety Guards ................................................................................................ 162 5.3.18 Silencers ........................................................................................................ 162 5.3.19 Air Filters ....................................................................................................... 162 5.3.20 Engine/Generator Control Panel ................................................................... 162 5.3.20.1 Alarms Annunciator ................................................................................ 163 5.3.20.2 Emergency Shut-down Relay ................................................................. 163 5.3.20.3 Engine/Generator Controls ..................................................................... 163 5.3.20.4 Engine/Generator Instrumentation ......................................................... 164 5.3.21 Generator ...................................................................................................... 164 5.3.22 Stator ............................................................................................................. 164 5.3.23 Rotor .............................................................................................................. 165
5.3
5.3.24 Exciters .......................................................................................................... 165 5.3.25 Ventilation ...................................................................................................... 165 5.3.26 Voltage Regulation ........................................................................................ 165 5.3.27 Pulley Block ................................................................................................... 166 5.3.28 Alternative Generators .................................................................................. 166 5.3.29 Parallel Running ............................................................................................ 166 5.3.30 Tools and Spare Parts ................................................................................... 166 5.3.31 Documentation .............................................................................................. 166 5.3.31.1 Drawings ................................................................................................. 166 5.3.31.2 Instruction Manuals ................................................................................ 166 5.3.32 Inspection and Testing .................................................................................. 166 5.4 48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS ........................................................................ 167 5.4.1 Functional Requirements .............................................................................. 167 5.4.1.1 General ................................................................................................... 167 5.4.1.2 System Capacity and Performance ........................................................ 167 5.4.1.3 Alarm Indications .................................................................................... 167 5.4.2 Battery and Charger Equipment .................................................................... 168 5.4.2.1 Batteries ................................................................................................. 168 5.4.2.2 Battery Chargers .................................................................................... 168 5.4.2.3 Control and Instrumentation ................................................................... 169 5.4.2.4 Construction ........................................................................................... 170 5.4.2.5 48V DC Distribution Board ..................................................................... 170
6.
CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 171 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 171 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 171 CONTROL ROOM ........................................................................................................ 172 EQUIPMENT ROOM .................................................................................................... 172 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF ............................................................... 173 6.5.1 General .......................................................................................................... 173 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES ................................................................. 174 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY...................................................................................... 174 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM ............................. 174 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM ................................... 174
6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9
6.10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA ......................................................................................... 174 6.11 CONFERENCE ROOM ................................................................................................ 175 6.12 MEETING ROOM ......................................................................................................... 175 6.13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS .............................................................................................. 175 6.14 POWER SUPPLIES ...................................................................................................... 175 6.14.1 General Requirements .................................................................................. 175 6.14.2 Control Centre LV In-feeds ............................................................................ 175 6.14.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure................................................................ 175 6.14.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies ..................................................................... 176 6.14.5 LV Distribution Panels ................................................................................... 176 6.14.6 UPS Battery Room ........................................................................................ 176 6.14.7 DC Supplies ................................................................................................... 176
Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A Page 6B- 8 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope
6.15 ACCESS CONTROL..................................................................................................... 176 6.16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 176 6.17 LAN ............................................................................................................................... 176 6.18 HVAC ............................................................................................................................ 176 6.19 LIGHTING ..................................................................................................................... 177 6.20 MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 177 6.21 MAINTAINABILITY ....................................................................................................... 177 7. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY ....................................................................................... 178 7.1 7.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................... 178 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 178 7.2.1 SCADA/EMS Availability ............................................................................... 178 7.2.2 Communication System Availability .............................................................. 179 7.2.3 Outstation Availability .................................................................................... 179 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS.................................................................................. 179 VERIFICATION ............................................................................................................. 179
7.3 7.4 8.
INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY ........................................................................ 181 8.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 181 8.1.1 Approach to Testing ...................................................................................... 181 8.1.2 Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 181 8.1.3 Test Equipment and Facilities ....................................................................... 182 8.1.4 Testing Stages ............................................................................................... 182 8.1.5 Notice & Witnessing of Tests ........................................................................ 183 8.1.6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets.............................................................. 183 8.1.7 Contractor's Prior Tests ................................................................................. 183 8.1.8 Conduct of the Tests ..................................................................................... 183 8.1.9 Failures .......................................................................................................... 183 8.1.10 Fault Categories ............................................................................................ 184 8.1.11 Repeat Tests ................................................................................................. 184 8.1.12 Fault Log ........................................................................................................ 184 8.1.13 Hardware Failure Reports ............................................................................. 184 8.1.14 Software Failure Reports ............................................................................... 184 TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................................ 185 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS .............................................................................. 186 8.3.1 Subsystem FAT ............................................................................................. 186 8.3.2 System FAT ................................................................................................... 186 8.3.3 General FAT Requirements .......................................................................... 186 8.3.4 Specific Test Requirements .......................................................................... 189 8.3.4.1 Master Stations ....................................................................................... 189 8.3.4.2 Outstations ............................................................................................. 189 8.3.4.3 Energy Management Software ............................................................... 190 8.3.4.4 Telecommunication ................................................................................ 190 8.3.4.5 Power Supplies ....................................................................................... 193 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING.................................................................................... 193 8.4.1 General SAT Requirements .......................................................................... 194
8.2 8.3
8.4
8.4.2 Site Installation Tests .................................................................................... 195 8.4.3 Site Update Period ........................................................................................ 195 8.4.3.1 SCADA/EMS Database .......................................................................... 195 8.4.3.2 Point To Point Testing ............................................................................ 195 8.4.4 System Site Acceptance Tests - SCADA ...................................................... 196 8.4.5 Site Acceptance Tests - EMS ........................................................................ 196 8.4.6 Acceptance Tests - Telecommunications ..................................................... 197 8.4.7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion ............................................ 197 8.5 TESTS ON COMPLETION ........................................................................................... 197 8.5.1 System Acceptance ....................................................................................... 198 8.5.2 Partial & Operational Acceptance ................................................................. 198 NON-CONFORMANCE ................................................................................................ 198
8.6 9.
SPARES AND MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 199 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 199 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY ................................................................................... 199 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 199 SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................. 199 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT .................................................................................... 200 9.5.1 Scope of Agreements .................................................................................... 200 9.5.2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement .......................................................... 200 9.5.3 Charges for the Maintenance Agreement ..................................................... 201 9.5.4 Maintenance Services ................................................................................... 201 9.5.4.1 Telephone Support ................................................................................. 201 9.5.4.2 Remote Access Support ......................................................................... 201 9.5.4.3 Fault Rectification ................................................................................... 201 9.5.4.4 New Software Releases ......................................................................... 201 9.5.5 Termination of the Agreement ....................................................................... 202 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS ......................................................... 202 CONSUMABLES .......................................................................................................... 202 COMMISSIONING PERIODS ....................................................................................... 202 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS ................................................................................ 202 9.9.1 SDH/PDH tester ............................................................................................ 202 9.9.2 Datacom tester .............................................................................................. 203 9.9.3 Digital multimeter ........................................................................................... 203 9.9.4 Signal generator ............................................................................................ 203 9.9.5 Maintenance laptop computer ....................................................................... 204
9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
9.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD ..................................................................................... 204 9.10.1 General .......................................................................................................... 204 9.10.2 Attendance .................................................................................................... 204 9.10.3 Quality Control ............................................................................................... 204 9.10.4 Access ........................................................................................................... 204 9.10.5 Replacement Parts ........................................................................................ 205 10. TRAINING ............................................................................................................................... 206 10.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 206
10.2 CONTENT ..................................................................................................................... 207 10.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES .............................................................................. 207 10.3.1 Overview Course ........................................................................................... 207 10.3.2 System Operation Courses ........................................................................... 208 10.3.3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses ............................................... 208 10.3.4 EMS Applications Courses ............................................................................ 209 10.3.5 System Administration Courses .................................................................... 209 10.4 TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES ........................................................................... 209 10.5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES ......................................................................... 210 10.6 COURSE ATTENDEES ................................................................................................ 210 10.6.1 Course Duration ............................................................................................ 212 11. DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................................ 213 11.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 213 11.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID ................................................... 213 11.3 DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT .......................... 214 11.3.1 General .......................................................................................................... 214 11.3.2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building .................................................... 216 11.3.3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings ..................................... 216 11.3.4 Programme of Work ...................................................................................... 217 11.3.5 Monthly Progress Report ............................................................................... 218 11.4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................................... 218 11.4.1 Functional Design Specification .................................................................... 218 11.4.2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation .......................... 219 11.4.3 Software Design Documentation ................................................................... 219 11.4.3.1 Standard Operating Software ................................................................. 219 11.4.3.2 Applications Software ............................................................................. 220 11.4.4 Design Control Document ............................................................................. 220 11.5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS ....................................................... 220 11.5.1 Test Plan and Schedule ................................................................................ 220 11.5.2 Test Procedures ............................................................................................ 220 11.5.3 Test Reports .................................................................................................. 221 11.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .......................................................... 221 11.6.1 System Manual .............................................................................................. 221 11.6.2 Operators' Manual ......................................................................................... 221 11.6.3 System Engineer's Manual ............................................................................ 221 11.6.4 Hardware Manual .......................................................................................... 221 11.6.5 Maintenance Manual ..................................................................................... 221 11.6.6 Equipment Manual......................................................................................... 222 11.6.7 Programmer's Manual ................................................................................... 222 11.6.8 Communication Documentation .................................................................... 222 11.7 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL ............................................................ 223 11.8 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................... 223 12. 13. DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................ 224 SITE SURVEYS ...................................................................................................................... 225
13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS.................................................................................... 225 13.2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS ........................................................................................... 225 13.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS ...................... 225 13.4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 225 13.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED ................................................................................ 226 14. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS ................................................................. 227 14.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 227 14.2 GENERAL STANDARDS ............................................................................................. 227 14.3 PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL .............................................................. 227 14.4 SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ................................................. 228 14.5 AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES .......................................................... 233 14.6 LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS ................................................................................... 234 14.7 DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS.............................................................................. 234 14.8 EARTHING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................. 234 14.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING....................................................................................... 234 14.10 ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 234 15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ......................................................................................... 236 15.1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS .......................................................................................... 236 15.2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS ...................................................................................... 236 16. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY............................................................................... 237 16.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 237 16.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY .......................... 237 16.3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ............................... 237 16.4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY ..................... 237 16.5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE ............. 237 16.6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE .................................................................................. 237 16.7 EMC STANDARDS ....................................................................................................... 237 17. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT .................................................................... 238 17.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 238 17.2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE ............................................ 238
17.3 SUB-CONTRACTORS ................................................................................................. 238 17.4 QUALITY PLAN ............................................................................................................ 238 17.5 AUDITS ......................................................................................................................... 239 17.6 QUALITY RECORDS.................................................................................................... 239 17.7 ORGANIZATION........................................................................................................... 239 17.8 PLANNING .................................................................................................................... 239 17.9 REVIEWS ..................................................................................................................... 239 17.10 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 240 17.11 CORRECTIVE ACTION ................................................................................................ 240 17.12 CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 240 17.13 ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE .................................................................... 241 18. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................... 242 18.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 242 18.2 SYSTEM OF UNITS ..................................................................................................... 242 18.3 DESIGN, STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY .................................. 242 18.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................ 243 18.5 EQUIPMENT LIFE ........................................................................................................ 243 18.6 RELIABILITY................................................................................................................. 243 18.7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 244 18.7.1 Alternating Current (ac) ................................................................................. 244 18.7.2 Direct Current (dc) ......................................................................................... 244 18.7.3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) .......................................................................... 245 18.7.4 Protection ...................................................................................................... 245 18.7.4.1 Fuses and Links ..................................................................................... 245 18.7.4.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers .............................................................. 245 18.8 CUBICLES, CABINETS, RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS ....................................... 245 18.8.1 General .......................................................................................................... 245 18.8.2 Cubicle Wiring ............................................................................................... 246 18.8.3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels ............................. 246 18.8.3.1 Terminal Blocks ...................................................................................... 247 18.8.3.2 Connectors ............................................................................................. 247 18.8.4 Equipment, Components and Terminal Identification ................................... 247 18.8.5 Degrees of Protection .................................................................................... 248 18.8.6 Painting and Finishing ................................................................................... 248 18.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES ..................................................................... 248 18.9.1 Keys and Push Buttons ................................................................................. 248 18.9.2 Indicating Instruments ................................................................................... 248 18.9.3 Indicating Lamps ........................................................................................... 248 18.9.4 Plug-in Cards ................................................................................................. 249
18.10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES ......................................................................... 249 18.10.1 General .......................................................................................................... 249 18.10.2 Cable Types .................................................................................................. 249 18.10.3 Cable Laying, Termination and Identification ................................................ 250 18.11 EARTHING ................................................................................................................... 251 18.11.1 General .......................................................................................................... 251 18.11.2 Safety Earthing .............................................................................................. 251 18.11.3 Cable Screens and Armouring ...................................................................... 251 19. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 252 19.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 252 19.2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE ........................................................................................ 252 19.3 CODE AND DATA STANDARDS ................................................................................. 253 19.3.1 Programming Languages .............................................................................. 253 19.3.2 Database Structure........................................................................................ 253 19.3.3 Program and Data Security ........................................................................... 253 19.4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................ 253 19.4.1 New Software ................................................................................................ 253 19.4.2 Existing Software ........................................................................................... 253 19.4.3 Configuration Data......................................................................................... 253 19.4.4 Software Validation, Verification and Testing ................................................ 253 19.4.5 Change and Issue Control ............................................................................. 254 19.5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE ........................................................................................... 254 19.5.1 General .......................................................................................................... 254 19.5.2 Software Life Cycle........................................................................................ 254 19.5.3 System Development Methodology............................................................... 254 19.5.4 Documentation .............................................................................................. 254 19.5.5 Functional Design Specification .................................................................... 254 19.5.6 Detailed Design ............................................................................................. 254 19.6 OPERATING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................. 255 19.6.1 General .......................................................................................................... 255 19.6.2 Security .......................................................................................................... 255 19.6.3 System Utilities .............................................................................................. 255 19.6.4 Text Editor ..................................................................................................... 256 19.6.5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities ...................................... 256 19.6.5.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring ........................................................... 256 19.6.5.2 Error Detection and Reporting ................................................................ 256 19.6.5.3 Online Performance Measurement ........................................................ 257 19.6.5.4 Telemetry Communications Statistics .................................................... 257 19.6.5.5 Software Maintenance ............................................................................ 257 19.7 PATENT AND COPYRIGHT ......................................................................................... 259 19.7.1 Patent Rights ................................................................................................. 259 19.7.2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights ............................................................... 260 19.7.3 Backup Copies of Software ........................................................................... 260 19.7.4 Right To Modify ............................................................................................. 260 19.8 LICENCES .................................................................................................................... 260 20. CIVIL WORKS ........................................................................................................................ 261 20.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................... 261
20.1.1 Civil Engineering, Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice 261 20.2 PRELIMINARY WORKS ............................................................................................... 262 20.2.1 Site Survey .................................................................................................... 262 20.2.2 Soil Investigations.......................................................................................... 263 20.2.3 Site Clearance ............................................................................................... 263 20.2.3.1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs ..................................................... 263 20.2.3.2 Removing existing equipment, dismantling steel structures .................. 263 20.2.3.3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures ........ 263 20.2.4 Site formation and up keeping....................................................................... 263 20.2.4.1 Cutting and filling earth ........................................................................... 263 20.2.4.2 Explosives .............................................................................................. 265 20.2.4.3 Earth retaining structures ....................................................................... 266 20.2.4.4 Anti Termite soil treatment ..................................................................... 266 20.2.4.5 Land escaping & tree planting ................................................................ 266 20.2.4.6 Surface chipping ..................................................................................... 266 20.2.5 Cable Trenches & Ducts ............................................................................... 266 20.2.5.1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts ............................................ 266 20.2.5.2 Concrete Beds and Casings ................................................................... 266 20.2.5.3 Cable Pits ............................................................................................... 266 20.2.6 Concrete Work, Foundations & Piling Work .................................................. 267 20.2.6.1 Concrete Work........................................................................................ 267 20.2.6.2 Materials ................................................................................................. 268 20.2.6.3 Test Certificates and Samples ............................................................... 269 20.2.6.4 Aggregates ............................................................................................. 269 20.2.6.5 Water ..................................................................................................... 271 20.2.6.6 Admixtures .............................................................................................. 271 20.2.6.7 Plant ..................................................................................................... 271 20.2.6.8 Concrete Strength Requirements ........................................................... 271 20.2.6.9 Mixing ..................................................................................................... 271 20.2.6.10 Workability .............................................................................................. 272 20.2.6.11 Transportation ........................................................................................ 272 20.2.6.12 Compaction ............................................................................................ 273 20.2.6.13 Construction Joints ................................................................................. 273 20.2.6.14 Construction Bays .................................................................................. 274 20.2.6.15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing ................................................. 274 20.2.6.16 Curing ..................................................................................................... 274 20.2.6.17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather ............................................... 274 20.2.6.18 Formwork ................................................................................................ 277 20.2.6.19 Reinforcement ........................................................................................ 279 20.2.6.20 Foundation Bolts..................................................................................... 280 20.2.6.21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground .................................................. 280 20.2.6.22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant ........................................... 280 20.2.6.23 Grout under Base Plates ........................................................................ 280 20.2.6.24 Foundations and Piling Work ................................................................. 281 20.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION .......................................................................................... 287 20.3.1 Lightning Protection for Buildings .................................................................. 287 20.3.2 Materials, ....................................................................................................... 287 20.3.2.1 Copper .................................................................................................... 287 20.4 WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM .................................................................. 288 20.4.1 Water supply system ..................................................................................... 288 20.4.2 Water Pipes ................................................................................................... 288 20.4.3 Sanitary Fittings ............................................................................................. 288 20.4.4 Waste Water Sewerage System ................................................................... 288 20.4.4.1 Drain Pipes ............................................................................................. 288 20.4.4.2 Manholes ................................................................................................ 289 20.4.4.3 Septic Tank & soakage pit ...................................................................... 289 20.4.4.4 Sewerage Treatment Plant ..................................................................... 289 20.4.5 Surface water drainage system ..................................................................... 291
20.4.5.1 20.4.5.2
General ................................................................................................... 291 Gradient .................................................................................................. 291
20.5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS ...................................................... 291 20.5.1 General .......................................................................................................... 291 20.5.2 Road carriage way......................................................................................... 292 20.5.2.1 Preparation of Formation ........................................................................ 292 20.5.2.2 Sub-Base ................................................................................................ 292 20.5.2.3 Prime Coat .............................................................................................. 292 20.5.2.4 Bituminous Surface ................................................................................ 292 20.5.2.5 Roadsides ............................................................................................... 292 20.5.3 Approach road ............................................................................................... 292 20.5.3.1 Structures for approach roads. ............................................................... 292 20.5.3.2 Access road and structures .................................................................... 292 20.6 FENCE AND GATE ...................................................................................................... 293 20.6.1 Chain link fence and Gate ............................................................................. 293 b) Gates ............................................................................................................. 293 20.6.2 Galvanized Barbed wire fence & Gate .......................................................... 293 20.7 MISCELLANEOUS WORK ........................................................................................... 294 20.8 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS .............................................................................. 294 20.8.1 General .......................................................................................................... 294 20.8.2 Fire criteria ..................................................................................................... 295 20.8.3 Super structure (Structural frame & walls) .................................................... 295 20.8.4 Brick work ...................................................................................................... 295 20.8.5 Lime ............................................................................................................... 295 20.8.6 Lintels ............................................................................................................ 296 20.8.7 Building in Frames ......................................................................................... 296 20.8.8 Cement, Brick work and Plaster .................................................................... 296 20.8.9 Doors and Windows ...................................................................................... 296 20.8.10 Aluminium Windows and Doors .................................................................... 296 20.8.11 Aluminium Patent Glazing ............................................................................. 297 20.8.12 Other Materials .............................................................................................. 297 20.8.13 Fire Resisting Steel Doors ............................................................................. 297 20.8.14 Timber ........................................................................................................... 297 20.8.14.1 Preservative ............................................................................................ 297 20.8.14.2 Workmanship.......................................................................................... 297 20.8.14.3 Timber Doors and windows .................................................................... 297 20.8.14.4 Builders Ironmongery ............................................................................ 298 20.8.14.5 Pin Tumbler Cylinders ............................................................................ 298 20.8.14.6 Door Closures ......................................................................................... 298 20.8.14.7 Door Fittings ........................................................................................... 298 20.8.14.8 Locking System ...................................................................................... 298 20.8.15 Glazing .......................................................................................................... 298 20.8.16 Trenches ........................................................................................................ 299 20.8.16.1 Indoor cable trenches ............................................................................. 299 20.8.16.2 Checker Plate ......................................................................................... 299 20.8.17 Damp Proof Course (DPC) ............................................................................ 299 20.8.17.1 Damp-Proof Membrane .......................................................................... 299 20.8.18 Floor Finishes - General ................................................................................ 299 20.8.18.1 Screeded Beds ....................................................................................... 299 20.8.18.2 Raised Modular Floors ........................................................................... 300 20.8.19 Roof and ceiling ............................................................................................. 301 20.8.19.1 Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheet Roofing ............................ 301 20.8.19.2 Gypsum board Ceiling ............................................................................ 303 20.9 FINISHES AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................... 303 20.9.1 Wall and ceiling finishes ................................................................................ 303 20.9.1.1 Generally ................................................................................................ 303 20.9.1.2 Workmanship.......................................................................................... 303
20.9.1.3 Materials ................................................................................................. 304 20.9.1.4 Hand railing ............................................................................................ 304 20.9.2 Painting .......................................................................................................... 305 20.9.2.1 Painting on Metal Surfaces .................................................................... 305 20.9.2.2 Paints and Other Materials ..................................................................... 305 20.9.2.3 Woodwork ............................................................................................... 306 20.9.2.4 Iron and Steel works (Except Structural Steelworks) ............................. 306 20.9.2.5 Bitumastic Painted Surfaces and Coated Pipes ..................................... 306 20.9.2.6 Copper Surfaces..................................................................................... 306 20.9.3 Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs & Masonry Walls in Toilet Areas .............. 306 20.9.3.1 General ................................................................................................... 306 20.9.3.2 Description of Work ................................................................................ 306 20.9.3.3 Materials ................................................................................................. 306 20.9.3.4 Execution ................................................................................................ 307 20.9.3.5 Certificate Warranty ................................................................................ 307 20.9.4 Waterproofing of water retaining Structures .................................................. 307 20.9.4.1 General ................................................................................................... 307 20.9.4.2 Description of work ................................................................................. 307 20.9.4.3 Materials ................................................................................................. 307 20.9.4.4 Execution ................................................................................................ 308 20.9.4.5 Certificate Warranty ................................................................................ 308 20.9.5 Waterproofing of Concrete Roofs .................................................................. 308 20.9.5.1 General ................................................................................................... 308 20.9.5.2 Description of work ................................................................................. 308 20.9.5.3 Materials ................................................................................................. 308 20.9.5.4 Certificate Warranty ................................................................................ 309 20.9.6 Internal Finishes ............................................................................................ 309 20.10 OTHER STRUCTURES ................................................................................................ 312 20.10.1 Site office ....................................................................................................... 312 20.10.2 Temporary Works .......................................................................................... 312 20.10.3 House for Diesel Generator ........................................................................... 312 20.10.4 Car parking .................................................................................................... 312 20.10.5 Guard House ................................................................................................. 312 20.10.6 Gabion Wall ................................................................................................... 313 20.10.6.1 General ................................................................................................... 313 20.10.6.2 Referenced Documents .......................................................................... 313 20.10.6.3 Terminology ............................................................................................ 314 20.10.6.4 Classification .......................................................................................... 314 20.10.6.5 Material Manufacture .............................................................................. 315 20.10.6.6 Mechanical Properties ............................................................................ 315 20.10.6.7 Physical Properties ................................................................................. 316 20.10.6.8 Dimensions and Tolerances ................................................................... 318 20.10.6.9 Workmanship.......................................................................................... 318 20.10.6.10 Sampling ................................................................................................. 318 20.10.6.11 Number of Tests ..................................................................................... 319 20.10.6.12 Test Methods .......................................................................................... 319 20.10.6.13 PVC Coating Thickness: ........................................................................ 319 20.10.6.14 PVC Adhesion Test. ............................................................................... 319 20.10.6.15 Weld Shear Strength of Fabric: .............................................................. 319 20.10.6.16 Inspection ............................................................................................... 321 20.10.6.17 Certification ............................................................................................. 321 20.11 LABELLING .................................................................................................................. 322 21. BUILDING SERVICES............................................................................................................ 323 21.1 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SERVICES................................................ 323 21.1.1 Contractors responsibilities ........................................................................... 323 21.1.2 Project requirement ....................................................................................... 323 21.1.3 Design and liaison of work ............................................................................ 323
21.1.3.1 External design conditions ..................................................................... 323 21.1.3.2 Internal design conditions ....................................................................... 323 21.1.3.3 Internal Sound Levels ............................................................................. 323 21.1.3.4 Vibration ................................................................................................. 324 21.1.3.5 Standards ............................................................................................... 324 21.1.3.6 Design Calculations ................................................................................ 324 21.1.4 Supplying and installation of services ........................................................... 324 21.1.4.1 Manufacturers ......................................................................................... 324 21.1.4.2 Split System Air Conditioning Units ........................................................ 324 21.1.4.3 Thermal Insulation .................................................................................. 324 21.1.4.4 Mechanical Ventilation ........................................................................... 325 21.1.4.5 Bifurcated fans ........................................................................................ 325 21.1.4.6 Axial flow fans ......................................................................................... 325 21.1.4.7 Ceiling fans ............................................................................................. 325 21.1.5 Control Equipment ......................................................................................... 325 21.1.6 Electrical Control ........................................................................................... 326 21.1.7 Electrical Connections ................................................................................... 326 21.1.8 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 326 21.2 FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION FACILITIES .................................................. 326 21.2.1 Fire Alarms .................................................................................................... 326 21.2.2 Bulk Heads for Cables and Pipes .................................................................. 327 21.2.3 Fire Protection Coating for Cables ................................................................ 327 21.2.4 Fire Detection and Fire Alarm System .......................................................... 327 21.2.5 Fire Alarm Panel ............................................................................................ 328 21.2.6 Manual Fire Alarm Stations ........................................................................... 328 21.2.7 Automatic Fire Detectors ............................................................................... 328 21.2.8 Audible Alarms .............................................................................................. 329 21.2.9 Visible Alarms ................................................................................................ 329 21.2.10 Cabling .......................................................................................................... 329 21.2.11 Fire Protection Equipment ............................................................................. 329 21.2.11.1 Portable wall mounted extinguishers ...................................................... 329 21.2.11.2 Mobile trolley extinguishers .................................................................... 330 21.2.12 Signs .............................................................................................................. 330 21.3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SUPPLY WORK ..................................................... 330 21.3.1 General .......................................................................................................... 330 21.3.2 Contractors Responsibilities .......................................................................... 330 21.3.3 Project Requirement ...................................................................................... 330 21.3.4 Design and liaison of work ............................................................................ 331 21.3.4.1 Coding System ....................................................................................... 331 21.3.4.2 Schedule of Design Requirements ......................................................... 331 21.3.5 Supplying and installation of service ............................................................. 332 21.3.5.1 AC Distribution boards ........................................................................... 332 21.3.5.2 Cables .................................................................................................... 333 21.3.5.3 Contactors .............................................................................................. 334 21.3.5.4 Switches and Push buttons .................................................................... 334 21.3.6 Lighting Fittings ............................................................................................. 334 21.3.6.1 Lamps 335 21.3.7 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets ........................................................ 335 21.3.8 Conduit and Fittings....................................................................................... 335 21.3.9 Poles .............................................................................................................. 335 21.3.10 Interior Installations ....................................................................................... 335 21.3.11 Exterior Installation ........................................................................................ 336 21.3.12 Earthing and Bonding .................................................................................... 336 21.3.13 Emergency Lighting ....................................................................................... 337 21.3.14 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Sockets Outlets ........................................ 337 21.3.15 Clocks ............................................................................................................ 338 21.3.16 Maintenance .................................................................................................. 338 21.4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 338 21.4.1 General .......................................................................................................... 338
21.4.2 21.4.3 21.4.4 21.4.5 21.4.6 21.4.7 21.4.8
CCTV System ................................................................................................ 339 Refuge Alarms ............................................................................................... 339 Assistance Alarms ......................................................................................... 339 Panic Alarms ................................................................................................. 340 Window Actuator Control Panel .................................................................... 340 Induction Loop Systems ................................................................................ 340 Intruder Alarm System ................................................................................... 340
21.5 LIFT ............................................................................................................................... 340 21.5.1 Capacity ......................................................................................................... 340 21.5.2 Erection ......................................................................................................... 341 21.5.3 Guarantee and Maintenance ......................................................................... 341 21.5.4 Drawings ........................................................................................................ 341 21.5.5 Car Control .................................................................................................... 341 21.6 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM .................................................... 342 21.6.1 General .......................................................................................................... 342 21.6.2 System Description........................................................................................ 342 21.6.3 Distributed Amplifier Unit (DAU) .................................................................... 344 21.6.4 Linked Audio Processor ................................................................................ 345 21.6.5 Man Machine Interface Unit (MMI) ................................................................ 346 21.6.6 Entertainment Rack ....................................................................................... 347 21.6.7 Pendant Full Range Speakers ...................................................................... 348 22. OTHER SERVICES ................................................................................................................ 350 22.1 TRANSPORT ................................................................................................................ 350 22.2 EMPLOYERS REPRESENTATIVES OFFICE ............................................................ 350 22.2.1 Main Project Office for Employers Representatives ..................................... 350
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AC or ac ACE AGC ASCII AVR B BER b CAPC CCTV CEPT CFDS CPU CRC CRT CT DC or dc DDE DLP DPI DPLC DVI EAPROM EBU EEPROM E/F EFI ELV EMC Alternating Current Area Control Error Automatic Generation Control American Standard Code for Interchange of Information Automatic Voltage Regulator Bytes (kB, MB, GB) Bit Error Rate Bits (kb, Mb, Gb) Cabinet Appointed Procurement Committee Closed Circuit Television Confrence Europen de Poste et Tlcommunication Communication Functional Design Specification Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check Cathode Ray Tube Current Transformer Direct Current Dynamic Data Exchange Digital Light Processing Dots Per Inch Digital Power Line Carrier Digital Video Interface Electrically Alterable Programmable Read Only Memory European Broadcasting Union Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Earth Fault Earth Fault Indicator Extra Low Voltage Electro Magnetic Compatibility
EMI EMS ESD FAT FDS FEP GPS GSM GUI HMI HD HFDS HIS HRC HVAC IAT ICCP ID IED IEC IEEE IET JBUS I/O ISO ITU LAN LCD LED LV MBUS
Electro Magnetic Interference Energy Management System Electrostatic Discharge Factory Acceptance Tests Functional Design Specification Front End Processor Global Positioning System Global System for Mobile (communication) Graphic User Interface Human Machine Interface High Definition Functional Hardware Design Specification Historic Information System High Rupturing Capacity Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning Internal Acceptance Tests Inter Control Centre Protocol Identification Intelligent Electronic Device International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Institute of Engineering and Technology Variation on MODBUS Input/Output International Standardisation Organisation International Telecommunication Union Local Area Network Liquid Crystal Display Light Emitting Diode Low Voltage Meter Bus
MCB MDB MDI MTBF MTTR MV NERC NCC O/C ODBC OPGW PCB PDH PLC PMC PMR PSU PTW PVC Q QA QAR QC QMS RAL RAM RFI RTU SAT SCADA SDH
Miniature Circuit Breakers Main Distribution Panel Maximum Demand Indicator Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Medium Voltage National Electric Regulatory Committee National Control Centre Over Current Open Data Base Connectivity OPtical Ground Wire Printed Circuit Board Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Power Line Carrier Protection Monitoring Computer Post Mortem Revision Power Supply Unit Permit To Work Poli Vinyl Chloride Reactive Power Quality Assurance Quality Assurance Representative Quality Control Quality Management System Reichs-Ausschuss fr Lieferbedingungen (German Colour Standards) Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Interference Remote Terminal Unit Site Acceptance Tests Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDM SFDS SIP SOE SQL SQP STT SXGA+ TASE.2 TCP/IP U/G UI UPS UTC VGA VDU VRLA VT WAN XLPE 4GL
Software Development Methodology Software Functional Design Specification SCADA Interface Panel Sequence Of Events Structured Query Language Software Quality Plan Sanction To Test Super Extended Graphics Adapter + Telecontrol Application Service Element 2 Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Under Ground User Interface Uninterruptible Power Supplies Universal Time Coordinate Video Graphics Adaptor Visual Display Unit Valve Regulated Lead Acid Voltage Transformer Wide Area Network Cross Linked PolyEthylene Forth Generation Language
Other abbreviations used in this document generally conform with the System International (SI - metric system) but are not listed here. The SI units and recommendations are defined in ISO 1000.
1. INTRODUCTION The principle objectives of this contract are to provide the Employer with a National System Control Centre (NSCC) for managing the electricity transmission/generation system in Sri Lanka. The works required to achieve these objectives shall include establishing the NSCC in a building also to be provided under this Contract, completing plant interface works in substations and power plants throughout the country, and establishing a country wide telecommunications network linking each substation and power plant to the control centre. This functionality and performance specification defines an outline design and user requirements in terms of five major elements that will deliver the contract objectives. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. The five main elements of the outline design comprise 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. SCADA/EMS Master Station specified in Chapter 2 Telecommunications Infrastructure specified in Chapter 3 Outstation and Substation Works Adaptation Works specified in Chapter 4 Uninterruptible Power Supply System specified in Chapter 5 NSCC Building specified in Chapter 6
In addition there are further requirements relating to the delivery of the works including requirements covering general engineering standards and environmental conditions; drawings and documentation; training; spare parts, special tools and test equipment; and inspection and testing. The installation of all equipment and interfacing to existing equipment shall be organised and executed such that the least disruption is caused to existing plant and equipment. In particular the existing System Control facilities must remain in operation until such time as they are replaced by the new facilities after they have been tested and accepted. Work requiring access to sites and plant requiring Permits to Work (PTW) or access permission shall be coordinated with the Employer. The following Chapters specify the overall scope of work for each of the foregoing sections of work and must be read in conjunction with the General and Particular Technical Specifications that form part of this Bid Document. Additionally the Bidder is required to complete a set of Technical Schedules that state the standards, characteristics and types of equipment that the Contractor guarantees to supply. The Bidder shall also complete the detailed Price Schedules that will determine the quantities of equipment that will be required to meet the full requirements of the project. 1.1 SCADA/EMS MASTER STATION
The Contractor shall supply a new SCADA/EMS master station and supporting equipment and services for the new Control Centre being established in Sri Jayewardenepura in the outskirts of Colombo. The works for the new SCADA systems include but shall not be limited to the design, manufacture, installation and setting to work of following principal subsystems/facilities and services: A SCADA Master Station Hardware and System Software a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) SCADA Hardware (Fault tolerant redundant Master Station Computer System with servers for; SCADA, Applications, Historical Information) Operating Systems and Antivirus software for all servers and workstations Workstations (3 Operator, 1 NSCC Manager, 1 Maintenance, 1 Remote) Operator Training Simulator hardware (Including Trainee and Trainer Workstations) Rear projection video wall displays to be located in the NSCC control room. Outstation Data Acquisition Servers (Fault tolerant duplicated system) Duplicated ICCP link Interfaces to other DCCs Duplicated Operational LAN Printers. Master Clock System
SCADA/EMS Master Station Applications k) l) SCADA Software Data Archiving and Report Generation Software
m) Network Analysis Applications n) o) p) q) C Energy Management Applications Remote Access (ICCP) Software Operator training simulator software Database and Display Configuration, Population and Testing
Services and other contractual requirements r) s) t) u) v) w) x) Training Inspection and tests Documentation Specialised tools and test equipment Spares Consumables Post Warranty Maintenance Support
The existing System Control Centre (SCC) uses an ABB Micro SCADA system which is at present able to communicate with the existing RTUs and Substation Automation System Gateways. The Contractor shall plan the implementation work such that all monitoring facilities currently available in the existing SCC continue to function until the new facilities are put into service. To achieve this may include the provision of dual porting at outstations or via a data connection between the existing master station and the new one. 1.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INFRASTRUCTURE
In order to accommodate the additional telecommunication facilities required for the new NSCC SCADA system, as well as supporting the growing telecommunication services required for the expansion of the power network to be built during the planned expansion projects, the existing telecommunication facilities are to be upgraded and expanded. The works shall include but are not limited to: a) A full survey of all proposed sites for communications equipment shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the work required in substations, generating stations, Control Centre and any intermediary locations. This works shall establish interface points, location of equipments, cable routes, condition and operability of existing equipment associated with the works and availability of power supplies. b) Design and implementation of a resilient, high bandwidth, digital telecommunication fibre optic network backbone based on SDH technology. The optical fibres are available from OPGW on the 220kV and 132 kV overhead lines and it is expected that SDH nodes will mainly be located in the 220kV and 132 kV stations. The design shall accommodate the changing network configuration anticipated during the course of the Contract and the Contractor should expect to reconfigure the SDH network a number of times during the course of the Contract. Installing and interfacing, all multiplexing and supporting equipment to provide a fully integrated telecommunication network for the transmission of SCADA telemetry, protection signalling, data and speech. Implementation of a new telecommunication management system to monitor and supervise the SDH network as well as alarm monitoring of other telecommunication equipment. There shall also be summary indication and alarm outputs to the SCADA system. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB.
c)
d)
e)
The Contractor shall plan the work so that the initial SDH network configuration is in place ahead of the requirement to establish links between the remote sites and the NSCC. New digital power line carrier (DPLC) links for 132 kV substations and their integration with other communications systems and equipment. Implementation of new digital teleprotection signalling equipment for electrical protection. Telephone exchanges for the new telephone network. Training. Inspection and tests. Documentation. Special tools and test equipment. Spares. Consumables. Post warranty maintenance support.
f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) 1.3
OUTSTATIONS AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS
The Contractor shall supply and install new Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) to enable control and monitoring of the (400kV in the future), 220kV, 132kV generating and transmission substations including the 33kV sections of those stations.. Additionally, the Contractor shall integrate existing RTUs, PMC(Protection Monitoring Computer) Interface and Substation Automation Systems with Gateways , into the new system. The works shall include adaptation works at some substations to provide monitoring and control facilities not yet available. The works shall include but not be limited to: a) A full survey of all 220kV, 132 kV substations and all generation stations shall be undertaken by the Contractor to obtain the necessary data to carry out the detailed design for the substation works. This works shall establish interface points, location of equipment, cable routes, etc. b) There are 27 Outstations Substation Automation Systems with which communication with the new NSCC will be via a Gateway. The manufacturer and model of each is indicated in the Table 1. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 5 - 101 protocol. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links with these outstations via their respective Gateways and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. The Contractor may at his option adapt the devices to use the IEC 60870 5 - 104 protocol. At present these Outstations communicate with the existing SCADA Master Station but the data subset is not as comprehensive as that required for the new NSCC. For example they do not include controls. Consequently the scope of work shall include the modifications necessary to invoke the additional signals required for the new NSCC. There are 9 outstations that are equipped with ABB RTU 560 devices. They all communicate with the existing Master Station using the IEC 60870 5 - 101 protocol. The scope of work at these locations will be to establish the communication links to the new NSCC with the respective outstations and to integrate the signals into the new SCADA/EMS database. The installation of the additional RTU modules, interposing relays, transducers and cabling required for the full monitoring and control requirements at these sites will be carried out by the Employer. Stations equipped with ABB INDACTIC 33 outstations (there are 18 of these) shall be equipped with replacement RTUs and the existing RTUs removed from the site and delivered to the Employers Stores in Colombo. Monitoring signals at present used by the existing SCC are wired to Marshalling Cubicles adjacent to the RTUs along with the required interposing relays and mA transducers. Where additional signals are required the additional interfacing devices and cables shall be provided under this Contract. Where the survey establishes that the existing cabling, relays
c)
d)
and transducers are not in good condition or are otherwise unsuitable the replacement shall be part of this Contract. Where +/-5mA transducers are used these shall be changed for 4-20mA type. e) In stations with no existing outstation equipment (there are 17 of these) a new RTU shall be provided and a new Marshalling Cubicle (or SCADA Interface Panel) except in cases where there is an existing Marshalling Cubicle. In the locations where Marshalling Cubicles are already installed the Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of any additional signals that are required. Where no signals or Marshalling are provided the Contractor shall provide all the cabling, interposing relays and transducers that are required. Where appropriate these RTUs may be of a distributed design. There are 7 IPP stations the data for which will be available at marshalling points within the substation to which the generation is injected. These signals shall be connected to the new RTU in the respective location with the exception of Heladhanavi whose data will be accommodated at the Puttlam SAS. For Stations that will be implemented under other projects by 2012 the Contractor shall establish the communication links between the new outstation and the new NSCC. The communication protocol shall be IEC 60870 5 - 101 or 104. For those stations to be implemented between 2012 and 2016 (SP11-SP20) the Contractor shall ensure that all necessary equipment, interfaces and capacity is available at the Master Station and within the Telecommunication System to support these new stations. Following provision of a new SDH node at the substation and identification of the new substation in the SCADA/EMS database, it shall only be necessary to connect the new Outstation device and carry out the point to point testing to put these Outstations into service
f)
g)
h)
i) j) k)
There are 4 generating stations that shall be equipped for operating with AGC on a total of 10 generators Set Point displays are to be provided at defined stations to facilitate the despatch of MW and MVAr values. In locations where no secure 48Vdc or 110Vdc supply exists or the existing equipment is unsuitable because of condition, age or capacity the Contractor shall provide secure 48Vdc Charger and Battery system to support the SCADA and Communication facilities being implemented as well as those that may exist (e.g. SDH, PLC). Duplicated communication ports may be provided to permit communication with the existing Control Centre and the new NSCC such that parallel running is possible during the transition of control from the present SCADA master to the new NSCC SCADA master station. Alternatively a link between the existing and new SCADA Master Stations shall be provided.
l)
m) Training n) o) p) q) r) Inspection and tests Documentation Post Warranty Support Specialised tools and equipment Spares
The details of RTUs and SASs that are already installed in transmission substations and generation stations are contained in Table 1. They shall be connected to the new NSCC Master Station via the communication links established under this Contract. The existing RTUs and SASs utilise the 1EC 608705-101 protocol. Details of the operating settings for the protocol at the respective outstation will be made available to the Contractor early in the Contract.
Table 1- Outstation List No. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 NSCC Station Name Ampara GSS Anuradhapura New GSS Anuradhapura Old GSS Balangoda GSS Biyagama GSS Bowatenna PS Canyon PS Embilipitiya GSS Habarana GSS Hambantota GSS Kelanitissa PS (Export) 33kV Kelaniya GSS Kiribathkumbura GSS Kosgama GSS Kothmale PS Kotudoga 132kV GSS Kurunegala GSS Laxapana PS (Old) Matara GSS Nuwara Eliya GSS Panadura GSS Pannipitiya GSS 132 kV Polpitiya PS GSS Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana GSS Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskanda GSS Sapugaskanda PS Seethawaka GSS Trincomalee GSS Ukuwela Valachcheni GSS Veyangoda 132 kV Victoria PS NSCC Building Total Data Points (New RTUs) IC1 IC2 S1 S2 S3 Fort (Substation F) Kolupittiya (Substation E) Total Data Points (DCC) ACE Power Matara - IPP Asia Power PS (KHD) - IPP Barge Power Colombo - IPP Data Points 468 538 553 612 975 91 126 476 543 340 398 530 533 353 737 457 470 488 474 404 403 511 446 157 593 442 262 581 451 393 290 96 370 296 266 176 15299 260 260 520 232 384 90 Data at SIP in Matara GSS Data at SIP in Kelaniya GSS Data at SIP in Kelanitissa GIS DCC Colombo Project DCC Colombo Project Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU New RTU One of each type supplied under this contract
No. S4 S5 S6 S7 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25
Station Name Chunnakam PS - IPP Embilipitiya ACE Power PS - IPP Heladhanavi PS - IPP Lakdhanavi PS - IPP Total Data Points (IPP) Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Total Data Points (RTU 560) Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (Sub A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (Sub I) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal Power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS
Data Points 232 337 336 118 1729 533 387 122 429 249 338 514 320 425 3317 202 332 498 416 329 463 302 361 1024 586 147 455 330 318 363 271 414 377 385 376 356 103 292 595 468
Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Data at SIP Chunnakam GSS Data at SIP in Embilipitiya GSS Data at SIP in Puttlam GSS Data at SIP in Sapugaskanda GSS Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 - TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SCS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to SiemensSECAM1703 Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway
No. V1 V2
Station Name Kukule PS Matugama GSS Total Data Points (SAS Gateway) Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala Weligama GSS Total Data Points (Under Station Projects) Grand Total
Data Points 263 548 10574 339 639 362 300 369 248 319 209 300 184 300 300 300 300 300 300 244 300 300 6213 37652
Requirement for SCADA facilities at the Outstations Interface to VATech Stat. Computer Interface to VATech Stat. Computer
SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19
Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016
The Scope of Work shall include the provision of 1 of each type of RTU supplied under the Contract to be installed in the NSCC building. They will be used to gather data associated with the building services and ancillary equipment that is important for the functioning of the control centre such as Equipment Room, temperature and humidity, HVAC, UPS, diesel generator, intruder detection etc.. They will also be used to test spares and replacement modules. 1.4 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
An Uninterruptible Power Supply System is to be installed at the new NSCC building to provide secure electrical supplies to the Control Centre complex. The system shall comprise but not be limited to: a. Dual Uninterruptible Power Supply with batteries capable of providing 3 hours of standby capacity b. c. A diesel generator capable of supply the complete NSCC building demand including the UPS when charging its batteries Automatic change over panel and distribution boards configured to provide segregation of duplicated or alternative supplies and allow maintenance without disruption to essential supplies A duplicated 48V charger/battery system for the supply to telecommunication equipment and RTUs with a standby capacity of 10 hours.
d.
1.5
NSCC BUILDING
A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided with the Tender Documents to the Contractor who shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: a. Conceptual Design b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements Detailed Design Provision of all necessary equipment, materials, supplies, labour, and supervision to execute the works Construction including piling, ground works, superstructure, drainage Complete fitting out Installation, testing and Commissioning of all building services Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary.
The design shall be appropriately prestigious that reflects the importance of the System Control Function. The Contractors Structural Engineer of Record shall be responsible for the design of the complete structural system for the building. The complete structural system for the building shall include but not be limited to; foundations, walls, roof framing, floor and roof diaphragms, lateral load stability, framing and connection of any architectural features, coordination of floor slabs to slope to floor drains shown on other drawings and support and bracing of mechanical and electrical related structures as well as all minor structures and any other work to complete the building(s). The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing utilities and structures affecting the work. The Contractor shall provide temporary bracing and shoring required for installation of all components of the Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for all safety precautions and the methods, techniques and sequences of procedures required to perform the work. The Contractor shall coordinate all trades and verify dimensions and interfaces in the field. 1.6 CONTRACTUAL AND PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF SUPPLY
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service of all equipment within his scope of supply and interfacing to existing facilities or equipment supplied under separate contracts. It is a requirement of this Contract that the Contractor actively coordinates all interface requirements with other Contractors and with the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible in conjunction with those other Contractors or the Employer for the resolution of any technical issues that may be required to successfully complete the works. The limits of supply for the respective Sections of Work are as follows: 1.6.1 SCADA/EMS System
The complete System including the Master Station Equipment, Control Room furniture and fittings, any auxiliary or miscellaneous items or connections are required to complete the working system. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supply System: UPS Distribution Boards provided within the UPS part of Works Communication System: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling and participation in testing and commissioning.
OPGW: NSCC Building: -
Miscellaneous: -
Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. The Contractor shall ensure that the Master Station equipment can be located where required, the environmental conditions are as required for the Master Station equipment, all cable routes that are required are defined and implemented, access for equipment is feasible and that the Control and Equipment Room designs have been correctly implemented. The contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works, mounting frames cable racks, cabling, connectors, ventilation devices etc. required to complete the installation.
1.6.2
Telecommunication System
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and putting into service the complete Telecommunication system including the SDH backbone network, the telecommunication network management system, PLC links, teleprotection signalling equipment, telephone system, and associated interfaces or connections required to complete the working system. The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Power Supplies: Primary Distribution Boards provided at the Control Centre building and Distribution Boards in Substations and other required locations that are provided by the Employer. Communication Systems: Interconnection between the Master Station communication servers/interface and the Communication System(s) including all cabling, connections and participation in testing and commissioning. Outstations: Outstation communication ports. Substation equipment: Interfaces to Distance Fault Recorders and frequency measurement devices. OPGW:Optical terminal box provided by others at each outstation and location and the NSCC building. DPLC/PLC links: Existing line coupling equipment and connections to terminal equipment, connections to channel equipment from Outstations, Protection etc. Protection signals via OF:Input point on SDH or PDH channel cards NSCC Building: As for the SCADA Master Station Miscellaneous: The Contractor shall provide or carry out any minor civil works, mounting frames cable racks, cabling, connectors, ventilation devices etc. required to complete the installation. 1.6.3 Outstation and Substation Adaptation Works
The boundary of connections or interfaces to existing equipment or equipment supplied by others shall be: Stations equipped with Gateway devices SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the SAS devices define the hardware interface boundaries. Stations equipped with ABB RTU 560 Outstations - SDH or PLC communication channel inputs and the communication ports of the RTU devices define the hardware interface boundaries Stations equipped with INDATIC 33 RTUs The existing marshalling cubicles shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. However, where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point.
Stations that are not equipped with Outstations In cases where no marshalling cubicles are provided the Contractor shall provide all wiring, cubicles, interfaces that are required to implement the full monitoring and control requirements detailed in the station signal lists. In the cases where there are existing marshalling cubicles these shall define the contractual boundary for the implementation of the new RTUs. However, where additional signals are required (and this may include controls) or where replacement materials are required the boundary shall be at the points of connection of the required materials. This would be from the Marshalling Cubicle to either the substation control rooms or the respective bays. Where suitable power supplies exist the interface point shall be the dc distribution boards. Where replacement or new dc supplies are required the 415Vac distribution boards shall be the interface point. Connection for IPP stations The marshalling point in the respective GSS shall be the defined boundary. All cables, connectors, cable trays, ducting, accessories and other materials required to complete the installation and setting to work shall be included in the scope of work. 1.6.4 Colombo City Distribution Control Centre
The Works involved with the Distribution Control Centre will require the following considerations: 1 Installation of necessary telecommunication equipment for the implementation of an ICCP links between the DCC and the new NSCC. 2 Coordination with the supplier of the DCC system to set up the required exchange of data. The Contractor shall coordinate with the parties responsible within the Employers organisation to ensure that all required data is defined and made available and that all activities required to complete and put into service these facilities for data exchange are carried out. 1.6.5 Uninterruptible Power Supply System
The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the complete UPS, Diesel Generator and associated control panels and distribution boards and their termination in the primary intake, switch rooms and battery room in the new NSCC building. 1.6.6 NSCC Building
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete architectural, civil and building services works associated the provision of the NSCC building. In addition to the coordination required with the other sections of work under this Contract the Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of access and routes for services. The Contractor shall provide suitable routes from the boundary of the construction site to enable the electricity, telephone, water and drainage services to be connected. The Contractor shall also provide suitable termination points for these services. In the case of the electricity services two independent and segregated routes shall be provided by the Contractor that are protected from mechanical damage. The service cables shall be provided by the Employer who will terminate them on Distribution Boards provided by the Contractor. Similarly, the Contractor shall provide independent, protected and segregated routes up to the boundary of the construction site for the communications cables to enter the building. The Contractor shall provide all required management, architectural, design, labour, travel, administration, equipment, earthwork, civil, structural, electrical, mechanical, building services and all other associated works and services to complete the design, construction and fitting out of the NSCC building. The Contractor shall include all work required including reinstatement of disturbed areas within and surrounding the site of construction including areas where the Contractors work force, storage and other related activities have occurred.
1.7
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURES OF PRODUCTS
The bidder shall ensure, that each main product (listed below) offered under this contract, is designed/manufactured/produced by a manufacturer with a minimum of fifteen (15) years successful experience in designing/manufacturing/producing comparable products, to the products offered under the contract. In respect of design of products offered under this bid, the bidder shall ensure that identical products in design have been in service for a minimum period of five (5) years. If the offered products are manufactured under license, the service experience of products manufactured by the parent company shall not be counted as service experience of the licensee's products. In the case of Computer Based and other electronic equipment the general system shall comply with this requirement whereas the devices used and architecture shall follow the latest models and standards. The Bidder shall provide adequate evidence of compliance to the above requirements to the satisfaction of the CAPC. Bids that do not comply with the above requirements or with incomplete evidence of compliance may be rejected. Main Product List: SCADA Application Soft ware EMS Application Software SCADA Hardware Rear Projection Video Wall RTUs Outstation interfacing equipment Fibre Optic terminal equipment Communication interfaces Power line Carrier Equipment Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems (including Diesel Generator, UPS, Batteries & 48Vdc Chargers). Building Services M&E equipment 1.8 THE ENVIRONMENT AND ADHERENCE TO THE ENVIRONMENTAL ACTS, REGULATIONS AND / OR GUIDELINES The selected contractor is responsible for the full compliance with the following acts, regulations and/or guidelines with respect to the execution of this project National Environmental Act No. 47 of 1980 including all the amendments Relevant Environmental safeguard requirements and reports under ADBs safeguard policy statement.
The bidders also shall take into consideration the relevant costs that will be incurred, for the strict adherence to the environmental safeguard measures stipulated in the environmental approvals and the relevant documents forming part of such approvals obtained under the above acts/regulations/guidelines with respect to this project.
2. NSCC SCADA/EMS 2.1 INTRODUCTION
A new NSCC is to be established to facilitate control and monitoring of the 220/132kV network and the primary feeds to the 33kV networks. A new SCADA/EMS Master Station is to be supplied and installed in the newly constructed Control Centre building to provide the control and monitoring facilities. This Chapter of the specification details the requirement for the Master Station and supporting equipment to be provided at each location. 2.2 2.2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS General
This specification document details the functional requirements of the SCADA/EMS Master Station software to be supplied under this Contract. The system and applications to be supplied shall be based on proven products that shall, as far as is possible, be configured to meet these functional requirements. The Contractor shall endeavour to meet the specified requirements using their standard software products. In this respect, it is important that the objectives of the requirements are met even though the solution may not entirely comply with the Specification. However, the Contractor shall develop new software to provide all specified functionality that cannot be achieved using the Contractors standard products. The Bidder shall include details in their offer how each of the specified requirements will be met by naming the standard product/module that provides the specified functionality or by stating the extent of software development required to implement the functionality. The Bidder shall identify whether the offered solution is a deviation from the specified requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. System to be supplied shall be based on mature products that have evolved and been proven in comparable projects. In this context it is recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system. Further to this, the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying, within the Contract price, all software, hardware, documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a fully operational system whether or not those items are explicitly specified or requested. Due to its pivotal role in the operational management of the power network the SCADA master station at the Control Centre must be secure against internal failures and external hazards. As defence against internal equipment failures the Master Station shall comprise a set of redundant hardware and software facilities as required to meet the availability requirements of this specification. The design is required to ensure that failures of components or sub-systems are detected promptly and that previously redundant components are brought into operational use, without operator intervention, and without causing a degradation of functionality or performance. The design shall be such that no single failure shall cause the loss or disruption to essential facilities. To provide a first level of defence against external, potentially common mode hazards, such as fire, redundant elements of the master station (principally servers) shall be capable of being located in physically segregated rooms within the Control Centre building(s). The control rooms will be the only common point of failure with respect to external hazards. As a defence against this it shall be possible to utilise any of the workstations located outside the control room as operational workstations including those associated with the maintenance and training facilities. Communication and power cabling shall be physically segregated to support the segregation of redundant hardware and software facilities. For example cabling to workstations outside the control room should not run through the control room and cabling to each workstation within the control room should be segregated. 2.2.2 System Architecture
The System design and architecture shall have followed industry standard open systems concepts with regard to interconnections with other equipment conforming to open standards and system upgradeability, for hardware and software, as well as for data management. In normal operation all subsystems and functions shall be available. However, certain subsystems shall be replicated such that no single failure shall cause loss of functionality and that the availability of the
functions meets the specified reliability requirements. The Contractor shall identify where subsystems need to be replicated to meet the specified requirements: The SCADA Master Station workstations need not be replicated provided the functionality previously available at a failed workstation is automatically available at a pre-defined workstation and by suitable access codes at other operator workstations. Similarly for Master Station printers, if suitable diversity of printers on servers is provided and automatic reassignment, then duplication is not required. The system must be designed to allow a faulty item to be removed from service and to be replaced without the functionality of the system being affected. The design shall be such as to avoid interruption of data acquisition because of faults. Under no circumstances shall it be possible for the system to lose data and be in an indeterminate state with respect to data validity. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure, indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed. Facilities shall be incorporated to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. Indicative outline design for the SCADA system is shown in Drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001. 2.2.3 Initial and Ultimate Sizing
The initial sizing of SCADA Master Station shall meet the requirements of the Outstation telemetered data and non telemetered data. This is estimated to be some 50,000 data points. Any additional capacity required for internal management, etc shall be accounted for separately by the Contractor. The expansion capability of SCADA Master Station system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. The delivered systems shall be dimensioned according to the following: a) b) c) A four-fold increase in the number of all database points both telemetered and nontelemetered. A two-fold increase in the number of Outstations. The Master Station software including SCADA and applications databases and display facilities shall be dimensioned to accommodate a four fold increase in size of the power network elements (nodes, generators, transformers, switches etc.). The introduction of an additional voltage level (e.g. 400kV).
d)
The above expansion shall be achieved without degradation to the availability or performance of the master station. The Bidder shall demonstrate in the sizing calculation to be provided with the offer that these expansion requirements are provided for and can be achieved without such degradation. The Contractor shall demonstrate in the Factory Tests that these expansion requirements can be achieved without such degradation. No additional hardware or software shall be required to accommodate the expansion defined above for the Master Station. In addition, the Master Station shall be capable of expansion to support 2 additional operator workstations within the control room and a further 2, operator workstations to be located elsewhere via a remote connection. The Bidder shall indicate if any additional hardware or software or licences, other than the workstations themselves, would be required in order to ensure that the performance of the system is not compromised by such an expansion in the number of workstations. 2.2.4 Reliability and Availability
It is a fundamental requirement that each system (and individual items of equipment within them) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the systems shall have been proven in service. 2.2.5 Risks
The construction of equipment and its installation shall be such that common mode risks from external hazards are minimised. Redundant items shall not be vulnerable to the same events, for example
damage in a location shall not affect both parts of the duplicated/redundant equipment/component or cabling. Segregation shall be used where possible and/or suitable means of protection. The installation plan shall include the measures to be taken to prevent such contingencies and will be subject to approval. 2.3 2.3.1 SCADA APPLICATIONS Communication
2.3.1.1 Data Acquisition The data acquisition software shall be capable of supporting multiple telecontrol protocols for the monitoring and control of substation plant via RTUs and Substation Automation Systems (SAS) with Gateway access. All existing Outstations that are to remain in service operate using the IEC 60870-5101 protocol new Outstations shall communicate with the master stations using the IEC 60870-5-101 or 104 protocols. The data acquisition system shall send out polling requests for data in accordance with a preprogrammed routine so as to maintain the database updated with the latest data from all Outstations. Where a report by exception technique is used the data acquisition software shall initiate a full scan of an RTU to retrieve the actual state of the RTU under the following circumstances: a) b) c) d) e) Master Station cold start RTU or SAS reset Restoration of communications Cyclically every 24 hours On request by the operator
The facility to switch Outstations into or out-of-scan for maintenance or commissioning purposes shall be provided. It shall only be possible to switch Outstations by manual command from an appropriate display. The status of all Outstation communication shall be available for display at any of the Master Station Workstations. All operator actions required to enable and disable data acquisition in the manner outlined above shall be recorded in the events list. The system shall also maintain a separate list of all data points which have been manually taken 'off scan'. The data acquisition system shall monitor the performance of each communication channel. Statistics on the performance of each communication channel shall be available for display. For each communication channel the data acquisition software shall detect loss of communication with an Outstation and raise an alarm. Where an alternate communication channel to the Outstation is available communication shall be switched automatically by the data acquisition software. The data acquisition software shall continue to operate on the alternate communication channel until instructed to switch-over to the main link by the Operator. In the event of detection of a data transmission error or failure, indications and alarms from the previously successful scan shall continue to be displayed on the workstations. Facilities shall be incorporated however to indicate automatically to the operators that the relevant data has not been updated. 2.3.1.2 ICCP Data Links Duplicated ICCP Data Links are required between the NSCC and the Colombo City Distribution Control to support the exchange of operational and commercial data including real time data acquired or calculated by the respective SCADA systems. The IEC 60870 6 TASE 2 protocol shall be adopted for these links. 2.3.2 Data Processing
The SCADA system shall provide a comprehensive and flexible set of facilities for processing telemetered, manually entered, calculated and data from other systems accessible at the NSCC. The following requirements relate to specific types of data.
2.3.2.1 Measured Values Scaling Measured values shall be converted, scaled and presented dependent upon the form in which the data is collected from the Outstation. Where conversion of raw data to engineering units is required this shall be configurable on an individual point basis. The following conversion types shall therefore be provided for measured value scaling: a) b) No conversion - The value in raw counts is stored directly in the database unchanged. A*X+B conversion - A and B are constants that provide the scaling and offset for the analogue value X. Unique pairs of A and B are provided for each analogue point requiring this conversion. An A*X conversion is provided by setting the B constant (offset) to zero. Suppressed zero - For each value of this conversion type a database value is specified below which the converted value will be set to zero.
c)
Each measured value shall have an associated 'value out of range' raw data value threshold. If this value is exceeded the last valid value shall be displayed and an out-of-range attribute shall mark the data item. It shall be possible to specify for each voltage, at database construction, a value in engineering units, below which the voltage shall be stored as zero. The following sign conventions for real and reactive power flow shall be used universally throughout the SCADA system: a) All active and reactive power flowing into a busbar shall be positive b) Limits All limit values shall be in engineering units. It shall be possible for the alarm limits to be amended on-line by the Operator. Amendments to the active limits shall generate a message indicating the changes made to the limit values within the event list. For monopolar measured values, alarm supervision shall be between two adjustable alarm limits. For bipolar measured values alarm supervision shall be between four adjustable alarm limits. When enabled the scanned measured value shall be continuously checked against assigned limit values. When disabled no limit checking shall apply to the selected measured value. All limit violations shall be annunciated as an alarm to the operator and recorded on the event list. To ensure that items whose values are varying just above and just below alarm limits do not generate a constant stream of alarms, the system shall not consider a value to have returned within a set of limits until it has done so by a predefined and operator adjustable margin. To avoid annunciation of certain transitory conditions it shall also be possible to delay the annunciation of an alarm for a defined period. This period shall be a system wide parameter, based on the number (1 or more) of consecutive scans for which the transgression is true, and shall be amendable on-line by the Operator. A time-delay filter shall be provided to ensure that any transient limit-transgressions do not result in transient changes to the displayed or annunciated alarm state. Whenever a measurement returns within limits from a limit violation, an event shall be recorded in the event list. All active and reactive power flowing out of a busbar shall be negative.
Acknowledged limit alarms associated with the measured value shall not generate an additional alarm, but shall be removed from the alarm list when the measured value returns within limits. Unacknowledged limit alarms shall be annunciated again measured value returns within limits. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding measured values with fixed values entered via the User Interface. All measurements shall be eligible for overriding. The System shall only permit the application of overrides for measured values by users with the appropriate area of authority. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. The appearance of values on displays shall be different when an override has been applied. On removal of an override the value shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the value is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority. 2.3.2.2 Status Indications - Digital Points Status Indications comprise signals formed as single or double point values. All status changes shall be processed immediately. Single Points In general this category encompasses alarm and status indications. Two forms of alarms shall be supported, these being fleeting (momentary signal e.g. a protection signal that is present for the duration of operation only) and non-fleeting or persistent (signal that remains in changed state until state changes again e.g. most signals are in this category) alarms. Double Points Double point indications shall be used to indicate the status of circuit breaker and switch position (Open or Closed) and other devices where a higher integrity is required than is possible with single point indication. . An output must be obtained from each of the two positions (e.g. 10 or 01) so that a persistent invalid combination (e.g. 00 or 11) shall result in the data being declared invalid. In many cases the indication wiring and interposing relays are existing and have been implemented as single point status signals. The system shall also be able to process these as switch position but without the validity logic. Transitory conditions that generate intermediate signals as may occur with disconnects, shall not result in an alarm signal until a predetermined period has elapsed to allow the device to reach its final position. The ability to differentiate between authorised status changes, such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator, and unauthorised changes such as occur from other actions, e.g. protection operation, shall be provided. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as an alarm condition. Manual Overrides Facilities shall be provided for overriding digital point values with fixed values entered via the user Interface. All digital points shall be eligible for overriding. Overridden values shall not be updated by values telemetered from Outstations or calculated by the system for values which are scan inhibited. The appearance of digital points on displays shall be modified when an override has been applied.
by a return to normal alarm when the
On removal of an override the digital point shall be marked suspect until the value has been updated from the telemetered source or recalculated. On removal of an override the SCADA shall immediately request the present status of the point from the RTU. Overrides shall be enterable and removable wherever the digital point is displayed subject to appropriate user function authority. 2.3.2.3 Derived Data Facilities shall be provided for deriving data values from other data items (including other derived measured values and digitals from anywhere in the system). The construction of these derived data values shall be operator orientated and not require the use of the tools used for database management and manipulation. The definition of a derived measured value shall permit the prioritisation of elements within a calculation. The operands that shall be supported are as follows: a) Arithmetic b) Unary c) Square root Unary negation Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Modulus
Boolean Logical AND Logical OR Logical exclusive-OR Logical NOT
d)
Relational Greater than >
Greater than or equal to Less than <
Less than or equal to Equal to Not equal to =
e)
Functions Absolute Minimum Maximum Logarithm Natural logarithm
Statistics Summation Sine, cosine and tangent and their inverse functions.
A derived measured value shall be processed in the same way as any other measurement, e.g. limit checking and propagation of quality attributes. And be available in one line and tabular displays. The performance requirements for the processing of derived values are specified in Clause 2.12. Examples of derived values that will be used are: -Line currents calculated from MW, MVAr and Voltage measurements -MVA calculated from MW and MVAr values -MW values calculated from MWh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MVAr values calculated from MVArh values averaged over 15 minute periods -MWh and MVArh values calculated from MW values over defined periods or accumulative values 2.3.2.4 Meter Values Energy metering values will be available as pulsed inputs to Outstations. A facility shall be provided for setting up and synchronising the stored values such that there is consistency with the actual measuring device. The arrangement should be such as to ensure the integrity of the data after temporary loss of the SCADA or communications. The energy metering data collected by the SCADA shall be stored within the SCADA system. It is anticipated that the storage will be achieved by use of the historical data processing and storage facilities and may include some pre-processing such as totalisation by period, day, area, etc. The SCADA system shall be able to report the daily, monthly and annual energy figures by substation, area, region and for the total system. 2.3.2.5 Tap Position These shall be processed from transducers with mA or binary coded outputs and displayed as integer number tap positions. Where master-follower equipment is installed the process shall identify whether a slave tap changer is out of step with the master. This condition shall be annunciated as an alarm. There would normally be an out of step indication as well derived directly from the AVR system. The alarm generated by the tap position processor shall be used to determine whether there is a fault on the tap position indication circuitry. 2.3.2.6 Data Quality Attributes All telemetered data, derived data and received via ICCP data link shall have attributes associated with each value that define the current quality of the data. These attributes shall be propagated with the status or value of each data item. The quality attributes required as a minimum are given in the following sub-clauses. 2.3.2.6.1 Normal Data
A normal data item is defined as one which is active, up-to-date and uninhibited. A lack of any other quality attribute can be used to indicate this state. 2.3.2.6.2 Event Inhibited
The event inhibit attribute is applied when the data item is active and up-to-date but no event or alarm is to be annunciated or recorded even if a limit is transgressed or a change of status is detected. The system shall provide facilities to enable the user, with appropriate functional authority, to set or clear the event inhibit attribute on-line.
2.3.2.6.3
Suspect Data
Data shall be marked suspect if the item is active but the updating of its value or status is discontinued for any reason other than an applied override. An item shall remain suspect until a valid update is received. 2.3.2.6.4 Overridden Data
The overridden attribute shall apply when the value of a data item has been manually replaced. The override feature shall be separate from the facility to change manually-dressed (non-telemetered and non-derived) data items. 2.3.2.6.5 Value-Out-of-Range
The value-out-of-range attribute shall mark a measured value as exceeding the metering range of the measuring device. 2.3.2.6.6 Propagation of Quality Attributes
A derived item shall have its suspect, overridden or value-out-of-range attribute(s) set if any of its constituent elements has the corresponding attribute(s) set. 2.3.2.7 Controls The system shall provide the facility to control plant and equipment by telecommand. Controls may be individual or part of a user definable sequence. Only one valid control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. However, control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. If equipment is selected which is unsuitable for remote control or if the wrong control initiation is attempted, e.g. to trip a breaker which is in the open position, then an incorrect selection indication shall be given. If equipment suitable for remote control is selected, but the device is selected to local control at the substation, then the command shall be blocked and an appropriate message given to the operator. Facilities shall be provided to inhibit control of any plant item suitable for supervisory control. Any plant item so inhibited shall have suitable identification on the displays. It shall not be possible to control an item where an applied tag is specified as an interlock. In communicating commands to the Outstations, the following conditions must be satisfied: a) b) Initiation of a command shall involve a select before operate procedure. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. The transmission of a command signal, e.g. close or trip shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation.
Successful completion of a control shall be indicated by update of its new telemetered state and the presentation of a confirmatory message. A change of state resulting from a successful control shall not generate an audible annunciation. Failure of a control shall be indicated by de-selection of the plant item and the presentation of an informative message. The failed control shall generate an alarm and initiate audible annunciation. The system shall also cancel controls automatically, such as when: a) A control check-back failure occurs at any stage b) c) d) A control is not executed within a predetermined time of selection There is a failure of a main computer resulting in a restart or changeover to a standby computer. Errors occur in the control protocol sequences.
Cancellation shall return the plant item to a state in which a new operation may be selected. All control actions and individual steps of switching sequences shall be logged in a single Telecommand Log which shall be available for display on-line and/or printed if required. The Telecommand Log shall identify the user, time and date of the occurrence of each entry. 2.3.3 Alarm and Event Processing
2.3.3.1 Definition An Event is defined as any change of state or threshold transition and includes the following. a) A state change of a binary signal input at an Outstation b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) A supervisory control action issued from the master station System generated messages, e.g. control action tracking messages, fault messages Log 'ON', log 'OFF' actions Measurand limit violations Manual diagram dressing actions Alarm acknowledgements System configuration and data amendment actions Conditions derived from the logical combinations of signals.
An alarm is defined as an annunciated event, requiring acknowledgement by an operator. Typically, alarms may be generated from any of sources a, c, e and selected instances of i above. The actual events to be defined as alarms shall be user configurable. Certain exceptions to the normal interpretation of events shall apply: A state change [source (a) events] normally expected to result from a supervisory control action [source (b) events] shall only be interpreted by the system as an alarm when the associated control command has not been issued. Where binary coding of transformer tap positions is employed, single bit state changes shall be evaluated by the system in the context of a coded group of bits for the purpose of registering an event. Illegal values shall be alarmed. Where analogue transducers are used to provide transformer tap position indications, the signal shall be processed to give a discrete integer value output corresponding to the tap position and changes between these discrete values shall be handled as an event. Illegal values shall be alarmed.
2.3.3.2 Event Handling As events are processed, the resulting changes shall be used to update the real-time database, and dynamic display facilities. Event description text shall be appended to each item in the event list and be available for printing. Many events will arise from initiating conditions that have two well defined states and, in the majority of cases, it will be required that the transitions between both states are recorded as events. However, whether or not a transition is recorded as an event shall be user configurable. In the case of double point status indications (e.g. circuit breaker status, where both the open and closed states are monitored by separate auxiliary contacts) it will normally be required to record as events only two of the four transitions (i.e. when the breaker moves to the closed position and when it moves to the open position). In the case of double point indications, a further event shall be derived from any incongruent condition arising between the independent contacts (e.g. both contacts open or both contacts closed for longer than a defined time). This situation shall also give rise to an alarm and the representation of the corresponding device upon diagram displays as being in an 'undefined' state. 2.3.3.2.1 Event Descriptions
Event descriptions shall comprise the following information for each event:
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) 2.3.3.2.2
Date and time from the event message time stamp Location description (e.g. substation name) Voltage level (where appropriate) Circuit description (where appropriate) Signal specific description (e.g. backup protection) Signal state (e.g. OPERATED, NORMAL) Operator's identity (for e.g. commands, manual dressing actions, alarm acknowledgements) For limit violations, the value of the limit transgressed and the actual value of the measurand The value entered for manual entries Event list
When an event list is first called up for display in a list window, the most recent page of entries shall be presented. The list shall be updated automatically with new entries as they enter the system. The operator shall be able to page through the lists in either direction, but each new page displayed shall retain some lines from the previous page, to provide visual continuity. In addition to the paging mechanism, there shall be a facility to jump immediately to an approximate position within the list, including either end of the list. It shall be possible to use the jump and page controls at will, to achieve rapid location of any portion of a list. If page 1 (most recent entries) of a list is displayed, it shall be paged automatically, so that it always displays the most recent entries. When the page is full the system shall refresh the display to ensure that the latest events are shown. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator, whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list, filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up, as required. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time, message descriptions, message type, source location, operator identity, etc. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible, incorporating features such as variable length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. An operator shall be able to send the search output to a printer or a disc file, upon operator request. Event list shall be sized to accommodate at least 10 000 events and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. 2.3.3.3 Alarm Management Where an event is configured as an alarm, it shall be automatically brought to the Operators attention via the Graphic User Interface GUI. Additionally, it shall be possible to generate an audible annunciation for selected alarms by setting attributes in the database. A list of substations and SCADA system groups with unacknowledged alarms shall be available to the operator. 2.3.3.3.1 Alarm Lists
Alarms shall be displayed on Acknowledged and Unacknowledged alarm lists. The alarm lists shall be displayed in chronological order with the most recent alarm first with the occurrence of new alarms handled in the same manner as events. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence, location, and device or other identifier, action, status, value and normal limits. A search and sort facility shall be available to the operator, whereby he shall be able to produce a reduced list, filtered and sorted according to certain criteria. The criteria shall be entered through a pro forma mask that the operator shall be able to call up, as required. The mask shall allow entry of search and sort criteria such as: date/time, message descriptions, message type, source location, operator identity, etc. The search and sort facility shall be very flexible, incorporating features such as variable
length character string searches and the use of wildcard characters. It shall also be possible to save a number of search criteria for quick access and use in the future. a) Priority b) c) d) e) f) g) Voltage level Substation Equipment type System Area of responsibility Time period
A display shall also be provided which identifies all substations with unacknowledged alarms. It shall be possible to navigate directly to the substation unacknowledged alarm page from this display. Alarm list shall be sized to accommodate 5000 Alarms and shall automatically archive any overflow on a first in first out basis. 2.3.3.3.2 Alarm Sequence
All alarms shall be brought to the attention of the operators. The alarm sequence shall be as follows: a) At the onset of the alarm condition the alarm will be entered into the alarm window, and into the Unacknowledged alarm list where displayed. Its priority shall be highlighted with the use of colour. Flashing shall not be used in the alarm lists. Any device being displayed on a one line diagram to which the alarm is associated shall flash. b) c) The audible alarm may be silenced by the operator(s). The alarm message will be acknowledged by the operator. If the alarm is fleeting it shall disappear from the alarm lists. If the alarm is persistent it shall be displayed on the Acknowledged alarm list. Symbols on the one line diagrams shall cease flashing when the alarm is acknowledged. The acknowledgement shall be logged in the event list. Reset of alarm condition shall be treated in the same manner as the onset except that on acknowledgement the onset and reset messages shall be removed from the alarm list. Where the reset condition occurs before the onset has been acknowledged, the message for both conditions shall remain in the alarm list and device symbols shall flash at half the rate of the alarm conditions. The presence of an unacknowledged alarm which has reset shall be indicated by colour in the alarm list.
d) e) f)
The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually, on a page basis and from diagrams on a device basis. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm. 2.3.3.3.3 Alarm suppression
The software shall support two forms of alarm suppression manual and automatic. This facility is intended for use in cases where faulty signals generate repetitive nuisance events and alarms. For manual suppression, it shall be possible for the operator to suppress the processing of individual alarm. Each suppression command shall be recorded on the event list. The system shall support the automatic suppression of nuisance alarms. A nuisance alarm shall be defined by the occurrence of a user definable number of changes of state within a user definable period
of time. Under these conditions the SCADA software shall automatically suppress the processing of this alarm. An alarm shall be generated indicating that the event has been automatically been suppressed. When the number of changes of state fall below the user defined threshold then the SCADA software shall remove the automatic suppression of the alarm. An alarm reset shall be generated indicating the removal of the automatic suppressed condition. All suppressed alarms either manually by the operator or automatically shall be displayed on a list suppressed alarm list. The list will have the facility to sort the alarms suppressed by to display those by station and/or by type either manual or automatic suppression. 2.3.3.4 Printing of Alarm & Event Lists Operators shall also be able to request the printing of all or a portion of any event or alarm list or search for an output list (see above) by defining the start and end points through a screen pro-forma or dialogue. The operator shall be able to define the start and end points in terms of message identity numbers or date/time stamps. 2.3.3.5 Sequence of Events Processing Sequence of events processing shall be provided whereby the order of occurrence of events shall processed for: a. Events where a time stamp is applied to a signal on receipt by the Master Station b. Events that are time stamped on occurrence by the Outstation
The sequence of events processor shall maintain a chronological list of events that can be viewed on a station, circuit or system basis. The process shall also group the data on an event basis, e.g. per fault. The data shall be readily available to include in reports. 2.3.3.6 Disturbance Monitoring A facility to record events associated with disturbances shall be provided. A first in first out log of values and events shall be maintained such that following predefined alarm conditions the values of measurements and status (received from the entire telemetry system) for the previous 5 minutes and the values for the following 10 minutes shall be stored and made available in a disturbance monitoring record. The total pre event and post event storage times shall be readily adjustable using simple user instructions. The initiating of such recording shall also be possible from logical rules and calculated values. The records shall be available for inclusion in reports and shall be readily viewable by Operators at their workstations. It shall be possible to alter the duration of the pre and post event recording by simple Operator settings. The Bidder may offer a system that records all data samples and provides facilities to construct such reports. 2.3.4 Graphic User Interface (GUI)
2.3.4.1 General The following sub-clauses outline the general functional requirements and principles of operation for the Graphic User Interface. It is not intended that they should define in detail the methods of presenting information to the operator and the means of operator interaction with the system. Rather, the main functional requirements and principles of operation have been defined and it is required that the Contractor shall develop his design accordingly, incorporating all additional detail necessary to furnish a comprehensive and fully functional interface for interaction with the system. The design of the User Interface shall be based on standard software packages. An organised approach to handling multiple windows, which allows the operator to save and subsequently restore the screen layout and its contents, is preferred. The workstations shall be capable of supporting as a minimum the number of windows per display specified in the Schedules. 2.3.4.2 Access Control The SCADA system software shall be capable of supporting different levels of user, such as Operator, Supervisor, Engineer, System Manager, etc. Access control shall be provided which requires all users to identify themselves and enter passwords before being granted access.
The system shall be capable of supporting a minimum 32 different levels of users. The access control facilities shall be arranged to restrict functional access to predefined users. Access privileges shall be freely definable and shall determine access to areas such as: a) Functions (controls, displays, reports, etc.) b) c) d) e) f) Data (real time, historical, etc.) Geographical areas Designated areas of responsibility Editing or creating data files, reports, etc. Database and graphic display amendment
The actual access privileges and users will be defined during the detailed implementation phase of the project. 2.3.4.3 Displays 2.3.4.3.1 Network Displays
The network display facilities shall use the principle of a world map whereby different levels of detail from geographic overview to detailed substation plant/circuit are accessible. Schematic layouts shall be represented in which the substations are laid out in approximate geographic positions with the interconnections shown by orthogonal lines with minimal crossovers. The displays shall include most items of plant explicitly, including transformers, buses, bus couplers/section switches, disconnects/isolators, earthing switches, etc. Fast panning shall be supported to traverse the entire network display and zoom/declutter facilities shall allow a large area of the network to be seen with a low level of detail, with progressively more detail including measurement values shown as the display is zoomed in. When fully zoomed in the diagram shall show the level of detail traditionally included on substation one line diagrams making these unnecessary. Additional means of navigating the network diagram shall be provided apart from panning. These shall include selection of individual stations from the overview diagram and by database search selection using the station name or mnemonic. The search facility shall allow the use of 'wild cards' so that it is not necessary to enter the full name. It shall also be possible to navigate directly to the network display of an item of plant which is in alarm by selection from the alarm list (and similarly to an alarm list entry from an item in alarm on the network diagram). The main network display shall be updated in real time with plant status and measurement information from SCADA or manually dressed and shall be used for initiating control actions and recording a variety of information concerned with the operation of the network. It shall also be possible for the operator to access any data which has been associated with the plant item by selecting the item on the diagram displayed on the workstation. Generally the design of displays shall focus on clarity and bringing abnormal conditions to the attention of operators. It shall be possible to show the operating status of any circuit; energised, degree of loading including (warning and alarm states), disconnected, isolated, earthed, over/under voltage etc. by use of colour, shading and line format. 2.3.4.3.2 Network Connectivity Display
Network Topology Processing The topology of the power network shall be monitored to determine the network connectivity. The connectivity data shall be updated automatically whenever a topology change is detected, as a result of telemetered status changes and/or manual diagram dressing. Connectivity shall be determined and held for each version of the network image resident in the database, whether real time or study cases. An alarm event shall be generated whenever the topology processor encounters a circuit arrangement resulting in the interconnection of the secondary windings of two transformers in either the same or different substations at the distribution level (11 kV or 33kV).
Connectivity Presentation The operator shall be able to call up connectivity information for superposition upon a network diagram display. This function shall have both global and operator selective modes. In global mode, all islands of interconnected equipment shall be highlighted. In operator selective mode, the operator would position the cursor on a circuit element in the portion of the network of interest and all circuit elements electrically connected to that selected shall be traced and identified by the System, originating at the primary substation source circuit breaker and terminating at the open point(s) of the circuit (feeder). The identification shall be carried out by means of a change of colour, or a change of line type (e.g. style or thickness but not flashing). The actual line attribute change invoked shall be freely user definable, although default selections shall normally apply. For example, if yellow colouring is set up by the system engineer as the default line attribute, selection of the connectivity presentation function by the operator shall cause the lines of the relevant portion of the network to be displayed in yellow. The line display attributes for the connectivity presentation function shall be set up in a priority display table such that when an operator invokes multiple connectivity traces (i.e. more than one feeder) on a display at any one time, each connectivity trace (i.e. each feeder) shall be distinguishable from others (i.e. different colours or line types). Separate commands shall be available to enable the operator to clear down the connectivity traces both individually and globally. Automatic clear down shall occur upon closure of the display window, but not during panning and zooming actions. The operator shall have the facility of an independent command to visually accentuate the open points in the network. Clear down shall be by manual command and automatically upon closure of the display window. 2.3.4.3.3 Hydro Complex Displays
Displays representing the hydro complexes shall be provided that show water levels for reservoirs and ponds in a cascade overview indicating spill gate operation, near spill and whether operation is near minimum limits. These displays shall be driven by telemetered and manually entered data and shall indicate warning and alarm conditions. In addition to these displays being available on Operator VDUs and the Video Wall, permanent pictorial displays shall be located adjacent to the Video Wall. 2.3.4.3.4 Tabular displays
For each station, tables of measured values comprising circuit loading (A, MW, MVAr), voltages (kV), frequency (Hz), transformer tap positions, energy meter advances (kWh, kVAh) and other measurements shall be available for display. 2.3.4.3.5 Video Wall displays
The video wall display shall be capable of presenting any of the Graphic and Tabular displays available in the system. 2.3.4.3.6 System Displays
The following System displays shall be provided with the purpose of providing the operators with key system information: Total System Demand (TSD) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system which shall calculate the TSD by comparing the TSG and the system frequency deviation; TSD = TSG + ACE Total System Generation (TSG) in MW as a digital readout derived from the SCADA/EMS system by summing the generation outputs of all synchronised generators. Area Control Error in MW derived by the AGC application Actual Time as real clock time and date Synchronous time derived from the system frequency Time deviation calculated from Actual Time Synchronous Time Water levels for reservoirs and ponds System Frequency derived directly from the HV busbars of the adjacent Grid Sub Station.
System Frequency Trend derived directly from the above measurement A further 6 frequency measurements shall be available for display that are derived from other GSS or generating stations and provided by direct communication via digital channels supplied under this contract.
It should be noted that the frequency measurements are the most critical system control variables and are required to be displayed without any delays incurred in the SCADA acquisition process and must be available in the event that the SCADA system fails. With the exception of the latter 6 frequency measurements these values shall be permanently displayed on a panel adjacent to the video wall. The display of the other 6 frequency measurements shall be operator selectable and presented in the same panel. Provision shall be made for 3 such frequency measurements to be displayed simultaneously. 2.3.4.3.7 Display Interaction
The User Interface shall be designed to maximise the use of graphical interaction implemented using standard software wherever possible and to this end it must be stated where the standard software, as offered, does not comply with the functional requirements detailed herein. All user actions shall be initiated using a mouse/trackball and keyboard using standard methods. The software shall also guide the user, step-by-step, through each sequence by identifying the remaining valid entries, preferably via the use of pop-up menus, dialogue prompts and help screens. All such facilities shall be context sensitive and, for example, only menu options relevant to the command sequence being executed shall be presented to the operator for selection. Where a command sequence requires selection from a series of menus, they shall be displayed sequentially at approximately the same position on the screen. Where text entry is more appropriate for the interaction or dialogue between an operator and the system, pro forma screens (data entry masks) and dialogue boxes shall be used. These shall contain field descriptions that readily identify the required information to the operator. Wherever possible, previous values or default values shall be entered into the interactive fields by the system, so that an operator only needs to make amendments, rather than completely filling the pro forma each time. Context sensitive help screens shall always be available to the operator to assist him to interact with the system. Where practicable, the help screens shall consist of the relevant pages of the Operators' Manual. All operator entries shall be checked by the system for validity and plausibility. The operator shall not be permitted to make invalid entries. Any invalid entry shall be detected by the software and ignored. An explanatory message shall be displayed. It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry. For rapid selection and control of diagram manipulative functions in particular, pointer selectable "softkey" symbols shall be available for use by the operator. Such soft keys shall duplicate equivalent selections available via the keyboard and through menus and shall typically be used to switch between mouse controlled actions (e.g. smooth panning and zooming) and to provide one step control functions (e.g. step zooming). Softkey control shall avoid the use of more cumbersome menu selection sequences in situations where one step execution of and rapid switching between functions is desirable. Where appropriate, the (latched) selection of a softkey function shall be visually indicated by a change of softkey appearance. Selection of a softkey function shall automatically cancel any alternative (mutually exclusive) selections previously made. Linking shall also be possible between text lists (e.g. an alarm list) and other windows. For example, selecting an alarm entry in a list may be configured to open a diagram window and display the related substation at an appropriate level of detail. It shall be possible to navigate directly from station single line level to both station acknowledged and unacknowledged alarm lists. 2.3.4.4 Supervisory Control The sequences employed to execute all required selection and control tasks, via the workstation, shall be by standard methods. Warning messages shall indicate if for any reason the selected control action is not possible. These reasons shall include the following:
a) Device is not suitable for remote control b) Device is selected to local control at the substation c) Redundant control initiation is attempted, i.e. to trip a breaker which is in the open position d) Device or other device at the Outstation is already selected for control e) Device has controls inhibited f) Device has a tag applied which is specified as an interlock All command sequences shall be terminated by pressing an execute key. A cancel key shall be provided to allow termination of the command sequence. In the event that a command sequence is left incomplete, subsequent inadvertent operation of the execute key shall be prevented. This shall be achieved either by a 30 s time-out function initiated by the key sequence reaching the execute stage. 2.3.4.4.1 Circuit Breakers
Only one valid circuit breaker control order may be sent at any time to a given Outstation. However, control orders may be sent to different Outstations at the same time. In communicating commands to the Outstations, the following conditions must be satisfied: a) Initiation of a command shall involve a select before operate procedure. This should be confirmed to the Master Station from the appropriate Outstation. Alternatively the validity of the command should be checked at the main computer and, if correct, transmitted to the Outstation at very high security. The transmission of a command signal, e.g. close or trip shall not interrupt the receipt of incoming data from the Outstation.
b)
The ability to differentiate between authorised status changes, such as occur due to commands initiated by the operator, and unauthorised changes such as occur from other actions, e.g. protection operation, shall be provided. Status changes arising from operator issued commands shall not be treated as alarm conditions. Normally, circuit breaker closing will be initiated by a 'circuit breaker close' command issued by the operator. Checking for synchronism and dead line conditions will be carried out locally by the switchgear control scheme, by means of appropriate check synchronism and dead bus relays. Certain circuit breaker closing command schemes will incorporate synchronising relays. Three special control signals are associated with such breakers: ''circuit breaker sync select', ''circuit breaker sync close' and ''circuit breaker deadline close'. The ''circuit breaker sync select' command is latched within the switchgear control panel and connects the appropriate "running", "incoming" and "phase angle" voltages to bus wires. These voltages shall also be transmitted to the Master Station for display to the operator. Unlatching will be performed locally by the closing logic, or through the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command (common for the substation). Circuit breaker closure will be controlled as follows: (a) Where voltages are present on both sides of the 'circuit breaker, the ''circuit breaker sync close' command should be issued by the operator. This will initiate the synchronising action of the local synchronising relay, which will latch the command until one of the following occurs: the relay closes the 'circuit breaker, a watchdog timer expires, or the ''circuit breaker sync deselect' command is issued by the operator. (b) Where voltage exists on only one side of a 'circuit breaker, the ''circuit breaker deadline close' command should be issued by the operator. This command shall be interlocked in software to prevent its issue if voltages exist on both sides of the 'circuit breaker.
2.3.4.4.2
Tap Changers
Under normal operation, transformer tap changers will be controlled by automatic voltage regulating (AVR) relays, at the substation. Facilities shall be provided to allow the switching between automatic and manual control of the AVRs. When selected to manual control, it shall be possible for raise and lower commands to be issued to the tap changers from the master station. The raise and lower commands shall not require an execute action by the operator. Feedback of command execution will be by an associated change in the indicated tap position. 2.3.4.5 Sequence Control Facilities shall be provided for the creation and editing of predefined control sequences to facilitate complex switching operations such as feeder switching, busbar changing, line switching, etc. with a single control. These facilities shall include syntax and logical validity checks on the sequence. Associated with each sequence shall be a text description to allow the operator to identify what will be achieved by the sequence and a summary of the steps involved. All sequences shall consist of checks, automatic controls, manual controls and delays. Checks shall provide the facility within a sequence to verify that an item of plant is in a particular state or that an analogue value is within pre-defined limits. Any check must be successful before the system proceeds to the next step. A failed check shall cause the sequence to suspend operation and alert the operator that this has occurred. Automatic controls shall be issued by the control sequence function. The system shall handle a sequence generated control exactly as if it had been manually generated and shall provide all of the necessary time-outs and check of plant status. Circuit breakers and other remote controlled plant included in a control sequence selected for execution or being executed shall be identified on displays by a symbol. Manual controls included within a sequence shall be carried out under instruction from the operator. The operator shall be required to enter that the control instruction has been issued before the sequence will continue. It shall be possible to execute a sequence automatically or on a step by step basis. If a control sequence fails because of an unsuccessful check or control, then an appropriate operator alarm message shall be generated and the sequence shall enter a paused state. This shall require the operator to decide whether to continue by retrying the check or to cancel the sequence. The initiation and completion of a predefined control sequence shall be logged. 2.3.4.6 Set Point Control Means shall be provided to transmit set point values to Outstations for output as analogue or binary coded signals. It shall be possible to configure such set points independently for manual entry, via the GUI, or for automatic transmission (eg. from an EMS function). Such set points may be used for machine control or remote indication; the need for set point acknowledgement may vary, therefore, and this aspect shall be user configurable. Where set points are used for the transmission of MW and MVAr target indications to displays at power stations, the following principle of operation is expected to apply. Where the transmitted values have been manually set by an operator or the output of an EMS function has been manually endorsed by an operator receipt of new set point values at the remote station will produce an indication that they require acknowledgement by power station operators. Power station operators acknowledgements shall be transmitted to the master station via the respective Outstations. Once acknowledgement is received, the master station automatically resets the indication to show that acknowledgement is no longer required. If acknowledgement is not received after a preset time (user configurable) an alarm shall be generated and a message shall be displayed to the System Control Room operators. 2.3.4.7 Manual Dressing 2.3.4.7.1 Non-telemetered data
Network diagrams may contain variable elements, which are manually-dressed by the operators.
Operators may change the status of manually-dressed elements on receipt of verbal instructions from site stating the actual element position. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and logged as an event. 2.3.4.7.2 Telemetered Data
It shall be possible from the operator workstation to remove from scan any measurement, or indication that comes within the operators area of responsibility. This shall be suitably indicated on the display by a symbol or tag to indicate the removal from scan. It shall then be possible, from the workstation, to insert a new (manually-dressed) value for the element, with the manual-dressing also suitably indicated by a symbol or tag. The manually-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database and thus on all other displays on which that element occurs. On manual restoration of the elements back into service the readings shall again be recorded in the database, returned to their normal presentation and hence regularly updated on the displays. Manual-dressing operations, as described above, shall be logged as an event. The system must recognise an attempt by the operator to make an invalid manual-dressing operation and this should be blocked, with a suitable error message being displayed on the screen. 2.3.4.8 Trending The system shall be capable of displaying any measured value in graphical form to show the trend of the value over a selected time period. The trend display shall have adjustable x and y axis. It shall be possible to compare on the same display, up to sixteen trends of real-time data or historical data. 2.3.4.9 Diagram Tagging 2.3.4.9.1 General
The operator shall have the facility to tag network diagrams to indicate various conditions. The system shall support as a minimum 16 different tags. In particular, the following tags shall be provided, but the system shall also support user-definable tags: a) Permit-to-Work (PTW) b) c) d) e) f) g) Sanction for Test (SFT) Operational restriction Point of Isolation Earth point. Fault Information
It shall be possible to place a tag marker anywhere on a diagram, where it shall act as a selection point to tag data and corresponding notepad pages associated with each tag. The notepad pages shall enable supporting textual and graphical information to be held in the system. It shall be possible for the operator to link the tag to diagram elements, so that control actions (e.g. circuit breaker closure) associated with the element is disabled. Each tag placement, modification and removal shall be accompanied by an entry in the event list. It shall be possible to set a number of tags for the same object but only the tag with the highest priority (Operator definable/selectable) will be displayed. In such cases of multiple tags the tag shall be presented in such a way to show that other tags are present. These other tags shall be readily opened via the priority tag. It is essential that all tag lists and associated notepad pages are held on disc to ensure non-volatility of data in the event of a total Master Station shutdown.
2.3.4.9.2
Tag Lists
Each tag type shall have its associated listing, which shall record all tags placed on diagrams, with the following supplementary information: a) Unique tag number (automatically allocated by the system and corresponding to that displayed on the diagram) b) c) d) e) f) g) Date and time of placement or removal Location and circuit description of tagged item Operator's identity Description of tagging action - placement or removal The associated PTW/SFT numbers. Expiry time
Where a tag has reached its expiry time the Operator shall be alerted to this automatically. 2.3.4.9.3 Permits-to-Work and Sanction for Test Tags
It shall be possible for an operator to easily link points of isolation and earth point tags to PTW/SFT tags, such that: a) b) c) Quick access links shall be established between the associated notepad pages, list entries and diagrams An operator shall be able to initiate an automated search of the earth list for those entries linked to a particular PTW An attempt by an operator to remove a PTW tag shall cause the corresponding isolation/earth points to be identified. Where an isolation/earth point is associated to more than one PTW/SFT, this fact shall also be notified to the operator attempting to remove a PTW/SFT tag or the relevant isolation/earth tag Removal of a PTW/SFT tag shall cause associated operational restriction tags to be identified to the operator.
d)
An operator shall be able to display and/or print out the PTW or SFT list in both tag number and PTW/SFT number order. An operator shall be able to view and print out both current and expired PTW/SFT lists. Expired PTW entries shall be retained on the system until manually archived. The system shall issue an alarm when the PTW/SFT files are 90% full, advising that archiving is due to be carried out. 2.3.4.9.4 Earthing List
The earthing list shall hold a comprehensive record of all earths applied to the network. The list shall hold earth tag entries, telemetered earthing point status information and manual diagram dressing information. It shall be possible to link any such entries to a PTW/SFT, in the manner described for tag list entries. 2.3.4.9.5 Operators Notepad
The System shall provide a facility to allow operators to create notes or messages to other operators. It shall be possible to define notes which include displays or segments of displays. The notes shall be stored in the System and their existence shall be indicated on displays to catch the attention of operators. 2.3.4.10 2.3.4.10.1 Printing Printer Management Facilities
All printers supplied shall be under the control of printer management facilities which provide buffering such that print requests do not disable operator interaction at a workstation whilst printing is taking
place. Printer buffers shall also retain data waiting to be printed to cater for events such as printers being temporarily off-line for paper loading, etc. The printer management facility shall warn operators of pending print buffer overflow. It shall be possible to direct output to any appropriate printer type, in any location, at the time a print-out is ordered, whether for immediate, future, periodic or continuous printing. Printer selection should preferably be via a menu list although the system shall preset the selection to a user defined printer, at each request, to aid the operator. It shall be possible for the print manager to automatically, or manually upon operator request, redirect print output to an alternative printer to that originally selected to cater for situations where the originally selected printer is unavailable for printing. This facility shall be user configurable. 2.3.4.10.2 Screen Prints
An operator shall be able to initiate a screen print to a full graphic colour printer upon demand. This facility shall be additional to those for printing of lists, reports, diagrams, trend displays, etc that are specified elsewhere. 2.4 2.4.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM General Introduction
A comprehensive and integrated suite of power system computational assistance programs is required for the monitoring, control and management of the 220kV and 132kV transmission network. The suite of software shall comprise two principal sub-systems: (a) Network Analysis and Security Assessment (b) Forecasting, Production Scheduling and Despatch. The Employer uses the PSS-E application suite for operational and network planning. It is a requirement of the Contract that an interface be provided between the PSS-E applications and the SCADA/EMS system to enable interchange of data, results, topology, study cases etc. In the near future the Employer intends to implement a Transparent Despatch facility to enable the details of daily despatch to be made available on line to market participants. The EMS system shall be able to interface with such a facility. The Bidder shall describe the method and tools that are used in his standard system to achieve this. The functional and performance requirements of the EMS are described in the following Clauses. The set-up and execution initiation for each application shall generally be through an Execution Control Display which shall have a similar layout for each application or facility, as appropriate. Any decision relating to the selection of particular methods, in order to ensure that the specified requirements are met, such as the use of accelerating factors, optimisation algorithms, sparsity techniques or special file management and accessing techniques, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. In addition to the main offer, the Bidder is invited to propose applications/modules as options which, in his opinion, offer improvements or cost savings. Wherever possible, the Bidder shall offer standard EMS modules with proven software. The Bidder shall identify in Technical Schedules those EMS modules which will require modification to meet the specified requirements and shall provide an estimate of the extent of amendments necessary. The Bidder shall state the service experience of each module. Any EMS module requiring special development for this project shall be identified. The Bidder shall provide sufficient technical detail in the offer to enable a full assessment of the suitability and compliance of facilities, and any proposed alternatives, to be made. The estimated CPU loading factors and execution times for each major application program shall also be stated in the Technical Schedules. The Contractor shall demonstrate the accuracy of solutions and optimisation result for each application prior to operational acceptance of the system. 2.4.2 Transmission/Generation Network
The transmission network presently comprises 220kV and 132kV cables and overhead lines, which feed an extensive radially operated 33kV and 11kV networks. The application of 400kV is likely in the future.
The transmission network is an island network but may in the future be interconnected with the Transmission System in Southern India. There are a number of hydro and thermal generating stations within the Country. The EMS shall cater for both existing and future multiple voltage network configurations and for a comprehensive mix of generating plant. The scope of coverage of the EMS shall extend to the 33kV load points. However, embedded generation which may include small thermal, hydro or wind turbines exists in various parts of the network. The collective capacity of these sources of generation is significant and must be taken into account in the EMS modelling and optimisation. At times the generated output from these units exceeds the local load and provides an infeed to the transmission system. This is a significant issue and the system shall model this characteristic clearly. Each "load" above can comprise up to twenty individual 33kV feeders, each of which may be independently monitored for status and load (current). Bid drawings show the Employer system for 2012 and 2016. These give a guide to the size of network that the network analysis programs will need to handle at the time of commissioning. The EMS shall be capable of handling a 400% increase in network size, without the need for any hardware or software upgrade; it shall only be necessary to carry out database amendments to incorporate the increase in network size. The following Clauses describe some aspects of the functional and computational requirements of various key functional blocks in the EMS. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that these functional and performance requirements are met with practical and reliable software implementation.
2.4.3
EMS Database
The general requirements for databases, their creation, amendment and data entry, are defined in Clause 2.8 and specific data management facilities for the SCADA/EMS functions are defined in this Clause 2.4.3. The design of the database shall be such that any new application program can be integrated with minimum interruption to the normal operation of the EMS. The general functional requirements of the User Interface (e.g. construction of display pages, input/output pro-forma, diagram displays, trend plots, etc) are defined in the Graphic User Interface Clause 2.3.4. It is important that, for operator interaction with the EMS functions, the data entry task is minimised through the general use of default (or previous value) entries within screen pro-forma. Means of easily duplicating data entries (e.g. loading values in time-based schedules) shall be provided. 2.4.4 Real-Time Network Analysis
2.4.4.1 General Requirements The real-time network analysis software shall comprise a number of power system application programs. These programs shall execute in response to trigger events and/or cyclically, as appropriate, and upon operator demand, to monitor and assess the security of the transmission system. All support software for the real-time network analysis programs, as required, shall be standard modules within the EMS environment, so that no special purpose or customised support software or procedures shall be provided solely for the real-time network analysis functions. The real-time network analysis software shall comprise the following programs: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow. The programs shall be executed within a user-definable Network Analysis Sequence with a userdefinable periodicity, typically every fifteen (15) minutes for the complete sequence and at least every few minutes for state estimation, or upon operator demand, or as a result of the occurrence of a triggering event. Facilities shall be provided to allow the operator to specify that some of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence, such as the security assessment and loss penalty factor programs can be executed not in every cycle but for every pre-defined number of state estimation runs. The triggering events shall be user definable and shall include system load changes and circuit loading thresholds, as well as breaker status changes. When the triggering event is detected, the initialisation of
the real-time Network Analysis Sequence shall be delayed for a pre-defined time interval to allow the power system to attain a steady state condition. Only one real-time network analysis sequence will be executed at a time. When a new real-time network analysis sequence is initiated, due to the occurrence of a triggering event, or upon operator request, any previously scheduled real-time network analysis sequence shall be removed from the pending queue or, if currently in execution, terminated. For operator demanded and event triggered runs, all network analysis programs, irrespective of the execution frequency relationship defined above, shall be executed in the sequence. Any one of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence shall be executable independently, upon operator demand. Real-time Network Analysis Execution Control Displays shall be provided for the following functions: (a) Definition and display of the selection and sequence of programs to be executed in the Network Analysis Sequence (b) Definition and display of the cycle period for the automatic execution of the programs in the Network Analysis Sequence. The period shall range from one (1) minute to sixty (60) minutes in increments of one (1) minute (c) Definition and display of the cyclic execution ratio for any program in the Network Analysis Sequence relative to the State Estimation runs. For example, run the Security Assessment software for every two State Estimation solutions (d) Definition and display of the events that will trigger the real-time network analysis sequence, using power system nomenclature. It shall be possible to define triggering thresholds for total system load change and percentage of circuit loading, as well as to identify those breakers whose status change shall trigger the sequence (e) Definition and display of the contingency lists. It shall be possible to include both single and multiple outage contingencies in any one list. The default contingency list used by the real-time Security Assessment program shall be defined via the Execution Control Display. It shall also be possible to define the priority levels of the outages in the list (f) Definition and display of the threshold boundary mismatch between the internal and external networks. The mismatch threshold defines the trigger for execution of the External Equivalent Network Modelling program (g) Definition and display of occurrences of anomalous data, i.e. those that cause measurements to be declared as bad data and raise alarms/messages (h) Identification and display of the status of each program including whether it is running, stopped, blocked, convergence status, etc. In addition, Execution Control Displays shall show the time remaining until the next scheduled periodic execution of the sequence, or a message to indicate that the sequence is currently in execution, and shall include a cursor selection point that allows a manual request for execution of the real-time network analysis sequence or any one of the programs in the suite of real-time network analysis software. The convergence index for the last run of the State Estimator shall be displayed. All inputs required for the proper execution of the real-time network analysis sequence shall be entered via Execution Control Displays and/or screen masks. The system shall deal with the non-convergence of any program in a manner which requires the minimum amount of interaction with the operator but results in a sensible outcome, e.g. if necessary, the controlled termination of a program which will not converge. This is particularly important where the values generated by a program which does not converge would normally be used by a subsequent program in the EMS execution cycle, e.g. programs which cannot be sensibly run without data from the non-converging program, are removed automatically from the execution cycle. Execution displays should provide details of program status under these conditions. Overall the EMS facilities shall provide a coherent and integrated approach and produce and present information in a form that is readily assimilated by system operators. 2.4.4.2 Network Topology The Network Topology program is one of the basic functions of the real-time network analysis software. It establishes the single line node-branch model of the current power network using status values from the real-time database. The Network Topology program determines the connectivity of the network components. Manual input or override of measurement values and states of devices such as breakers, switches, capacitors, reactors, generators, power lines and cables, through the single line diagram of the internal as well as the external networks, shall be accepted by the program.
The Network Topology program shall perform switch status validation to determine a consistent set of switch states. It shall also perform digital smoothing to minimise data acquisition time skewing for measured values and shall generate a vector of digitally smoothed MW, MVAr and voltage magnitude, at all relevant line ends and buses for the state estimation and external network model calculation programs. The Network Topology program shall detect network islands and identify them to the operator. In addition, a list shall be provided to indicate the electrical island to which each device /substation/power station is connected. To assist with the presentation of network topology the program shall include a facility for tracing network connectivity and presenting this on network diagrams either by a change or colour or a change in line type. It shall be possible to invoke a trace from any point in the Transmission network for selected voltage levels. The program shall generate summaries of equipment and network status including de-energised equipment, open ended circuits, equipment with an abnormal status, etc. 2.4.4.3 State Estimation The State Estimation program is necessary in order to provide an accurate and reliable database for all subsequent energy management functions. The State Estimation program shall make use of all relevant measurements in the network and calculate the best estimated system steady state solution, including line power flows, line currents, bus voltages and phase angles for the observable portion of the transmission network. For the un-observable portions of the network, which may include the near external networks, far external networks, as well as parts of the internal network which become unobservable due to temporary loss of telemetered measurements, pseudo measurements shall be used, based on assumption and historical data. The state-estimator is required to maintain an accurate balance between the estimated flows on the boundaries between the external and internal networks. The calculated state values for both the internal and external networks shall be available for use by the other EMS application programs and for display on the single line diagram. The State Estimation program shall also perform plausibility checks. Measured values which do not pass the checks shall be flagged and listed. The state estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance should the network split in to two or more observable areas (islands). If an Outstation fails the State Estimator shall continue to function without degradation in performance for those areas of the power system for which it still has telemetered values. The state estimator shall have the following features: (a) Measurement Data Real-time measurements will be available, as stated below and indicated in the Bid Drawings and Schedules. (i) Busbar voltage magnitudes (ii) Line MW and MVAr flows (as shown on drawings) (iii) 220/132/33kV, 132/33kV and 132/11kV transformer MW, MVAr flows (iv) Transformer tap positions (v) Generator, MW, MVAr injections (vi) Reactor, MVAr injections The State Estimator shall make use of all measured values where available. For the unobservable portion of the network, pseudo-measurements shall be computed and made use of with appropriate weighting factors. (b) Bad Data and Measurement Bias As part of the state estimation function, grossly erroneous measured values shall be detected, identified and eliminated from the solution process. The state estimator shall re-determine the best estimation of the system state after all such anomalous data is eliminated. When a measurement is identified as bad data for a number of specified occurrences, alarms shall be issued and messages logged. The State Estimator shall be able to re-incorporate the measurements once they are checked as being nonanomalous. This checking process shall ensure that data points which have been identified as anomalous are not utilised by the state estimator until they are shown to be permanently recovered. The State Estimator shall also be able to detect and report measurement biases. Bad data and measurement bias information shall be summarised in suitable Tables for presentation to the operator. (c) Transformer Tap Position Estimation
The State Estimator shall be able to estimate both in-phase and phase-shifting transformer tap positions when requested by the operator. Significant deviation between the estimated values and the telemetered tap positions shall be reported. (d) Security Monitoring The solution of the State Estimator shall be checked against the operating limits of the transmission network components, including line/cable ratings, voltage limits, and generator power injection limits. For security monitoring purposes, the limits may not be the actual operating limits of the components of the network. Rather, the State Estimation program shall allow the operator to define an operating margin for each type of limit, via the execution control display. Violation of the redefined limits shall be listed, annunciated and displayed on the single line diagram. 2.4.4.4 External Network Modelling and State Calculation The network modelling program shall be able to accommodate external network models as may be required in the future. 2.4.4.5 Security Assessment The function of security assessment is to predict post-contingency security violations using the solutions of State Estimation and External Network State Estimation programs. Two modes of operation are required; real-time mode and predictive mode: (a) Real-time Security Assessment In this analysis, the results of the state estimation programs, for the current network condition, shall be used as the base case. (b) Predictive Security Assessment (Optional) In the predictive mode, the system condition for future time horizons of up to two hours ahead shall be treated as the basis of the assessment. It shall be possible to define time steps at which the predictive security assessment will be made within the overall time horizon. In this predictive mode, there will not be any real-time measurement values. Instead, the current system state, scheduled switching actions, historical data, forecast of bus load distribution and generation schedules, for both the internal and external networks, shall be utilised to establish the pseudo-measurements for the times of interest. State estimation programs shall then be executed to provide the base case system state. Automatic and periodic execution of either or both security assessment modes shall be accommodated in the real-time network analysis sequence. Constraint violations shall raise alarms in the alarm list. Each security assessment mode shall also be executable on demand or by user definable triggering events. The Bidder may offer other applications as options which would assist the operators assess security and network stability in a predictive manner. At this point in the development of the transmission system the operators experience difficulties with voltage stability and load despatch which is often security constrained. Security assessment divides into two solution processes; Contingency Selection and Contingency Analysis. (a) Contingency Selection The Contingency Selection program is the first stage of security assessment. It selects the contingencies from the contingency list according to priority, as defined via a realtime Execution Control Display. Power circuits that are loaded to their security limits in the base case shall be selected automatically for screening, irrespective of whether they are in the contingency list or their priority in the list. The program shall determine, using power flow techniques with adequate accuracy, the post-contingency branch flow and nodal voltages. Circuit ratings and voltage limits shall be checked and the severity of security violations of the contingencies shall be ranked in order of their relative seriousness. The program shall take due account of any automatic switching regimes (e.g. loss of a transformer infeed at a substation results in restoration of supplies by automatic switching) and their impact on the security of the system. There shall be user friendly facilities for defining, validating and ranking contingencies for addition to the contingency list. (d) Contingency Analysis The second stage of security assessment is Contingency Analysis, which shall evaluate in detail post-contingency branch flows and bus voltages of the contingencies in the
ranked contingency list produced by the Contingency Selection stage. It shall be possible to limit the number of contingencies that will be analysed to a user defined maximum (typically 50, although this should not be the ultimate limit) or to define that analysis will cease after N successive contingency evaluations have resulted in no limit violation, where N is user definable via the real-time execution control display. The security assessment programs shall have the capability to handle single and multiple outage contingencies, including any combination of: (i) Generators/Loads (ii) Transmission lines/cables (iii) Shunt capacitors/reactors (iv) Series capacitors/reactors (v) Transformers/Synchronous condensers (vi) Bus Couplers (vii) Outages causing islanding For generator and load outages, and any other outages which cause loss of generation or load, the re-distribution of power injections shall be according to participation factors which are pre-defined by the user. Results of security assessment programs shall be available for viewing. Output from the Contingency Selection program shall include a ranked contingency list. The Contingency Analysis program shall provide outputs including: lists of contingencies, ranked in severity order, that result in branch flow and voltage limit violations; a list of violations for each contingency analysed; a list of equipment subject to violations for each contingency. The analysis shall incorporate any subsequent and multiple tripping arising from violations caused by the first contingency. The results of each contingency analysed shall also be available for displaying with information (e.g. location and type of violations) presented in a format approved by the Employer. 2.4.4.6 Bus Load Forecast A Bus Load Forecast program shall be provided to forecast the loads at all the internal and external buses. The results of the Bus Load Forecast are particularly useful to provide a source of information for pseudo-measurement values for those non-observable parts of the internal and external networks. The bus load forecasting program shall analyse the results from the state estimation programs and update the stored distribution factors and load patterns with regard to both active and reactive power injections for different times (48 half hourly values) and day types covering the complete yearly cycle of climatic conditions. These factors and patterns shall be modified by applying smoothing techniques. Based on these distribution factors and patterns, the active and reactive loads and generation injections and voltage magnitudes at different buses of the system, for different times of the day, shall be forecast. Load characteristics and time switched loads shall be taken into account by the forecasting process. The Bus Load Forecast program shall be executed after each state estimation calculation, as configured by the operator via the Execution Control Display. The output of the Bus Load Forecast program shall be available for viewing by the operator in the form of tables and on network diagrams. Displays shall also allow estimated and forecast values for individual loads to be compared. The values for the factors used in producing the forecast shall also be available. The Bus Load Forecast shall provide modelling of embedded generation sources in order to effectively represent the effect on bus loads when in operation. 2.4.4.7 Loss Penalty Factors The network Loss Penalty Factors program shall calculate the marginal losses with respect to active and reactive power injections at the Employer generator buses. The program will generally be activated following a user definable number of state estimation runs, immediately prior to generator plant scheduling calculations and periodically in support of load dispatching calculations. Full AC network model equations, based on current network configuration and State Estimator results, shall be used to derive these penalty factors. A penalty factor matrix for typical system loading shall be stored and updated. The matrix is required to support operational planning studies. 2.4.4.8 Optimal Power Flow This facility shall enable an operator to optimise a target functions such as minimisation of losses, minimise generation cost via manipulation of the physically controllable devices or quantities on the system subject to a set of constraints. It shall be possible to configure the OPF facility for a wide variety of optimising tasks via a user friendly interface which can be configured to speed up the execution of
repetitive tasks. It shall be possible to use the OPF in the real time and study mode environments. It shall be possible to set up scenarios for analysis from save cases and historical data. It shall also be possible to display the results of the analysis on one line diagrams and in graphical format as well as in tables. The OPF facility shall produce solutions quickly and shall be able to deal with situations where an optimal solution does not exist without frequent interaction with the operator. The operator interface to the OPF facility shall facilitate the selection of target functions, selecting appropriate control variables, selecting appropriate constraint limits, monitoring the optimisation analysis, reviewing the active constraints and causes of infeasibility, modifying variable limits, observing the effects of constraints and control actions on the target function, and reviewing the performance and nature of the results of the OPF analysis. 2.4.4.9 Save cases Facilities shall be provided for generating save cases from study or real time databases. It shall be possible to maintain at least ten save cases of each type on disk and archive save cases to a readily retrievable medium. There shall be facilities for identifying save cases and maintaining a record of those which have been stored on disk or archived. Restoration of save cases, from disk or archive, shall be possible even though the current database configuration (study mode or training simulator environment) is different from the one which was current when a particular save case was generated. If the system cannot restore a save case reports shall be produced advising on the probable cause and shall include details of all inconsistencies which it cannot resolve. It shall not be possible to recover a save case into the real time environment. 2.4.5 Real-Time Short Circuit Calculation
The Real-time Short Circuit Calculation program determines the possible over duty of circuit breakers. The program shall be executed upon operator demand. The following types of fault evaluation shall be provided: (a) Three-phase and Phase-to-Phase Short Circuit Faults The system states as determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. The operator may choose to calculate the fault level at all buses or at selected buses. Output of the program shall include lists of fault currents/powers and faults causing over duty of circuit breakers. Detection of any fault which would overstress any circuit breaker shall be annunciated (b) Phase-to-ground Faults Similarly to the three-phase fault calculations, the system states determined by the State Estimator shall be used as the pre-fault system condition. The operator shall be able to specify the faulted phase(s) (single, double or all three), any external fault impedance and the bus fault location, interactively, through the graphical interface, pointing device and keyboard. Output of the program shall include lists of post-fault branch currents/powers, ground fault current/power and bus voltages. 2.4.6 Study Mode Network Analysis
Study mode network analysis provides facilities to allow operators to carry out short term or operational planning studies. Data for the study mode is based on saved copies (snapshots) of the relevant section of the real-time database. An operator shall be able to retrieve saved case databases and then modify them via single-line diagrams (using the pointing device and keyboard) and the study mode Execution Control Display. All real-time network analysis programs shall be available in study mode for operators to select for execution, including: (a) Network topology (b) State Estimation (c) Security Assessment (d) Bus Load Forecast (e) Loss Penalty Factors (f) Optimal Power Flow.
The HMI for the application programs in study mode, including the study mode Execution Control Display, shall be, as far as possible, similar to that for the real-time network analysis facilities. The input/output data for the above programs shall be relevant to study mode analyses. In study mode it shall also be possible to use the output of the power flow and bus load forecast programs to generate base cases for the security assessment and other programs. By using interactive network editing capabilities, together with the study mode application programs, it shall be possible for an operator to carry out security checking prior to any switching operation. The study mode Execution Control Display shall provide facilities to allow operators to select some or all the study-mode application programs to be executed sequentially and automatically. It shall be possible for operators to define and save a number of such study-mode Network Analysis Sequences for subsequent selection and execution, upon demand. It shall be possible to apply the network analysis programs to save cases originating from the real time and study mode databases. There shall be facilities which allow an operator to modify a save case after it has been recovered. It shall be possible with the right access privileges, to access the study mode environment from any workstation. It shall also be possible to return quickly to the real time environment and without terminating the study session. There shall be simple procedures for quickly utilising a study session based on the current real time situation regardless of the previous state of the study mode environment. A workstation shall indicate clearly whether it is in the real time or study mode environment. The system shall be capable of supporting the simultaneous execution of three different studies on three different workstations concurrently with the Real Time Sequence. Under these conditions the associated studies shall not interact at any level including event and alarm processing. It shall, however, only be possible to initiate one study at a time from an individual workstation. 2.4.7 Generating Plant Scheduling
2.4.7.1 Introduction The system generation includes hydroelectric units and thermal units, some of which are based on IPP agreements and a number of mini hydro and wind turbine stations. During the lifetime of the SCADA/EMS system, the Employer proposes to install additional thermal and hydro generating capacity and there is expected to additional mini hydro and wind generators. The EMS functions shall be capable of incorporating these additional units as they are introduced onto the network. The EMS facilities shall include a plant scheduling calculation for optimising the start-up and shut-down times of all generators, in order to minimise expected operating costs, consistent with all system operating and security constraints. The facility shall run in both on-line mode, using estimated demand data from the demand prediction facility, and in study mode, for longer term costing evaluations with manually prepared data. In the on-line mode, the facility shall permit the calculation of unit commitment schedules and expected generation power outputs at user defined intervals from 15 minutes to 1 hour, up to several days ahead of the event. Typically, the facility will be used to derive daily commitments, with the ability to calculate short-term revisions of these schedules, following changes in plant availabilities or demand expectations. These revisions may also be used to refine the scheduling of plant up to several hours ahead of the event. The plant scheduling facility shall be fully integrated with the other EMS facilities to ensure commitment schedules do not, for example, result in any constraint violations. The scheduling facility shall be able to accommodate the following types of generation and produce optimal hydro thermal coordinated schedules taking into account network constraints: - Hydro Run of River - Hydro Chain/Complex - Hydro Storage - Coal fired steam turbine - Single and dual fuel fired Gas Turbines (Open and Combined Cycle) - Diesel - Embedded generation - HVDC Interchange
Further information on the generating plant, hydro systems and current operational practice are given in Volume 7 Part D. The applications offered shall satisfy the current operational practice in addition to the requirements specified in the section. The present mini hydro and wind generation stations are not subject to scheduling and despatch as their production is dependent on weather conditions and is usually automatically activated. However, their contribution shall be taken into account in the scheduling and despatch models. The hydro schemes also provide water for irrigation and domestic potable use. This imposes constraints on the use of water for generation. The scheduling application shall take into account any constraints arising from the water flow management restrictions. The scheduling application shall incorporate detailed hydro topology models of each of the hydro complexes that represent the reservoirs and plant characteristics. The Employer has database of historic data associated with the quantity of water that was available in a given year on a monthly basis since 1950. This historic data will be made available to the Contractor for use in the water forecasting models of the scheduling applications. In study mode, the scheduling facility will be used to evaluate hypothetical future situations, to prepare preliminary schedules and to assist in operational planning and maintenance programming. It shall also be possible to use the output of the generation scheduling facility as an input to other network analysis programs such as the security assessment program. Facilities shall be provided for establishing a library of commitment schedules. After sufficiently studying the Sri Lankan hydro system detailed in volume 7, the bidder shall present in his bid the hydro optimization algorithm that he proposes to use, with sufficient detail to demonstrate its efficacy for the Sri Lankan hydro system.
2.4.7.2 Plant Scheduling Input Data In the on-line mode of operation, the scheduling input data comprises four principal data sets. These are 'Fixed' Data, Variable Data, predicted system demands and system operational constraints. (a) 'Fixed' Data (i) Minimum stable output for each generating unit (ii) (iii) (iv) Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings for each generating unit Maximum and Economic Continuous ratings of combined cycle units Maximum generation for each turbine (taking into account the MW/MVAr operating limits) (v) Boiler and turbine start-up delays as functions of down times (vi) Maximum sustained turbine output ramping rates (vii) Maximum sustainable step output changes (viii) Minimum turbine run periods (ix) Minimum turbine down periods (x) Overall generating unit heat-rate curves (xi) Efficiency curves for hydro units (xii) On combined cycle stations, functions describing turbine heat rate and boiler efficiencies (xiii) Regulating Reserve functions and parameters (xiv) Emergency Reserve parameters (xv) Start-up heat as function of boiler and turbine down times (xvi) Governor regulating gains (xvii) Output dependent operational and maintenance costs. Variable Data These data are held in a variable generation data file that is updated systematically and regularly by the on-line data system and by manual input of information. The data include: (i) Boiler and Turbine Plant Availabilities for all periods of the scheduling timehorizon (ii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iii) Temporary modifications to plant capabilities, e.g. Restricted outputs, run-up rates, start-up delays, minimum run periods, water flow or fuel restrictions, etc.
(b)
(iv)
(c)
(d)
Variations from normal heat rates and efficiencies, e.g. due to cooling water temperatures, ambient temperature and other restrictions (v) Time elapsed since last start-up, derived from on-line data (vi) Time elapsed since last shut-down, derived from on-line data. (vii) Water availability for hydro units taking into account irrigation and domestic requirements/limitations (viii) Value of water (to be calculated by this application) and marginal rate curves (ix) IPP agreement values and conditions Predicted Demand and System Data At each initiation of an on-line scheduling calculation, the short-term demand prediction facility shall be invoked to derive predicted demands over the time horizon of the scheduling period. The predicted quantities shall include the total system demand at quarter-hourly intervals, over the relevant time span, together with any bulk supply point loads that are within network zones whose exports or imports are limited by transmission security considerations [see item (d) below]. It shall be possible to automatically adjust the demand data for present and scheduled load management using data from load management programs. Penalty factors, or other transmission loss coefficients, as derived from network load flow calculations, shall be included as input data. System Operational Constraints The calculated generation schedule is required to satisfy the relevant system operating constraints. These shall include: (i) Minimum system spinning reserve (ii) Minimum system emergency or immediate reserve (iii) Generating Plant must-run constraints (iv) Simplified transmission security constraints in the form of modified generator or station output constraints and maximum zonal or group export and import limits (v) Minimum system frequency regulating gain These constraints should be defined for each quarter-hour period of the scheduling time-span.
2.4.7.3 Plant Scheduling Outputs The plant scheduling facility shall derive the optimal unit commitment schedule taking due account of all plant operating costs and constraints, together with system operational requirements and security constraints. Outputs from the plant scheduler shall include: (a) Synchronising times and shut-down times for all generating plant over the scheduling time span (b) Run-up and loading profiles for all synchronised generators for each scheduling interval of the scheduling time-span (c) Expected emergency and spinning reserve generation for each scheduling interval (d) Expected active transmission security constraints for each period (e) Start-up costs of each plant item and system totals (f) Variable system generating costs by period (g) Total and marginal system generation costs (h) Hourly and daily summaries of the anticipated maximum and minimum load, energy generated (MWh), and production costs. 2.4.7.4 Generation Scheduling Operating Modes In on-line mode, the scheduling calculation shall have the capacity to derive weekly or daily unit commitment schedules together with short-term revisions following system changes or unexpected demand levels. It shall be possible to run the scheduler on demand without degrading the performance of the SCADA/EMS System. In study mode, the scheduling function shall enable the operator to initiate long-term studies, using manually derived generation, demand and system data. The operator shall be able to use stored data files for this purpose. 2.4.7.5 Reserve and Plant Monitoring The power system requires comprehensive reserve and plant monitoring facilities. These will promote the improved management of system security and economy of operation. On-line monitoring facilities are required for four principal categories of power reserve:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Emergency Reserve - this reserve is the active power that is available within a few seconds of an incident, to cater for occurrences such as circuit breaker trips resulting in infeed losses (e.g. generator trips). The EMS facility is required to model individual generating units in sufficient detail to permit the accurate estimation of emergency reserves available in response to credible system incidents. Modelling of turbine response capabilities, together with governor gains and response rates, is required for this purpose. Also to be included in this calculation is the expected load shedding via underfrequency relays over this timescale. This calculation shall be based upon bus demand data and under-frequency settings. Spinning Reserve - this component is the reserve generation provided by the unloaded capacity of the synchronised generation, available to respond within a defined (user-configurable) time of a few minutes. The calculation of this reserve, a consequence of plant scheduling and load dispatching, requires the aggregation of the expected responses of individual generators. Standby Reserve - this reserve will include that available from fast starting gasturbine or hydro generation, as well as unsynchronised but ready to generate steam driven plant. This component may be subdivided into auto-standby and manual standby. Reactive Reserve Generation - this capacity will be evaluated as the sum of the unloaded reactive generation that can be made available by increasing the excitation of synchronised generators, together with the reactive capacities of all unused static reactors that can be made available by switching. The reactive reserve in userspecified network zones shall also be derived.
The display of spinning, standby and zonal reactive reserves shall include the values of the prevailing user-specified targets for these quantities. Plant monitoring facilities shall include the collation of data required to evaluate plant response models in relation to both steady-state and emergency operation. The facility shall also provide statistical measures of the accuracy of compliance of generating units with scheduling and dispatching instructions, both for manually operated units and those under automatic generation control. 2.4.8 Demand Forecasting
2.4.8.1 Introduction The requirements for computer aided demand forecasts divide into two categories: long-term predictions for production and operational planning and short-term forecasts for scheduling and load dispatching. These requirements are summarised below. 2.4.8.2 Long-Term Demand Forecasts Long-term demand forecasts are required for the purposes of operational planning, including production planning and plant maintenance scheduling. Forecasts up to a year or more ahead of the event are required. The long-term facility shall run in study mode, on request, using historical demand data from previous months and years, but it shall not require immediate access to on-line demand data. Predicted information requirements include the following items: (a) Predicted system peak monthly demands under average weather conditions, including impending monthly peak demands and expected times of occurrence (b) Estimated monthly integrated energy demands under normal weather conditions (c) Estimated monthly and annual load duration functions for production planning and costing purposes. Input data will include historical demands over previous months and years, adjusted to standard weather conditions and corrected for deviations from nominal frequency and supply voltage. It shall be possible to generate save cases for load forecasts produced in the study mode and to generate a number of forecasts for the same period but using different assumption for each forecast. 2.4.8.3 Short-Term Demand Prediction Facility Short-term demand predictions are required for plant scheduling, for load dispatching, for predictive security assessments and for operational planning purposes. The facility is required to run both automatically with on-line data and in study mode for longer-term network and economic calculations:
(a)
On-Line Short-Term Forecasts On-line forecasts are required up to one day ahead of the event for scheduling plant and for loading of plant. Input data for the on-line facility will include the following items: (i) Recent on-line demand data obtained from the state-estimation facility (ii) Demand corrections arising from; load management and load shedding, together with adjustments for voltage and system frequency deviations; embedded generation. (iii) Meteorological data relating principally to weighted ambient temperature (for humidity), illumination index, wind speeds and precipitation. It shall be possible to enter weather data manually and to acquire it automatically via Outstations which interface with appropriate sensing/measuring equipment. (iv) Bulk supply point demand ratios, by time of day and season, relating principal substation demands to total system demand (v) Historical load data relating to typical standard daily load curves, including weekdays, weekend days, holidays and other special days (vi) System power factor at principal demand points, by time-of-day and season, obtained by averaging historical active and reactive recorded demands. The function of the on-line demand prediction facility shall be to forecast total system demand, and its distribution, taking due account of historical and on-line demand data, the type of day, time of day and year, and prevailing or expected meteorological parameters. The forecast interval shall be user configurable with a minimum interval of not more than 15 minutes. Data outputs shall include: (vii) Predicted total system demand for each forecast interval for up to one day ahead (viii) By application of load ratios, approximate bulk supply point demands for security assessment and network studies (ix) Predicted total reactive demand, and its distribution, derived from the power factor data in (vi) above (x) Statistical information relating to previous prediction accuracy (xi) Validated, corrected and adjusted demand data for updating the historical demand database. Study Mode Short-Term Forecasts Study mode short-term forecasts are required for system security and plant scheduling studies.
(b)
These studies require the same input data as the on-line load forecasts, but the input data will be manually alterable off-line by the user. 2.4.9 Economic Load Dispatching
2.4.9.1 Introduction The functional requirements for load dispatching include the economic allocation of loads to committed generating plant, in order to minimise the minute-to-minute operating costs, taking due account of all operational requirements and system security constraints. Due account shall be taken of the current fuel or water utilisation of the generating plant, the economic allocation of load, interchange schedules and IPP schedules. The load dispatching facility is required to operate in two main modes: Computer-Aided On-Line Dispatching Mode and Study Dispatch mode. These are detailed in the following Clauses. 2.4.9.2 Computer Aided On-Line Load Dispatching The computer aided on-line load dispatching facility is required to run automatically and cyclically, with a user definable periodicity of 3-30 minutes, or upon operator demand. It shall be possible to enable, disable and set the execution periodicity for this facility through an Execution Control Display. In this mode, the dispatch facility shall utilise both on-line data and database resident plant parameters to calculate the optimal trajectories of the outputs of all synchronised generating units. The calculated generator loadings shall take due account of all relevant input data as follows:
(a)
(b)
Dispatch System Input Data (i) For all committed and scheduled units and interchanges over the period: generator operating limits, maximum capability, economic continuous rating, minimum stable generation, plant ramp rates and reserve functions (ii) For unit generators, overall heat rates as functions of sent out (SO) active powers (i.e. MW net of unit and static station MW requirements) (iii) Fuel costs and calorific values (iv) Water values and marginal rate curves (v) Interchange transaction costs (vi) Energy dependent costs of operation and maintenance (vii) Emergency reserve availabilities, capacities, start-up delays, loading rates and operating costs (viii) Prevailing load shedding profiles (ix) Reserve generating capacity requirement (x) Transmission loss penalty factors obtained from load flow studies (xi) Scheduled start-up and shut-down times of all generating plant, together with defined run-up loading schedules (xii) Transmission circuit and zonal security constraints that may require out-ofmerit operation; these constraints will be defined by the user typically as a result of off-line studies (e.g. load flow relating to security contingency analysis, short circuit levels, stability and reactive power considerations). They will take the form of additional limits on the power outputs of individual power stations or generating groups. Dispatch System Outputs (i) Target outputs of all synchronised generating plant. (ii) Identification of target outputs which have varied by more than a userdefinable threshold since the previous load dispatch calculation (iii) Active power reserve generation, prevailing and dispatched (iv) Active transmission security constraints (v) Average and marginal generation costs (vi) Transmission constraints MW.
2.4.9.3 Study Mode Load Dispatching In this mode, the dispatch facility shall enable the operator to evaluate the dispatch problem associated with any feasible set of committed generating plant and demand data. The facility shall enable the operator to evaluate load dispatching under hypothetical plant and demand conditions. In particular, the facility shall run on request, with manually entered generator commitment schedules and predicted future demand profiles. Plant commitment schedules and demand profiles shall be prepared by the operator, by means of manual modification of selected previous output data. By relaxing on-line plant or system security constraints, within a study mode dispatch, an operator shall be able to evaluate the out-of-merit operational costs due to those constraints. 2.4.10 Reactive Power Scheduling 2.4.10.1 Introduction
A requirement of the EMS facility is the inclusion of a reactive power scheduling function for maintaining an acceptable power network voltage profile, whilst minimising losses, or achieving an alternative objective function. The reactive power scheduler shall utilise an optimal power flow calculation for optimising reactive power controls, whilst satisfying all system operating constraints. The on-line reactive scheduling calculation shall be initiated automatically following execution of the on-line generation plant scheduling program or significant network topology changes, or upon operator demand. It shall be possible to run the program in study mode using saved case and manually entered data. 2.4.10.2 Reactive Scheduler Input Data
In on-line mode, the reactive power scheduler shall utilise the following input data: (a) Predicted quarter-hourly bulk supply point active and reactive demands (b) Network configuration and parameters (c) Generating plant schedule and expected loads over the period of interest (d) Permitted generator operating regions in active/reactive power output planes (e) Availability of reactive compensating devices (e.g. reactors) (f) Transformer tap options
(g) (h) 2.4.10.3
System voltage limits Other security and operational limits. Reactive Power Calculation
The optimising calculation shall permit a choice of objective function, including the minimisation of generation cost, the minimisation of active power losses and the minimisation of a measure of the deviation of the voltage profile from a desired user-specified profile. Subject to user-specified operational constraints, the algorithm shall determine the values of the reactive control variables that minimise the objective function. The reactive schedule shall satisfy the following operational constraints: (a) User specified voltage limits and stability margins (b) Generator MVAr output limits (c) Circuit capacity and other security limits (d) Generator MW output limits. Normally, in the on-line mode, the generator active output limits will be constrained to those determined by the plant scheduling calculation, which will result in the determination of the optimal reactive control settings associated with the projected plant schedule and loading profile. However, in study mode the operator shall be able to run the optimal power flow program without the constraints of the plant schedule (active power schedule), thus allowing any sub-optimality resulting from the plant scheduling function to be discerned. Study mode operation will aid the operator in evaluating the effect of different operating regimes, so that, for example, means of enhancing the network voltage profile can be investigated. 2.4.10.4 Reactive Scheduler Outputs
The reactive power scheduler shall derive a schedule for reactive control variables over the daily load cycle and shall allow revisions of the schedule following significant changes in power plant availabilities, network configuration and system demand expectations. The control variable schedule shall include the following: (a) Generator MVAr set-points (b) Multi-step reactive compensator switch positions and settings (c) Transformer tap positions (d) Switching of bulk reactive compensation. The output of the Reactive Power Scheduler shall be in the form of detailed schedules of settings for the above devices. It shall be possible both manually to modify and to store the schedules and to use them to provide the data source for setting the foregoing power network devices. It shall be possible for an operator to enable the function to automatically issue controls to the devices (or values to set point displays), via the SCADA interfaces, in accordance with the schedules. 2.4.11 Automatic Control of Generating Plant 2.4.11.1 General Requirements
A means shall be provided for directly controlling the output of those generating units with interfaces for supervisory control by the SCADA/EMS System. Control of both active and reactive outputs of generators, in response to the output of EMS scheduling and dispatching functions, shall be catered for. Control of active power shall be handled by the AGC function described below. Reactive control of generating plant is required to follow the output of the reactive power scheduling function. Scheduled MVAr set points, for each generating set available for automatic control, shall be converted to the corresponding generator AVR and generator transformer tap positions and the control actions shall be executed by issuing the necessary raise and lower output pulses to the devices concerned. 2.4.11.2 Automatic Generation Control
An Automatic Generation Control (AGC) facility shall provide the interface between the active power scheduling and load dispatching functions of the EMS and the generating plant. It shall also provide means for automatically regulating power system frequency, system time deviation and, if required, area interchange. The function shall provide power loading base points for all generators, including those not under AGC operation.
The power loading base points shall take account of the operating limits and dynamical rate constraints of the individual generating units to ensure that the base point load is within the plant's feasible operating region. In particular, the AGC function shall operate in both emergency and normal modes and it shall be possible to independently set operating limits and control parameters for each mode. The normal mode rate limit shall refer to sustained response whereas the emergency rate will be higher. The AGC function shall provide outputs for plant loadings in two alternative forms. The first form shall comprise raise and lower pulses for governor speeder-motor action and the second form shall comprise set-point values for display and manual implementation. The AGC operation shall initiate a change in unit power output by means of proportional and integral control action in terms of the plant control error (PCE). The PCE will include terms dependent upon the difference between required and actual plant output, together with terms dependent on system frequency error and system time error. Facilities for avoiding excessive governor set-point control action shall be provided by the use of filtering, control deadbands and predictive loading signals. By means of user specified deadbands and filtering of the plant control error, excessive control action will be avoided and the plant loading instructions follow a smooth trajectory. The AGC facility shall include the facility for operating under Interchange and Area Control Error (ACE) modes. The AGC system shall include facilities for adjusting independently all control system parameters and plant static and rate limits, both for normal and emergency modes of operation. The AGC system shall include comprehensive monitoring facilities to enable the operator to analyse control system performance and to promote the tuning of control system parameters. Parameter tuning and control system testing shall require the temporary disabling of the control outputs to the plant controllers. The Contract shall include the supply, installation and commissioning of frequency measurements derived from selected station busbars. These will provide the reference frequency measurements for the AGC function and will assist operators managing islanded sections of network. 2.4.12 SCADA/EMS System Interfaces with Power Stations 2.4.12.1 Introduction
The interfacing to the SCADA/EMS System with each of the transmission and generating stations for the transfer of operational information may take various forms, depending on the facilities provided at each location, and may include the following: (a) Telephony communication between the NSCC and station control rooms (b) SCADA Outstations at the stations for: Data acquisition Output to set-point displays Output of controls to plant (c) Facsimile communication between the NSCC and IPP stations control rooms (d) Via e-mail or CEB internal messaging facilities. (e) Data via GSM channels from certain plant (e.g. embedded generation) The general requirements for the above types of facilities are covered elsewhere in this Specification. Specific functions utilising the above interfaces are specified in the following Clauses. 2.4.12.2 Active and Reactive Power Dispatch Schedules
Each active power target output data, as calculated in the On-line Load Dispatcher [Clause 2.4.9], and reactive power schedule data, as derived by the On-line Reactive Power Scheduler [Clause 2.4.10] shall be arranged into schedules for issue to the power stations via the Data Exchange Facilities [Clause 2.9]. It shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to manually amend the schedules prior to their issue to the power stations. 2.4.12.3 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Displays
For generating sets with set-point displays driven from the power station SCADA Outstation, the load dispatch operator at the NSCC shall be able to either manually dispatch target active and reactive power output values to the set point displays of each generating set. It shall also be possible to do this using
the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role, or to enable those EMS functions to directly output the target values to the displays automatically. The scope of work shall include provision and implementation of set point displays for each unit defined in the signal lists as having set point outputs. 2.4.12.4 Active and Reactive Power Set-Point Control
For generating sets with plant controllers able to be remotely controlled via the power station SCADA Outstation, it shall be possible for the load dispatch operator at the NSCC to either manually dispatch active and reactive power output set points to each generating set, using the output of the AGC and Reactive Power Scheduler EMS functions in an advisory role, or to enable those EMS functions to output the controls directly to the plant. The stations that are initially assigned for load frequency control are: Kotmale PS 3 units New Laxapana PS 2 units Samanalawewa PS 2 units Victoria PS 3 units The scope of work shall include the adaptation works to connect the set point at each generator unit and to set to work the AGC function with these generator units. 2.4.12.5 Embedded Generation Data
Production data for embedded generators may be available from the respective locations via GSM channels or Operator entered values. The data will include whether a machine is running and the MWh production value for predefined and operator adjustable periods (typically 15 & 30 minutes). The data shall be used to provide approximate MW values for the preceding period. 2.5 OTHER APPLICATIONS
The applications described in the following Clauses shall be provided at the NSCC. 2.5.1 Switching Schedules
There shall be facilities for assisting the operator to compile, test, save, review and authorise switching schedules. Once compiled and tested, it shall be possible to copy a switching schedule to other functions such as the Job Management and Load Shedding facilities. 2.5.2 Job Management
There shall be an integrated facility for controlling scheduled and unscheduled work on the transmission network, i.e. 'jobs' or outages. This shall include pro forma facilities for: a) Identifying a job b) Noting the reason for the job c) Identifying the work to be carried out d) Identifying the time, sequence, and execution (local or supervisory) of the associated switching e) Managing the authorisation, issue and cancelling of the associated Permit to Work (PTW) f) Monitoring the progress of the job
g) Managing the authorisation, issue and cancelling of any associated Sanction to Test (STT) h) Noting comments during and on completion of the job i) Identifying the relevant portion of the network diagram. The outage management facility shall receive inputs or requests for jobs/outages from the Employers maintenance department via remote workstation(s) located in that department or from an NSCC operator, e.g. for outages resulting from faults. The job management facility shall generate all necessary supporting documentation necessary for the execution of each job. This includes documents for use in the field, e.g. switching schedules, permits to
work, sanctions to test. It also includes any documentation to be kept as a hardcopy record of the work, e.g. identifying those who planned, authorised, performed and approved the work. It shall be possible to extract statistical information from these job records. It shall also be possible to archive job records. 2.5.3 Fault Detection, Location and Load Restoration (Option)
Bidders shall include in their offer as an option facilities to assist the operator with fault detection, location and restoration. Switch status indications, alarms, network connectivity information and other relevant data shall be utilised by a fault identification and location facility to assist the operator to identify faults, their location and effect on the network. The facility should also assist the operator, if required and appropriate, to utilise the switching schedule facility to compile a schedule for isolating the fault and recovering any load that has been lost and, later, for restoring the system to its normal configuration. 2.5.4 Expert System Assistance (Option)
Bidders shall include in their offer as an option any 'expert system' based facilities they could provide that would be appropriate and effective in the context of the Employers transmission system. Such facilities should provide the operator with assistance in analysing alarms and events, identifying faults, and provide advice on appropriate remedial action including recovery of unserved load, fault isolation, and subsequent system reconfiguration. 2.5.5 Under Frequency Load Shedding
An under frequency load shedding scheme is implemented at a number of substations. The scheme is designed primarily to protect the power network in the event of a loss of infeed (e.g. generator trip). The under frequency scheme is currently arranged in a number of stages, each stage resulting in tripping of the connected feeder circuits at the frequencies set. As each stage of tripping is reached signals are sent to the local Outstation. The facility shall provide assistance to the operator to restore load following an under frequency event, by compiling a list of those feeders shed through under frequency action. The list shall indicate the last recorded load of each feeder. Although the load restoration is to be under operator control, the System shall simplify the task by means of cross-linking the lists to diagrams and/or permitting initiation of control actions from the lists. Where shed load has not been reconnected after an Operator definable period following its interruption, the situation shall be brought to the Operators attention by periodically annunciated alarms or by other suitable visually effective means. This shall be one alarm or alert associated with the load shed list so that one annunciation for any number of cases is required and where the list shows the remaining disconnected loads. 2.5.6 Load Shedding Schedules
A function shall be provided that facilitates setting up of Load Shedding Schedules. Such schedules would be used in times of shortage of generation or limitation of circuit loadings in order to curtail demand and protect the system or circuits. The facility shall enable selection of loads and/or MW to be shed, the duration expected and to provide for a rotor system whereby the curtailment is shared by all but consumers with essential supplies (e.g. hospitals). The facility shall be linked to the Switching Sequence facility so that shedding can be instructed using simple instructions from the UI which will result in the required sequence to effect shedding to be initiated. 2.6 HISTORICAL DATA
The SCADA System shall incorporate historical database facilities for all measured, digital and other internally calculated or generated signals. The facilities shall be able to support the fully expanded System without degradation of performance. All signals shall be scanned periodically and updated values or digital status changes stored with station/point or other identifier. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each signal.
Data shall be stored online for up to 12 months and be available for subsequent recall at any time. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches its capacity at which time the data shall be sent to the Data Archiving System for long term storage and retained for future reference. It shall be possible to restore the data from the long term archive facilities at any time for viewing without disrupting the online historical data. All changes in each real time data point (analogue and digital) received from the plant shall be recorded in the historical database. There shall be facilities for selecting on a point by point basis whether or not an historical record is maintained for each telemetered data point. The historical data database shall use highly efficient compression algorithms to store the data. There shall be user friendly facilities for archiving data to archive files to hard disk and to back up media and for recovering archived data. Data recovered from archive shall be accessible via the same tools as the current historical database. The design shall ensure that historical data is not lost if the historical database goes out of service and that when it comes back online, it is able to automatically un-spool data that has been saved instead of being passed into the historical database. There shall be facilities for extracting data periodically and on demand from the historical database directly into third party spreadsheet programmes such as MS Excel. Ideally this should be done through a client facility that is integrated directly into the spreadsheet. The data extraction via the spreadsheet client shall be user definable on a point by point basis in terms of the start and finish times and pre-processing of the data before delivery to the spreadsheet. This ensures there is easy access to historical data and that, report configuration and presentation is very flexible. Historical data held on the existing SCADA system shall be imported into the new SCADA/EMS System and consideration should be given to retaining the present data structure, where consistent with the above requirements. 2.7 REPORT GENERATION
Operators shall have the facility to configure periodic and ad-hoc reports. The format of these reports shall be fully configurable by the operator using any system data acquired and/or calculated, and presented either in tabular or graphical form. It shall be possible to use current online data, restored archive data or a mixture of both as the source data for reports. The report generation facility must allow for selective searching for data by location, date, etc., and support arithmetic and logical operations that may be needed on the data before presentation in the reports. Facilities shall be provided for the printing of these reports either automatically at specific times or on request by the operator. All reports shall be available for display on the operator workstations. The Bidder shall describe the report generation facilities offered. 2.7.1 Routine Reports
The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of routine reports. These shall include daily, monthly and annual reports of network conditions and loading. The content and format shall be developed during the preparation of the Functional Design Specification. These reports shall be routinely printed at a designated time. The operator shall be able to request an immediate printout of any report and this shall include the values stored up to the time of operator request. The format of all reports prepared by the Contractor shall be to the approval of the Employer. 2.7.2 Energy Reports
The Contractor shall configure and implement a set of reports to assist the Control Centre to record, report and manage the daily system production and related factors. The reports shall be on a daily, weekly and annual basis and derived from half hourly values of: (a) Pulse accumulator MWh and MVArh values acquired from energy meters (b) MWh and MVArh values calculated by integration of MW and MVAr values (c) Generator unit despatch instructions (d) Generator unit incremental costs
(e) Generator variable and fixed costs (f) Generator unit availability (g) Generator scheduling constraints including permitted starts, stops (h) Generator unit regulation participation (i) Hydrological data pertinent to despatch and production (j) Weather data (k) Load forecast values (l) Transmission constraints (m) Transmission loss factors (n) Scheduled maintenance (o) Unscheduled outages (p) Other data available within the SCADA/EMS system or entered by users. The system shall be capable of updating retrospectively any data that was not available at the half hourly interval (e.g. because of telemetry failure) but retrieved at a later time. The daily reports shall present the following information: (a) Daily Despatch schedule per half hour (b) Daily Despatch actual per half hour (c) Load forecast per half hour (d) Load actual per half hour (e) Energy per half hour and daily cumulative values per unit and station (f) Other data and information shall be presented in a suitable text form to give a clear presentation of the factors influencing the daily production results. (g) The system energy balance between production and energy delivered to the 33kV system The weekly and monthly reports shall present cumulative values in a similar manner. The format and presentation shall be developed during the preparation of the database. 2.8 2.8.1 DATABASE MANAGEMENT General
A data engineering tool with a graphical user interface shall be provided to generate and maintain all data and displays. The user shall be able to amend the real time database using screen pro forma and menu driven techniques, to accommodate such changes as: Modifications to the power network topology Addition and deletion of substations (and Outstations) Amendment of signals at Outstations Signal processing requirements Reconfiguration of the communications network
It is essential that database amendments propagate through the System and that all necessary consequential changes are carried out automatically. The System shall prompt for supplementary data, as necessary. It shall not be necessary for the same data to be entered more than once in order to provide the source data for different SCADA/EMS functions. It shall be possible to store offline amendments ready for incorporation into the real time database, as required. The ability to activate downloading of stored databases to the online system shall not be limited to the System Maintenance Workstation user or to any specific workstation. For example, it shall be possible to create an offline amendment of the database on the System Maintenance Workstation, in
advance, and initiate its incorporation into the online System from a control room workstation at a later time. The access authority of the operator activating such a predefined database amendment shall be definable by the System Engineer and shall not be restricted to levels at or above those normally permitting on-line database amendments. Facilities shall be provided which allow operators to quickly restore the original database on the operational system where amendments have been incorporated and found to be unsatisfactory. Facilities shall also be provided which ensure that when restoring, amending or regenerating the system database it is not necessary to re-enter all data which had previously been entered manually. The Bid shall provide a detailed description of the facilities he will be providing in respect to the requirements of this clause. 2.8.2 Data Entry
The data entry task shall be made as simple and error free as possible. Screen proof reads, menu selections, block copying, etc shall be the sort of mechanisms provided to facilitate this activity. Validity and plausibility checks shall be carried out on all data entries, wherever possible. So for example, measurand alarm limits shall automatically be checked to ensure that HH>H>L>LL and that dead bands (which shall be user definable) do not overlap with adjacent limits. 2.8.3 Data Manipulation Function
A facility shall be provided to enable the user to generate derived data using arithmetic and logical functions. The derived data shall be held in the database and shall be accessible, as for any other real time data, for display, reporting and historical data compilation. The user shall have access to the facility, through an interpretive high level interface, which shall include spreadsheet format or 4GL language. These facilities shall include functions for generating duration curves for showing graphically when measurands were above, within, or below specified limits over a selected time period. The spreadsheet facility shall also include normal spreadsheet calculation, manipulation and printout facilities as are found in current proprietary products. There shall also be a facility for interrogating the Master Station database via SQL type queries. These facilities shall enable operators to define status lists which list data points, equipment, substations etc in accordance with user defined criteria and which can be designated for updating on a cyclic basis and on demand by the operator. The Contractor shall prepare a set of 20 displays or status lists covering 20 different sets of selection criteria to be defined during the course of the contract and provide a pro forma template which enables an operator to quickly set up additional status lists. To assist the operator in making a query which relates to one or more items of equipment there shall be simple procedures for identifying the item or items of equipment to be queried on one-line diagrams. 2.8.4 Graphic Display Construction
Diagrams shall be prepared and modified using an interactive screen display editor that shall be available at any workstation incorporating graphic display capability. User access to the function shall be controlled through the normal system access control mechanism. This shall be capable of imposing different access restrictions to different display editing functions. For example, a user may be able to copy, modify and store diagrams, but be prevented from updating the current (operating) diagram files. The diagram editing function shall be implemented using the same type of graphical user interface as that used for the power network control function. User interaction with the editor shall support different levels of user familiarity by providing parallel paths for command entry. At one level the user shall be fully guided through the interaction with the editor by the use of menus and context sensitive help screens. However, operators familiar with the facilities shall be able to use quick selection methods such as the use of function keys and/or short form command line entries. Construction of the diagrams shall use graphic primitives, character fonts and user definable symbols. The user shall be able to construct the definable symbols using other symbols and graphic primitives. Such user defined symbols should be capable of being stored in a library for ready retrieval and use in diagram construction. The library shall hold a minimum of 256 symbols. Each symbol shall be capable of being scaled and oriented at will during construction of a diagram.
Graphic primitives typically comprise: line, arc, circle, ellipse, rectangle, polygon, etc. Independently, it shall be possible to define line type (thick/thin, solid/broken) fill pattern and colour for each. It shall be possible to select from a minimum of eight line types, eight fill patterns and 32 colours. A minimum of two vector character fonts, comprising 96 characters each, shall be defined. The text strings constructed from them shall be capable of being freely scaled and oriented as for user defined symbols. Diagram elements may be defined as the component parts of the power network representation, e.g. power lines, circuit breakers, text labels, measured values, alarm points, etc. During diagram construction, the user shall be able to define certain attributes associated with the elements (e.g. colour, line type, etc), although default values (last setting) shall normally apply until changed. It shall also be possible to define the element as passive, active or interactive, as appropriate. The responses for active and interactive elements shall be determined by user definable default values of attributes for each element type, but they shall be capable of independent amendment. In this way the user shall be able to define how an element changes its appearance in response to a change in a database point or points to which it is linked. It shall be possible to define elements such that they respond to a logical combination of database points (e.g. at a certain magnification level the substation diagram may represent each line end status as a single symbol, where the states of corresponding busbar isolators, circuit breaker, line isolator, etc are logically combined to a single status indication). Diagram construction shall be made less arduous by providing editing tools, for example, to facilitate the copying of areas of the diagram and replication of them within the world map and to permit the relocation of areas of the diagram without disrupting connectivity. For construction of the multiple layers of a world map, the editing facilities shall enable the diagram elements from an adjacent plane or overlay to be transferred to the layer being constructed. This shall provide a means for readily aligning the diagrams on different layers of the world map and speeding diagram building. 2.8.4.1 Configuration Responsibilities It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all configuration tasks are completed correctly and in accordance with the approved project programme. For the purpose of training and becoming fully familiar with techniques and methods for data configuration, the Employer will provide a number of staff to assist in this exercise. They will use the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities in the task of entering the project specific data required to configure the new SCADA/EMS System database(s), to build screen displays and report formats, etc., produced by the Contractor. Bidders shall clearly define in their Bid the tasks they have allocated to be performed by the Employer, the required programme for the performance of those tasks to meet the overall project programme and the resources required to complete those tasks, both in terms of man power and System facilities, e.g. the number of workstations required to be used to perform those tasks. It is anticipated that this configuration task will include the preparation of network diagrams, screen displays, field signal definitions, the entry of network electrical parameters, the design of report formats, etc. The Contractors training regime shall ensure that the Employer personnel shall be fully competent to undertake these tasks as the system evolves over time following completion of the Works under this contract. To assist the Employer in future data gathering and collation activities the Contractor shall specify the detailed requirements of all data necessary to configure the SCADA/EMS System to enable it to meet its specified functionality. This information shall be provided as part of the Contractors training effort. The Contractor shall carry out any necessary training, prior to making the Configuration and Maintenance Facilities available for use by the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the 'first fit' of user definable displays including the world map single line and geographical representations and individual object summaries together with displays relating to the SCADA System status (including Outstations), and that of the associated communications arrangements. The remaining database and graphics work will be completed by the Employers staff following suitable training and under the supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible managing this work through to successful implementation is completed. To facilitate the tasks of data engineering the Contractor shall arrange for the Maintenance Workstation to be delivered at an early stage of the Contract. Additionally, it is intended that some members of the Employers data engineering team will spend at least one month in the Contractors Works assisting with
the initial data engineering tasks. The Contractor shall include the cost of travel and subsistence for 6 persons in his Bid. 2.8.5 Changes to Configuration Data
During the initial configuration period prior to provisional acceptance initial source data may change as the Employer's staff gain a deeper understanding of the process and they or the Contractor gather more complete and or accurate power system data. The Contractor or the Employer's staff under the supervision of the Contractor shall incorporate any such changes into the system. If any changes are required to database, screen or report configuration data after completion and before final acceptance, the Employer will provide details of the changes to the Contractor, and update the source data under supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure all changes are subject to formal change and version control procedures. The Contractor shall consider the implications of any such changes on the hardware and software capacity and performance of the system, and shall advise the Employer of these implications. 2.8.6 Change Control
When modifying the database or displays, the item to be modified shall be copied into a work area for modification. The original item shall be available for selection as part of the normal real time system operation, until the modified item is specifically substituted for the original. Previous revisions of graphics and databases shall be retained for manual deletion by the system manager. The data engineering tools shall have built-in extensive validation checks on power system components and their integration topology. The facilities shall be able to provide an audit trail to identify changes and the by whom the changes were carried out by. 2.9 DATA EXCHANGE FACILITIES
The System shall be capable of supporting the following data interchange facilities: a) Import/export of data via a standard SQL interface. b) Interface to the Employers PSS-E study and planning applications. c) Interface to a future Transparent Despatch facility. d) Dynamic data linkages such as ODBC, DDE and OLE shall be provided to access real time and historical data by Windows based applications such as Word, Excel, etc. e) Export of files in standard formats suitable for import into spreadsheets, word processors and graphics programs. f) Import/Export of data via ICCP (TASE 2) interface
g) Web server that permits external users with appropriate access rights to obtain network displays, trends, alarm/event lists and reports available within the system h) E-mail i) Facsimile
The external access shall not affect the operational performance of the system in anyway and shall be via a highly secure mechanism whereby non authorised user cannot access the system and no authorised external user can make modifications other than providing data such as may be required for reports or operational planning. 2.10 OPERATOR TRAINING SIMULATOR Objectives
2.10.1
The major objectives of the training simulator are summarised as follows:
a) To enable control room operators to become fully practised with the SCADA/EMS facilities under steady state conditions. b) To provide realistic simulation of power network events in quasi-real-time so that control room operators can be exposed to a wide range of power network contingencies and interactively initiate remedial actions. The facilities shall not cause any disruption to the normal operation of the NSCC whilst training is taking place nor adversely affect the reliability and availability of the on-line SCADA system whilst training is taking place. To fulfil the above objectives a separate operator workstation as a training simulator is envisaged. The software facilities to be provided shall be fully described and are expected to include the features described in the remainder of this section. The bidder may offer a simulator meeting the full EPRI standard as an option. 2.10.2 Simulation Functions
The SCADA User Interface functions provided for the training simulator shall be the same as those provided in the Control Room except that the data acquisition functions shall be replaced by an event simulator. However, it shall be possible for save cases and database snap shots available on the main system to be loaded and used in simulation sessions. The event simulator shall provide simulation of the real-time power system offering a realistic perspective to the trainee. The simulation software shall display to the trainee the redistribution of network voltages and powers based upon the simulated operating conditions. The simulation model used shall be identical to that for the power network applications. Instructor facilities shall be provided to set up any number of pre-determined sequences of timed chronological events to change the state or value of any point defined in the simulation model. Individual points shall be described in these scenario files. The instructor shall be able to monitor simulated events and trainee responses during simulation and be able to introduce further scenarios at will. The instructor shall also be able to activate individual events or chains of events at will from the instructors console without first having to set up a scenario. A specific console shall be dedicated to the instructor for supervising the training. The man-machine interface of the instructor and of the trainee-Operator shall be the same as that of the Operators in the control room. The basic functions available in the simulation environment shall be the same as those used in the operational system including SCADA functions, forecasting, scheduling, despatch, AGC, power system analysis functions in real-time and study-mode. The network behaviour shall be presented either at real-life speed or with some acceleration or slow down factor. The simulator shall present the following features: -Variations of loads according to predefined models, -Load sensitivity to voltage and frequency, -Long-term dynamic models for generating unit components, including boiler and boiler controls, water flow and controls for hydro generators, turbine controls (primary frequency regulator and interactions with AGC for secondary frequency regulation), voltage regulators, active and reactive power loading static and dynamic limitations, -Simulation of the effects of a fault, -Simulate load shedding -Simulation of the operation of protection relays -Simulation of the operation of re-closers, -Simulation of the operation of synchronous-checks, -Simulate random disturbances to measurements. -Simulate multiple islanding of the network
-Simulate reconnection of network islands The simulator shall compute a complete AC load flow solution in the acceleration framework. It shall provide: -Bus voltages in the range nominal +30%/-30%, -Loads, -Active and reactive branch flows, -Active and reactive generations, -Frequency in the range 45 to 55Hz. Line or transformer overloads, voltage and frequency excursions shall be processed by relay models. These relay models shall trip the associated breakers if the violations exceed predefined thresholds based on duration and magnitude.. Inverse time over current relays shall be modelled. Through predefined scenarios or through manual interventions during a session, the instructor shall be able to: -Modify the loads (individually or globally and time scheduled), -Trip lines or transformers, -Trip generating units, -Change plant control mode (local / AGC), -Allow / prohibit supervisory control of breakers, transformers, -Set RTU and communication lines out-of-service. Such events shall occur either at instructor specified times, or conditional to some designated variables satisfying some instructor specified condition. The simulator shall be configurable to serve as testing tool during Factory and Site Acceptance Tests 2.10.3 Relay modelling Protection relay models which trip or close circuit breakers and switches for the purpose of protecting and controlling the Power System and its components shall be provided. Relays shall be modelled in such a way that the automatic switching operations in the network are accurately portrayed in the simulation. Those relays that operate because certain simulated variables reach particular thresholds shall be explicitly modelled. Relays which operate rapidly during transients in the system need not be modelled and only their effects are introduced into the simulation. For example, a short circuit on a high voltage transmission line activates protective relaying within a few cycles but this process shall be modelled in the scenario as the tripping of certain circuit breakers. The following relay types shall be represented explicitly: -Under/over frequency relays which are activated by the value of system frequency. -Under/over voltage relays which trip bus load breakers or generators according to the value of the bus voltage. -Automatic reclose relays attempt the reclose of transmission line circuit breakers after they have tripped. For example, a predefined end of a tripped transmission line will attempt three reclose operations at specified times. If the line has a permanent fault, the reclose operations are unsuccessful and there is no effect on the simulation except for circuit breaker status closing and opening. Otherwise, the successful reclose at the near end is simulated in the power flow with subsequent reclosing of the far end. The near end breaker (s) attempt reclose for a maximum of three times. -Synchronous check relays shall be modelled which check voltage magnitude, phase angles, and frequencies across a breaker before attempting closure. When both ends of the breakers are in the same island, the difference between the voltage magnitudes and phase angles at the two ends have to be less than a specified value for closure to occur. In the case where the two ends are in different islands, the check is done on voltage magnitude and frequency differences.
-Directional and non-directional inverse time MVA or current flow relays which trip a line or transformer if a limit, MVA or current, is exceeded for a predefined time. 2.11 MASTER STATION HARDWARE
2.11.1 Operating Systems It is required that each category of computer has its own operating system and that this operating system is capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. 2.11.2 Antivirus Software Antivirus software shall be supplied on all computer systems. On completion of the project update and maintenance of the Antivirus product will be undertaken by the Employer IT staff. The Bidder shall describe the management process by which this will be carried out. 2.11.3 Servers All servers shall be of a well proven design suitable for real-time operation where reliability is a prime consideration. Highly reliable mass storage devices shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system, applications and data. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion for future use as specified in 2.2.3. All servers shall be rack mounted within a cubicle, and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. All servers shall have redundant hot swappable power supplies. All servers shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. Where a number of servers are mounted within in a cubicle or suite of cubicles it is permissible for these servers to share a single system console connected via a KVM switch. However it is not acceptable for the system console to be shared with a server or servers located in another equipment room. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software, database configuration, graphics and the archive and retrieval of historical data on magnetic or optical media. The operation of this device shall not require that the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. 2.11.4 Data Acquisition Servers Data acquisition servers shall be provided at the Master Station to independently carry out all acquisition and processing of telemetered data. Each data acquisition server shall be equipped with a system console to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. For each communications channel the data acquisition server shall detect loss of communications with an Outstation and raise an alarm. The detection of the loss of a communication channel shall include the following conditions. a) No carrier from the Outstation over a user configurable time period (where appropriate) b) No reply from the Outstation for a user configurable time period and number of tries. c) A user configurable number of bad responses in a user configurable period of time, including CRC errors, length errors in data etc. The data acquisition server shall be capable of being equipped with the following interfaces for communication with the Outstation equipment: a) V.24/V.28 interfaces for unbalanced communication configurable up to 9600 bps. b) 64kbps interfaces c) TCP/IP 100/10 Mbps (where appropriate)
2.11.5 Operator Workstations Each operator workstation shall be equipped with alphanumeric keyboard and mouse/trackball and LCD screens. The number of workstations and LCD screens shall be as stated in Technical Schedules. There shall be a minimum of 50 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for expansion capacity for future use as specified in 2.2.3. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate main memory for the required tasks with 50 per cent spare capacity. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. There shall be 50 per cent spare capacity above that required for the fully expanded system. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm. The operator workstations shall meet the requirements defined in Technical Schedules 2.11.6 Local Area Network (LAN) Interconnection between computers, operator workstations, communications servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant LAN which conforms to IEEE standards. The dual redundant LANs will be constructed, separate LAN switches equipped with redundant power supplies. The LANs must be constructed to provide the necessary throughput to meet overall system performance requirements. The LAN shall be complete with all necessary terminal/printer servers, repeaters, bridges, routers/gateways etc necessary for the operation of the SCADA system. Failure of a LAN in a redundant configuration shall not degrade system performance below the specified performance requirements of Section 2.12. Failure or degradation of LAN operation shall be reported via alarms. All transfers of devices between redundant LANs shall be performed automatically without disruption of any logical channel between applications. The removal, powering off, or malfunction of a piece of hardware on a LAN shall not interfere with the operation of that LAN. When required a firewall or filtering router shall be provided to separate the SCADA master station LAN from all other LANs and WANs. All LAN equipment shall be rack mounted within a cubicle, and redundant systems mounted in separate cubicles for location in equipment rooms. 2.11.6.1 Ethernet switches
Where dual redundant LANs are required, separate Ethernet switches and power supplies shall be supplied for each. The Ethernet switches provided by the Contractor shall have the following minimum features: a) Multiple LANs supported concurrently. In particular, multiple independent Ethernet LANs shall be concurrently supported. b) c) d) e) f) g) h) 2.11.6.2 Media support for Ethernet Category 5 e UTP or better. Single-mode fibre up to 2 kilometres. Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades. Centralised network management via SNMP. Hot-swappable boards. Redundant power supplies (for main switches). Routers
Where routers are provided for connections of other LANs to the SCADA LAN for the purposes of remote access or the exchange of operational data these shall have the following minimum features: a. Media support for Ethernet
b. c. d. e. f. 2.11.6.3
Category 5 e UTP or better G703 optical fibre interface
Multiple routing protocols including RIP and IGRP Modular architecture permitting field configuration and upgrades. Centralised network management via SNMP. Hot-swappable boards. Redundant power supplies. LAN Management
LAN management facilities shall be provided via a full graphical user interface that shall be supplied and configured. This management function shall provide overall control and monitoring capabilities to reconfigure and indicate the status of the LANs, network equipment, and support peripherals. 2.11.7 Printers 2.11.7.1 General
The devices shall contain off-line self-test systems that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. Printer consumables shall be readily available locally in the Employers country. 2.11.7.2 Laser Printers
All laser printers shall produce clear black & white copies on standard A4 paper or transparencies with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. Each printer shall be capable of printing at minimum speed of 15 ppm. Each printer shall be capable of manual and automatic paper handling and be equipped with 500 sheet paper tray. The number of laser printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules. 2.11.7.3 Colour Printers
Colour printers shall comply with the above requirements for general purpose printers. The printers shall be able to print A4 and A3 black and white and colour pages. Printers shall have separate black and coloured toners and printers using individual colour cartridges are preferred to those that use single multi-colour cartridges. The number of colour printers shall be as stated in the Technical Schedules. 2.11.8 Video Wall The Video Wall shall provide for a 8 panel display with overall size of approximately 160 inches wide x 60 inches high comprising 50 (diagonal) panels. The construction shall provide for an aesthetic mounting and finish. The joints between panels shall be such that lines or diagram elements crossing them are clear and without discontinuities (a maximum screen to screen gap of 1mm). Each panel shall be set and be capable of automatically maintaining equal levels of contrast and brightness to each other in order to achieve an even and homogenous presentation of displays and information. The design of the construction and appearance shall be subject to approval by The Employer. The system shall include both digital (DVI) and analogue inputs and allow easy expansion to support additional inputs for compatibility and redundancy purposes.. The projection system must be capable of being controlled via remote keypad (wired or IR), by external computer via Ethernet, via external computer or terminal via networked RS-232, or via hardware switch through a standard GPIO port. The equipment offered in this Contract shall be suitable for continuous 365 day per year 24 hour control room operation and have been proven by satisfactory operating experience in similar environmental conditions elsewhere.
2.11.8.1
Display Units
Each rear projection display unit shall be equipped with projector based on DLP technology capable of 1400x1050 SXGA+ pixels or higher resolution. Each display unit shall be equipped with a three colour LED light source using single separate Red, Green and Blue LEDs. The projection system shall not contain arc lamps, motorized colour wheels, or motorized apertures. The system shall automatically ensure a consistency of colour and intensity between each display panel. The Bidder shall specify the viewing angle which must be at least 180 degrees horizontally and 120 degrees vertically. The Bidder shall state the brightness which shall be at least 450 Cd/m2 and also the brightness uniformity between centre and edge of screens which must be greater than 90%. The screen technology shall be of a Fresnel lenticular construction and not use a Blackbead screen technology. 2.11.8.2 Controllers
Video wall controllers shall be supplied for interfacing to the SCADA system equipment. Each video wall controller shall be equipped with the following interfaces as detailed in the technical schedules: a. b. c. d. Duplicated Giga/Fast Ethernet connections 2 off video/CCTV camera inputs. 2 off DVI inputs 2 off VGA inputs
The video wall controller shall be resilient to single equipment failures e.g. through the provision of independently fed redundant power supplies. The Bidder shall describe the resilience features of the equipment supplied. 2.11.8.3 Video Wall Construction
The minimum overall size of the video wall display area shall be as stated in the technical schedules. In addition panels shall be located at each end to house the displays described in sections 2.3.4.3.3 and 2.3.4.3.6. These panels shall be sized and constructed to house additional active video wall screens which may be implemented at a later date. The lower edge of the display units shall be 1.5 metre above the floor level. The display units and associated equipment are to be installed in a suitable enclosure for location in the control room. The display units and their supporting structure shall be enclosed in an external finish to the approval of the Employer. Samples of the proposed finish shall be provided to the Employer for agreement prior to manufacture. The Contractor shall be responsible for the confirmation of actual enclosure dimensions prior to commencing manufacture. The installation of the display wall units shall be such that they appear as an integral part of the overall enclosure. The display units shall be installed fully in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and in such a manner that allows safe access for maintenance. All maintenance of the display units shall be from the rear of the units. Fixed access shall be provided for maintenance of the units as part of the video wall supporting structure. Outline details shall be submitted in the Bid and agreed with the Employer prior to manufacture. The Bidder shall specify the heat loads generated by the video wall equipment. 2.11.8.4 Software
The video wall controllers shall be capable of displaying windows from all sources simultaneously. The entire video wall must be available for presentation of a minimum of 16 windows containing graphical displays. It must be possible to move and resize these windows to use any part of the video wall area. It must be possible to enlarge any single window to use the whole display area. The video wall controllers shall be supplied with Microsoft Windows based operating system.
2.11.8.5
Management
Management facilities for the control, backup, and monitoring of performance shall be provided with the video wall controllers. This shall be from a dedicated console that provides control to all equipment connected to the video walls. Facilities shall be provided for the definition of up to 8 video wall window layouts which can be recalled from the management interface. 2.11.9 System Time Time synchronisation of the Master Station equipment shall be from the GPS master clock system located in the NSCC. Updating shall take place automatically at start-up and regularly thereafter to ensure that the error between the GPS master clock time and Master Station Servers does not exceed 1 ms. Time synchronisation between workstations and servers on the Master Station LAN shall be better than 10 ms. Outstations shall normally be synchronised directly from GPS equipment located at each of the substations. It shall also be possible to synchronise the Outstations from the Master Station via the SCADA telecommunication channels in cases where no GPS is installed or the GPS has failed. Where the Master Station equipment is required to maintain time synchronisation of the Outstations, the Master Station equipment shall initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure. The time synchronisation procedure shall maintain time synchronisation between the Master Station equipment and each of the Outstations to better than 10 ms and to better than 20 ms between Outstations. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure. 2.11.10 System Displays System Displays shall be provided to present the information described in section 2.3.4.3.6. With the exception of the directly derived frequency measurements the system shall be able to present this information on the Video Wall. However, as the information is permanently on display separate dedicated display devices shall be mounted adjacent to the Video Wall and fitted with surrounds and bezels in keeping with the Video Wall design. Similarly Hydro Complex Displays shall be provided in an adjacent panel to the Video Wall. To this end the Video Wall housing shall have a panel at each end both with matching bezels.
2.12
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The following Clauses describe the performance requirements for the System operating in its normal configuration. The performance test shall be carried out at different times of day including crossing hour, day, month and year boundaries. 2.12.1 Normal Activity Conditions The normal activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 2 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. b) A total of 1 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. d) A total of 2 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute, in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations, with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. e) A new display being requested every minute (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). f) One alarm page accept every 3 minutes.
g) All application and standard software running as normal.

h) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes. 2.12.2 High Activity Conditions The high activity level shall be defined as the following conditions: a) Changes in 10 per cent of all status indications per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. b) A total of 10 per cent of all analogue measurements exceeding their alarm limits per minute with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. c) All measurements being transmitted to the Master Station at the update times specified in the Schedules with subsequent processing and presentation on displays at the Master Station. d) A total of 10 per cent of all alarm points being initiated per minute, in addition to alarms caused by the above mentioned status changes (see (a)) and measurement limit violations, with subsequent processing and sorting into lists at the Master Station. e) A new display being requested every 15 seconds, at each operator workstation (Each display containing an average of 30 analogue values and 50 indications). i) f) One alarm page accept every 30 seconds. All applications and standard software running as normal.
g) Execution of topology processing and any cyclically executing EMS applications every 5 minutes. 2.12.3 Computer Start Up Total time for the start up of a computer, including automatic program load, initialisation and database updating, shall not exceed five minutes. Automatic restart following a power down shall not exceed five minutes. Complete SCADA/EMS functionality shall be available within a further five minutes following a start up or automatic restart of the last computer in the minimum set of computers required to be running to support this functionality. Updating from outstations may extend beyond this time but the full update of the System with data from the field shall not exceed a further five minutes. Thus, a complete restart of the System, including full update from the field, shall not exceed 15 minutes. 2.12.4 Transfer of Operation No operational feature of the SCADA/EMS System shall be unavailable for more than 30 seconds at any time due to the transfer of operation from one processor to another following processor failure (e.g. failover to a hot standby computer or reconfiguration of networked tasks) or for any other reason. Immediately after failover, all functions shall be available to the operators. The operators shall not need to login again and the display selections should remain as they were prior to the failover. 2.12.5 System Response Times The performance of the System shall meet or better the maximum response times specified in Table 2.12 The response times for interactions with the UI displays shall be measured from the time of completion of the initiating action on the operator display to the time the relevant operator display has been fully updated with the respective real time data resulting from the action. The response times for events and alarms shall be measured from the time of occurrence in the field of the initial event/alarm to the time the relevant operator display is updated with real time data or an event or alarm appears in the respective list. If a display is suspended during panning and zooming, the time for the display to be refreshed shall be no more than 0.5 seconds after the panning/zooming operation has completed. Panning and zooming in/out movements shall be achieved in increments of no greater than 1/8 the screen size. The time for the display to be refreshed following each step shall be no longer than 0.25 second. The Bidder shall provide detailed calculation that demonstrates that the proposed system has the capacity and response capability to meet the full requirements for performance initially and when a fully
expanded. The calculations shall demonstrate that there is sufficient disc capacity, processing power and main memory to achieve the requirements.
Table 2.12 Maximum System Response Times (seconds) Description Confirmation of point selection on a VDU The time between selection of a display and the VDU diagram fully updated shall not exceed Acceptance of a single alarm Acceptance of a page of alarms The time between selection of a control function and check back from the outstation as to whether or not the control can be performed shall not exceed The time between execution of a control function and initiation of the control at the outstation shall not exceed The time between the occurrence of a change of state or an alarm at an outstation and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between a change of state at an outstation due to a control action and display at the Master Station shall not exceed The time between successive updates of the main computer data base with analogue measurements shall not exceed a) MW, MVAr & Voltage measurements b) Other measurements The time between successive updates of the main computer database with pulse meter values shall not exceed Loading of a save case and initialisation of a study mode EMS application Results available from a derived calculation Time from request of hard copy output to the commencement of printing Normal Activity 1 2 2 2 2 High Activity 1 4 2 4 2
5 5
20 40
30
30
10 2 2
30 2 5
2.13
CONTROL CENTRE FURNITURE
2.13.1 Operator Desks The Operator Workstation VDUs and associated keyboards described in this Specification shall be mounted on control desks to be supplied under this Contract. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desks shall be subject to approval. The control desks shall be of robust, durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. The design, appearance, and finish of the control desk shall be to approval. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a communication console.
2.13.2 Operator Chairs High back reclining swivel, arm rest chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design, construction and finish, and shall be subject to approved. 2.13.3 Equipment Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands, the design and finish of which shall be subject to approval. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling. 2.13.4 Office Furniture A range of standard office desks, tables and chairs in the quantities stated in the Price Schedules, shall be provided by the Contractor. The design of the furniture shall be in keeping with the general office dcor. The furniture shall be of a good quality, durable and appropriately designed for office work where staff members are expected to be seated for several hours at a time. The proposed furniture will be subject to approval by the Employer.
3. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 3.1 INTRODUCTION
The Telecommunication System Specification details the requirements for the modification, extension and upgrade of the existing telecommunication system and associated works. It also describes the overall functional, performance and general hardware and software requirements for the new telecommunication system needed to support the new NSCC SCADA system, including details of necessary survey work to be undertaken by the Contractor, installation requirements and other project specific particulars. The Telecommunication System Specification is to be read in conjunction with other documents containing the Technical Schedules and Drawings. The proposed telecommunication system shall fully comply with the requirements stipulated in all these documents. The intention of these documents and drawings is to provide the basic design concept, technical and functional requirements of the new telecommunication system as a base for preparation of offer by the Bidders. Bidders may propose alternate design solutions so long as these match or exceed the specified functionality and performance. 3.1.1 Specification and Design Criteria
The equipment, including software, to be supplied to meet the requirements set out in this document shall be based on mature and proven products that have evolved and been field proven in comparable projects. As far as possible these products shall be customised to meet the specified functional requirements. The Bidder shall identify where the solution offered is a deviation from the requirement or an alternative that meets the objectives of the specified requirement. It is also recognised that such a system will have standard functional features not specified herein but nevertheless important or essential for the implementation of a fully operational system. In this context it is important to recognise that the systems being provided are likely to be expanded in the future and new facilities added. Such future flexibility shall be borne in mind in the detail design of the telecommunication system. Further to this the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying, within the Contract price, all software, hardware, documentation and miscellaneous items required to implement a complete and fully operational system that is fit for the intended purpose whether or not those items are specified herein. Together, the SCADA system and telecommunication system designs shall constitute a fully integrated and complete operation and control system. The Bidder shall provide cross referencing for his Bid submission identifying where the particular clauses of this Specification and the associated General Technical Specifications are addressed. The Bidders attention is also drawn to the Schedule of Confirmation of Compliance which is contained in Volume 7. It should be emphasised that the existing telecommunication system should be modified, extended and upgraded in a cost effective manner to meet the new telecommunication requirements. Therefore existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or de-commissioned and re-commissioned elsewhere and be integrated into the new telecommunication network wherever possible. In order to minimise disruption to the Employers power system operation, the modification, extension and upgrading works carried out by the Contractor must be well planned and co-ordinated with other parties involved in the NSCC Project. The transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network should be carried out in a staged and overlapping manner to minimise cut-off time and disruption to power system operation The strategy of working with one communication link (main or secondary) only at a time should be applied wherever possible during upgrading/reinforcement of the existing telecommunication network. 3.1.2 Reference Documents and Standards
All equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications, ISO Standards, IEEE Standards, International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer.
3.1.3
Site and Environmental Conditions
All equipment supplied shall be fully suitable for operating at the temperature and humidity as specified in the General Technical Specification contained in Volume 4 Section 6 Part A and Volume 5, Section 6, Part D. 3.1.4 Existing Control and Telecommunication Facilities
At present a System Control Centre (SCC) is in operation and is located near Kolonnawa substation. It is responsible for the despatching of load to the power stations and the operation of the power transmission network. It was commissioned in 1985, with a SCADA system based on ABB BECOS 20 system. The present system is based on an older ABB Spider Micro SCADA system commissioned in the year 2000. The system can monitor the transmission network and power system only, having no remote control facility. It only covers about one third of the power stations and grid substations and further stations cannot be connected without severe degradation of the already insufficient system performance. The existing telecommunication network (see drawing TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006-PLTS not shown), consisting mainly obsolete and aged analogue Power Line Carrier (PLC) equipment, does not provide sufficient communication channels / capacity required for the efficient operation of the power system. Except for some voice links, redundant telecommunication paths do not exist. The telecommunication network is used for the transmission of SCADA data, voice and teleprotection signals. In recent years, fibre optic (FO) links have been increasingly used for these functions. SCADA data transmission between the RTUs and the control centre is using data channels with transmission speed of 200 bps via the analogue PLC links and 9600 bps via the FO links. The existing telecommunication system comprises the following sub-systems: PLC equipment- (see drawing no. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005). Fibre optic terminal equipment. Party line telephone system Administrative telephone system. Teleprotection signalling equipment. Multiplexing equipment and modems. Optical ground wire (OPGW), ADSS and underground fibre optic cables. 48 Vdc power supply system for both SCADA RTU and telecommunication equipment.
The party line telephone system (PLTS) is a dedicated non-switched telephone system, which is exclusively used for system control purposes. The system comprises of a master station equipment at the SCC and terminal equipment at all power stations and grid substations. The existing telecommunication network is composed of a mix of communication media, which include the following: Fibre optic links, via OPGW, ADDS or underground fibre optic cables. PLC links, operating over high voltage transmission lines. VHF radio links. Pilot copper cable links.
Most of the PLC links are double channel equipment with one channel being used for party line telephone system and the other channel used for PAX system. The FO links are based on synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) technology operating at a STM-1 transmission rate (155 Mbps). The existing SDH equipment is FOX515 from ABB. The SCADA RTUs communicate with the master stations at the existing SCC via data communication channels.
The Bidder should be aware that due to constant expansion of the Employers power network, the existing telecommunication drawings contained in Volume 6, Section 6, Part C may not be up to date and that a site visit by the Bidder will be needed to confirm the extent of work required. 3.1.5 Implementation Programme
The telecommunication system shall be implemented in accordance with the milestones set out in the Contract Implementation Programme contained in Volume 7 Part D Schedule E section 11.3.4. It should be noted that since some elements of the fibre optic backbone communication network rely on optical ground wire (OPGW) to be fitted on existing overhead transmission lines as well as the provision of some SDH equipment by others, the Contractor shall take into account possible changes to the OPGW and SDH installation programmes and plan his work in a manner that mitigates against delay to the implementation of the telecommunication system in general. The Contract Implementation Programme that is proposed takes into consideration the above constraints, with the objective of making both SCADA and telecommunication facilities progressively available throughout the power system. 3.2 3.2.1 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Introduction
A reliable and high performance telecommunication system is needed to support power system operation. The prime function of the telecommunication system is to provide the necessary speech, data and teleprotection signalling communication channels. To meet the Employers present and future operational and business requirements, the existing telecommunication network shall be modified, upgraded and expanded to meet the following: a. To accommodate the telecommunication services needed to meet the Employers operational and administrative requirements. To facilitate future expansion of the telecommunication system to meet the requirements of power system expansion. To have sufficient telecommunication system spare capacity for selling to third parties at a later date.
b.
c.
The Telecommunication Specification describes the project specific requirements to fulfil the telecommunication objectives including detailed functional and performance requirements of the various sub-systems comprising the telecommunication system. The sub-systems include: a. b. c. d. e. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) communication system. Telecommunication management system (TMS). Digital power line carrier (DPLC) equipment. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. Telephone system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the telecommunication system and the provision of telecommunication equipment under the Contract. Drawing No. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 shows an overview of the new telecommunication system requirements. The telecommunication system shall provide, as a minimum, the following facilities: a. High speed (nx64 Kb/s) data channels for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via optic fibre links. V.24/V.28 (RS232C) asynchronous data channels with speed up to 9.6 kb/s for connection to RTUs connected to the telecommunication network via DPLC links. 2 Mb/s transport service. Voice channels.
b.
c. d.
e. f.
Teleprotection signalling channels. Other non-critical operational and administrative data communication services using TCP/IP. Video transmission service (at a later date).
g.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the parameters of the existing systems and equipment owned by the Employer and to ensure that new equipment supplied by the Contractor is fully compatible with such existing systems and equipment. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor, assisted by the Employer, to demonstrate by means of tests at site that the Employers existing equipment and any supplied by the Contractor perform satisfactorily together, subject to the proviso that any fault or failure of existing equipment shall be the responsibility of the Employer. Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. In general, where the existing PLC equipment is relatively new the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services except teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. Teleprotection signalling commands will be transmitted as before via the existing PLC equipment. However, where the existing PLC equipment is old and obsolete the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the new fibre optic network. The Contractor shall furnish equipment, which shall meet in all respects the performance specified under the prevailing site conditions. 3.2.2 Design and Operational Philosophy
The design philosophy of the new telecommunication network is that failure of any single component shall not cause failure of critical function. In addition, the telecommunication network shall be capable of providing a fully resilient network in which all speech, data and teleprotection signalling channels can be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk/node failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the network. The primary multiplexers shall be used widely at substations to combine at maximum of 30 pulse code modulation (PCM) voice channels or 64 kb/s data channels into a 2048 b/s signal. Cross-connection criteria of channels shall be as follows: a. Transmission of teleprotection channels over physically separated multiplex equipment. Transmission of main and secondary channels over physically separated multiplex equipment as much as possible.
b.
Major telecommunication equipment malfunction alarms shall be transmitted to the NSCC via the SCADA system, to alert the system operators of the operational status of the telecommunication system. Remote monitoring of telecommunication equipment operational status including alarms and performance shall be under the supervision of the telecommunication management system (TMS). The design objective with respect to reliability is to ensure that no single contingency results in loss or unacceptable degradation of service, and that the incidence of failure of components/elements is consistent with achieving high availability. The system must be fault tolerant, resilient to hazards and robust in all respects. These criteria will normally require dual routing or dynamically allocated virtual circuits. The proposed design shall incorporate proven technology, address the requirements set out in this document with respect to availability and reliability. The equipment shall preserve configuration data during power failure and all modules shall be capable of hot swappable. In order to provide a cost effective telecommunication network, the existing telecommunication equipment should be re-used or dismantled and re-commissioned elsewhere to form part of the integrated telecommunication network. All necessary additional user interfaces shall be provided to meet the new communication requirements.
The Contractor shall deliver any unused dismantled telecommunication equipment to the Employers store. 3.2.3 Expansion and Upgrade Capability
The telecommunication system supplied by the Contractor shall employ open standard concept in the design and shall offer greatest flexibility for future expansion and upgrade of the system and facilities. System expansions and upgrades carried out at a later date shall be possible by means of minor modifications and/or by the addition of extra equipment modules to the telecommunication system. It shall be possible to purchase the additional telecommunication hardware and software needed for future expansion and upgrade from different vendors. The following future upgrade options shall be possible: a. b. c. Single fibre operation. Dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM). TCP/IP Ethernet networking.
All systems shall, however, be supplied already equipped with a minimum of 25 per cent spare capacity including interface modules for each type of communication circuit. A minimum of 50 per cent system expansion capability shall be provided over and above the capacity/channel requirements that are needed for the new telecommunication system. Open topology network allowing the most flexible way of building the SDH network shall be adopted and the network shall be able to evolve in functionality just by simply adding plug-in units. Details of system expansion and upgrade capability shall be submitted with the Bid. 3.2.4 Telecommunication Network
Approximate numbers and types of various communication channels required are detailed in the Specification for Bid purposes. However, the exact number and type of communication channels required shall be determined by the Contractor during the detailed engineering design of the telecommunication system. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of existing channel assignment required to ensure that the telecommunication system can be developed and existing facilities are fully migrated to the new network with minimal disruption to power system operation. In addition, the telecommunication system shall have built-in flexibility to cater for communications requirements outside the power system operation of the Employer; such as corporate business computer applications and regional administrative communications etc. 3.2.4.1 Configuration and Topology The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall employ SDH technology with STM-1 (155.52 Mb/s) transmission level. The telecommunication network backbone shall be based on ring topology with self healing protection capability. The operating wavelength of the SDH network shall be 1310 nm or 1550 nm, with 1310 nm being the preferred choice as most of the fibre optic span lengths are generally less than 50 km. Longer span lengths may require the use of 1550 nm operating wavelength window. The Contractor shall carry out optical loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to determine the most suitable operating wavelength to be used. It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. However, if the distance involved so requires, the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters including solar power supply and all associated works and plant to enable the proper operation of the repeaters. The new SDH network backbone shall be linked to the existing SDH network and also to the new DPLC network to form an integrated digital telecommunication network. It is preferable that one common telecommunication network management system is used to monitor and supervise the new integrated digital telecommunication network. At substation sites currently with fibre optic communication facilities, existing equipment such as indoor fibre optic cables, optical terminal boxes, fibre approach cables, terminal hood closures, SDH and primary multiplexers and cross-connect units will remain the same and be re-used for the new SDH network.
The SDH network shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the relevant ITU-T recommendations for STM-1 transmission bit rate. The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level STM-4 (622 Mb/s), by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date, to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations, if any. The maximum transmission capacity which the proposed SDH network can be achieved and whether the upgrading can be carried out whilst the system is carrying live traffic shall be stated in the Bid. Fibre optic links that will be made available by others for use to implement the SDH fibre optic network backbone are shown in Drawing No. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002. The proposed SDH network design is shown in Drawing No. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003. The Bidder shall comment on the proposed SDH network topology, in particular, with regard to any deficiencies. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design and implementation of the network so that it achieves the design objectives set out in this document. Due to the variety of equipment available in the market place the final solution may not exactly mirror the equipment and connectivity shown here but it should achieve design objectives in terms of functionality, performance, reliability and availability. A diagram showing the Bidders proposed integrated telecommunication network and a detailed description on the functionality provided shall be submitted with the Bid. 3.2.4.2 Network Design The design of the telecommunication network backbone should make use of independent fibre path where available to provide the necessary resilient. In order to increase the availability and reliability of the telecommunication fibre optic network, SDH equipment shall be equipped with dual redundant hotstandby control modules and power supply units. Each SDH ring shall be designed to operate independently and a failure in one ring should not affect the normal operation of other rings. 2 Mb/s tributaries on the STM-1 system will be utilised to provide voice, data and teleprotection signalling connectivity between substations and NSCC using first order multiplexing equipment at all the stations. The 2 Mb/s transmission system will interconnect the following end-user facilities: a. b. c. d. e. High speed (64 kb/s) data channels according G.703. Low speed data channels (up to 9.6 kb/s asynchronous V.24/V.28). nx64 kb/s data channels according to ITU-T V.35. Voice channels (VF E&M 2/4 wire). Remote subscriber channels.
The proposed SDH network should be designed in such a way to allow easy migration to a fully integrated multi-service TCP/IP (transmission control protocol/internet protocol) networking for voice, data, teleprotection signalling and video, and with the appropriate quality of service (QoS) required for power system operation at a later date without sacrificing current investments in telecommunication infrastructure. Details of how this can be achieved shall be submitted in the Bid. The telecommunication network shall also have provision for an engineering order wire (EOW) facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between nodes. It should be emphasized that due to unforeseen circumstances it may be necessary to change some of the routing during the course of the Contract. The Contractors design should therefore be flexible and be able to accommodate of such possibilities. 3.2.4.3 Network Protection The telecommunication network shall employ the following network protection methods as appropriate: a. SNCP (Sub-Network Connection Protection) where working traffic flows in one direction and protected traffic flows in the opposite direction. If a problem occurs in the working traffic path, the receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction. The SNCP shall be in accordance with ITU-T G.841.
b.
Ring MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) shares the ring bandwidth equally between working and protected traffic. Linear MSP for point to point applications. 2 fibre bi-directional self healing ring.
c. d.
The switch over times for SNCP and MSP shall be less than 50 ms. Details of the proposed network protection shall be submitted with the Bid. 3.2.4.4 Fibre Optic Links The new telecommunication fibre optic network backbone shall make the best use of the following available fibre optic links: a. b. c. Existing fibre optic links. Fibre optic links currently under construction by others. Fibre optic links to be supplied under the NSCC OPGW Cable Contract.
Details of the available fibre optic links can be found in the Table 3.1. Each fibre optic link generally comprises a total of 24 discrete single mode optical fibre cores, conforming to ITU-T recommendation G.652. A maximum of 4 fibres in each fibre optic link will be made available for telecommunication use. The remaining fibres will be for other purposes and/or served as spares. The Contractor under this Contract shall take whatever steps necessary to ensure the works supplied by others are properly co-ordinated with the works supplied under this Contract and that together they provide the functionality and performance defined for the works in this Contract. The Contractor must provide all information and complete comments on designs produced by others that relate to the works to be supplied under this Contract in a timely manner and in accordance with the programme for the works under the related contracts. Demarcation of responsibility between this Contract and optical fibres supplied by others is at the optical terminal box.
Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specification
Table 3.1 Available fibre optic links
Region
FO Link 1 2
From Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Sri Jaywardanapura Sri Jaywardanapura Pannipitiya Pannipitiya Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana CEB HQ CEB HQ CEB HQ Kolonnawa Kolonnawa Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa Kelanitissa GIS Kolonnawa Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama Biyagama
To Athurugiriya Sri Jayewardenepura Pannipitiya NSCC Ratmalana Dehiwala Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa Havelock Town Maradana Kolonnawa ESCC Kelanitissa GIS Kelanitissa ESCC Barge Kelaniya Sapugaskanda GS Biyagama Sapugaskanda PS Pannipitiya Kotmale Kelanitissa
Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 220 220 220
Approx. route (km) 14.0 6.0 6.9 0.0 6.9 9.0 8.5 6.3 4.6 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.4 0.0 2.2 0.0 6.6 4.6 4.2 2.1 15.5 70.5 12.5
Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Ongoing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW Contract
Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract ------As per NSCC OPGW contract --------Dec 2010 Dec 2010 Dec 2010 ----------------As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract
SCC Colombo Region
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Table 3.1 Available fibre optic links (contd) Region FO Link 25 26 Northern Region 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 From Kotmale Kiribathkumbura Kiribathkumbura Kotmale New Anuradhapura Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Puttalam Pannala Pannala Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kotugoda Veyangoda Kotugoda Kotugoda Ukuwela Ukuwela Ukuwela Naula Habarana To Kiribathkumbura Ukuwela Kurunagala New Anuradhapura Norochchole PS Maho Madampe Pannala Diesel gen. 100MW Madampa Bolawatta Katunayake Kotugoda Kerawalapitiya Veyangoda Norochchole PS Aniyakanda Kelaniya Bowatenna Pallkele Naula Habarana Valachchenai Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 Approx. route (km) 22.5 29.9 34.6 163.0 100.0 42.0 68.2 86.4 0.0 31.8 27.6 10.7 11.3 18.0 17.0 117.0 14.3 29.3 30.0 17.0 45.0 37.5 100.0 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing UGFO (?km) Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Optional under NSCC OPGW contract Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2013 Apr 2013 Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract ----------------------As per NSCC OPGW contract Aug 2012 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract
Table 3.1 Available fibre optic links (contd) Region FO Link 48 49 Northern Region 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Kotmale Region 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 From Habarana New Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura New Anuradhapura Vavuni Kilinochchi Old Laxapana New Laxapana New Laxapana Old Laxapana Kotmale Kotmale Badulla Nuwara Eliya Old Laxapana Badulla Madagama (T-off) Old Laxapana Kotmale Victoria Randenigala To Old Anuradhapura Old Anuradhapura Puttalam Trincomalee Vavuni Kilinochchi Chunnakam New Laxapana Balangoda Canyon PS Polpitiya Upper Kotmale Polpitiya Rantambe Badulla Nuwara Eliya Madagama (T-off) Monaragala Wimalasurendra Victoria Randenigala Rantambe Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 220 220 220 Approx. route (km) 48.9 1.5 75.0 103.3 53.5 74.1 67.2 0.6 43.9 10.0 8.3 18.5 29.5 37.0 35.4 38.8 32.5 16.0 5.1 30.1 16.4 3.1 Remark Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing ADSS Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Existing UGFO Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Dec 2011 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Dec 2012 Expected completion date As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Jul 2012 Jul 2012 --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract
Table 3.1 Available fibre optic links (contd) FO Link 70 71 Kotmale Region 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Southern Region 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 Approx. route (km) 21.0 89.0 24.1 25.0 24.4 10.0 60.0 17.0 33.3 48.1 30.0 28.0 1.6 0.0 34.0 40.0 38.0 35.0 19.0 40.0 44.2 52.0 8.0
Region
From Rantambe Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Badulla Polpitiya Seethawake Athurugiriya Pannipitiya Panadura Horana Matugama Matugama Embilipitiya Matara Matara New Galle Embilipitiya Embilipitiya Balangoda Balangoda Balangoda Matara Matara-Embilipitiya (T-OFF)
To Mahiyanganaya Vaunativu Ampara Wallawaya Seethawake Kosgama Thulhiriya Panadura Horana Matugama Kukule Ambalangoda AES PP ACE Matara PP New Galle Ambalangoda Samanalawewa Hambantota Samanalawewa Rathnapura Deniyaya Embilipitiya Beliatta
Voltage (kV) 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 33 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132 132
Remark Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW Existing OPGW (?km) Ongoing OPGW Ongoing OPGW Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Under NSCC OPGW contract Ongoing OPGW
Expected completion date Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 Jul 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract --------------Aug 2012 Dec 2013 As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract As per NSCC OPGW contract Dec 2011
3.2.4.5 Upgrading of Existing PLC Links New digital PLC (DPLC) links shall be established as reinforcement of the existing PLC links via 132 kV O/H lines, by replacement of some of existing old analogue PLC equipment with the new digital one. The existing PLC terminals operate on nominal carrier frequency band between 50 and 500 kHz. The DPLC shall comply with IEC 60495 recommendation with channel capacity of at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9.6 k/s, up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 b/s (ITU-T recommendations V.24/V.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band. The new DPLC shall have the capability to fall back to analogue mode should the noise on the overhead power transmission lines is high. The following existing analogue PLC links are to be replaced with new digital PLC links: a. b. Badulla - Inginiyagala Kolonnawa - Kosgama
The Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands onto the new DPLC links. Necessary teleprotection signalling equipment or modules shall be provided by the Contractor to allow teleprotection signalling commands to be sent via the DPLC links. An engineering order wire facility capable of providing a dedicated telephone communication system for commissioning/maintenance purposes between PLCs shall also be provided. The new digital PLC equipment shall use existing frequency bands in accordance with the existing PLC frequency plan. The Contractor shall ensure that the new DPLC equipment to be supplied is fully compatible with the existing analogue PLC system. PLC equipment such as line traps, coupling capacitors and matching units will remain the same. The scope of work shall include dismantling of existing analogue PLC terminal units and delivering them to the Employers store and shifting the existing communication services to the new DPLC equipment. 3.2.4.6 Communication Facilities The new telecommunication network shall be capable of providing the necessary speech, data and teleprotection signalling channels at the following locations: Table 3.2 SDH Nodes No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 AES power plant Ambalangoda 132/33kV Ampara 132/33kV Aniyakanda 132kV Anuradhapura 132kV (old) Anuradhapura 220kV (new) Athurugiriya 132/33kV Badulla 132/33kV Balangoda 132/33kV Beliatta 132/33kV Biyagama 220kV Bolawatta 132/33kV Bowattenna PS Canyon PS CEB HQ Chunnakam 132/33kV STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 Location Existing SDH Node New SDH Node STM-1
No 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 Colombo City DCC Dehiwala 132kV Deniyaya 132kV
Location
Existing SDH Node
New SDH Node STM-1
FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 . FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others. . STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others. STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 . FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
Embilipitiya 132/33kV Galle 132/33kV (new) Habarana 132/33kV Hambantota 132/33kV Havelock Town 132/11kV Horana 132/33kV Katunayake 132/33kV Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kelanitissa 132kV Kelaniya 132/33kV Kerawelapitiya 132kV GSS Kerawelapitiya 220kV PS Kilinochchi 132/33kV Kiribathkumbura 132/33kV Kolonnawa 132/33kV Kosgama 132/33kV Kotmale 220kV PS Kotugoda 132kV (old) Kotugoda 220kV Kukule 132kV PS Kurunagala 132/33kV Laxapana 132/11kV PS (new) Madampe (Chillaw)132/33kV Mahiyangana Maho 132/33kV Maradana 132kV Matara 132/33kV Matugama 132/33kV Monaragala 132/33kV NSCC (National System Control Centre) ESCC (Existing System Control Centre) Naula 132/33kV Norochcholai 220kV (Puttlam PS) Nuwara Eliya 132/33kV
No 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Pallekele 132/33kV Panadura 132kV Pannala 132/33kV Pannipitiya 220kV
Location
Existing SDH Node STM-1 By Others. FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1
New SDH Node
Polpitiya 132/12.5kV PS Puttalam 132/33kV Randenigala PS Rantambe PS Ratmalana 132/33kV Ratnapura 132kV Samanalawewa PS Sapugaskande 132/11kV GSS Sapugaskande PS Seethawake 132/33kV Sri Jayawardanapura 132/33kV Thulhiriya 132/33kV Trincomalee 132/33kV Ukuwela PS Ukuwela GSS Upper Kotmale PS Valachchanai 132/33kV Vaunativu 132/33kV Vavuniya 132/33kV Veyangoda 220kV Victoria PS Wimalasurenda PS Wimalasurenda GSS TOTAL 37 STM-1 By Others STM-1 By Others . FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 STM-1 By Others FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 FOX515 STM-1 .
STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
STM-1
STM-1 STM-1 STM-1
STM-1
STM-1
STM-1 43
3.2.4.7 ICCP links between NSCC and Colombo City DCC Dual redundant ICCP (inter-control centre communication protocol) links shall be provided between the NSCC and DCC (Colombo City Distribution Control Centre) for the transfer of operational data. Each communication link shall initially cater for 4xE1 (i.e. 4x2048 kb/s) but can be upgraded to a higher speed at a later date if required. The Contractor shall determine the required speed of this link based upon the amount of operational data to be transferred between the NSCC SCADA system and DCC SCADA system. Details of the proposed ICCP links shall be included in the Bid. 3.2.4.8 Communication Requirements at Power Stations / Substations Communication facilities to be provided by the new telecommunication system are: (1) For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via fibre optic links the minimal communication requirements shall be as follows at each site:
a.
Two 64 kb/s data channels for connection of new RTU at the substation to the NSCC. The speed of data channels shall be able to be upgraded to nx64 kb/s if it is necessary to meet the performance requirements. . Two V.24/V.28 data channels for connection of existing RTU at the substation to the NSCC. Three voice communication channels. Independently routed teleprotection signalling channels as required. TCP/IP Ethernet communication link to NSCC via gateways for non-critical substation data. Four spare 64 kb/s data channels for future use. Non-critical substation data communication link based on IEC60870-5-104 should be available as an option at a later date.
b.
c. d. e.
f. g. (2)
For sites that are connected to the telecommunication network via transmission media with limited capacity such as PLCs, the requirements shall be as follows at each existing site: a. b. c. Two V 24/V28 data channels for connection of RTUs at the substation with NSCC. Two voice communication channels. Independently routed teleprotection signalling.
SCADA data communications protocol shall be based on IEC60870-5-101 and/or 104. In addition, TCP/IP communication link is required for connection to the Substation Automation System (SAS). This link will be used to allow remote access to substation data that would be inappropriate to transmit over the SCADA links. For example fault waveforms from the substation protection equipment. This link may also be used to remotely reconfigure the SAS database or to adjust protection relay settings. To ensure secure and reliable transmission at all times, teleprotection signalling for first and second main protection associated with existing circuits shall be implemented using separate multiplexing equipment and routed via physically segregated paths wherever possible. 3.2.5 Telecommunication Management System
A telecommunication management system (TMS) shall be provided to monitor the new SDH network performance and status and to make alternative routing and channel allocation changes as necessary. The TMS shall enable the telecommunication network be configured in such a way that there shall be a preferred routing for normal operation for speech, data and teleprotection signalling communications, and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route, and vice versa. The switching and channel reallocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users and shall cause no loss of information. The TMS shall have, as a minimum, the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. User friendly computer based network management. Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities. Ability to integrate with other propriety equipment sub-management systems. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. End to end circuit management. Multi-user capability. No single point of failure in the design.
h. i. j.
Compliance to international standards such as ITU-T. Security management. Reports management
The TMS shall include facilities that enable the system to be extended without interruption to existing services. In addition to monitoring and supervising the SDH network, the TMS shall also be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. b. c. d. e. PDH equipment. Digital PLC equipment. Analogue PLC equipment. Teleprotection signalling equipment. PAX equipment.
A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. However, it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. Alternatively integration of the new SDH network components into the existing TMS provided by ABB. Details of how this is achieved shall be fully described in the Bid. 3.2.5.1 TMS Control Centre Equipment Dual redundant application/communication servers shall be provided at the NSCC. Human machine interface (HMI) at the NSCC shall include two operator workstations, one black/white laser printer and one laser colour printer. The application/communications servers shall be interconnected with the operator workstations and printers via a dual LAN. 3.2.5.2 Time Synchronisation The TMS shall interface with the master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the TMS central computer system. The TMS central computer system shall in turn initiate a regular time synchronisation procedure to maintain time synchronisation of the remote network elements. The Bidder shall provide details of the time synchronisation procedure and method of interfacing with the master clock system. 3.2.6 Teleprotection Signalling Equipment
Overhead lines that are to be fitted with OPGW currently use PLC links for transmission of teleprotection signalling commands. The following PLC links are using old and obsolete PLC equipment and the Contractor shall transfer all existing telecommunication services including teleprotection signalling commands from the PLC links onto the new fibre optic network. a. b. c. d. e. f. Kiribathkumbura -Kurunegala New Laxapana - Canyon PS Badulla - Rantambe Old Laxapana - Nuwara Eliya Embilipitiya - Samanalawewa Balangoda - Samanalawewa
The Contractor shall provide necessary teleprotection signalling equipment including all necessary ancillary equipment so that existing teleprotection signalling commands can be transmitted via the new fibre optic network for the above PLC links:
The Bidder shall include details of the proposed teleprotection signalling system in the Bid. The existing PLC equipment shall be decommissioned, removed and returned to the Employers store. 3.2.7 Telephone Network
3.2.7.1 Telephone Exchange Equipment Some of the existing telephone exchanges are old and operating at their design capacity and these are to be replaced with new modern telephone exchanges. New private automatic exchanges (PAX) are proposed at the following locations. a. b. c. d. NSCC. Kotugoda. Kotmale. Laxapana.
The new telephone exchanges shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) exchanges. The capacity of the new NSCC PAX shall be as follows: a. b. c. 500 subscriber lines. 20 PAX-PAX tie lines. 150 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels.
The capacity of the new PAX at the substations shall be as follows: a. b. c. 200 subscriber lines. 5 PAX-PAX tie lines. 50 simultaneous subscriber to subscriber communication channels.
The old exchanges as well as the existing PLTS in the SCC shall be decommissioned, removed and returned to the Employers store. The new telephone system shall be capable of providing at least similar PLTS functions such as hot line telephone communications between Control Centres and Grid Substations/Power Stations. All necessary interfaces shall be provided to enable hotline and party line functions are available in the new telephone system. A voice recording equipment and a main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided at the NSCC. The voice recorder shall record all voice communications on the telephone network. The PAX shall automatically use available alternative routes in the event of faults or congestion. It should be possible to preset individual channels to bypass some PAXs on the trunk routes to reduce the number of intermediate steps on the long haul routes. The Bidder shall comment on the effect of failures within the PAX on the integrity of communication channels routed through the PAX. The existing telephone extension lines, telephone numbering system and network shall be modified according to the Employers new telephone network requirements. Drawing No. TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 shows the proposed telephone network. The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed telephone network and method of providing hot line and party line functions. 3.2.7.2 Voice Recording Equipment A PC based voice recording equipment shall be provided and be capable of interfacing with the new NSCC PAX to automatically log all telephone communications between operators in the NSCC and other personnel. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date.
All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s). The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. b. c. User friendly. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable. Voice playback facility. Transfer to tape cassettes and other archive media . Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc).
d.
e. f. g.
The digital voice recording equipment shall have sufficient built-in redundancy to prevent a single point of failure causing the equipment to malfunction. 3.2.8 Power Supply Requirements
In general, the new telecommunication equipment shall be designed to operate from a nominal 48 Vdc, positive earthed supply. However, the TMS central computers, operator workstations and printers that are to be installed in the NSCC shall be designed to operate from a 240 Vac uninterruptible power supply (UPS) system. As majority of new telecommunication equipment will be powered from existing power supply systems, details of the anticipated power requirements and power consumption of the new telecommunication system shall be included in the Bid. However at some sites, a new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be required. The Contractor shall liaise with other parties to ensure that there is sufficient space and suitable environmental conditions for the installation of the 48 Vdc power supply system. 3.2.8.1 At NSCC The new telecommunication equipment (excluding the TMS central computers, operator workstations and printers) shall be powered from a new 48 Vdc power supply system. The TMS workstations and printers shall be powered from a 240 Vac UPS. 3.2.8.2 At Existing Substations and Power Stations The new telecommunication equipment shall be powered from the existing 48 Vdc power supply system. 3.2.8.3 At Employers HQ Building A new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be provided at the Employers HQ Building by the Contractor to support the new telecommunication equipment. The new 48 Vdc power supply system shall be sized to meet the electrical loading of the telecommunication equipment plus 100 per cent spare capacity. 3.2.9 Equipment Locations
The majority of the telecommunication equipment will be located at the NSCC and at existing substation and power station sites. The Bidder shall include the supply and installation of all necessary interconnecting cables required for the proper installation of the telecommunication equipment in the NSCC and substation sites.
In general, new telecommunication equipment will be located adjacent to existing telecommunication equipment or in a location previously occupied by existing equipment. The telecommunication equipment will also be co-located with existing or new NSCC RTU and equipment supplied by others. Co-ordination with other contractors shall therefore be required to ensure that the equipment cubicles are arranged in an orderly manner to facilitate ease of equipment identification and access for maintenance. 3.2.10 Transition from Old to the New Telecommunication System The Contractor shall determine the method, timing and phasing of the removal of existing telecommunication equipment that are to be replaced by the new telecommunication equipment. The removal of existing telecommunication equipment shall cause minimal disruption to the power system operation. The discarded equipment shall be returned to the Employer to be used as spares. A detailed method and programme for the removal of existing telecommunication equipment and transition from the old telecommunication network to the new telecommunication network shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer. The proposal shall also include any anticipated duration of outages required for the installation, testing and commissioning work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications and re-allocations of channel assignment required to ensure that the network can be developed and be capable of providing the necessary communication facilities and security required from one phase to the next. 3.2.11 Interfaces with Other Systems/Equipment The telecommunication system shall be equipped with the necessary hardware including interconnection cabling and software to enable interfaces with the following systems to be made: a. b. c. NSCC SCADA system. Fibre optic cables (supplied under the NSCC OPGW Contract). Master GPS clock system at the NSCC for time synchronisation of the telecommunication management system and telephone exchange equipment. Existing power supply systems that are to be utilised for the new telecommunication equipment. Existing fault recorders. Existing Substation Automation Systems. (SAS) Existing telephone exchanges Existing ABB FOX515 SDH equipment New SDH equipment (supplied under the ongoing Station Projects) PMC Interface-Protection Monitoring Computer Interface
d.
e. f. g. h. i. j.
The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving and co-ordinating with other contractors or Authorities to ensure that the interfaces and the final installation between the telecommunication system with the other systems are fully compatible both physically and operationally. Failure to co-ordinate or delay in providing or timely requisition of the necessary interfacing information/ requirements shall be at the risk of the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear any costs which may arise as a result thereof for the provision of modification to other works which are involved with or subject to another contract. 3.2.12 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) As the telecommunication equipment will be installed in substations and power stations it must be able to co-exist and operate within the electromagnetic environment with adequate immunity to any electromagnetic disturbances in order that operations will be free of malfunction and safe. Equipment and system designs proposed by the Bidder shall take into account the requirements outlined in the relevant internationally recognised Standards and Regulations to ensure electromagnetic compatibility.
The design shall take account of all aspects of EMC including, for example, circuit design; equipment and cable screening; filtering; grounding, bonding, etc.. The inclusion of EMC requirements in the equipment/system design shall not cause any degradation of quality, performance or loss of function.
3.3 3.3.1
FIBRE OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM General Requirements
3.3.1.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a high bandwidth digital fibre optic communication (FOC) system and associated works. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, installation of SDH and primary access multiplexing equipment, digital cross connection units including necessary optical line terminal equipment, optical repeaters if required, optical fibre distribution frames and patch panels, handheld maintenance terminal units, equipment cubicles and enclosures, service telephone handsets, all associated connectors, interconnecting cables including pigtails and patch cords, power supplies, and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. The digital fibre optic communication backbone shall be based on the SDH technology and network architecture. The proposed SDH system shall be capable of interworking with lower order PDH systems. The FOC system shall be designed for digital transmission using single mode optical fibres and shall conform to the ITU-T recommendations G.703, G.704, G.707, G.783 and G.957. The multiplexing structure of the proposed FOC system shall allow existing PDH signals to be carried over the synchronous network and shall permit the extraction of individual circuits from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole system. Cross connect facilities shall be provided to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. All electrical and electronic equipment supplied shall be properly grounded and shielded to protect the equipment and operating personnel from effects of induced currents and voltages. The equipment shall be rack mounted and be of modular design construction and be housed in approved equipment enclosures. The enclosures shall be provided with lockable doors. The equipment shall be suitable for operation in a substation with harsh environment as is found on site and with high electromagnetic interference, be highly reliable and provide secure communication for real time signals such as voice, SCADA, teleprotection and status/control signals. Where the performance of the equipment could be susceptible to electromagnetic interference, the Bidder shall state the maximum level of such interference, which will not cause equipment malfunctioning. Built-in test and self-monitoring facilities shall be provided to enable maintenance personnel to break-in and/or make bridging measurements without degradation or interruption of service. In order to facilitate maintenance work and trouble shooting, the fibre optic equipment shall also have remote loopback test facilities. All test loops and loopbacks shall conform to ITU-T recommendation X.150. In order to maximise the benefit of the telecommunication network and to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the FOC system, the system shall include network management capability so as to facilitate system performance monitoring, alarm and fault monitoring, system configuration, bandwidth management, dynamic allocation, automatic re-routing, prioritising of channels, testing and maintenance facilities etc. A redundant configuration for ensuring minimum down time in case of equipment failure shall be provided. Any failure shall produce automatic switch-over to the back-up unit and initiation of an alarm. Bidders shall provide detailed design philosophies for equipment and routing redundancy. The FOC system shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. 3.3.2 Loss Budget Calculations
The Contractor shall carry out loss budget calculations for each fibre optic link to ensure the FOC system meets the requirements of this Specification. The calculations shall include both a worst case and a typical loss budget calculation, using the respective maximum and average attenuation predicted for each component in the system. The optical power budget calculation shall take into account of the following parameters: a. b. Mean launch power. Receiver sensitivity.
c. d. e. f.
System design penalties. Margin for age degradation and temperature. Connector losses. Maximum installed cable loss.
System performance calculations shall include a minimum safety margin of 3 dB. Preliminary loss budget calculations shall be included in the Bid. Detailed calculations shall be submitted during the detail design stage for the approval of the Employer. 3.3.3 Safety
The FOC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment. The system shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provision for the safety shut-off of the optical source to prevent exposure to laser light during installation, maintenance and repair work. The possibility of automatic laser shit down adjustment through the telecommunication management system should be supported. Laser products shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60825 specification. All metal parts, metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. 3.3.4 Functional Requirements
3.3.4.1 General The FOC system shall have the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. High operational security and reliability. High quality transmission in accordance with ITU-T recommendations. Flexibility for adaptation to the desired transmission capacity. Integrated monitoring facilities. Comprehensive operation and fault diagnosis. Redundancy capability where required. Direct and easy access to the transmitted base band signal. Direct connection to multiplexing equipment employing pulse code modulation (PCM) techniques. Capability of routing TCP/IP traffic. Support Q3 interface in accordance with ITU-T G.773. Capable of integrating/upgrading with existing system.
i. j. k.
The FOC system shall be required to interface with the telecommunication management system (TMS) for the purpose of centralised supervision and monitoring of the telecommunication system performance. The TMS shall enable circuits to be automatically re-routed in the event of a trunk failure and/or traffic congestion occurring anywhere on the telecommunication network. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to enable integration with the TMS shall be provided under the Contract. The FOC system shall be capable of normal operation with or without the TMS. As far as practicable all fibre optic equipment shall self diagnose internal fault conditions and separately alarm their occurrence. The designs shall also include diagnostic test facilities to allow step-by-step checking of the performance of the equipment. 3.3.4.2 System Capacity and Performance The SDH network backbone shall be designed initially with transmission rate of 155.52 Mb/s (STM-1).
The system shall be capable of being upgraded to the next hierarchy level, for example from STM-1 to STM-4, by exchanging appropriate modules at a later date, to provide a higher transmission rate using the same optical fibres and repeater locations, if any. The overall mean equivalent bit error rate (BER) of the SDH system between any two end terminals shall not be worse than 10-9 under normal operating conditions. The typical error rate for each traffic path shall be stated. End to end error performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITUT recommendation G.826. The automatic switch-over to standby transmitter criterion shall be BER>10 -9. Switching shall also be possible manually for maintenance purposes. The switchover shall be transparent to the data stream. Jitter performance on STM-1 interfaces shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendations G.813 and G.825. The FOC system shall include provision for overcoming impairments caused by transmission delays. Details of the performance of the proposed FOC system shall be included in the Bid. The FOC system shall preserve configuration data during power failure or management connection failure. During power or management connection failure alarm logs and performance monitoring statistics shall be preserved. Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively, and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. In addition, details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic communication network shall be included in the Bid. 3.3.4.3 Service Channels Each optical line terminal equipment shall provide at least two analogue and four digital service channels for voice communications and testing purposes between any two terminal stations, between any terminal and repeater station and between any two repeater stations (if applicable) exclusively for the use of installation and servicing personnel. The 64 kb/s digital service channels shall be suitable for any data transmission requirements. Each terminal equipment shall have a handset for voice communications. 3.3.5 SDH Equipment
3.3.5.1 General The SDH equipment shall perform both multiplexing and optical line terminating functions. The aggregate ports of the SDH equipment shall be duplicated and shall be capable of operating in a 1 + 1 protected mode as part of a point to point link, or as an east/west mode when used in a drop and insert chain in a ring. All features and functions of the SDH equipment shall be readily software configurable to suit operational requirements of the SDH system. The SDH equipment shall be capable of being configured as a hub, cross connection, repeater, add/drop multiplexer or terminal multiplexer. The multiplexing structure of the proposed SDH equipment shall permit the extraction of individual 2 Mb/s tributaries from high capacity systems without having to demultiplex the whole STM-1 frame. The equipment shall provide interfacing and multiplexing for broadband, wideband and narrowband applications. The SDH equipment shall be equipped with a range of plug-in tributary interfaces to support a comprehensive range of plesiochronous and synchronous tributaries including 2 Mb/s, 8 Mb/s, 34 Mb/s, 140 Mb/s, and from STM-1 operation. Cross connection levels shall include nx64 kb/s, P12, VC-12, VC3 and VC-4 to enable interconnections between different channels and network components. The SDH equipment shall be capable of upgradeable from STM-1 to STM-4 without disruption to existing traffic. The capacity shall be 63 E1 (2Mb/s) signals for STM-1 and 252 E1s for STM-4. Compact unit design and flexible shelf architecture shall allow for housing of various plug-in units. Each SDH equipment shall comprise, but not be limited to, the following functional elements: a. b. c. Optical line interface. Electrical line interface. Tributary module.
d. e. f. g. h. i.
Switching unit. Control and alarm functions. Engineering order wire (service telephone) unit. Service data interface. Power supply unit. Centralized function.
SDH equipment shall be located on a fibre optic backbone system that serves the major facilities within the system. 3.3.5.2 Optical Line Interface The SDH equipment shall be capable of supporting the following optical interfaces: a. b. S-1.1, L1.1 and L-1.2 STM-1 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G.957. S-4.1, L4.1 and L-4.2 STM-4 interfaces in accordance with ITU-T G.957.
The optical interface shall carry out the parallel to serial conversion of traffic from the switch unit into a STM-1 155 Mb/s stream. The optical section shall convert electrical signals into an optical signal for transmission over an optical fibre and perform a reciprocal function on the receive side. Each optical line system shall be suitable for duplex operation at optical wavelength of 1310 nm or 1550 nm over 2 optical fibres. The electro-optic converter shall have a power output suited to the requirements of the fibre optic links and shall be suitable for transmission length of at least 120 km without any use of intermediate repeaters. All transmitter equipment shall use the same laser type, to simplify spares and maintenance aspects, with optical amplifiers or attenuators provided to suit the optical performance requirements for each fibre optic link as far as is practical. The optical source shall have minimum life of at least 50 000 hours at an ambient temperature of +50C. The transmitter shall have internal diode current and output power monitoring, which will provide status indications. The design of the transmitter shall be such that under fault conditions, the launch power shall be significantly reduced to a safe level. It is preferable that the optical transmit and receive equipment are interconnected in such a way that a broken fibre will automatically switch off the optical transmitters at both ends of the section. Transmitters which output optical power of sufficient intensity to cause hazard to health shall have mechanical interlocks to isolate the diode supply current during the installation or maintenance of the equipment. Sign warning of possible hazard shall be permanently fixed at all appropriate points. Transmitters shall provide the continuous transmission of data timing information. The optical receiver equipment shall have a bit error rate performance suited to the requirements of the network. The receiver shall automatically accommodate signal level changes due to temperature effects and ageing of the system. Where necessary receiver optical attenuators shall be provided to optimise link performance. It shall be possible to use an optical line interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an Add/Drop multiplexer. 3.3.5.3 Electrical Line Interface The equipment shall support standard electrical tributary interfaces in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.703. The electrical interface shall perform the same electrical functions as the optical interface unit. STM-1 electrical line signals shall be in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.709. It shall be possible to use an electrical interface unit as a tributary module to enable STM-1 signals to be terminated when the equipment is configured as an Add/Drop mutiplexer. A 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet LAN interface shall also be supported.
3.3.5.4 Tributary Module The tributary module shall perform the selective extraction/insertion of tributaries to and from the STM-1 signal whilst enabling other traffic to pass through without interruption. The tributary module shall be capable of supporting tributary data rates of 2 Mb/s, 8 Mb/s. 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s. The data from each tributary shall be mapped into virtual containers and tributary units in accordance with ITU-T recommendation G.774 which shall make up the SDH payload before being sent to the switch unit. 3.3.5.5 Switching Unit A switching unit shall be provided to allow traffic from any line interface unit to be connected to any tributary port or any other line port. In addition it shall allow full cross connections between tributaries. The switching unit shall provide the change over facility from faulty units to the standby units to achieve 1+1 protection. The switching shall be done within the multiplexer without using the telecommunication management system. 3.3.5.6 Control and Alarm Functions Comprehensive control and alarm functions shall be included to provide performance monitoring, alarm and fault monitoring, system configuration, bandwidth management, dynamic allocation, automatic rerouting, prioritising of channels, testing and maintenance facilities etc. These functions shall interface to the telecommunication management system to allow the control and alarm monitoring of the equipment to be carried out locally and remotely. The equipment shall be provided with a fault location and supervisory system to monitor the status and alarms of the SDH equipment. The fault location and supervision system shall provide in-service bit error monitoring facilities. The following alarms shall be provided on the SDH equipment as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. Optical transmit power low. Laser current high. Bit error rate (BER) threshold high. Optical receive level low. Multiplex input fail. Loss of clock signal. Distance alarms. Power supply fail or out of limits. Loss of frame synchronisation. Failure of check bits.
An alarm monitoring system shall be provided to monitor and display the locally derived alarms and if applicable adjacent repeater station alarms, showing the location of each alarm displayed. The system shall be capable of providing details of origin, date and time of the occurrence of alarms. It shall be possible to change alarm severity and threshold levels manually. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. The alarm monitoring system shall form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. The alarm concept shall conform to ITU-T recommendation G.784. Test points shall be available on each unit to help in failure diagnosis. Digital data streams shall be monitored at all levels. Equipment power supplies shall be monitored and a fuse alarm indication shall be provided for each cabinet or rack.
3.3.5.7 Engineer Order Wire An engineers order wire (EOW) system providing call, ring and speech facilities shall be provided with each SDH multiplexer. The system shall operate on a service channel in the STM-1 bit stream. The system shall be configured as an omnibus circuit, with a telephone handset, selective calling to reach any station along the route and an audible alert provided at each terminal and repeater site. 3.3.5.8 Service Data Interface Means shall be provided for accessing auxiliary channels using spare bytes in the SDH overhead bit stream to enable management signals from additional equipment such as primary access multiplexers to be transmitted over the fibre optic transmission system. The number, bit rate and type interfaces available shall be stated by the Bidder. 3.3.5.9 Power Supply Unit The power supply unit shall be capable of being paralleled with another power supply unit in the same shelf to provide redundancy in case of a single unit failure. Power supply units located in the same shelf shall be capable of maintaining shelf power in the event of single power unit failure. Each power supply unit shall have fuse protection and alarm reporting/indications as standard features. 3.3.5.10 Centralized Function
The SDH equipment shall have comprehensive monitoring and high capacity management channels to facilitate centralised network controls and maintenance through the network. 3.3.6 Primary Access Multiplexing Equipment
3.3.6.1 General Primary access multiplexing equipment shall be provided as necessary and shall comply with the relevant ITU-T recommendations. The digital interface of the multiplexing equipment shall be of a time division multiplex signal conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G.703 to enable direct connection to the SDH optical multiplexing equipment. All primary access multiplexing, demultiplexing and signal processing and conditioning equipment shall be provided to interconnect SCADA, teleprotection and telecommunication equipment to the fibre optic communication system. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the types and quantities of primary multiplexing equipment provided shall be capable of meeting the required number of communications channels specified, including redundancy requirements. All equipment shall be wired for their maximum capacity. Future extension shall be possible by simple field installation of appropriate modules. 3.3.6.2 Multiplexer The primary digital multiplexing equipment shall be capable of combining 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels with standard frequency ranges of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz into a digital 2048 kb/s data stream conforming to the ITU-T recommendation G.703. The multiplexer shall provide means to drop and insert individual 64 kb/s signals and allocate them to determined time slots in the 2 Mbps streams. Path protection on 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s shall be supported. The types and quantities of the cards for the 30 PCM 64 kb/s channels shall be supplied so as to meet the requirements of the Contract. Communication interfaces shall be capable of being made available by means of insertion of appropriate plug-in cards into the multiplexer rack. The FOC system shall be capable of supporting the following user interfaces: a. b. c. d. e. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency. 2-wire to 2-wire voice frequency. 2-wire E&M signalling. 4-wire E&M signalling. 2-wire with ring down suitable for a remote subscriber telephone connection.
f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
2-wire loop disconnect signalling. 4-wire to 4-wire voice frequency with FSK modem and channel fail detection. Data interface suitable for multirate synchronous/asynchronous data signalling. 64 kb/s data channel according to ITU-T G.703. 2 Mb/s data interface according to ITU-T G.703. TCP/IP Ethernet communication. Alarm collection interface.
It is preferable that a channel card should contain all the components necessary to enable the same card to cater for as many different types of operation as possible by means of software configuration both locally and from a remote site. Details of the channel cards to be supplied by the Contractor shall be included in the Bid. Test points shall be provided on the channel cards for level measurement and adjustment. A suitable rack mounted level meter shall be provided at each station with the necessary test leads and patching cords. The multiplexing equipment shall have the following features: a. Sample rate for each channel shall be 8 kHz with maximum deviation of 50 parts per million, with 8 coding bits per sample, giving 256 quantisation levels, resulting in a 64 kb/s rate for each channel. Encoding law shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T G.771. Jitter characteristics shall be equal to or better than ITU-T G.703. The 2 Mb/s interface shall be 2048 kb/s 50 parts per million with a HDB3 line code conforming to the ITU-T G.703.
b. c. d.
Signal synchronising facilities are required to enable the system to be implemented effectively, and facilities for connection of unused multiplexer inputs to appropriate signals as specified by the manufacturer shall be provided. In addition, details of how the Bidder intends to perform synchronisation across the fibre optic transmission network shall be included in his Bid. 3.3.6.3 Alarm Indications The PCM multiplexing equipment shall have extensive alarm monitoring facilities. In the event of failure, appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. Alarm indications shall be clearly displayed through LEDs on the front panel of the module. It shall also be possible to remotely display some of the alarms locally at that site via voltage free contacts. All PCM multiplexing equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. BER threshold high. Failure of 64 kb/s interface. Multiplex input fail. Loss of clock signal. Remote alarms. Power supply fail or out of limits.
3.3.6.4 User Interfaces User interfaces shall be provided by the Contractor to accommodate various voice frequency (VF) and data channels requirements. The user interfaces shall allow direct connection to SCADA, teleprotection and telecommunication equipment.
Any special interfaces which are considered necessary for the provision of a full and complete installation of the telecommunication system shall be included in the offer and full details shall be supplied with the Bid. 3.3.6.4.1 Telephony Interface
4-wire voice frequency channel interfaces shall comprise 600 ohm balanced circuits with a bandwidth of 300 Hz to 3400 Hz. VF signal levels shall be adjustable within the range: Input: -16 to +1 dBm
Output: -7 to +7 dBm E & M signalling interfaces shall be provided on each 4-wire VF channel. 2-wire analogue subscriber interfaces shall permit direct connection of subscriber sets to the PAX equipment. Interfaces shall comprise balanced circuits with E & M signalling and recall facilities and shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) signalling. Telephone ringing supplies shall form part of the interface equipment. Signalling (E & M) channel interfaces shall be suitable for a maximum signalling rate of 300 baud. The interface shall be capable of operating from an external power supply with either positive or negative polarity grounding and a maximum potential of 100 V. The E-lead shall be capable of switching currents up to 100 mA. The external connections of both VF and E & M circuits shall be isolated from the associated board circuits. Where modems are connected to communication cables, barrier transformers shall be supplied for protection against induced overvoltages. 3.3.6.4.2 Data Interface
Data interfaces of the following types shall be capable of being made available by insertion of appropriate cards into the multiplexer rack for direct connection to computer systems. The following data interfaces shall be supported as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T G.703. Multirate 0.6 to 64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T X.21/V.11. Multirate 0 to 19.2 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.24/V.28. nx64 kb/s data interface according to ITU-T V.35. 2 Mb/s HDB3 coded signals on line interfaces conforming to ITU-T G.703 using 120 ohms balanced impedance, with co-directional interface synchronisation.
Sub-multiplexing up to 8 low speed (0 to 1 200 baud) asynchronous data inputs over a single 64 kb/s communication channel shall be possible. 3.3.6.4.3 Teleprotection Signalling Interface
The FOC system shall be capable of facilitating the transmission of teleprotection signalling commands associated with the power transmission network. Provision shall be made by the Contractor to enable direct connection to the teleprotection equipment for transmission of remote protection signalling/tripping commands. The transmission of protection signalling commands shall preferably be utilising a complete 2 Mb/s channel according to ITU-T G.703. The protection channel interface units shall operate regular loop tests to ensure their readiness for operation. In the event of a fault being detected an alarm shall be raised and the protection command inhibited. The maximum signal transmission time of the FOC system over any fibre optic links shall not exceed 2 milliseconds. This signal transmission time shall exclude any delay times of the teleprotection equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that the routing and rerouting of the SDH transmission network do not compromise the operating time of the protection signalling equipment.
3.3.6.4.4
Ethernet Interface
The FOC system shall be capable of supporting a 10/100 Mb/s BaseT Ethernet interface complying with IEEE standard 802. 3.3.7 Cross Connection Equipment
Cross connection equipment shall be provided as necessary to enable interconnections between different channels and network components be made. Cross connection functions available shall include pass through, broadcast, non-blocking, add/drop and loopback. It shall cross-connect 64 kb/s as well as 2 M/s (ITU-T recommendations G.703 unframed and G.704 framed) and VC12. The Bidder shall state the cross connect capacity for high density application. 3.3.8 Optical Regenerative Repeaters
3.3.8.1 General It is desirable that no intermediate repeaters are employed. However, if the distance involved so requires, the Contractor shall provide all necessary optical regenerative repeaters and associated plant together with detailed calculations justifying the need to have intermediate repeaters The locations for repeaters shall be determined by the Contractor and details of equipment locations shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Employer. Optical regenerative repeaters, where required, shall be connected to the fibres of the optical cable at the repeater sites by means of detachable optical connectors. Each spare fibre shall be equipped with an optical connector. Each two-way repeater shall comprise an optical receiver, a regenerator circuit, and an optical transmitter. The optical output level shall be maintained relatively constant with variation in the optical input level due to fibre length, and with variation in power supply voltage and/or ambient temperature. Each optical regenerative repeater shall be totally compatible with other optical repeaters and optical line system described in this Specification. Except for minor level adjustments, each optical line repeater shall be mechanically, electrically and optically interchangeable. The repeater shall be equipped with facilities for sending alarm signals to the optical line system to indicate a fault condition. Proper operation of the repeaters shall be continuously monitored during service. The optical repeaters shall be housed in a weatherproof enclosure. The enclosure shall be one of two types: a. The first type shall be suitable for mounting on overhead line towers. The enclosure shall be weatherproof, vandal resistant and equipped with all accessories necessary for securing to the tower and for grounding any metal parts. b. The second type shall be suitable for use underground. The enclosure shall be weatherproof and suitable for installation in a manhole. If the enclosure is metal, cathodic protection shall be incorporated where corrosion would otherwise occur. Both types on enclosure shall be of sufficient size to meet minimum bending radius requirement of the fibre optic cable, and to accommodate duplex repeaters and all necessary ancillary equipment including storage for sufficient length of fibre for at least 10 future splices. 3.3.8.2 Alarm indications The following alarms shall be provided on the optical regenerative repeater equipment: a. Loss of incoming signal or loss of frame alignment. b. Optical transmit power low. c. Laser current high. d. BER threshold high (for both directions of transmission).
e. Optical receive level low. f. Switch-over to standby transmitter.
g. Fault in supervision channel. h. Power supply fail or out of limits. The alarms from the repeaters shall be transmitted to the terminal ends. At the terminal ends, the repeater alarms shall be monitored and displayed on the alarm monitoring system. The alarm monitoring system of the repeaters shall also form an integral part of the telecommunication management system. 3.3.9 Power Supplies Requirements
The fibre optic transmission equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the fibre optic transmission equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the fibre optic transmission system shall be individually fused. 3.3.10 Optical Fibre Distribution Frames / Patch Panels Optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be provided as necessary by the Contractor to facilitate the termination of fibres, testing and isolation of both the optical fibre cable and fibre optic terminal equipment, and to provide interface and/or cross-connect facilities between the digital multiplex equipment. The optical fibre distribution frames or patch panels shall be mounted at a maximum height of 1.5m above ground level so to facilitate ease of maintenance. Sufficient space shall be available on the frame to allow ease of access and minimise the possibility of interference or damage to fibres carrying traffic during maintenance testing on the back-up or spare fibres. Optical fibres shall be terminated by detachable connectors, complying with the requirements of IEC 60874, at the optical fibre distribution frame and shall be properly labelled with fibre identity, destination or source, go or return. It shall be possible to connect each optical fibre to the appropriate point on any terminating equipment. Fixed couplers shall be provided for each fibre comprising a link. The following basic functions of the fibre distribution frame are required: a. b. c. d. Circuit re-routing/jumpering. Circuit disconnection. Patching and test connections. Bridging measurements.
Plug-in connection shall be used, and the transmit and received direction of the transmission shall be segregated. The optical fibre tail cables and connections shall be substantially protected from possibility of damage due to maintenance or installation activity. Facilities shall be provided for termination of any metal cores within the fibre cables. The capacity of the fibre distribution frame shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity of the fibre optic communication system plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. All fibre distribution frames shall have a earth connection provided, and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising.
3.4 3.4.1
TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Introduction
This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a telecommunication management system (TMS) and associated works. This Specification covers all design and engineering, central computer system including system and applications software and human machine interfaces, interfacing equipment, handheld maintenance terminal units, equipment cubicles, interconnection cabling, power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. The TMS will be used for administering the management activities associated with the telecommunication system so as to maximise the benefits of the telecommunication network and to ensure that the telecommunication resources are utilised efficiently. Technical descriptions detailing the TMS performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The TMS equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. The telecommunication management equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.4.2 Functional requirements
3.4.2.1 General A telecommunication management system shall be provided by the Contractor to monitor and supervise the telecommunication network. The TMS shall have, as a minimum, the following management capabilities: a. b. c. d. e. Configuration management. Fault management. Performance management. Security management. Reports management.
The TMS shall be capable of monitoring the following telecommunication equipment: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. SDH equipment. PDH equipment. Digital PLC equipment. Analogue PLC equipment. Teleprotection equipment. PAX equipment. 48 Vdc battery and battery charger system.
A common integrated TMS for monitoring all telecommunication equipment is the preferred choice. However, it is recognised that not all the existing and new telecommunication equipment can be integrated in the TMS and that equipment monitoring can only be carried out via voltage free alarm contacts. All necessary hardware and software interfaces to allow integration with existing and new telecommunication equipment for alarm management via external voltage free contacts shall be provided under the Contract. Details of how the various telecommunication equipment can be integrated and monitored by the TMS shall be included in the Bid. The telecommunication management system shall provide equipment status and alarms, system telemetry, configuration and resource management, and command controls. The TMS shall also provide the necessary information to assist the Employer in the operations and maintenance of the
telecommunication resources of the telecommunication system including planning, new installations, detection of degraded circuits and system performance, the diagnosis of problems, the implementation of remedial actions and the allocation or reallocation of telecommunication resources. 3.4.2.2 System Architecture and Design Concept The TMS functional and informational architecture and physical architecture shall be in compliance with ITU-T recommendation M.3010. The system design concept shall allow a user to set up, via software configuration, a preferred routing to be used for normal operation for speech and data communications between the Control Centre and remote sites, and an alternative routing in the event that there is a failure and/or traffic congestion on the preferred routing. All necessary switching and channel re-allocations for speech, data and teleprotection communications shall be automatic during the changeover from the preferred route to the alternative route, and vice versa. The switching and channel re-allocations from active to standby route shall be transparent to the users. The features to be provided by the telecommunication management system shall include at least the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Computer based system with multi-user capability. On-line help facilities and easy to use graphical user interfaces. On-line testing of any transmission network components. Real time status of every individual network component. Remote control and reconfiguration of the network. Historical and statistical information on network alarms and signal quality. Automatic generation of network configuration data. Interfaces for proprietary network monitoring sub-management systems. End to end circuit and allocation management capability. Back up facility. Hard key licence. Ability to readily export/import files to Microsoft Windows based software packages such as Word or Excel for TMS report presentation.
3.4.2.3 System Performance The response times required for the TMS are stated in Technical Schedules. The up date time of a visual display unit (VDU) screen shall be measured from the final action of the operator to request the display, to the time of the relevant page, updated with real-time data, appearing in full on the operator workstation. 3.4.2.4 Management Functions The TMS shall be capable of supporting a wide variety of management functions to cover planning, installation, operations, administration, maintenance and provisioning of telecommunication network and services. It shall be possible to upgrade the TMS to include accounting and business management functions, at a future date, for billing, administration of customers as well as business planning and forecasting. The TMS shall provide standard management interfaces, such as Q3 interface based on ITU-T recommendations M.3100 and G.774, which enables easy integration with other management systems. 3.4.2.4.1 Configuration Management
The configuration management shall include, as a minimum, the following functions: a. b. System set up and configuration of the network elements. Creation of end to end circuits and paths in the network.
c.
Automatic or manual switching from preferred route to alternative routes in the event of failures. Creating and editing of cross connections. Graphic display of network topology. Create or delete network components. Create, delete or modify network links between network components by end point selection. Software upload/download of network component configuration to/from system database. Clock synchronisation. Setting up and monitoring of loopbacks. Fault Management
d. e. f. g.
h.
i. j. 3.4.2.4.2
The fault management shall report faults and system anomalies, via the human-machine interface, to alert the TMS operators. As a minimum requirement, the fault management shall include the following functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. 3.4.2.4.3 Real time alarms acquisition and logging. Graphic display of alarms. Alarm list presentation. Classification of alarms. Alarm delay time filtering. Alarm inhibiting/blocking. Grouping of alarms. Diagnostic displays. Display of historical alarm data. Trends display. Alarm reports. Spontaneous printout of alarms. Locating of faults. Archiving of event logs. Configurable audible alarms. Ability to accept voltage free alarm contacts. Performance Management
The performance management shall include, as a minimum, the following functions: a. Performance monitoring in accordance recommendations G.821 and G.826. Initialise/reset performance monitoring data. Define data collection interval. with the requirements of ITU-T
b. c.
d. e. f. g. 3.4.2.4.4
Setting and clearing of performance counter thresholds. Assigning performance counter thresholds. Control of line signal and tributary signal performances. Predicative capabilities. Security Management
The security management shall include, as a minimum, the following functions: a. b. c. 3.4.2.4.5 Users log on via passwords protection. User groups with several levels of privileges. Audit trail of user actions Reports Management
The reports management shall include, as a minimum, the following functions: a. b. c. d. 3.4.3 Configuration management report. Alarm management report. Performance management. Security management report. Telecommunication Management System
3.4.3.1 General The telecommunication management system shall be based on an open application environment and a standard user interface to ensure connectivity to different vendors network components can be made easily. System design shall meet the following general requirements: a. The system shall be designed, delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for meeting the required performance. The hardware design shall allow expansion, modification and testing with the minimum of disruption. The system shall have a high degree of automation and easy to maintain. The system shall provide data retention feature to enable off-line analysis of configuration or of events and alarms. The system shall be user friendly.
b.
c. d.
e.
3.4.3.2 Central Computer System The TMS central computer system shall be based on a distributed client/server computer architecture as far as possible complying with internationally accepted standards. The proposed configuration of equipment shall be described fully, emphasising the availability and security provided. Interconnecting cables shall be made via substantial, secure plugs and sockets, which shall be mounted in accessible positions and clearly labelled. The TMS central computer system shall comprise the following: a. b. c. Dual redundant application/communication servers. Two operator workstations. Dual LAN.
d. e. f. g. 3.4.3.2.1
One black and white laser printer. One colour laser printer. Applications software and operating system. Interconnecting cables and interfacing equipment. Application/Communication Servers
Two servers shall be provided and shall be of a well proven design suitable for real-time multi-tasking operation where reliability is a prime consideration. The servers shall carry out the management functions as well as all acquisition and processing of network components alarms and data. Database held on each server shall be updated simultaneously with the latest data from all telecommunication network elements. Failure of one of the servers shall not cause maloperation and/or degradation of the performance of the telecommunication management system. Each server shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirements of the operating system and applications software. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use. Provision shall be provided to allow the tracing of faults and stoppages. Long term data storage facilities shall be provided for loading and backing up of software, database configuration and graphics. Archiving and retrieval of historical data shall preferably be via optical media such as CD or DVD. The operation of this device shall not require the device be physically connected to each computer in turn. 3.4.3.2.2 Local Area Network
Interconnection between computers, operator workstations, communication servers and peripheral devices shall be supported by a dual redundant local area network (LAN) complying with internationally accepted standards. The transmission medium of the LAN shall be fibre optic. The LAN shall be complete with all terminal/printer servers, repeaters, bridges, routers/gateways etc necessary for proper operation of the TMS system. 3.4.3.2.3 Human-Machine Interface
The human-machine interface (HMI) shall provide all the necessary facilities for the users to interact with the telecommunication management system. The HMI shall be capable of supporting multi-layer graphics to provide both detailed and overview displays of the network topology and individual network components. Pan, zoom and windowing facilities shall be provided. The HMI shall also support multiple user levels such as operator and system manager etc. The level of authority for each user shall be set so that the users area of responsibility is defined. The maximum number of different level users supported shall be stated in the Bid. The level of control and monitoring authority for each user shall be configurable. The design of the human-machine interface shall be based on latest de facto standard software packages. 3.4.3.2.3.1 Telecommunication Management System Workstations
Two workstations shall be provided. Each workstation shall be equipped with a high resolution flat screen LCD type colour VDU, an alphanumeric keyboard and a mouse. The size of the VDU shall be at least 19 inch. Each operator workstation shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with 100 per cent spare capacity. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided to satisfy the requirement of the operating system and applications software. Disk mirroring facility shall be provided. There shall be 100 per cent spare capacity above that required to allow for extension capacity for future use.
Workstations shall be fully interchangeable with areas of responsibility and functions allocated to any workstation. It shall also be possible to allocate all areas of responsibility to any one operator workstation. Each operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm and a CD/DVD writer and reader device. 3.4.3.2.3.2 Black and White Laser Printer
The laser printer shall produce clear copies on standard A4/A3 paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi (dots per inch). The printer shall be capable of printing at least 20 ppm (pages per minute) and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. 3.4.3.2.3.3 Colour Laser Printer
The colour printer shall produce clear prints on A4/A3 size paper with a minimum resolution of 1200 dpi. The printer shall be capable of printing at least 12 ppm and equipped with at least 200 sheet paper tray. The printer shall contain off-line self-test facilities that provide the capability of adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer system. 3.4.3.3 Software Software program packages shall be developed in a high-level program language complying with industry recognised standards. Source codes for software programs specifically developed for use in this Contract shall be provided so to enable the Employer to make minor modifications if required. Software development tools such as editors, program compilers or assemblers, program linkers etc shall be provided. All firmware and software delivered under the Contract shall be the latest field proven version available at the time of design approval. All software licences required for proper operation of the TMS shall be included in the offer. 3.4.3.3.1 Operating System Software
Operating system software based on standard software packages shall be provided to control the execution of system programs, application programs etc and to allocate system resources. Each category of computer shall have its own operating system and that this operating system shall be capable of supporting all on-line and standby functions to be performed by that computer. 3.4.3.3.2 Applications Software
The TMS applications software shall include the following categories: a. User interface. Telecommunication network information shall be presented to the operator via the human-machine interface. All applications shall be supported by user accessible help commands to assist the user in performing the tasks. It is intended that standard software will be implemented wherever possible and to this end it must be stated, where the standard software as offered, does not comply with the functional requirements detailed in the Specification. Data acquisition and control. Data acquisition and control functions include management of database, data acquisition and processing, storage and retrieval. The application software offered shall facilitate the secure execution of these functions. Support and diagnostic. The diagnostic software shall provide, by means of online and off-line test programs, continuous correct operation of all system functions
b.
c.
even when essential system components fail. The support software shall include automated back-up/restore and archive facilities provided by menu driven utilities. 3.4.3.4 System Functions System functions of the TMS shall include alarms handling, remote commands, reports generation, historical retrieval and storage, graphic displays generation, database management and administration. 3.4.3.4.1 Real-time Databases
The system shall comprise a distributed real-time database resident on the application servers. The database shall be open and the data dictionary published. The real-time databases shall be continuously updated by the processed information from the network components and that entered by the operator(s). Facilities shall be provided to allow, as a minimum, the following: a. b. c. d. Modification of existing databases and creation of new databases. Adding/deleting network components and data Installing new or modified VDU diagrams and lists. Installing new or modified log formats.
Full details of display generation and data modification procedures shall be provided, and in particular this shall give details as to how extra data points and additional network components would be incorporated into the database. Dynamic data linkages shall be provided to access real-time and historical data by industry standard applications software such as Microsoft Excel etc. 3.4.3.4.2 Displays
The TMS shall provide, as a minimum, the following user displays: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 3.4.3.4.3 Network overview displays. Network component overview displays. Alarm summary displays. Tabular displays. Event displays. Trend displays. Diagnostic displays. TMS hardware configuration. Alarms
Facilities shall be provided for processing of alarms. Classification and grouping of alarms shall be possible. The operator shall have the facility to accept alarms individually or a TMS of alarms. When an alarm occurs an audible alarm shall sound and the appropriate symbols shall flash in the alarm field. The alarm list shall be displayed in chronological order with the latest alarm first. Each alarm entry shall include the time and date of occurrence, location, device or other identifier, action, and status etc. Silencing alarms shall not inhibit the annunciation of further alarms or constitute an acknowledgement of the alarm.
3.4.3.4.4
Event and Alarm Logging
The TMS system shall incorporate long-term logging facilities for all alarm events, operator commands and system generated actions. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each event. Alarms and events shall be logged on a designated printer as they are received at the central computer system with each item consisting of the date and time of occurrence, together with a description of the operation, user identification, event or alarm, and sufficient information to enable full identification of the outstation affected. Any data processed by the TMS shall be available for storage and subsequent re-call. Data shall be stored for up to three months on a suitable storage medium and be available for subsequent re-call at a later date. An alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches the capacity of the storage medium. All data shall be capable of being archived and retained for future reference. When the archive becomes full it shall automatically overwrite the oldest data on the archive without degradation of system performance. The operator shall have the facility to recall data held in the data logger memory or from archives over a specified period of time. The requested information may be presented on the operators workstations either in tabular form or as selected variable on a trend display. Information on print-outs may be either in tabular form or in a preformatted report form and may be automatic at specific times or on request. 3.4.3.4.5 Reports
All report generation shall be generated and edited using report generation software delivered with the TMS. User customised report generation shall be possible. 3.4.4 Telecommunication Management Centre Furniture
3.4.4.1 Control Desk A control desk shall be provided for mounting the HMI equipment described in this Specification. The arrangement and method of mounting equipment on the desk shall be to the approval of the Employer. The control desk shall be of robust, durable construction and shall be ergonomically designed to facilitate operation of the equipment to be mounted on them. The design, appearance, and finish of the control desk shall be to the approval of the Employer. They shall provide for adequate writing space and have room for a telephone handset. 3.4.4.2 Chairs Swivel chairs complete with five castors shall be provided to match the desks. The chairs shall be of robust construction suitable for continuous use and shall be designed to give optimum body support and comfort during use. The chairs and their upholstery shall be of a design, construction and finish, to be approved by the Employer. 3.4.4.3 Stands All peripherals which are not free standing must be mounted on suitable robust stands, the design and finish of which shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. All stands shall be complete with all necessary trays and accessories for orderly paper handling.
3.5 3.5.1
DIGITAL POWER LINE CARRIER SYSTEM General Requirements
3.5.1.1 Introduction This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital power line carrier (DPLC) system and associated works. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, DPLC terminals including user interfaces, service telephone handsets, handheld maintenance terminal unit, equipment cubicles, interconnecting cables, power supplies and all necessary ancillary equipment including installation materials to complete the system. The power line carrier equipment shall be designed to work over the high voltage overhead power transmission lines. The equipment shall operate satisfactorily under all power system switching and weather conditions likely to be encountered at any time. Technical descriptions detailing the DPLC equipment design and performance including equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The DPLC equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. The digital PLC equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of builtin alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.5.1.2 Safety The DPLC equipment will be situated in high voltage electricity substations which are subject to rises in earth potential at times of system faults. Precautions shall be taken to prevent damage occurring to the equipment. All metal parts, metal cable sheaths and equipment housings shall be bonded to earth. Details of the earthing arrangements shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. 3.5.2 Functional Requirements
3.5.2.1 General Transmission shall generally be carried out by single sideband, suppressed carrier, amplitude modulated, twin channel equipment. The nominal carrier frequency band shall be 40 500 kHz. The DPLC system shall use the latest signal processor technology to permit optimal operating behaviour under all operating conditions. Configuration of carrier frequency and setting up of transmission of speech, data and protection signals shall be software programmable. Details of the maximum transmission capacity of the DPLC and the signal to noise ratio required shall be included in the Bid. 3.5.2.2 Carrier Frequency Allocation The DPLC equipment shall be capable of operating satisfactorily using the same frequency allocation previously assigned and with the same line traps, coupling capacitors and line matching units. If any problems are foreseen by the Contractor he should draw attention to them at the time of preparing the site survey report. The Contractor shall put forward a solution for mitigating the problems for consideration by the Employer. 3.5.3 Digital PLC Equipment
3.5.3.1 General Digital PLC equipment shall comply with the recommendations of IEC 60495 and shall be fully compatible with existing analogue PLC system. The digital PLC shall be designed to transmit and receive speech, telephone signalling, teleprotection signalling and voice frequency telegraph signals. The transmission capacity shall be at least 32 kb/s which enables transmission of up to 3 speech channels with transmission rate per speech channel (including signalling) 9600 bit/s, up to 9 data channels with transmission rate per data channel 1200 bit/s
(ITU-T recommendations V.24/V.28) or combination of the two and up to 4 teleprotection channels out of band. The DPLC equipment including transmit and receive filters shall be field programmable over the entire frequency range. Programming and system configurations shall preferably be carried out using a window based operation. The Bidder shall state the type of modulation scheme and the minimum signal to noise ratio for guaranteed performance. The modulation used shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as 4-state phase shift keying (PSK), 4-state quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) or OFDM (othogonal frequency division multiplexing) multi carrier etc and shall be compatible with the required transmission capacity and signal to noise levels. Details of modulation adopted for the digital PLC equipment shall be included in the Bid. The demodulation of the signals shall be coherent. The Bidder shall state in the Bid the maximum numbers of speech channels and data channels possible. The digital PLC equipment shall be equipped with built in self diagnostics and status monitoring facilities including service telephone, and shall interface with the telecommunication management system for remote supervision and monitoring. 3.5.3.2 Design Characteristics The DPLC shall have the following characteristics: a. b. c. d. e. Transmission capacity: Number of speech channels: Channel (including signalling): Number of data channels: Transmission rates per data channel: 32 kb/s (minimum). 0 - 3. 9600 b/s. 0 - 9. 1200/9600 b/s (ITU-T V.24/V.28). f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Number of teleprotection channels: Carrier frequency range: Nominal bandwidth for duplex connection: Output power: Coax impedance: Line impedance: Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR): 4 per circuit. 40 - 500 kHz. 8 kHz. as required. 75 unbalanced. 320 30 dB.
3.5.3.3 Carrier Oscillators The carrier frequency oscillators shall be fully field programmable and capable of producing the entire range of frequencies from 40 to 500 kHz. Carrier oscillators shall be designed to operate with a high degree of stability and this shall be stated in Bid. The frequency difference between a transmitted voice frequency (VF) signal and the received signal shall be not more than the figure stated in the Technical Schedules. Any means adopted to achieve end-to-end frequency stability shall be clearly stated. 3.5.3.4 Automatic Gain Control Automatic gain control shall be provided to prevent transmitter overload and proper operation of the receiver. The Bidder shall state the means of obtaining automatic gain control and the degree of regulation attained.
3.5.3.5 Service Telephone Provision shall be made on each carrier terminal for emergency and maintenance telephone communications together with audible and visible calling indicators. Engineering order wire maintenance telephone handsets shall be provided. 3.5.3.6 Test Facilities Means shall be provided for testing the input and output levels at all stages throughout the equipment. Loop test facilities shall be provided in order that a PLC link can be fully tested from one end. Test jacks and/or test points must be available for diagnosing problems. Important metering points, control elements and visual indicators shall be on the front of the modules or front panel. Remote alarms shall provide dry relay contacts for forwarding alarms to the Control Centre via the SCADA system. 3.5.3.7 User Interfaces The following user interfaces shall be provided as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3.5.3.8 Monitoring Provision shall be made for monitoring, with suitable LEDs and alarm relays, the following functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3.5.3.9 Alarms Provision shall be made for the following alarms as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. Low level transmit carrier. Low level receive carrier. Low receive pilot level. Low SNR (ie high noise level). Low power supply voltage. System operating correctly. Transmitter output level. Receive pilot level. Receive carrier level. IF oscillator levels. Power supply voltage. Multi-rate asynchronous data with ITU-T V.24/V.28 interface. Multi-rate synchronous data with ITU-T X.21/V.11 interface. 2 and 4 wire E & M signalling. Ringer facility. Decadic signalling. Teleprotection commands. Ethernet interface.
All alarms shall be shown on the front of the module or panel by suitable LEDs, and must have associated dry relay contacts. 3.5.3.10 Power Supplies Requirements
The DPLC equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules.
All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the DPLC equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the DPLC equipment shall be individually fused.
3.6 3.6.1
TELEPROTECTION SIGNALLING EQUIPMENT Introduction
This Specification defines the requirements for the design of digital teleprotection signalling system and associated works. This Specification includes for all design and engineering of the teleprotection signalling equipment, including all interconnecting cables, power supplies, and necessary installation materials to complete the system. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be suitable for transmission of teleprotection commands in the high voltage networks and shall be capable of being used for blocking, permissive and direct tripping commands without any additional equipment. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall, in addition, be capable of direct transfer tripping, special switching functions and digital current comparison protection. Teleprotection signalling in point to point or T-networks shall be possible. The equipment should be able to select and disconnect the faulty part of the system in the event of faults in high voltage installations within the shortest possible time. Technical descriptions detailing the teleprotection signalling equipment performance and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The protection signalling equipment shall be capable of providing reliable performance throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters and a loop test facility. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed and manufactured in such a way that disturbances on the transmission path shall not lead to false operation or cause undue delay in the transmission of the tripping command. The teleprotection signalling equipment and signal transmission shall not be affected by switching operations, atmospheric conditions and other sources of interference. The teleprotection signalling equipment shall employ state-of-the-art components together with the digital signal processing technique to provide programming facilities for flexible adaptation to various requirements of teleprotection signal transmission. The selection of transmission time, dependability and security to suit the different operating modes shall be possible by means of programming using either a plug-in handheld terminal or programming switches on the equipment. The teleprotection signalling equipment is required to operate over PLC and fibre optic links. It shall therefore be of a modular design so that it can be readily for direct connection to the PLC or SDH fibre optic equipment by insertion of a plug in interface module. Teleprotection signalling equipment that is an integral part of the PLC or SDH equipment without going via multiplexing equipment is preferred. The type of teleprotection signalling equipment proposed shall be clearly stated in the Bid. 3.6.2 Functional Requirements
3.6.2.1 General The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. High equipment reliability. Integral monitoring facilities. Simple operation and fault diagnosis. Direct integration to existing telecommunication systems. Wide selection of user interfaces. Easy programming for optimum setting of signal processing time, security and dependability. Permanent self-supervision.
g.
h.
Automatic loop checking.
3.6.2.2 System Capacity The protection signalling system shall be designed with a minimum of 4 diverse teleprotection command channels operating in full duplex mode. 3.6.2.3 System Performance The protection signalling system performance shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60834 specification. 3.6.2.4 Interfaces The teleprotection signalling equipment shall provide suitable interfaces for the direct connection to fibre optic transmission equipment. The equipment shall have as a minimum the following relay interfaces: a. b. c. Command transmission 4 binary inputs with (NO) 4 relay outputs. Direct tripping 4 binary inputs with 4 (NO) relay outputs. Message 8 (changeover) relay outputs.
3.6.2.5 Alarms indications The teleprotection signalling equipment shall have extensive alarm and operational monitoring facilities. In the event of failure, appropriate alarm indications shall be initiated. Alarms and monitoring indication shall be clearly displayed through coloured LEDs on the front panel of the module. It shall also be possible to transmit alarms to the telecommunication management system, NCC SCADA system and SAS via voltage free contacts with a maximum operation time of 1.5 ms. The equipment shall be equipped with alarm circuits to detect at least the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Error rate of guard or tripping signal codes too high. Loss of synchronisation. Alarm indication signal response. Bit error rate above the set level. Components failure. Response of an internal test routine. Receive signal low level. Loss of guard signal.
The LED alarm displays shall be capable of being reset from the equipment. 3.6.2.6 Power Supplies Requirements The teleprotection signalling equipment shall be designed to operate from a 48 Vdc (positively earthed) supply. The equipment shall have protection against transient voltages and operate without degradation in performance for a supply voltage variation stipulated in the Technical Schedules. All interconnection cabling from the equipment to power source and any necessary devices to protect the teleprotection signalling equipment from damage in the event of overload shall be provided as part of this Contract. The power supply input to individual items of equipment comprising the teleprotection signalling equipment shall be individually fused.
3.7 3.7.1
TELEPHONE SYSTEM Introduction
This Specification defines the requirements for the design of a digital telephone system and associated works. The private automatic exchange (PAX) shall be designed to fulfil the requirements for the Employers private telecommunication networks and combine both power system operation and administration into one PAX. This Specification includes for all design and engineering, system software, telephony equipment including telephone operators console and handsets, telephone socket outlets, interfacing modules, voice recording equipment, handheld maintenance terminal unit, equipment cubicles, main distribution frames, surge arrestors, isolation transformers, associated ancillary equipment, interconnecting cables and power supplies. The choice of system hardware and the associated software shall be restricted to the use of digital facilities, with the use of analogue techniques being used only at the interfaces to analogue power line carrier (PLC) equipment and telephone handsets. Technical descriptions detailing the PAX equipment performance and capacity, and equipment configuration shall be provided in the Bid. The equipment shall be capable of providing proper performance continuously throughout the 15 year life expectancy of the system. All equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and shall include a variety of built-in alarms associated with vital operating parameters. 3.7.2 Functional Requirements
3.7.2.1 General The PAX equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be capable of being integrated into the existing telephone network. To ensure maximum compatibility with future systems, all equipment and systems provided by the Contractor shall conform to the latest ITU-T recommendations. The PAXs shall be interlinked by either digital or analogue trunk/tie lines to form an integrated telephone network for the purpose of providing operational and administrative telephone communications covering all power stations, transmission and primary substations and Control Centres. The telephone network shall be transparent to the users and all users shall have the same functions and features as if they were connected to one exchange. The PAX equipment shall have facilities to give priorities and restrictions according to the function and importance of users. System parameters and database shall be configurable by software both locally and from a remote site. The PAX software shall be designed for the full capacity that does not required to be modified or replaced by the extension of the PAX hardware. Operating system software shall preferably be stored in EEPROM or similar technology. 3.7.2.2 System Performance The PAX equipment shall be designed with a low probability of losing telephone calls and be capable of providing the following minimum traffic handling capabilities: a. b. 0.4 erlang per extension. 0.7 erlang per trunk.
The signalling and switching system shall be designed in such a way that the call setup time to any extension on the PAX network shall be less than 2 seconds. 3.7.2.3 Network Management Facilities The PAX equipment shall be provided with network management and supervision capability so as to facilitate continuous access to operation and maintenance information associated with the telephone network. The network management and supervision equipment shall enable a network operator to monitor several communications links from a centralised location, and where necessary remotely carry out diagnostics and modifications to equipment configuration.
All items of equipment necessary for providing the network management and supervision facilities shall be supplied under the Contract. 3.7.2.4 Analogue and Digital Interfaces The exchange equipment shall require both analogue and digital interfaces. The analogue interfaces shall be two and four wire interfaces, with and without E & M signalling and busy/test signalling, to suit telephone, PLC and pilot cable equipment. 2 wire loop subscriber/tie lines shall be possible as an option. The digital interfaces shall be 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s with and without common channel signalling, to suit digital data links and inter-exchange trunks. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected; ie neither a short circuit nor open circuit on the line shall cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected so that the application of a 500V, 50 Hz signal to either or both legs of the line, shall not cause permanent damage to the exchange equipment, or cause malfunctioning of the exchange equipment. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall have an insulation resistance of greater than 10 mega ohms when a 500 Vdc megger is applied between the line terminals and earth. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be protected from electrostatic discharges transmitted to, or occurring at the line interface unit. Each 2 and 4 wire interface shall be capable of withstanding longitudinal voltage impulses, with a peak voltage of 2 000 volts, a rise time of 10 microseconds and a decay time of 1 000 microseconds, without damage. 3.7.2.4.1 2 Wire Analogue Telephone Interface
The interface shall be suitable for both standard telephone instruments and telephone consoles using dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signalling. The interfaces shall provide BORSCHT functions (ie Battery supply, Over-voltage protection, Ring current supply, Supervision, Code, Hybrid and Testing functions) for each line connection. The line feed shall be sufficient to ensure the satisfactory performance of two telephones in parallel on a balanced line of between 0 and 1 500 metres in length. The range of loop resistance over which the interface will operate will be 0 to 500 ohms, with a similar limit for the Transmission Equivalent Resistance (TER). The 2 wire port impedance shall be 600 ohms, nominal, balanced and suited to the telephone instruments during ringing, signalling and voice transmission conditions. 3.7.2.4.2 Analogue Power Line Carrier Interfaces
The interfaces shall operate as four wire plus E and M interconnections, with the facility for equipment busy signalling wire and test signalling wire, for use with existing transmission equipment interfaces such as PLC and pilot cable interfaces. The electrical interface requirements are as follows: Transmit and receive pairs: impedance 600 ohms balanced; better than 20 dB; levels - 3.5 dBm. 48-volt battery and relay coil. voltage free relay contact to earth. voltage free relay contact to earth. return loss
E wire: M wire: Test/busy wires: 3.7.2.4.3 PAX to PAX Interface
The interfaces shall operate as digital trunk/tie line interfaces to enable exchanges to be interconnected with digital PAX and multiplex equipment. 2 Mb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with the requirements of ITU-T recommendations G.703 and G.732.
64 kb/s interfaces shall be in accordance with requirements of ITU-T recommendation G.703, and shall be complete with channel associated signalling. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that these interfaces enable the full range of network facilities to be available for the PAX extensions. 3.7.2.4.4 Pilot Cable Interface
The interface shall provide facilities to interconnect telephone and other terminals to multiplex and between exchanges via pilot cable systems. These interfaces generally conform to those of the PLC system, and are suitable for extending 2 or 4 wire analogue telephone interfaces beyond the 500 ohm limit. All necessary isolating transformers shall be provided. 3.7.2.5 Interface with Other Systems/Equipment Provisions shall be provided by the Contractor to enable: a. b. PAX equipment to interface with the telecommunication management system. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. PAX equipment installed at the Control Centre to interface with the voice recording equipment. PAX equipment to interface with the facsimile machines. SPC Telephone Exchange Equipment
c.
d. 3.7.3
3.7.3.1 General The PAX equipment shall be microprocessor based stored program control (SPC) digital type exchange with non-blocking architecture, suitable for the transmission of 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital signals. It should be possible, if required at a later date, to interface with public switched telephone network (PSTN) and other public integrated services digital network (ISDN) exchanges. Details of how this can be achieved shall be included in the Bid. The PAX shall be capable of being connected via 64 kb/s and 2 Mb/s digital trunk links as well as analogue PLC circuits utilising multi-frequency and E&M signalling to other existing PAXs installed in the telephone network. It shall also be possible to transfer 30 voice channels to a remote place or as a tie line to another PAX. The PAX equipment shall also be capable of fully automatic switching and use completely solid state time/space switching methods. All PAXs shall provide an orderly shut down during loss of power and automatic recovery after restoration of power. Furthermore the PAXs shall be capable of being configured by software to automatically search for alternative routes in the PAX telephone network should the first choice route be busy or faulty so to maximise the availability of the network. Only if all possible routes have been attempted and found unavailable will the engaged tone be returned to the caller. The equipment shall be expandable to at least the specified maximum switching capacity without impairment to reliability and performance, and without the need for replacement of installed major software or equipment items. Failure of any single component shall not go undetected or cause failure of critical function. The PAX equipment shall be capable of detecting faulty trunk lines and disconnect them as well as periodically test their status and re-connect the trunk line once it is operational. The PAX shall report to the telecommunication management system should one or more trunk lines are faulty. The PAX shall be capable of incorporating the facility for recording voice messages on a store and forward basis. Telephones connected to the network shall be able to send a voice message to the PAX, together with a called extension number. A message waiting indication shall be available to telephone stations to advise that a message has been stored when a code prefix is keyed. Messages are to be password (key pad code) protected.
3.7.3.2 Switching Facilities The switching equipment shall provide for the following facilities: a. b. The interconnection of calling and called extensions. The interconnection of the PAX exchanges for information, control and voice via multiplex circuits conforming to relevant ITU-T recommendations and PLC channels confirming to IEC 60495. Interconnection with central PAX telephone system manager console at the Control Centre. A traffic monitoring and reporting system.
c.
d.
3.7.3.3 System Facilities a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. Abbreviated dialling. Alarm signalling. Answering machine connection. Auto-attendant. Hot line dialling. Long line extension. Incoming/outgoing call barring. Automatic call distribution. Break-in/listening-in. Call identification. Central/distributed operator. Conference call. Day/night mode. Directory assistance/programming. Directory dialling. Emergency alarm. Message answering. Music on hold. Password protection.
3.7.3.4 Extension Facilities The PAX shall provide for the interconnection of any calling and called extension connected to the exchange, without the participation of a telephone operator, on the basis of keyed or dialled number information. The exchange equipment shall provide, as a minimum, the following facilities: a. b. Normal telephone-to-telephone communications. Limited access extensions and tie circuits for which special prefix calling codes shall be applicable and as a selectable option, that only specified calling extensions can access.
c.
Priority access enabling selected extensions to interrupt busy extensions or trunks and either request or force the freeing of the busy extension or trunk. Both request and forced priority levels to be available. Automatic callback on Busy or No Reply in which the PAX will automatically initiate a retry of a called extension once the called extension becomes free. The calling extension will need to enter a prefix code for this facility to be operable. Conference call, both 3-way conference established by a normal extension, and a multiparty conference (up to 20 extensions) established through a multi-key hand set at each Control Room Operator position. Call transfer to enable a calling party to be transferred to another extension. Call transfer/follow-me to enable all incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension. Call transfer on no answer to enable incoming calls to be re-routed to another extension if not answered within a predetermined time (programmable time adjustment 5 to 30 seconds). Call pick up to enable a called extension to be answered at another extension by keying from that other extension using a prefix code. Last number redial to enable a call retry without re-keying the required extensions. Abbreviated dialling in which short key codes will enable access of previously stored longer numbers for extensions connected directly to the network. Call waiting indication, a busy extension shall receive a call waiting signal, once a calling extension keys a camp-on request suffix code. The exchange will automatically call the called extension when it becomes free, while the second caller is waiting. Extension group hunting, a number of extensions may be grouped on a common extension number and incoming calls shall be assigned in priority on cyclic order to the next free extension. Extensions directly connected to the network shall be able to press a hold button to hold an existing call while initiating a second call.
d.
e.
f. g.
h.
i.
j. k.
l.
m.
n.
The facilities shall be available on an assigned basis, whereby a central operator shall be able to allocate any or all facilities to any extension either directly connected, or remotely connected to the PAX on the network. The means of assignment shall be by the use of a simple task list, entered at the exchange administrative/supervisory terminal. The task list shall not involve complex codes and shall use a high level, easy to operate man-machine interface. All facilities shall be readily available without limitation, i.e. the use of any single facility or any combination of facilities shall not limit the use of other facilities on any extension. 3.7.3.5 Switching Capacity The exchange equipment shall have initial and final switching capacities as detailed in Technical Schedules. 3.7.3.6 Transmission Performance Transmission through the exchange will involve: a. b. c. 2-wire to 2-wire analogue working. 4-wire to 4-wire analogue and 64 kb/s digital working. 2-wire to 4-wire working, both analogue and 64 kb/s digital.
d.
2 and 4-wire analogue and 2 and 4-wire 64 k/s digital to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working, and the reverse direction. 2 Mb/s to 2 Mb/s composite digital signal working.
e.
The exchange transmission performance shall comply with the ITU-T recommendation G.712, for combined transit/local exchanges and related recommendations in regard to measurement techniques, interface characteristics, definitions and, in particular, in respect of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Relative level values and tolerance. Impedance, nominal values return loss, longitudinal balance. Terminal balance return loss. Nominal transmission loss and variations with time and input levels. Attenuation/frequency distortion. Group delay, absolute delay, absolute group delay and variation with frequency. Noise, weighted idle channel, cross talk, intermodulation, impulse noise, quantization distortion, spurious signals. Discrimination from out-of-band signals. Bit error rate performance.
h. i. 3.7.3.7 Software
The preferred software programming language is CHILL, as described in ITU-T recommendation Z.200. However, other high level programming languages may be offered if they can provide better reliability and maintainability required, and which conform to the basic structural requirements. Details of the programming language used and software licensing and upgrades arrangements shall be included in the Bid. The software shall be well tried and tested and shall be of modular construction, using a hierarchical set of function levels and modules. The modules shall be combined using structured programming techniques, in which each module is well defined and the communication between the modules also well defined. Security measures shall be provided to protect the system software from corruption. System parameters and database shall be user configurable by software. Password protection shall be used to allow only authorised users access to the modification of system parameters and database. It shall be possible to modify the database without disturbing operation of the exchange. All programming tools and man machine interfaces required for system modifications and re-configurations shall be provided under the Contract. 3.7.3.8 Maintenance The exchange shall provide automatic monitoring and reporting functions to verify the proper execution of call handling and exchange software or hardware malfunctions, and report on the condition of interfaces and exchange resource, eg memory occupation, call queue levels, CPU utilisation, traffic levels. The exchange shall be equipped with the following alarm facilities: a. Urgent alarms are those indicating the exchange has or is about to stop or that a major malfunction has occurred that can affect the operational service. Non-urgent alarms are resulting from transient conditions or self-clearing (automatic partial restart) conditions that do not affect the operational service.
b.
Classification and prioritisation of system alarms shall be configurable by the user. Local urgent and non-urgent alarm indicators shall be provided. Voltage free alarm contacts shall also be provided to enable integration into the telecommunication management system and SCADA system. Provision shall be provided to enable diagnostics and maintenance functions, telephone numbering changes and network management facilities be carried from a remote site.
3.7.3.9 Hardware To meet functional, reliability and performance requirements, the hardware for the exchange shall use: a. b. c. d. e. Distributed call handling multiprocessor architecture. Duplicated processors each equipped with its own memory and memory control. Duplicated buses for common data, memory and control. Duplicated power supply units. High speed RAM backed by non-volatile, eg EEPROM, memory and duplicated hard disk storage (storage to have 50 per cent spare capacity). Duplicated ringing/tone signalling. Bulk software loading facilities, preferably of the hard cassette disk or CDROM/DVD type. System control and display panel. All switching/exchange equipment shall operate from a 48 Vdc power supply system. Synchronisation
f. g.
h. i.
3.7.4
The telephone exchange shall be provided with facilities for linking to a master clock system for time synchronisation purposes. 3.7.5 Telephone Numbering Plan
The PAX shall be programmed according to the Employers telephone numbering plan. The exchange shall have facilities to transpose telephone numbers for routing to and from extensions on remote exchanges. It shall be possible to alter the numbering plan at a later date should this be required. 3.7.6 Telephone Signalling
Line, information, tone and ring signalling shall be provided to suit analogue and digital telephone extension equipment. Analogue telephone extension signalling shall provide the line, information, tone and ringing facilities as follows: a. The extension line control signalling shall use line loop signalling to initiate and terminate extension calling and answer activities, in accordance with BORSCHT exchange and multiplex interface requirements. Information signalling will be DTMF in accordance with ITU-T recommendations Q.23 and Q.16, and other associated ITU-T recommendations. Tone signalling will conform to the suppliers standard equipment and appropriate ITU-T recommendations. Ringing current shall be to the manufacturers standard.
b.
c.
d.
The network signalling protocols for the PAX network shall be based on internationally recognised standards such as analogue private networking signalling system (APNSS) and digital private networking signalling system (DPNSS). Details of the PAX network signalling protocols proposed shall be included in the Bid.
3.7.7
Status Reporting and Call Detail Recording Facilities
Printed and visual display reports of the status of the exchange shall be possible either as an integral part of the PAX equipment or via a personal computer (PC). The reports shall be date and time stamped and identify exchange and software version codes. In addition, provisions shall be made to enable details of each incoming and outgoing call on the network be recorded, stored and printed in a report form for administrative and operational purposes. The following facilities shall be provided as a minimum: a. Capacity to store at least 50 000 call records with expansion capability to 100 000 records. Record incoming and outgoing calls by destination and trunk groups. Ability to collect data either directly or via a remote data collection device. The data collection device shall be protected with 24 hours of battery back-up and equipped with floppy disk or tape back-up storage device. Ability to produce management and equipment status reports. Ability to produce traffic analysis and summaries by locations and called number plus exception reports. Telephone System Management Console
b. c.
d. e.
3.7.8
A telephone system management console shall be provided for the PAX at the Control Centre. The final design of the console shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. The facilities available on the console shall include at least the following: a. b. c. Hands free operation. Centralised voice recording for operational telephone communications. Ability to initiate multi party conference call.
In addition, the console shall also control the normal monitoring and operation of the switching network, including enquiries on system operation and extension numbers, establishing multiparty conference calls, call transfers and fault reporting. The operators console shall be capable of displaying the following information as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. Line engaged. Waiting time for unanswered incoming calls. Longest waiting call. Priority override calls. Called/calling parties identity on the other terminal.
The operators console shall be equipped with interactive VDU, keyboard, handset, headset and exchange function controls, and be ergonomically designed for "stress free" operation. 3.7.9 Telephone Handsets
The handsets shall be of modern design and equipped with push buttons for call selection. They shall be suitable for either desk top or wall mounted. Built-in speaker shall be provided to enable hand free operation. Details of features provided for each type of telephone handsets shall be included in the Bid. The final design and colour of the telephone handsets shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. 3.7.10 Main Distribution Frame Main distribution frame (MDF) shall be provided to facilitate cable terminations, circuit re-routing, circuit disconnection, patching and test connections for the telecommunication system.
Main distribution frames shall preferably be single-sided and suitable for wall mounting. Sufficient verticals and termination blocks shall be provided to accommodate the anticipated ultimate number of exchange and extension lines and cabling requirements for other systems. Fuses, surge protectors and barrier transformers etc shall be provided under the Contract. Cross connection by means of jumpering facilities shall also be provided. The capacity of the main distribution frames shall be chosen to accommodate the maximum capacity required for the telecommunication and SCADA data channels plus 50 per cent spare capacity to cater for any future expansions. All main distribution frames shall have an earth connection provided, and shall be protected from corrosion by painting or galvanising. 3.7.11 Voice Recording Equipment A computer based voice recording equipment shall be provided at the Control Centre to automatically log all telephone conversations between operators in the Control Centre and other personnel. The voice logging will be used for the purpose of determining sequence of operational events. Provision of all necessary hardware and software required for voice logging shall be supplied by the Contractor. The voice recording equipment shall be a multi-channel digital communications logger that can simultaneously record and replay voice messages. Initially the equipment shall be capable of providing 16 simultaneous speech channels recording but with a capability of being expanded up to 32 speech channels at a later date. All messages shall be digitised and stored on the hard disk(s). Appropriate compression algorithm and sampling rate shall be used to minimise the disk space storage requirement and maximise voice recording quality. The hard disk(s) shall be sized to provide a minimum of 2 500 channel hours voice recording on a roll-over basis. Appropriate audible alarms and visual indications shall be provided to alert the operator whenever the disk storage space for voice logging is less than 50 channel hours. The voice recording equipment shall also be available for replay regardless of the operation of the system. During replay incoming messages shall be stored on the hard disk(s). The digital voice recording equipment shall have the following features: a. b. c. User friendly. Automatically monitoring the correct operation of the channel. Voice operation so that the equipment can be operated in a voice operated record start mode. Date and time recording facility such that the date and time of each recorded call is easily traceable. Voice playback facility. Sufficiently built in redundancy to avoid single point of failure. Archiving on optical media such as CD or DVD for long term storage. Remote facilities interface (clean contacts for remote indicators/alarms etc).
d.
e. f. g. h.
4. OUTSTATION AND SUBSTATION ADAPTATION WORKS 4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the project specific requirements for the Outstation and Substation Adaptation works in terms of overall design, functionality and performance. The general requirements of the various elements of the substation works including Outstations, SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles, cables, relays and sundry other miscellaneous equipment are specified in the General Technical Specifications and Technical Schedules. The Contract also requires that all existing Outstations are connected to the new NSCC Master Station and where necessary that additional signals are incorporated. For the purpose of this document Outstations includes Remote Terminal Units (RTU), Substation Automation Systems, and Distributed RTUs. 4.2 DESIGN OBJECTIVES
The principle objectives of the design of the substation works shall be to provide high reliability & availability, ease of maintenance and to meet the system performance requirements. It is expected that where new or replacement outstation equipment is required that each substation will be equipped with: a) Remote Terminal Units (conventional or distributed) b) SCADA Interface Panel(s) SIP c) Bay Control Units (for distributed solutions) d) Plant interfaces (existing and new devices where required) e) Plant to SIP cabling f) SIP to RTU cabling
g) 48Vdc positive earth power supply with battery and charger h) Communication interface All components shall be wholly suitable for operation in the hazardous environment of substations. The components/modules shall be designed to have inherently high reliability. The installation shall ensure that exposure to hazards is minimised and where possible protected from common mode failures or damage caused by other failures. Equipment construction and installation shall allow easy access so that tests, repairs and replacements can be carried without endangering or disruption to other parts of the works. 4.3 OUTSTATIONS
Outstations supplied under the contract shall be entirely suited for operation in HV substations both in terms of functionality and suitability for the climatic and EMC environments. The Outstations proposed for this contract should have a proven track record of satisfactory operation in similar environments. The Bidder shall provide a reference list detailing where the proposed equipment has been supplied for comparable applications. 4.3.1 Initial Equipping of Outstations
The Outstations supplied under this contract shall be equipped for monitoring and control as defined in Tables 4.1 and 4.2. These tables identify the number of each type of signal required at each location. They also identify the number of transducers and interposing relays required. However, the Bidder is not restricted to offering individual transducers and may offer combined transducers or other signal conversion techniques suitable and proven in HV substation environments and providing they comply with the relevant IEC standards. Table 4.3 lists the locations where there are existing Outstations that the Contractor shall integrate into the new SCADA/EMS. This table indicates the activities and devices that are required to complete the integration task at each location. At these locations the Contractor shall, subject to the results of the site surveys, provide: Protocol Adaptation Signal data definition
Point to Point Verification New/Additional Communication Gateway Port New/Additional Communication PDH Port New GPS
And any other items to complete and set to work.
Table 4.1 Materials and Works for New Outstations

Stations Embilipitiya SS Sapugaskanda GSS Bowatenna PS Anuradhapura New Valachchenai Nuwara Eliya Trincomalee Hambantota Seethawaka Veyangoda Canyon PS NSCC RTU Ratmalana Panadura Kosgama Kelaniya
Ampara
Matara
Total
Outstations without existing RTUs
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles Complete with all necessary terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply - Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply - Battery Transducers - 4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA - Voltage Transducers 4-20mA - Frequency Transducers 4-20mA - MW Transducers 4-20mA - MVAr Transducers 4-20mA - Current Transducers 4-20mA - Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA Water Level Transducers 4-20mA Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA - Temperature Transducers 4-20mA - Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment
Unit Lot Lot Lot No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. m m Lot Lot Lot
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 83 331 36 18 0 0 0 0 468 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 2 1 1 1 1 110 373 41 12 0 2 0 0 538 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 3 1 1 1 1 5 57 16 6 3 2 0 2 91 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 4 1 1 1 1 2 74 24 12 6 4 0 4 126 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 5 1 1 1 1 79 343 42 12 0 0 0 0 476 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 6 1 1 1 1 63 235 24 18 0 0 0 0 340 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 7 1 1 1 1 111 364 43 12 0 0 0 0 530 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 8 1 1 1 1 63 252 26 12 0 0 0 0 353 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 9 1 1 1 1 83 337 36 18 0 0 0 0 474 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 10 1 1 1 1 70 287 29 18 0 0 0 0 404 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 11 1 1 1 1 63 291 31 18 0 0 0 0 403 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 12 1 1 1 1 83 310 31 18 0 0 0 0 442 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 13 1 1 1 1 93 423 47 18 0 0 0 0 581 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 14 1 1 1 1 70 276 29 18 0 0 0 0 393 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 15 1 1 1 1 45 200 26 12 3 2 0 2 290 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 16 1 1 1 1 67 263 28 12 0 0 0 0 370 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 17 1 1 1 1 54 205 19 18 0 0 0 0 296 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 18 1 1 1 16 64 16 16 16 16 16 16 176 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 17 18 18 18 1160 4685 544 268 28 26 16 24 6751 18 18 18 18 18 18 17
9 0 6 9 10 0
9 2 12 12 4 0
1 1 3 83 349 32
1 1 2 110 387 30
4 1 3 3 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 65 2
6 1 5 5 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 90 0
11 1 10 10 8 0
6 0 5 5 6 0
14 0 12 12 3 0
6 0 5 5 8 0
8 0 7 7 12 0
6 0 5 5 11 0
6 0 5 5 13 0
8 0 6 6 9 0
12 0 11 11 11 0
5 0 5 5 12 0
1 1 2 79 355 28
1 1 3 63 253 20
1 1 2 111 376 30
1 1 2 63 264 20
1 1 3 83 355 26
1 1 3 70 305 22
1 1 3 63 309 20
1 1 3 83 328 26
1 1 3 93 441 32
1 1 3 70 294 18
8 0 6 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 45 214 16
6 0 5 7 8 0
3 0 3 3 8 0
8 1 1 1 8 1
1 1 2 67 275 24
1 1 3 54 223 14
16 16 1 8 64 1
135 6 112 117 135 1 2 3 3 32 32 41 1152 4947 361 0 1800 52000 18 18 17
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 1000 1 1
Table 4.2 Materials and Works for INDACTIC 33 Replacement RTUs

Stations Kiribathkumbura Randenigala PS Samanalawewa PS Kotudoga - Old Sapugaskanda PS Kelanitissa PS Anuradhapura Old Rantambe PS Laxapana PS (old) Kothmale PS Polpitiya PS Ukuwela PS Kurunegala Pannipitiya 132/33kV Victoria PS Balangoda Outstations RTUs with INDACTIC 33 RTUs Biyagama
Habarana
Total
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
Item of supply/work Site Survey Design Works Installation and Commissioning RTU Complete with all necessary cards and racks I/O Cards/modules to provide for: Control Outputs Indication Inputs Measurand mA Measurand Binary (No of i/p bits) Indication Outputs Pulse Counter Inputs Set Point mA Set Point Binary Signal Totals per Station RTU Cubicles with all terminals fixtures and fittings RTU GPS Clock RTU Communication Modules/Interfaces RTU PSU SCADA Marshalling Cubicles Dual 48Vdc Power Supply - Rectifier/Charger 48Vdc Power Supply - Battery Transducers - 4-20mA: Transducers Composite Transducers 4-20mA - Voltage Transducers 4-20mA - Frequency Transducers 4-20mA - MW Transducers 4-20mA - MVAr Transducers 4-20mA - Current Transducers 4-20mA Water Level Transducers 4-20mA Gate Limiter Transducers 4-20mA Turbine Water Flow Transducers 4-20mA - Tap Position Transducers 4-20mA - Temperature Transducers 4-20mA - Humidity Transducer Binary Command Output Relays Status / Indication Interposing Relays Bay Control Selector Switches Connection of Sub RTU Cables: Power Cables Signal Cables All other Ancillary Equipment required Minor Civil Works Removal of existing equipment
Unit Lot Lot Lot No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. No. m m Lot Lot Lot
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 120 375 40 18 0 0 0 0 553 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 2 1 1 1 1 115 430 49 18 0 0 0 0 612 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 3 1 1 1 1 212 661 84 18 0 0 0 0 975 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 4 1 1 1 1 90 391 44 18 0 0 0 0 543 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 5 1 1 1 1 16 276 52 12 18 12 0 12 398 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 6 1 1 1 1 91 379 45 18 0 0 0 0 533 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 7 1 1 1 1 115 519 64 18 9 6 0 6 737 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 8 1 1 1 1 96 302 35 24 0 0 0 0 457 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 9 1 1 1 1 73 346 33 18 0 0 0 0 470 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 10 1 1 1 1 85 307 55 6 15 10 0 10 488 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 11 1 1 1 1 114 340 39 18 0 0 0 0 511 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 12 1 1 1 1 79 308 45 0 6 4 0 4 446 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 13 1 1 1 1 12 104 27 0 6 4 0 4 157 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 14 1 1 1 1 88 401 54 36 6 4 0 4 593 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 15 1 1 1 1 37 178 27 12 0 4 0 4 262 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 16 1 1 1 1 37 316 50 24 0 24 0 0 451 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 17 1 1 1 1 9 56 17 0 6 4 0 4 96 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 18 1 1 1 1 2 184 41 18 9 6 0 6 266 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 18 18 18 18 1391 5872 801 276 75 78 0 54 8547 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 0 187 30 203 219 70 6 8 21 21 17 17 44 1391 6227 442 0 1800 54000 18 18 18
9 0 9 13 7 0
12 2 11 11 11 0
21 4 23 26 8 0
10 0 9 11 12 0
14 0 14 14 8 0
10 0 9 13 11 0
1 1 6 120 393 38
1 1 3 115 448 32
1 1 3 212 679 76
1 1 3 90 409 34
0 0 0 16 300 2
1 1 3 91 397 36
15 2 19 19 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 115 543 38
10 4 8 11 0 0
6 0 5 7 13 0
1 1 4 96 326 34
1 1 3 73 364 26
10 2 14 14 0 2 1 5 5 1 1 1 85 323 18
11 2 12 12 0 0
1 1 0 114 358 32
12 2 12 12 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 79 312 22
7 1 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 12 108 4
13 3 14 13 0 4 1 2 2 1 1 6 88 441 28
6 2 6 6 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 2 37 194 10
6 2 20 20 0 0
1 1 4 37 364 10
4 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 2 1 1 0 9 60 2
11 2 10 9 0 0 1 3 3 1 1 3 2 208 0
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
100 3000 1 1 1
Table 4.3 Existing and Proposed SCADA Facilities and Protocols Item 560-1 560-2 560-3 560-4 560-5 560-6 560-7 560-8 560-9 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 V1 V2 SP1 SP2 SP3 SP4 SP5 SP6 SP7 SP8 SP9 SP10 SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16 SP17 SP18 SP19 Station Athurugiriya GSS Chilaw (Madampe) GSS KCCP / AES PS Kelanitissa 220kV GIS Kerawalapitiya PS Kotugoda 33kV GSS Puttalam GSS Ratnapura GSS Thulhiriya GSS Colombo Substation C Dehiwala GSS Havelock Town (SUB A) Horana Kelanatissa 132kV GSS Maradana GSS (SUB 1) Sri Jayawardhanapura GSS Vavuniya GSS Kolonnawa GIS Pannipitiya 220/33kV GSS Puttalam PS(Coal power) Veyangoda 220kV GSS Ambalangoda GSS Aniyakanda GSS Bolawatta GSS Deniyaya GSS Katunayaka GSS Kerawalapitiya GSS Kotugoda 220kV GSS Pannala GSS Laxapana PS (New) Wimalasurendra PS Wimalasurendra GSS Ukuwela GSS Badulla GSS Kukule PS Matugama GSS Chunnakam GSS Galle New GSS Kilinochchi GSS Maho GSS Mahiyangana GSS Naula GSS Pallekele GSS Polonnaruwa GSS Vavunativu GSS Upper Kotmale PS Beliatte GSS Baddegama Colombo B Colombo K Kadawatha GSS Kappalthurai GSS Kegalle GSS Monaragala GSS Piliyandala GSS Existing/Planned Outstation Type Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 561 - TH1 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to RTU 560 Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB COM 581 Gateway Interface to ABB SYS 500 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to ABB PCU 400 Gateway Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to PSX 600-SAC Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to Siemens Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to ALSPA HMI Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to SAS Gateway Interface to VATech Stat. Computer Interface to VATech Stat. Computer Under station project Under station project Interface to ABB Gateway Computer Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Under station project 2012 - 2016 Existing Protocol IEC 60870 - 5 - 101 IEC 60870 - 5 - 101 IEC 60870 - 5 - 101 IEC 60870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104 IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104
Item SP20
Station Weligama GSS 4.3.2
Existing/Planned Outstation Type Under station project 2012 - 2016
Existing Protocol IEC 870 - 5 - 101/104
Expansion and Upgrade Capability
The expansion capability of the SCADA system is required to match power system developments over its service life of some 15 years. All delivered Outstations shall be dimensioned according to the following criteria: a. b. c. d. All delivered Outstations shall be equipped to accommodate a 20% increase in I/O as defined in the I/O schedules Where spare capacity would mean that I/O cards with no signals are required then only the wired rack space shall be provided This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules For stations where supervisory control is not yet required, the Outstations shall have the functionality to execute controls and sufficient rack space, processing power and power supply capacity to accommodate control output modules for the number of circuit breakers and switches being monitored. This expansion capability shall be realisable solely by the plugging in of additional I/O modules. The provision shall also take into account the requirement for a 20% increase in controls outputs. The SCADA Interface Panels (facilities) shall be equipped with sufficient spare terminals to accommodate the expansion requirements set out in a to d.
e.
Cabling for these expansion requirements shall be installed between the Outstation and the SCADA Interface Panels. Cabling from the plant to the SCADA Interface Panels shall contain a minimum of 10% spare pairs for each signal type or a minimum of one spare pair for each signal type associated with the Outstation. 4.3.3 Functional requirements
4.3.3.1 General The standard Outstation software shall be capable of supporting, but not be limited to, the following basic functions: a. b. c. d. e. f. Data acquisition and processing, data preparation for transmission, data transmission, and performing control functions commanded by the Master station. Alarm/Event prioritisation for the interrogation of changes of status. Sequence of Events recording with a storage capacity for 24 hours alarm, event and measurement data. Synchronising of internal time clocks with a high resolution GPS signal or synchronising messages from the Master Station. Secure telecommand using the select/check/execute mechanism with OPEN and CLOSE command outputs. Initiate Load Shedding of pre-definable sizes of load following specific and/or broadcast instruction from the NSCC (the load shall be monitored on each MV feeder and based on a predefined priority the required circuit breakers corresponding to the predefined load shed value shall be tripped/opened). The predefinitions shall be readily set up and amended by the Operators in the NSCC. Programming to carry out specific user defined functions
g.
The alarms shall be assigned with priority levels at the Outstation and transmitted according to priority or alternatively as soon as the alarms are received, whichever method is standard. The standard method employed shall be fully described. The occurrence of an alarm or an event shall be arranged for transmission to the Master station at the earliest opportunity. Alarms or events occurring during a transmission of measurements shall be arranged for insertion at the next convenient point in the message cycle. Details shall be provided in the Bid describing the message cycles employed for methods where priority assignments are implemented at the Outstation (e.g. arranging multiple alarms with different priorities). Each Outstation shall have the capability of automatic start-up and initialisation following restoration of power after an outage without need of Master Station intervention. 4.3.3.2 Time Synchronisation Outstations shall have the capability to time tag events and alarms to a resolution of 1 ms or better with respect to other time tagged signals in the same Outstation. To complement this feature, the Outstation clocks shall be synchronised to enable system wide comparisons to be made on the alarms and events recorded by different Outstations. The synchronisation shall be achieved by providing periodic time signals from GPS clocks and from synchronising messages from the Master Station. The resolution of time tags between Outstations shall be better than 5ms. In the event of a failure of the external synchronising time signal, the Outstation shall continue to perform time tagging from its internal clock until the synchronisation signal is restored and the clock is corrected to compensate for any time drift. 4.3.3.3 Communication Protocols 4.3.3.3.1 Master Station
The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following master station communication protocol: a) IEC 60870-5 101 b) IEC 60870-5 104 4.3.3.3.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED)
The Outstation shall be capable of supporting the following communication protocol for communicating with intelligent electronic devices: a) IEC 62056-21 b) IEC 60870-102 c) IEC 60870-103 d) MBUS e) Modbus RTU f) 4.3.3.3.3 JBUS Satellite RTUs
Where an Outstation is used to collect data from a remote location using a Satellite RTU a standard protocol shall be used to suit the communication medium available. 4.3.4 Control Security
Operation of control outputs shall use a true select/-/check/-/before/-/execute command sequence between the Outstation and the master station. The sequence shall include, as a minimum, the following functional capabilities: a. The master station shall transmit a control selection message addressing the required Outstation and control point within the Outstation, and indicate the control action desired.
b.
The Outstation shall initialise its control logic, reassemble the control selection message received in (a) above, and transmit the reassembled message to the master station. The information in the message sent to the master station shall be generated by the Outstations point-selection logic indicating the point and control function selected. It shall not be a simple repeat of the master stations message transmission. The master station will verify the returned message with the message sent in (a) and, if valid, shall issue an execute control message to the Outstation. The Outstation shall only operate the control point selected after the check - before - execute sequence above has been performed without error or interruption by any other messages. The Outstation shall reset its control logic upon any error in the sequence or if the execute message is not received within a set time (user adjustable) after the command message is received at the Outstation. Hardware Requirements
c. d.
4.3.5
4.3.5.1 General Each Outstation shall comprise microprocessor based equipment with its software (firmware) resident in non-volatile memory. It shall be readily possible to update the software (e.g. by PROM replacement) to alter or extend the Outstations functionality. The Outstation shall be linked to the plant by means of a number of I/O modules with a main processing module processing the signals. The standard I/O shall include single, double point and multi-point teleindication input signals, analogue telemetering input signals, pulse counting and double point telecommand and teleswitching output signals. Communications to the SCADA master station shall be by communications modules via modems connected to the bearer circuits. The I/O modules shall include all interface and protection circuits. The design of all Outstation equipment shall be such, as to ensure satisfactory operation in an electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations. In order to prevent incorrect functioning or damage to the equipment when subjected to interference arising from power system switching, fault currents and lightning, all Outstation input and output circuits, and power supply circuits shall be provided with isolation and/or immunity to electrical interference. Where the inherent withstand capability of Outstation I/O modules does not meet the test requirements specified in IEC 870-3 Class III then interposing equipment with the required withstand characteristics shall be provided. 4.3.5.2 Digital Inputs The digital inputs shall comprise volt free contacts. Changes of state in the digital inputs shall be reported to the main processing module for further processing. The inputs shall be configurable from a down-loadable database. Status changes shall be time tagged to a resolution selectable from 20 ms, 10 ms, 5 ms, 2 ms and 1 ms, with or without debounce filtering. Digital inputs may be single point, double point or multi-point. The interpretation of states for single or double point inputs shall be configurable. A single point indication shall be represented by a binary digit. Double points shall be represented by a pair of binary digits. 4.3.5.3 Analogue Inputs The analogue input module shall be capable of processing standard voltage and current inputs continuously. Input voltage and current range, and variable scan rate shall all be configurable. The inputs shall be multiplexed and digitised by the use of an analogue multiplexer and an analogue-todigital converter (ADC). A fast sampling, self calibrating ADC technique shall be utilised to measure the input signal. The ADC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits plus 1 sign bit ADC specification over a wide temperature range. Additional software filtering facilities shall be provided for minimising sampling errors. Each analogue input shall be monitored, by the Outstation, against two upper and two lower limit values, with an alarm time delay. An alarm shall be generated only if the limit has been exceeded for longer
than the programmed time delay. This shall be operator adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds or by a variable number of scan cycle periods (1 to 100). Each analogue input shall be terminated with transient voltage protection components. In case of overload, the input circuit shall not sustain any deterioration of its characteristics. Furthermore, an overload present on one of the circuits shall not induce telemetering errors on the other circuits. 4.3.5.4 Pulse Counting The Outstations shall be capable of counting and storing the number of pulses generated by MWh or MVArh metering equipment external to the Outstation. The metering equipment will provide an isolated normally open contact. The pulse counter shall be incremented one count for each cycle of the input (pulse). The pulse counter shall be capable of accepting pulses at a rate of ten counts per second. The count shall be frozen (transferred to a buffer register) when commanded by the master station or when commanded by locally generated contact inputs. The Contractor shall describe his method for ensuring the value recorded at the master station(s) corresponds precisely with the value indicated by the pulsing instrument. 4.3.5.5 Command Outputs Command outputs shall enable the Outstation to telecommand power devices by operating external interposing relays. Galvanic isolation shall be achieved by relays on the modules. Facilities shall be provided for pulse controls with programmable duration from 0 to 60 seconds. The module shall provide dual pole control outputs configured as high security select/actuate with check-back. The module shall operate by means of internal select relays following a command from the master station. Each select relay shall have a pair of isolated contacts which shall be used to select a power device. Once a particular power device has been selected, a second command shall be required from the master station to energise one of two actuate relays. These relays shall each have a pair of contacts which shall be configured to complete the circuit to energise the selected power device using the substation/plant supply. The duration for which the external device is energised shall be determined by a programmable interval timer whose value shall be set either locally or remotely. The design of the command circuit shall ensure that no single hardware failure on the module can cause incorrect operation of the command outputs. Also an on-board watch-dog circuit shall be provided to monitor correct software operation. Should time out occur then all outputs shall be inhibited. 4.3.5.6 Digital Outputs The digital output module shall provide non-isolated digital outputs suitable for driving local display lamps or external interface relays. Each digital output shall be configurable between continuous and pulse modes. In continuous mode the digital output shall be set to a particular state and remain there until set to the opposite state. In pulse mode the digital output is set to the energised state for a predefined time. The time shall be user configurable for each pulse mode output. The mode and time information shall be down-loadable from the master station. 4.3.5.7 Analogue Outputs The analogue output module shall provide dc voltage or current outputs. The analogue output module shall convert data from digital form to analogue form utilising a digital to analogue converter (DAC). The DAC shall be cyclically tested for correct operation. The DAC shall be capable of providing a minimum resolution of 11 bits + 1 sign bit on unipolar, bipolar and offset outputs. 4.3.6 External Communications Interfaces
4.3.6.1 Master Stations Outstations shall have capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent master stations. Each Outstation shall be equipped with a communication port for communication with the SCADA Master Station. The Outstations shall be capable of expansion to support an additional port for communications with another Master Station. The communications interfaces provided shall depend on the type of communication channel available at the location:
SDH Node o The interfaces shall support 64kbps digital channels and TCP/IP Ethernet channels
DPLC Channel o The interfaces shall conform to CCITT Recommendations V.24 and V.28. The baud rate of each communication port shall be configurable over the range 50 to 9600 baud for connection to modems.
4.3.6.2 Intelligent Electronic Devices (IED) Each Outstation shall be capable of being equipped with up to 4 communications ports for communication with intelligent electronic devices (IEDs). The communications interfaces provided shall conform to EIA RS 485. communication port shall be configurable over the range 300 to 38400 baud. 4.3.6.3 Configuration and Maintenance Each Outstation shall be equipped with an external communications ports for connection to a portable configuration and maintenance PC. 4.3.7 Power supplies The baud rate of each
At each location the Outstations and ancillary equipment will be supplied from a battery backed dc power supply. Where a new power supply is required it shall be a duplicated system that meets the requirements for 48 Vdc Power Supplies specified in this document. The battery charger units shall each be capable of supplying 100% of the load for the fully expanded Outstations and following loss of primary supply to maintain supply for a period of at least 8 hours. This power supply is subject to voltage fluctuations and the Outstation shall therefore be capable of operating with supply variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage. Power input fuses and LEDs for monitoring shall be provided on the front of the unit. All power supply failures shall be reported to the master station. The power supply units shall incorporate surge suppression and isolation circuits to protect the Outstation modules from external electrical disturbances. Overvoltage and undervoltage protection shall be provided within the power supply to prevent the Outstation internal logic from being damaged as a result of a component failure in the power supply and to prevent the Outstation internal logic from becoming unstable and causing misoperations as a result of voltage fluctuations. 4.3.8 Configuration and Maintenance
4.3.8.1 Configuration Tools A portable PC based configuration and maintenance facility shall be provided along with all software and hardware necessary to interface to the Outstation. All database and software interfaces (Outstation diagnostics, database compiler, software listings, Outstation configuration listings, etc.) required for the maintenance and configuration of the Outstation shall be provided. The Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall have diagnostics for the Outstations processor(s), memory, I/O ports, and any other functional areas of the Outstation. The portable Outstation configuration and maintenance PC shall also be used to monitor and test the Outstations operation and communication interfaces. The configuration and maintenance PC shall be capable of emulating both the master station and the Outstation. The Outstation shall have the capability to have I/O cards and distributed modules changed without powering down the equipment. 4.3.8.2 Database Management System Each Outstation shall be provided with a database management system. The database management system shall present the information via a user interface such that any individual database is transparent to the user.
The database management and configuration software shall not impose a limit on the sizing of the Outstation It shall be possible to expand the Outstation up to it maximum physical limit without the need to reconfigure, or purchase additional software licence The database management system shall provide a means of verifying the database in order to check consistency and completeness of the database. The database modifications shall all be documented. The contents of a database shall not be lost if the power supply fails. Outstation shall start and load its database automatically. After a power failure, the
It shall be possible for the current database to be printed out on-line at any time on a printer connected to the Outstation. 4.3.8.3 Maintenance and Diagnostics Facilities The Outstation shall perform continuous self diagnostics to monitor its own operational capability. Any detected fault or abnormality which could affect the Outstations performance or operational capability shall be indicated to the master station and locally at the Outstation. The Outstation design shall facilitate first line fault location and maintenance to be readily performed on site. Maintenance equipment shall include an engineer's portable test unit. The test unit shall enable all the Outstation functions to be tested on site, with the Outstation in both off-line and on-line states. It shall provide an indication of the presence and location of any detected Outstation fault. Safeguards shall prevent the activation of Outstation control outputs with the test unit connected and the Outstation in the on-line state. The design of the O Outstation shall allow the replacement of I/O cards and distributed modules without powering down the Outstation. 4.4 SCADA INTERFACE PANEL
SCADA Interface Panels (SIP) or Marshalling Cubicles shall be provided to marshal all wiring related to supervisory measurement, indication and control functions from the local control panels, remote control panels, relay panels, transformer tap changers and other panels, as necessary. In addition to the standard requirements for equipment construction specified elsewhere in this Specification, each SIP shall incorporate terminal blocks and, where required, SCADA transducers. Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled with the name of the circuit and its alphanumeric identity. With the exception of terminals for connections in current transformer (CT) circuits, all terminals shall be provided with an isolating link that may be operated without disturbing the connected wiring. Terminals used in CT circuits shall provide a means of maintaining continuity of the CT circuit external to the SIP, without disturbing the connected wiring, so that SIP equipment (such as transducers) may be safely disconnected from those terminals without disrupting the CT circuit. Terminals for the connection of transducer wiring shall be arranged to enable any one transducer to be disconnected and replaced without disrupting the connections or operation of any other transducer, particularly where more than one transducer is connected to the same CT or VT input signals. The field wiring side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits and bays. The Outstation side terminal blocks shall also be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications and Controls. All looping between terminals and cross connections between the field wiring side and Outstation side terminal blocks shall be supplied and installed under this Contract. Each SIP shall be fitted with a Dummy Circuit Breaker to simulate the open and close operations of a circuit breaker to enable the command outputs of the associated Outstation to be tested. This shall comprise a latching relay with the dummy breaker relay open and close coils connected to a double point command output on the Outstation. Contacts on the relay shall be connected to a double point digital input on the Outstation to provide indication of the dummy breaker state, i.e. open and closed. 4.5 4.5.1 POWER SYSTEM MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCERS General
All power system measurement transducers for the measurement of MW, MVAr, voltage, current and frequency shall be plug-in type and individual transducers shall be enclosed and mounted in sheet steel cubicles. The location of these cubicles will be subject to the site survey but there is a preference for a
centralised arrangement. Transducers shall provide continuous dc analogue output signals from continuous ac analogue inputs. Transducers shall include all necessary circuits for signal amplification and for scaling. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurements shall correctly compound the voltage and current inputs to provide bi-directional output related to active and reactive power flow. Transducers for MW and MVAr measurement shall be suitable for three phase unbalanced load. Power system measurement transducers shall provide galvanic separation between the primary current, voltage transformers and the Outstations. Measurement transducers and interposing transformers connected to any main instrument transformer of one main circuit shall be kept fully segregated from those associated with any other main circuit. Test terminal blocks shall be provided with all transducers to permit injection testing of individual transducers, without interference to the continuous operation of other apparatus connected to the same current and voltage transformers. Isolation links shall be provided for current transformer circuits which automatically short circuit the current transformer output. 4.5.2 Overloads
Each current input shall be capable of carrying 200 per cent rated current continuously and withstanding ten times the rated current for 5 seconds. Each voltage input shall be capable of carrying 120 per cent rated voltage continuously and withstanding twice the rated voltage for 10 seconds. The output shall be limited so as not to exceed 1.6 times nominal full range output current. The open circuit output voltage shall not exceed 25 volts dc. Transducers shall be protected against overcurrent and overvoltage. 4.5.3 Burden
The burden imposed on the primary current transformer, at full rated input shall not exceed 1 VA per transducer. The burden imposed on the primary voltage transformers at full rated input shall not exceed 3 VA per transducer. Preference shall be given to transducers which offer burdens significantly lower than the values specified in this document. 4.5.4 Output
The output shall be linear in respect to the measured value with a range of 4 to 20 mA. Transducers shall be designed to operate into any load impedance between 20 and 1000 ohms, maintaining measuring accuracy to IEC 688 (Class 1.0). 4.5.5 Response time
The response to achieve a final steady value for any step change of 90 per cent of input range shall not exceed 1 second. 4.5.6 Power supply
Preference will be given to transducers which derive auxiliary power from the measured voltage input. An auxiliary dc supply will be available from the Outstation dc power supply system. Attention is drawn to the fluctuating nature of the dc voltage. Variations of between +20 and -15 per cent of nominal voltage shall not cause any detectable inaccuracies. 4.6 4.6.1 RELAYS General
Electrical equipment, materials and components shall comply with the requirements of IEC 150, IEC 439 and IEC 445 in so far as they are applicable to equipment of this type. All relays shall be hermetically sealed with transparent covers. All dc operated relays are to be equipped with flywheel diodes.
Plug in types complete with socket bases and retaining clips, suitable for the loads to be switched, shall be acceptable subject to the approval of the Employer. Where plug-in type relays are approved each relay type shall have a unique plug to socket colour. Interposing relays shall be capable of performing at least 25 000 operations at the rated duty, without failure. 4.6.2 Control interposing relays
The control interposing relays shall provide a means of operating the electrical control circuits of switchgear (circuit breakers and disconnectors), transformer tap changers, etc by means of light current signals from the Outstations. The control signal will be in the form of a pulse of short duration but to ensure high reliability, all control interposing relay coils and contacts shall be continuously rated. The relays shall have a high degree of reliability. The relays shall provide double pole switching. One contact per pole is the nominal requirement but series or parallel arrangements of contacts for each pole will be considered. 4.6.3 Status indication repeat relays
The status repeat relays shall each be provided with a minimum of three sets of contacts, each set arranged to close while the relay coil is energised. The rating of repeat relay coils shall not exceed 2 Watts. Contacts shall be designed to conduct load currents of less than 5 mA and also be suitable for infrequent operation. The Bidder shall clearly state the lowest operating current for the proposed relays. 4.7 SAS GATEWAYS
The SCADA system shall be capable of communication with SAS Gateways that operate with IEC 80670-5-101/104 protocols. Where such devices exist or are to be installed under other projects the Contractor will be provided with the operating schedules following contract commencement. Where SAS systems are provided under this contract the following features shall be provided: (a) A full graphic HMI from which local control and monitoring can be carried out (b) Capable of supporting communication with more than one Control Centre using protocols as stated above (c) High reliability with duplicated LAN for acquisition and control within the substation. (d) Generally comply with the foregoing requirements for Outstations
5. POWER SUPPLIES 5.1 GENERAL
Secure power supplies are required at all locations where equipment is supplied under this contract. The power supplies are required for: a. The NSCC Control Room equipment, the SCADA Master Station, and Communication equipment. b. The Outstations and associated telemetry equipment in substations and generating stations. c. Communication equipment located in substations, generating stations and other locations where equipment may be installed as part of the overall communication system.
The Control Centre location shall be equipped with battery backed 415/230Vac Uninterruptible Power Supplies and diesel generator capable of supplying the complete building load. The Substations and other sites shall be equipped with 48Vdc battery backed power supplies. The Employer shall provide primary supplies at each location. These shall be located conveniently for the connection of the power supply equipment. The functional requirements for these power supplies are detailed in the following sections. The Bidder shall advise of any locations outside of the Control Centre or Substations (e.g. repeater sites or other buildings) where power supplies will be required. 5.2 5.2.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES Functional Requirements
5.2.1.1 General The UPS shall be rated to supply the complete Master Station system, telecommunication equipment not supplied by the 48Vdc system, selected lighting circuits in the Control Room to allow for continued work and sufficient air conditioning to allow for the temperature and humidity in equipment room(s) to be maintained within operating limits. The UPS system shall have the following features: a. High operational security and reliability b. Integrated monitoring facilities c. Simple operation and fault diagnosis When required by the Employer, the
d. Similar parts shall be interchangeable. Contractor shall demonstrate this ability
e. Components shall be capable of withstanding the thermal and dynamic stresses resulting from internal and external short circuits and circuit switching operations, etc. Damage arising from component failure should be confined to the component concerned. 5.2.1.2 UPS Configuration The UPS configuration shall be parallel redundant hot standby with 2 x 100% inverters, 2 x 100% chargers and 2 x 50% batteries. A static voltage stabiliser shall be provided in the mains by-pass circuit to maintain 2% static voltage tolerance when the by-pass is in use. For ease of maintenance, it shall be possible to isolate inverters and static switches from the load by means of a manually operated make-before-break switch. The Contractor shall provide the cables interconnecting the UPS unit with external equipment, including those to the battery. The manufacturer shall specify the size of conductor required for the battery cables. In this case the batteries shall be located in a battery room and connected to the rectifier/inverter units located in an adjacent room via fuse switches located in the battery room. The manufacturer shall provide a suitable fused load-switch or moulded-case circuit breaker with the UPS unit to facilitate on-load isolation of the battery for the purpose of performing battery maintenance.
Moulded-case circuit breakers shall be category P-2, in accordance with IEC 947-2. The switching device shall be installed adjacent to the battery, or outside the battery room, if applicable. 5.2.2 Modes of Operation
The operation of the UPS shall comply with the following basic operating principles. 5.2.2.1 Normal The output of the rectifier shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load, via the inverters, while simultaneously maintaining the battery charge in the float charge mode. Normally both inverters shall be synchronised with each other and with the main supply. The two inverters shall be operating in parallel and sharing the load equally. The output of the inverter shall be maintained within the voltage and frequency tolerances of the load at all times. The output voltage of the inverter shall also be controlled to maintain synchronism and phase with the mains bypass supply voltage, provided the latter is within the tolerances specified for the load transfer conditions. If the mains bypass supply voltage exceeds these tolerances, then the UPS shall revert to unsynchronised operation at its own internally set frequency. The UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply when the voltage and frequency of the latter are within the specified tolerances. Under synchronous operating conditions, the static switch shall initiate uninterrupted transfer of the load to the mains bypass supply in the event of deviation in the output quantities of the UPS unit resulting from a UPS component failure (including inverter static switch element, if applicable), external overload/short circuit condition or switching-off of the inverter. 5.2.2.2 Main Supply Failure In the event of an interruption or depression in the AC main supply voltage to the rectifiers, the batteries shall supply the power requirements of the load, via the inverter, for not less than 3 hours based on the full load plus the 50% spare capacity. Upon restoration of the AC mains voltage, the rectifier shall supply the power requirements of the load, via the inverter, while simultaneously recharging the battery. The rate of recharging the battery shall be such as to restore it, within the specified time, to a capacity that will enable it to again fulfil the discharge performance requirements. 5.2.2.3 Overload When a disturbance/fault occurs in any of the inverters the faulty unit shall be automatically disconnected and the entire load supplied from the remaining inverter. If both inverters develop a fault, the load shall be transferred to the bypass supply through the static switch. In the event of automatic transfer of the load to the bypass circuit and subsequent restoration of the inverter output quantities to within the permissible tolerances, the UPS shall automatically resume synchronous operation with the mains bypass supply and shall initiate uninterrupted retransfer of the load to the UPS inverter. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following a number of automatic transfers of the load to the bypass, if these take place within the specified period. 5.2.2.4 Static Bypass Facilities shall be provided to enable manual initiation of uninterrupted transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass, and from the mains bypass to the inverter. The UPS shall be capable of energising the load within the permissible tolerances and of achieving the uninterrupted load transfer requirements via the static switch, without the battery connected. 5.2.3 Performance
5.2.3.1 Rectifier The rectifier shall be of constant voltage, current limiting output type designed for float charge operation. The rectifier shall incorporate a soft-start feature to gradually accept load on initial energising. The rectifier shall re-start automatically upon restoration of the mains power supply following a main supply interruption.
The DC output of the rectifier unit shall remain within the limits of 2 percent under any of the following conditions. Switched diodes or supplementary battery cells as a means of limiting DC voltage variations are not acceptable: System frequency between 10 percent Output between 5 and 100 percent of rated output Output power shall be controlled via a full wave half controlled thyristor/diode bridge with free wheeling current facility. The output current shall be smoothed by means of series reactance or equal. Ripple in the rectifier output voltage shall not exceed 2 percent of nominal voltage for all values of load within charger rating.
The rectifiers shall be capable of limiting the output current to 110 percent of rectifier rating and be capable of operating continuously at that current. Each charger shall be sized to supply full load plus boost charging the two batteries simultaneously. Each rectifier shall be capable of fully charging the two batteries upon initial installation. It shall be capable of being connected to the fully discharged batteries, without overloading, and recharge them to their full capacity within a period of eight hours, whilst simultaneously supplying the full load plus 30 percent spare capacity. Battery float-charge operation i. The rectifier steady-state DC output voltage variations shall be controlled to within plus one percent and minus one percent of the set value (corresponding to the battery float-charge voltage) during load variations between zero and the rated output of the rectifier, and during steady-state input voltage and frequency variations referred to above. Short-time mains supply voltage depressions of not more than 20 percent, which may be the result of motor starting activities, shall not result in a trip of the rectifier or the initiation of battery discharge. On-line adjustment of the set value of float-charge voltage shall be possible by means of a potentiometer on the relevant control circuit card. The range of adjustment shall include allowance which may be necessary to compensate for the ageing of the rectifiers. The DC output current of the rectifier, when operating under constant currentlimiting conditions, shall be controlled to within plus two percent and minus two percent of the set value.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Battery rapid-charge operation i. Facilities shall be provided to initiate battery rapid-charge operation by manual and automatic means. Automatic initiation of battery rapid-charge operation shall occur following any period of battery discharge exceeding ten seconds. Battery rapid-charge operation shall be automatically controlled according to a constant current/constant voltage characteristic.
ii.
iii.
iv.
The float voltage of the batteries shall be the optimum required to ensure the maximum possible period between topping up with electrolyte, without the need for supplementary charging to restore the battery to its fully charged condition. The power supplies system will operate with battery terminals free of earth. A suitable earth fault detection scheme shall be provided.
v.
5.2.3.2 Battery and DC Circuit The batteries shall operate in conjunction with a constant voltage, float charging system and be capable of providing the guaranteed output throughout the range of ambient conditions specified. At the end of the rated discharge period the voltage available at the output terminals of the UPS shall not be less than the minimum operating voltage of any load normally connected to the UPS including the spare capacity. The battery discharge capacity shall be such that with the charger disconnected, the UPS shall be maintained in continuous operation at full load (including spare capacity) within its stated voltage limits for a period of three hours. 5.2.3.3 Inverter Static inverters shall be of an approved type, designed to maintain a single phase, 50 Hz supply at the appropriate voltage. The equipment shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of operating reliably for long periods of time with minimum maintenance. The equipment shall be capable of providing an output voltage which has a waveform approximating to a sinusoidal shape under all steady load conditions from zero to rated load. The total rms harmonic content of the output waveform shall not exceed five percent of the fundamental value and shall not contain harmonics higher than the 15th. The waveform shall be such that there is no measurable difference between positive and negative half cycles. A suitable filter shall be included in the dc input circuit of all inverters to prevent noise from the inverter being fed into the dc supply system. The output voltage shall be regulated to 1 percent of rated output voltage with load power factor over the range 0.7 lagging to unity. The inverter shall maintain output frequency such that synchronism with the bypass voltage is maintained. During variations greater than 2 percent in the power supply frequency the inverter shall revert to internal frequency control. A facility shall be provided for adjusting the synchronising frequency from one percent to two percent. When rated load is suddenly applied or removed, the momentary voltage change shall not cause damage to any connected equipment and shall be capable of restoring it to nominal value in a period not exceeding 0.1 s. The inverter shall be capable of the necessary output to satisfy capacity of the computer system and the essential services load, plus 50 percent at a power factor of 0.8 lagging continuously when operated from the battery and charger system and alternatively from battery only, at the worst environmental conditions obtainable. The inverter shall be capable of delivering sufficient short circuit current to cause the output fuses rated nearest to 10 percent of the UPS rated output current to interrupt the short circuit current within 3 ms when the UPS is not synchronised to the bypass power supply. The main output circuit fuse links shall be of the slow-acting type g1, in accordance with IEC 269. The output voltage static regulation shall be maintained within plus one percent and minus one percent of rated output voltage, for the specified input power supply conditions, from no-load to full-load. The dynamic output voltage variations shall not exceed plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of rated output voltage in the event of instantaneous load change of 100 percent rated output. The output voltage shall be restored to within the steady state limits within 0.1 seconds. It shall be possible to vary the output voltage within 5% of the specified output voltage. adjustment shall be possible on-line. This
The UPS shall be suitable for both floating output or with one leg of the AC output earthed. 5.2.3.4 Static by-pass switch The by-pass circuit shall have a continuous current rating equivalent to the rated output of the UPS unit. It shall be capable of conducting a current of ten times the rated output for not less than two seconds. Facilities shall be provided to manually and automatically initiate transfer of the load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit and from the by-pass to the inverter. The combined detection and switching time required to transfer load from the inverter to the by-pass circuit shall not exceed 0.5 ms. The criteria for load transfer shall be as follows: Transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains by-pass load transfer shall only be possible when: The mains bypass voltage is within 15% of rated UPS output voltage, and The mains bypass frequency is within the tolerances specified, and The inverter output and mains bypass voltage are synchronised Automatic transfer of the load shall be initiated when: The inverter output voltage drops below 95% of the nominal output voltage. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 85% of the nominal value, or The inverter output voltage exceeds 105% of the nominal output voltage. Transfer should be accomplished before the voltage reaches 115% of the nominal value, or The inverter output current limit is exceeded. Retransfer of the load from the mains bypass to the inverter Load retransfer shall only be possible when: The inverter output voltage is within 10% of the nominal output voltage for more than 5 seconds, and The inverter output and mains bypass voltages are synchronised.
Subject to fulfilling the above criteria, retransfer of the load from mains bypass to the inverter shall be initiated automatically following automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to the mains bypass. The automatic retransfer of the load to the inverter shall be inhibited following four automatic transfers of the load to the bypass, if these take place within an interval of 5 minutes. 5.2.3.5 Noise limits The sound pressure level measured at one metre distance from the UPS unit, at any position, shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at any load between zero and the rated output of the unit. If tonal components are present, the noise limit shall be 5 dB(A) less, i.e. 70 dB(A). 5.2.4 Controls and Instrumentation
The UPS unit shall incorporate all the necessary equipment to enable operation, protection and control of the UPS in accordance with this specification, and to safeguard the unit and its components from the consequences of internal and external short circuits, over voltages and any main or control circuit malfunctions, howsoever caused. The UPS shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. The principle indications and alarms shall be: a. Mains input voltage and current b. c. d. e. f. Inverter output voltage and current Battery voltage Rectifier alarms Inverter alarms Load alarms
Remote indication of the general alarm status of the UPS system shall be made available. A summary alarm shall be wired directly into the Control Room from the UPS indication panel and the individual signals shall be input to the Local RTU. 5.2.5 Construction Requirements
5.2.5.1 Enclosures 5.2.5.1.1 Electronic Equipment Enclosures
Each unit consisting of a rectifier, inverter and static switch shall be housed separately in one or more free-standing, self-supporting steel cabinet forming an enclosure. Each enclosure shall comply with the relevant requirements of the General Technical Requirements. Wiring and terminations shall, in general, comply with all the requirement details in the General Technical Specification. 5.2.5.1.2 Battery Enclosures
The battery may be installed in a separate cabinet adjoining that of the rectifier/inverter or on separate, unenclosed, free-standing support racks in a separate room. Battery enclosures shall be naturally ventilated to disperse gaseous products. The battery shall be positioned such that possible leakage of electrolyte or emission of gaseous products shall not cause damage to other equipment, components, or adjacent cells. Separate, free-standing support racks for batteries having plastic cell containers may be steel or solid wood. Nickel cadmium batteries having steel cell containers shall be supplied in wood crates. Support racks for the latter shall be solid wood. All wood should be treated to render it non-hygroscopic and acid resistant. Steel racks shall have a plastic or epoxy coating to provide suitable protection against the effects of electrolyte spillage. Battery cell cover shall be sealed against creepage of electrolyte and shall be fitted with spray proof vent plugs. The lowest rack for accommodating battery cells shall be a minimum of 30 cm above ground level. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. 5.2.5.2 Converter components Main circuit switches (mechanical) shall comply with IEC 947-3 and be of the independent manually operated air-break type for continuous duty. They shall comply with utilisation category AC23 and DC23 for AC and DC switches respectively. Contactors shall comply with IEC 158-1 and be rated for uninterrupted duty and intermittent duty of at least class 0.1. The utilisation category for DC contactors shall be not less than DC-4 and for AC contactors not less than AC-3. Transformers and reactors shall be of the air-cooled type and comply with the relevant parts of IEC 146. Rectifier stacks shall comply with the requirements of IEC 119 and IEC 146 as appropriate. Rectifier transformers shall be of the air-cooled type, rated in accordance with the requirements of the Data Sheets and comply with IEC 742 as appropriate. They shall be capable of withstanding the let through energy of the fuse controlling the AC supply to the transformer. The insulation level between transformer primary and secondary windings shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000 volts rms AC applied for one minute, but where an earthed screen is inserted between the windings this may be reduced to a level of 1500 volts. 5.2.5.3 Battery cells and containers The battery cells shall be of the nickel-cadmium type and shall comply with and selected in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. Nickel-cadmium battery cells shall be of the pocket plate, sintered plate or fibre plate types. Sealed, recombination battery cells shall be of the flat plate construction incorporating electrolyte absorbed in the plate separators. Terminal pillar seals shall be of a design that prevents the initiation of pillar corrosion.
Cell containers of plastic material, are preferred, subject to the material being non-flame propagating and mechanically shock resistant. Steel cell containers are preferred in applications requiring large capacity batteries, if parallel operation of battery cells is thereby avoided. Plastic containers of vented, flooded cells shall permit the electrolyte level to be viewed through the container material. Vented, flooded cells shall be fitted with flame arresting vent plugs. Inter-cell connectors and terminals shall be insulated or otherwise provided with protective covering to prevent inadvertent short circuiting. Batteries shall be supplied complete with all necessary interconnecting links, bolts, insulation terminal covers etc; inter-cell connections shall be of low resistance, in a clean condition when bolted and protected against corrosion. Cell terminal posts, bolts and associated hardware shall be of electrolyte-resisting material. Electrolyte level lines shall be marked on the front side of each container. Batteries shall be supplied filled with dry electrolyte. 110% of distilled water, required for the batteries, shall be supplied in separate containers. 5.2.5.4 Distribution Board The UPS shall be equipped with a distribution board that permits segregation of duplicated devices. Each outgoing circuit from the distribution board shall be controlled and protected by fuses and links or miniature circuit breakers, their short circuit rating being adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 25 percent of the number required for the master station equipment. 5.3 5.3.1 DIESEL GENERATOR General Requirements
A standby diesel generator and all its associated ancillary systems shall be supplied, installed and commissioned by the Contractor. The Generator shall be located within the Control Centre site boundary in suitable accommodation which is also to be provided by the Contractor. The Generator may be a packaged unit or housed in a purpose built structure which is separate from the new control room building. In any case the location shall be above potential flood water levels. The generator shall be rated for continuous output and capable of supplying the total load of the new control centre building (including the UPS and battery charging demand concurrent with supplying the load) and all electrical loads to be supplied under the Contract, including HVAC, small power and lighting, plus 50% spare capacity, at 415/240 volts (3-phase, 4-wire), 50 Hz. The Contractor shall provide and install cables from the generator to the main switchboards in the new control centre building. The diesel generator shall be wholly suitable for supplying UPS, rectifier and computer loads. A daily service fuel tank shall be provided and this shall have sufficient capacity to supply fuel for 8 hours continuous running of the generator at full load. A bulk fuel tank of sufficient capacity to store fuel for 7 days continuous running of the generator at full load shall be supplied and installed within the complex. The Contractor shall provide suitable foundations and a bund wall as part of the civil works to be provided under the Contract. 5.3.2 Design Requirements
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other Contracts. All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without distortion, or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform. No welding, filling or plugging of defective parts will be permitted without the approval in writing of the Engineer.
Corresponding parts liable to renewal shall be interchangeable. When requested by the Employer, the Contractor shall demonstrate this capability. All apparatus shall operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. A sound attenuation to 55 dB(A) (or lower) at 10 metres from the set shall be achieved. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil-filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment which is in tension or subject to impact stresses except where it can be shown that service experience has been satisfactory with the grade of cast iron and the duty proposed. The underside of all tanks shall be ventilated in an approved manner to prevent corrosion. Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings, mechanisms and moving parts. All mechanisms shall, when necessary, be constructed of stainless steel, brass or gunmetal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. All taper pins used in any mechanisms shall be of the split type. All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying continuously the specified currents without undue heating, and shall be secured by bolts or set screw of ample size, fitted with locking devices of approved type and material. All rubbing or wearing surfaces shall be machine surfaced. Joints employing a gasket material shall be so constructed that the packing is maintained under sufficient compression in all parts, so that an efficient joint can be made without the use of jointing compound. Gasket material shall be of the minimum thickness necessary and of approved composition. Galvanising shall be applied by the hot dip process. The preparation for galvanising and the galvanising process shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the material being coated. Pre-site drilling, punching, cutting, bending and removal of burrs shall be completed before galvanising. Surfaces in contact with oil shall neither be galvanised nor cadmium plated, unless finished with an oil resisting varnish. The average thickness of the zinc coating shall be equivalent to not less than 0.6 kg/m2 of zinc for all surfaces. Bolts and studs for electrical connections shall preferably be of brass M6 size. Alternatively, size M5 may be used, but these must be of stainless steel, phosphor bronze or high tensile brass. Nuts and pins shall be locked in position with lock nuts or lock washers, or other devices if approved. Lock washers shall not be used above M24 size except when a spring type is specially approved. No bolt or stud shall project through its nut by more than approximately 10mm or four threads whichever is the less, except for terminals and relay stems. Bolts, nuts and washers on outdoor equipment shall be of non-corroding material where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittings and elsewhere if specially required. Suitable special spanners shall be provided for bolts and nuts which are not properly accessible by means of an ordinary spanner. All apparatus, connections and cabling shall be designed and arranged to minimise the risk of fire and any damage which might be caused in the event of fire. 5.3.3 Type of Diesel Engine and Operating Conditions
The engine may be naturally aspirated or turbocharged and charge air-cooled and shall be capable of giving continuously at site not less than the specified output and an overload of 10% in excess of this output for one hour in any period of 12 hours of consecutive running. The set shall operate at a maximum speed of 1500 rev/min. The continuous site rating shall be based on the specified site operating conditions. If the continuous site rating is less than the stated catalogue rating, a detailed explanation of the de-rating shall accompany the Bid. The site rating of the generator, irrespective of engine rating, shall also be stated and the rating of the set will be based on the lower of the two.
Attention is drawn to the requirement that the engine may stand for a considerable period yet must be immediately available for full load and any special lubrication or heating arrangements necessary to meet this condition shall be provided. 5.3.4 Fuel
The engine shall be supplied with and operate on diesel fuel. 5.3.5 Bulk Fuel Storage
The bulk fuel oil tank shall be of horizontal cylindrical type, fabricated from steel plate and supplied complete with mounting saddles, inspection manhole, access ladder, fill pipe and cap, level indicator, delivery, overflow, vent and drain pipes. There shall be an indication, at the filling point, of tank level together with an alarm from a separate initiating device for tank full. The fuel oil storage and delivery system, including the associated earthing arrangements, shall be designed too minimise the risk of fire and explosion. 5.3.6 Daily Service Tank
The daily service tank shall be totally enclosed and of welded steel construction with suitable supports and shall be installed in a position where any fuel leakage cannot impinge on exhaust pipes or other hot engine surfaces. The tank shall be provided with all necessary fittings including fill, vent, drain and overflow lines, level indication and access for inspection and maintenance. Level switches shall be provided for the following services: (a) Low level alarm (b) (c) (d) 5.3.7 High level alarm Low level start of transfer pump High level stop of transfer pump Fuel transfer Pump
An electric motor-driven transfer pump shall be provided to enable the service tank to be filled from the bulk storage tank. The capacity of the pump shall be such that the service tank can be completely filled in not more than 2 hours. The pump motor starter control panel shall contain a selector so that the pump may be either started and stopped by hand or automatically on receipt of signals from the level switches in the service tank. For emergency use, a semi-rotary hand pump shall be supplied and connected in parallel with the motor driven pump. It shall be of sufficient capacity to enable the service tank to be fitted in not more than 4 hours. A suitable strainer shall be supplied and fitted at the transfer pump suction line. 5.3.8 Fuel boost Pump
If required by the engine manufacturer, a fuel boost pump shall be provided between the service tank and the engine. The pump shall be directly driven by the engine. 5.3.9 Fuel Oil Piping
The Contractor shall provide and install all required piping to carry the fuel from the bulk storage to the service tank and the engine. The pipe layout shall be such that it does not pass close to hot surfaces, and in no circumstances shall it be permitted to pass over exhaust pipes. All necessary valves and fittings shall be provided including sufficient isolating valves to enable items in the system to be serviced without draining down the whole system. 5.3.10 Engine Lubrication Lubrication of the engine shall be by means of an engine driven integral pump. The pump shall have on the suction side a course strainer and on the delivery side a duplex 'full flow' fine filter complete with
changeover cock incorporating pressure by-passes to facilitate oil flow to the engine should the filter become blocked. The Contractor shall ensure that the lubricating oil system capacity shall be sufficient to enable the engine to run continuously for 12 hours at any load without replenishment. The Contractor shall supply all lubricants necessary to commission the generator and it shall be fully lubricated at Handover. 5.3.11 Set Mountings To achieve simplicity in foundation work, the set shall preferably be mounted on a welded steel common bedplate. If a flange mounted generator is not employed, the bedplate shall be stress relieved before machining. Suitable anti-vibration mountings shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit, and all set-mounted ancillary apparatus. Flexible connections shall be provided to the exhaust, air, fuel and water piping to avoid fracture due to vibration and to minimise conduction of noise. 5.3.12 Crankshaft The design shall avoid undesirable torsional oscillation at or near the designed running speed and, if required, the Contractor shall submit his calculations to the Engineer for examination. 5.3.13 Governor The governor shall preferably be of the hydraulic type and shall be equipped with an adjustable droop mechanism. It shall control the speed within the limits specified and be capable of adjusting the engine speed to a minimum of 5% above and below the rated speed. 5.3.14 Engine Protection The following protection devices shall be provided with the engine and the Contractor shall provide and install all the necessary alarm initiating devices: (a) High Lubricating Oil Temperature (b) (c) (d) Low Lubricating Oil Pressure High Engine Jacket Cooling Water Temperature Engine Overspeed.
Item (a) may be omitted if lubricating oil cooling is carried out by the jacket water. In the case of air cooled engines, the Contractor shall propose an alternative to item (c). The alarm initiating devices shall be of high quality and of robust construction to withstand operation in high temperature and vibration conditions entailed with the diesel engine. With the exception of the overspeed condition, the protection shall be in two stages, the first operating an alarm indicator and the second operating the emergency shut-down relay. The overspeed condition shall operate both an alarm indicator and the emergency shut-down relay simultaneously. Visual indication of the cause of an alarm signal or shut-down shall be given on the local control panel. An inhibit system to cater for normal shut-down and initial start-up shall be provided. The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. The device shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip and lock-out the generator circuit-breaker in the event of the automatic device operating. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any inductive circuit. 5.3.15 Starting System Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that the engine will start automatically on failure of the normal electricity supply. The engine shall also be capable of being started by "push
button" from the local control panel specified. Provision shall also be made for local manual starting of the set. Electric starting equipment shall be provided and so designed that: (a) At engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to complete the starting circuit (b) Not more than two consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period of 1 minute, each starting period and the period between such consecutive attempts being automatically time controlled by the equipment. At the failure of the second attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual resetting.
The equipment shall include an adequately rated lead/acid starter battery and battery charger which generally comply with the requirements of IEC 60623 except that discharge time indication is not required. The battery charger will be supplied from the mains and an engine driven dynamo is not required. The battery shall be adequately rated for any standing load and its specified starting duty. It shall be protected against accidental, mechanical or electrical damage. The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery charge fail alarm. Without power supply to the charger, the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. Upon restoring power supply to the charger immediately thereafter, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery, within 30 minutes, to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed. A suitable battery isolating switch, capable of being locked in both the open and closed positions, shall be provided on the engine to prevent starting while the engine is under maintenance. 5.3.16 Cooling System The engine shall be provided with a two or three section oil and water tropical radiator capable of dissipating the heat from the jacket water, lubricating oil and charge air (if appropriate). The radiator must be generously sized to permit operation at full load and overload in the specified ambient conditions. The radiator may be mounted on or remote from the engine. The necessary cowling shall be supplied and installed by the diesel plant manufacturer. A centrifugal pump shall be supplied to circulate the coolant. 5.3.17 Safety Guards All moving parts shall be adequately guarded, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, in order to prevent danger to personnel. 5.3.18 Silencers The engine shall be efficiently silenced with primary and terminal silencers complete with interconnecting exhaust pipe and fittings. Supports for the complete system shall be of the anti-vibration type and shall be so arranged that no weight is carried by the engine set. Due allowance for expansion of the exhaust system shall be made by the inclusion of expansion bellows if necessary. Each silencer shall be supplied complete with a drain off point. The complete system including brackets shall be supplied galvanised and shall be insulated within the building. The silencers and exhaust pipes shall be provided with 25mm stools, welded on, to accept extruded mesh to provide a 25mm air gap between the hot surface and insulation to be applied. The insulation shall be 75mm thick preformed rigid insulation wired on and then covered with hammered aluminium sheet. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing the fittings and wall plates necessary to carry the tail pipe through the generator room wall. 5.3.19 Air Filters Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise occasionally. 5.3.20 Engine/Generator Control Panel A rigid, front access, free standing cubicle shall be provided as the engine/generator control panel. All indicators, instruments, control switches, alarm and control equipment shall be contained within the
cubicle and indicators, instruments and control switches shall be visible from the front of the cubicle with the door closed. The control panel shall incorporate the following equipment. 5.3.20.1 Alarms Annunciator
A local alarm annunciator panel shall be provided equipped with audible and flashing visual annunciators, accept, reset and lamp test facilities. Alarms shall latch until accepted. A muting facility shall be provided for the audible device. Summary alarms shall be connected into the Master Station Computer System via the local RTU in order to generate System alarms. The alarms shall also be connected to the Auxiliary Plant Annunciator. Alarms shall be inhibited from operating during transient conditions, e.g. temporary overload and mains disturbances. When the MANUAL/AUTO control selector switch is in the AUTO position, the audible alarm shall be inoperative. All alarm circuits shall derive their power supply from the starting battery. The following alarms shall be annunciated: (a) Failed to start (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5.3.20.2 Low lubricating oil pressure High lubricating oil temperature High jacket water/cooling air temperature (as appropriate) Engine on overload Overspeed Emergency shut-down Starter battery low-voltage Daily Service Tank high level Daily Service Tank low level Emergency Shut-down Relay
A manually reset, master shut-down relay shall be provided in the control panel, so arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions, the relay shall automatically: (a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker (b) (c) (d) 5.3.20.3 make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker stop the engine close a set of voltage free contacts to operate an alarm annunciator Engine/Generator Controls
The following controls for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Automatic/manual selector switch for set starting (b) (c) Start pushbutton Stop pushbutton
(d)
Emergency stop pushbutton (the emergency stop pushbutton only shall be operable without opening the control cubicle door) Speed adjustment Alternator voltage adjustment Stop/manual/auto selector switch for fuel transfer pump On/off switches for heaters in alternator stator and engine jacket (if required) Logic equipment for start sequence of set including lock-out after two attempts to start Automatic voltage regulator Engine/Generator Instrumentation
(e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) 5.3.20.4
The following instrumentation for the engine/generator set shall be provided in the control panel: (a) Engine Speed (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) Lubricating oil pressure Lubricating oil temperature jacket water or cooling water temperature Engine hours run meter Generator frequency Generator voltage (with phase selector switch) Individual phase currents (3 instruments) Watt meter Kilowatt hour meter
All transducers and connections necessary for the functioning of the above instrumentation shall be provided. 5.3.21 Generator The generator shall be a brushless, salient pole, revolving field self regulating alternator of fabricated steel construction throughout. It shall have ball and roller bearings, a dynamically balanced rotating field, salient pole construction with heavy damper windings. The machine shall have an ac exciter and liberally rated silicone diode assembly with a self contained excitation system with transistor automatic voltage regulator (AVR), and an efficient cooling system using a centrifugal fan. It shall be screen protected and drip proof with a large terminal box for outgoing connections. The generator shall be star connected. The generator shall be capable of maintaining continuous maximum rated output when operating within + 5% of rated voltage and at rated power factor. The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value. All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient conditions. 5.3.22 Stator The stator core shall consist of high permeability, low loss steel stampings, tightly clamped and securely located within the machine casing.
The windings shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with Class 'B' materials. The windings shall be effectively braced to withstand the maximum forces arising from any short circuit that may occur at the stator winding terminals. Any material that is liable to shrink in service shall not be used for bracing, packing or wedging. The ventilating circuit shall be designed to avoid hot-spots and to permit adequate cleaning by a portable centrifugal blower. Tubular low-temperature heaters of sufficient rating to maintain the windings in dry conditions during long periods of standstill shall be fitted in the stator casing and wired out to a terminal box on the bedplate. They shall be suitable for operation from the local single phase ac supply. Both ends of each stator winding shall be brought out to terminal positions on the stator casing, the phases and terminal box being arranged for 3-phase and neutral connection. All current transformers, including their associated primary connections and secondary circuit terminal blocks, required for any instruments and/or protection relays specified or for excitation circuit compounding or compensation, together with the generator neutral earthing connection shall be supplied and accommodated within a substantial dustproof sheet steel enclosure mounted at the generator neutral terminal position. 5.3.23 Rotor The rotor shaft and hub shall be of forged steel, preferably in one piece. The rotor poles shall be constructed of steel laminations, keyed and securely fixed to the rotor hub and fitted with interconnected damper windings to absorb the cyclic irregularity of the engine. The field winding shall consist of electrolytic copper conductors insulated throughout with class 'F' materials. They shall be fully insulated at all positions of support and shall be securely located against movement due to thermal and rotational cycling and the force arising during overspeed testing, transient overspeeds in service and normal operation. Where a separate exciter is provided, the exciter rotor shall be mounted on the extended main shaft at the free end of the generator. The minimum factor of safety of the rotating system shall be not less than 1.5, based upon the yield point of the part most highly stressed at the stated overspeed or during a stator 3-phase terminal short circuit at normal voltage, whichever is the greater. 5.3.24 Exciters The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel stampings tightly clamped and secured to minimise magnetic noise. The characteristics of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in matching the required loading conditions. 5.3.25 Ventilation The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to provide the machine cooling effect necessary to comply with the temperature requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions. 5.3.26 Voltage Regulation Continuously active, quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. Preference will be given to equipment based wholly or mainly on static state devices. The equipment shall include all selector switches, indicating instruments, rectifiers, resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant. A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1% between the limits of 95% and 105% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of the machine shall be mounted on the control panel. When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected, the regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over-voltage to a value not exceeding 120% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 2% of the nominal preset value within three seconds.
Over-voltage protection shall be provided, the voltage setting range being 105% to 125% in steps of 5%, the time setting range being adjustable within the range 1 second to 5 seconds in steps of 1 second. 5.3.27 Pulley Block A hand-operated lifting block and chain shall be provided for the set, capable of lifting the largest item that has to be removed from the plant for routine maintenance and overhaul. 5.3.28 Alternative Generators The Bid shall be based on the requirements of the Specification. The Bidder may additionally offer alternative arrangements to those specified in the foregoing clauses. A separate price should be given for any alternative offers and full technical details must be included. 5.3.29 Parallel Running It is not required to run the generator in parallel with any other generator set or in synchronism with the mains. 5.3.30 Tools and Spare Parts A complete set of tools required to carry out all maintenance and normal overhaul work on the engine, generator and ancillary plant shall be included in the offer. Spare parts necessary to keep the set in a state of operation for a period of 4 years or 12,000 hours, following the end of the Defects Liability Period, shall be listed and priced as an option. 5.3.31 Documentation Documentation for the generator set shall be provided as specified in Section 11 and shall include the following: 5.3.31.1 Drawings
The Contractor shall provide the following drawings prior to delivery of the generating set: (a) A general arrangement of the complete generating set showing details of terminal points for cabling, wiring, pipe work, and all associated trenches or ducts required for the proper installation of the set. The principal dimensions and weights of the set and major components shall also be shown. (b) (c) A general arrangement of the diesel engine. A general arrangement of the alternator and exciter showing terminal markings, polarity, and phase rotation. A general arrangement of the control cubicle showing cable entry and control wiring termination points. An electrical schematic diagram of the control cubicle, or a detailed wiring diagram of the control cubicle. Instruction Manuals
(d)
(e)
5.3.31.2
Operating and maintenance instruction manuals and spare parts lists shall be supplied generally as specified in Section 11.6. The manuals shall contain: (a) Fully detailed instructions for operation, maintenance and major overhaul of all parts of the complete plant supplied (b) A comprehensive spare parts list for the complete plant, giving description and parts identification numbers.
5.3.32 Inspection and Testing Inspection and testing of the engine/generator set shall be performed as provided for under Section 8.
5.4 5.4.1
48 V DC POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS Functional Requirements
5.4.1.1 General The 48 Vdc battery and charger systems shall consist of 1 x 100% nickel cadmium (NiCad) storage batteries and 2 x 100% float/boost chargers and a distribution switchboard. The systems shall have, as a minimum, the following features: a. High operational security and reliability. b. Alarm monitoring facilities. c. Simple operation and fault diagnosis.
The output of the battery and charger system shall be 48 volts (positive earth) and shall continuously supply the power requirements of the load. There shall be no power interruption to the load during mains power failure or when the mains power is restored. 5.4.1.2 System Capacity and Performance The ampere capacity of the batteries shall be adequate when fully charged to maintain the stated load in normal operation within its stated voltage limits for a period of at least: a. At substation: b. At Control Centre: c. At CEB HQ 10 hours autonomy. 10 hours autonomy. 10 hours autonomy.
The batteries shall normally be kept charged by a dual battery charger unit, each charger comprising a float charger with manual boost charge facilities. The rating of each charger shall be sufficient to carry the specified maximum load including the spare capacity, whilst maintaining the battery in a fully charged condition. The boost charger shall be rated to restore the fully discharged battery to the fully charged condition within 12 hours, without interrupting supplies to the equipment. When the battery is connected to the charger, the psophometric noise level at the output, for loads between 0 per cent and 100 per cent, shall not exceed the equivalent of 2 mV at a frequency of 800 Hz after weighting as specified by ITU-T recommendations for any operational condition. Automatic control of the output dc voltage is required. Variation shall not exceed 0.5 V from 20 per cent to 100 per cent full load current. Ripple voltage shall not exceed 0.1 per cent of the working voltage without battery. 5.4.1.3 Alarm Indications The battery and charger systems shall be provided with efficient built-in self-monitoring and alarm facilities. An alarm shall be activated when a fault is detected. Alarm conditions shall be displayed locally. Voltage free contacts wired to cabling terminals shall also be provided to enable remote indication of each alarm. At the NSCC the following signals shall be provided and wired up to the telecommunication network management system and SCADA system Local RTU: (a) AC supply fail. (b) Battery voltage high. (c) Battery voltage low. (d) Charger fail indication. (e) Battery earth fault. (f) DC supply fail. (g) Output dc MCB trip (Common for all MCBs).
In substations and generating stations a summary alarm shall be input to the respective Outstations. Sufficient alarm initiation outputs shall be provided to allow each alarm of the 48 Vdc power supply system to be displayed at up to three remote locations. 5.4.2 Battery and Charger Equipment
5.4.2.1 Batteries The batteries shall provide power supply for the telecommunication equipment demand and be designed to give at least 15 years life from the date of installation. The battery design shall be in accordance with IEC 623 and IEEE Std 1184. Nickel-cadmium batteries are required and shall be of the pocket plate, open, or semi sealed type, housed in totally enclosed translucent plastic or stainless steel containers. Each cell shall be provided with a vent cap/electrolyte filler plug and a pressure operated gas release valve designed for intermittent operation. The batteries shall operate in floating service, i.e. they shall be continuously connected to load and to the charging rectifiers. The batteries shall be housed in one of two ways: a. In a battery room on heavy-duty epoxy coated metal racks suitably protected against corrosion and attack by the battery electrolyte. b. Inside a suitably designed battery cubicle. The final choice of battery installation method shall be agreed with the Employer. The battery shall be spaced so as to permit easy access to all individual cells to allow replacement of cells and/or checking cell voltages and connections. The positive and negative terminals of each cell shall be clearly marked and permanently indicated. The positive and negative terminals of each complete battery shall be indicated by red and black markings respectively in an approved form. Each cell shall be identified by a number formed in a non-corrodible material and fixed to the cells to be visible when installed on the racks. The Contractor shall select the Ah capacity according to the actual equipment consumption, taking into consideration the following: a. The 50% spare capacity. b. The standby time required to supply the entire dc power demand. c. The service voltage required shall not drop below recommended figures (permitted voltage tolerances of the individual loads).
d. The voltage fluctuations caused by power consumption of various loads shall be kept within permitted limits. Cells shall be formed into a sub-assembly by mounting in groups, in robust containers. Taping together of cells will not be accepted. Stainless steel containers shall be insulated one from the other. Cells utilizing plastic containers shall be constructed so that the plates are rigidly held so as to avoid the possibility of distortion and short-circuiting of the plates. Each cell container shall be equipped with an electrolyte level indicator and the electrolyte capacity shall be sufficient to ensure long intervals between topping-up. The battery unit shall be connected to the distribution board and battery charger by PVC insulated copper cables. A fuse box shall be provided for the battery. The positive and negative fuses shall be arranged in pairs and shall be fully segregated from each other by an insulating barrier. The fuses shall be of the high breaking capacity type in accordance with IEC 60269. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of battery capacity. 5.4.2.2 Battery Chargers The batteries shall normally be kept fully charged by a dual battery charger unit. Each battery charger shall be capable of simultaneously supply the full load and charging discharged batteries at the optimum rate. Under normal condition, each battery charger shall support half the load. In the event of a failure of one of the battery chargers, the healthy charger shall automatically take-over the full load current without supply interruption. Manual change-over of chargers shall also be possible. The use of a
modular type of chargers that have N+1 modules which capable of supplying the load such that the maximum load is divided upon N modules with one module acting as spare is also acceptable as an alternative solution to the traditional dual redundant battery charger configuration. Should modular type of battery chargers are offered, full details shall be included in the Bid. The battery charger shall be of the solid state static thyristor or switch-mode rectifier type suitable for dc power supply and charging of the associated storage battery. The rated output and current of rectifier shall correspond to the requirements of system load and battery charging. The operation of the rectifier shall be fully automatic. The output voltage shall be maintained constant and just sufficiently above the open circuit voltage of battery to keep the battery in a fully charged condition, independent of load variations or variations of ac input voltage within the specified limits. Provisions shall be made to adjust the charging voltage for a fully charged battery with an accuracy of at least 1%, and to move the setting point within a range of 10%. The rectifiers shall be fed from the LVAC main switchgear. Double wound transformers shall be provided at the input side of rectifier to prevent galvanic connection between the dc and ac system. The charging rectifier shall normally operate in the float charge mode. It shall be possible to select the charger to Boost charge mode. When selected to Boost charge mode, the battery condition shall be monitored and on achieving a fully charged condition, the rectifier shall automatically regulate the charging current and change over to the Float charge mode. In addition to Boost and Float Charge modes, the charger shall also be equipped with manual equalizing mode for initial conditioning and periodical maintenance of batteries. Irrespective of the mode of operation the load voltage will be maintained to nominal level by the automatic introduction of suitable dropping diodes. When an ac supply failure occurs which lasts for more than five minutes, the rectifier shall automatically select the Boost charge mode immediately on restoration of the ac supply. Each mode shall be signalled on the front of the rectifier cubicle. Manual or automatic switchover from one mode to the other shall be possible. No break in voltage shall occur during such switchover. Rectifier ratings in all modes of operation shall be adequately adjustable to deliver the optimum charging rate recommended by the battery manufacturer while also supplying the normal steady state loads. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of rectifier load. The rectifiers shall be equipped with automatic current limiting devices to make them short-circuit proof. Current limitation shall be 100% of rated output current. Each rectifier shall be designed to carry 110% of rated output current for an indefinite time. All fuses shall be equipped with a flag, enabling an easily visible detection of any blown fuse. Battery fuse shall be equipped with signalling contact. The charging rectifiers shall be of approved construction and shall be equipped with all necessary fuses, protective devices, indicating instruments, switches, lamps, etc. and shall be suitable for automatic and manual control. All voltmeter instruments shall be connected via fuses to the busbars, feeders, batteries, etc. The mains supply voltages available to the chargers will be 415 Vac, 50 Hz three phase and a 240 Vac, 50 Hz single phase. Internal cooling of the charger shall be by natural ventilation. If forced ventilation is unavoidable then 100 per cent redundant fans shall be provided. The output dc voltage control range shall be adjustable and the range of voltage shall be stated in the Bid. The battery charger shall be installed in the telecommunication room. The final location shall be agreed with the Employer. 5.4.2.3 Control and Instrumentation The battery and charger system shall have a local control panel to show the status of the key parameters and mode of operation of the system. A mimic diagram shall be mounted on the front panel and shall clearly display the main circuit in relation to the various switching equipment. Each of the two rectifier cubicles shall contain at least the following indications/meters: a. DC output voltmeter.
b. Ammeters for charger current output &battery current. LED indications for: 5.4.2.4 Construction The cubicles shall be completely self supporting, made of a required number of standardized, prefabricated, vertical sections bolted together to form indoor metal clad, dust-proof rigid unit, degree of protection IP51. The cubicles shall be free standing, equipped with bottom frames suitable for bolting to the floor. Sheet steel thickness shall not be less than 2 mm. The switchboard and charger cubicles shall be vermin and termite proof. Hinged doors shall be provided to provide easy access to equipment contained within the cubicle. The hinged doors shall be of the lift-off type, secured with integral handles provided with locks and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket made of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. The cubicle shall be designed for cable entry from the bottom rear and equipped with glands suitable for all incoming and outgoing cables. Adequate working clearance shall be maintained inside the cubicles. The main switchgear and distribution board shall be provided with a copper earth bus of the size not less 2 than 100 mm and in cases where two or more cubicles are installed adjacent to each other this earth bar shall be continuous. A light suitably positioned to ensure even illumination of the entire panel shall be provided inside each cubicle as well as 1-phase, 13A, socket-outlet of the same type as other outlets in the installation. 5.4.2.5 48V DC Distribution Board The 48 Vdc distribution boards shall supply power to telecommunications equipment. The board shall be composed of standard cubicle of approved construction. The distribution board shall be mounted in the telecommunication room. The busbars shall be made of copper painted with suitable paint while all connection points shall be tinplated. The busbars shall be supported by insulators having high mechanical and electrical strength, sufficient creepage distance and shall be able to withstand all short-circuit conditions without damage. To ensure maximum safety to personnel, the busbars shall be completely insulated at the front. The busbar shall be supervised by an under voltage relay to be set at 80% of rated voltage with time delay between 0-5 seconds. Switching of the outgoing feeders shall be effected by two pole, manually operated miniature circuit breakers. The miniature circuit breakers shall be equipped with an adjustable, temperature compensated thermal overload and an adjustable magnetic instantaneous over current release for automatic tripping. The short circuit rating shall be adequate to protect each circuit against the effects of a fault at the outgoing terminal of the unit. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. The Contractor shall submit a calculation of selectivity between all protective devices in a circuit for all 48 Vdc. feeders to the Employer for approval. Time delayed releases shall be used wherever necessary in order to provide proper selectivity between circuit breakers of a circuit. Resetting shall also be provided. The above-mentioned protective devices shall withstand the specified short currents. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each circuit breaker for signalling circuits. The number of spare ways for future loads shall be at least 100 per cent of the number required for the specified loads. Charger on. Float mode. Boost mode. Under voltage. Over voltage. Current limit. Charger fail.
6. CONTROL CENTRE BUILDING REQUIREMENTS 6.1 INTRODUCTION
A new building shall be provided at the designated location in Sri Jayewardenepura on the outskirts of Colombo. The Contractor is required to carry out the design and construction of the new building. The results of the Soil Investigation and Land Survey will be provided to the bidders. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete works including but not limited to: 1. Conceptual Design 2. Processing and obtaining all national and local construction permits and/or clearances 3. Satisfying all planning and building regulation requirements 4. Detailed Design 5. Provision of all necessary equipment, materials, supplies, labour, and supervision to execute the works 6. Construction including piling, ground works, superstructure, drainage 7. Complete fitting out 8. Installation, testing and Commissioning of all building services 9. Landscaping of site around building and reinstatement of surrounding boundary. The Bidder shall provide the conceptual design with his offer that presents the proposed design in sufficient detail to demonstrate the general appearance of the external and internal structure and finishes, the layout of the control and equipment rooms including the service rooms (UPS, HVAC, etc). Three dimensional drawings of the Control Room interior shall be provided showing the perspective, colour schemes and layout of the furniture and equipment. During the initial design phase the Contractor shall provide a computer simulation of the building interior and exterior construction in sufficient detail to demonstrate the layout, access, ambience and appearance of the structure, rooms and furniture. The Contractor shall also provide a physical model of the building and its interior to a scale of 1:100. The model shall be in sufficient detail to demonstrate, access, layout, and general appearance. It shall also show access to the building for mains cables and communication cables via segregated and protected routes. There should be provision within the control centre complex to accommodate all of the System Control Centre's operational and support staff. The requirements for rooms are detailed in the following sections. 6.2 ACCOMMODATION REQUIREMENTS
The new NSCC building shall provide for the following accommodation: (a) Control room (b) (c) (d) Main equipment room for the NSCC Master Station and Communication equipment Office accommodation for Operational Support Staff Office accommodation for Commercial support (Future requirement for trading/energy purchase) A separate area/room in which management, modification and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS system is performed A separate room for training and location of the Despatcher Training Simulator
(e)
(f)
(g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n)
Workshop and office facilities for communications and outstation maintenance groups. Area/room for spare parts and equipment storage A reception area A visitors viewing area Documentation library Conference and meeting rooms Domestic facilities for the Control Room staff. Domestic facilities for the offices in general
The services shall include: (a) Secure power supplies derived from different sources and a standby diesel generator and the associated distribution system (b) (c) Fire detection and fighting equipment. Access Control System
The requirements for these are detailed in turn in the following sections. Drawing Nos. TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001/002/003 and 004 illustrate layouts indicative of the required space for the respective functions and staffing. 6.3 CONTROL ROOM
The control room is the heart of the control centre. It accommodates the operators, the user interfaces (UI) they use to interact with the SCADA/EMS system, and other ancillary equipment. The UI principally comprises of SCADA/EMS workstations and communications facilities (telephone and radio based) scanning, printing and plotting facilities and a rear projection display wall. All the other control centre facilities referred to above are required to support the control room activities. It is envisaged that all power system supervisory activities will be based in a single control centre that has been sized to accommodate the anticipated expansion in the number of operator positions and facilities for the next 10 to 15 years. The control room shall provide a work environment that assists the operators to effectively perform their duties. As the task of system control requires sustained vigilance and periods when high concentration is needed on the part of the operators, that environment shall be designed to eliminate as many sources of distraction as possible. For this reason, the control room shall be segregated from the rest of the control centre both visually and acoustically, and through restricting the general access of nonoperational staff or visitors to the control room. Since operators spend long periods of time within the confines of the control room, predominantly sitting in front of video monitors, it is essential that aspects of control room design, such as the selection of decor and furnishings, take ergonomics and comfort into account. The control room decor shall incorporate relaxing colour schemes that are light. The colours and design shall blend aesthetically with the Control Equipment (e.g. Operator Desks, Workstation & Screens & the Rear Projection Wallboard). The duty operators must be readily available at all times in order to respond to any situation as it arises. Therefore, it is necessary to provide separate domestic facilities for them that are in close proximity and with ready access to the control room. Such facilities shall include male and female toilets/washrooms and showers. Lockers for up to 20 persons shall be provided. There shall also be a fitted kitchen and a rest/dining room suitable for 6 persons for operators to use while on break or meal times. The Control Room shall be adequately sound proofed against noise from adjacent rooms. 6.4 EQUIPMENT ROOM
The Equipment Room is expected to house the following:
The SCADA/EMS Master Station equipment The Communication terminal equipment (e.g. SDH multiplexer, optical terminal box) PAX
The Equipment Room shall be partitioned by a fire wall and fire door such that the redundant or duplicated devices of which the SCADA/EMS and Communication systems comprise can be installed in separated areas to avoid common mode damage by fire or fumes or fire fighting substances/actions. The Equipment Rooms shall be adequately sound proofed to prevent disturbance to people working in adjacent rooms. This ensures that noise from equipment cooling fans and banks of disk drives and the conversation of those using the associated maintenance terminals does not intrude on control room activities. The equipment room(s) will need to be sized to house the system proposed along with its various peripherals and data storage devices. Equipment Room shall be designed with spare space for additional or replacement equipment in the future. Decor and wall coverings should be light but not bright and distracting and lighting is an important feature. Higher levels of illumination are normally used in equipment rooms compared to control rooms, but the need to avoid glare and reflections on screens still arises. Air conditioning must be highly reliable and maintain conditions typically around 21 +- 2C a relative humidity around 50% +- 10%. 6.5 6.5.1 OFFICES FOR CONTROL CENTRE STAFF General
In addition to the Control Room shift staff that will normally use the Control Room as their normal place of work, provision of offices shall be made for day staff comprising: DGM System Control CE System Operation CE System Operational Planning CE Performance Monitoring (Audit) Training Engineer SCADA/EMS System support; o o o o o System Administrator Software and Database Production Applications Network Applications SCADA/EMS Hardware individual office 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons 2 persons individual office individual office individual office individual office individual office
Communication System Support; o o o CE Communication Telecommunication Engineers SCADA Engineers individual office 1 person 2 persons
Electrical Superintendents Secretarial and Clerical support Commercial and Trading support -
7 persons 7 persons 2 persons (future)
The foregoing staff will require frequent access to the control room or equipment rooms albeit restricted by Access rights. Their offices shall therefore be conveniently located to allow this access. Provision shall also be made for Drivers (6), Security (3) & Janitor (3) staff. The Bidder may propose a number of offices to accommodate these members of staff and the respective functions taking into account the functional differences. There shall however be at least 3 individual offices and distinct open plan areas or 4 person offices to accommodate the others. A reception area with facilities for a receptionist shall be provided. This would serve the dual function of receiving visitors to the centre and to act as the first line access control to the control room. 6.6 STORAGE AND WORKSHOP FACILITIES
Storage facilities shall be provided to accommodate all of the spares and test equipment delivered under the Main Contract. The space and storage facilities shall allow easy access and identification of all items. Workshop facilities shall be provided that are suitable for carrying out maintenance to the control centre equipment away from the control and equipment rooms. This is to ensure that such work does not cause distraction to normal control room activities or jeopardise the operation of other equipment. This workshop shall be provided with suitable access to both the control and equipment rooms, and to the exterior of the building, to facilitate the easy manoeuvring of equipment in and out of the workshop. The workshop facilities will also be used for the maintenance of outstation and communications equipment. 6.7 DOCUMENTATION LIBRARY
A significant amount of hardware, software, and operation and maintenance documentation will be required for the new systems. Additionally, a number of technical references and technical papers should be available to the system control centre staff. The accommodation of this documentation, along with suitable reading area and copying facilities, will require a room within the control centre with sufficient size to house items in a logical and easily accessible manner. 6.8 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AND TRAINING SIMULATOR ROOM
The Development System and Operator Training Simulator shall be collocated in one room for the purpose of database maintenance and Operator Training. This room shall have sufficient space to house a 2 screen SCADA/EMS workstation and 2 persons for the Development System and for the Operator Training Simulator a 3 screen SCADA/EMS Operator Workstation and a single screen Trainer Workstation. 6.9 TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK MANAGEMENT ROOM
A separate room shall be provided for the monitoring of the telecommunication system. The room shall house 2 workstations for the Telecommunication Management System and 2 persons. Space for a SCADA/EMS 2 screen workstation with desk shall also be provided. 6.10 VISITORS' VIEWING AREA
The control room will become the focal point for visitors and the Contractor shall provide an area from which visitors can view and observe the control room activities without the need to enter the control room. This may be through a double or triple glazed window (for sound proofing) behind or to the rear or side of the operators. This ensures the viewing area is positioned out of the operators' line of sight, but from where the operator VDU screens and the Wallboard can be viewed. However, the design and location shall be such that reflections do not interfere with the operators view or ability to read Operator screens or the Wallboard.
6.11
CONFERENCE ROOM
This room shall house a conference table for up to 15 persons for the use of visitors, training and meetings. The design of this room shall facilitate presentation and training and be equipped with overhead projector, electronic white board and sound system . 6.12 MEETING ROOM
A meeting room shall be provided close to the office of the DGM System Control for general meetings and for convening emergency response teams/meetings. 6.13 DOMESTIC QUARTERS
Domestic quarters shall be provided for 24hour on call staff. This shall comprise two bedrooms, lounge area, cooking facilities and sanitary services. 6.14 POWER SUPPLIES 6.14.1 General Requirements A secure power supply is essential for the control centre in order that the continuity of control activities is not affected by losses of power, whether wide spread or to the control complex alone. In order to ensure high availability of supply, the Contractor shall provide the following. The detailed technical requirements are specified elsewhere, the purpose here is to define the equipment that space shall be provided for and details particular requirements related to location and segregation: (a) A dual LV (415V) infeed to the control centre complex (b) (c) An uninterruptible power supply (UPS) with 3 hour standby battery capacity A standby diesel generator.
The dual LV supplies shall be derived from different HV sources to minimise the possibility of simultaneous loss of supply from both in-feeds. The diesel generator should be rated to supply the complete control centre load including air conditioning, lighting, general services and the UPS system, i.e. the UPS full rated load plus the load associated with recharging the UPS battery. A fault tolerant form of UPS, e.g. dual redundant with static bypass, shall be provide for the supplies to the master station and communications equipment and the control room workstations. This shall be provided such that conditioning of the mains in-feeds and consequent protection from noise and perturbations occurring on the mains supply is assured and to permit continuity of operation should the mains in-feeds fail completely. 6.14.2 Control Centre LV In-feeds The LV in-feeds to the control centre shall be provided from two independent LV (415V AC 3-phase) infeeds. Each infeed shall be fully rated to supply the entire control centre load and should be derived from separate diverse HV sources. The standby generator should also be connected to the main distribution board to provide supply to the control centre in the event of both LV in-feeds being lost. The main distribution boards shall be arranged as two interconnected boards, each supplying half of the total control centre load. With this arrangement either half of the board may be taken out of service for maintenance without total disruption to the control centre's power supply. A similar split distribution board should be provided to distribute the supplies from the UPS. However the two LV in-feeds are derived, it is also essential that the cables carrying those supplies to the control centre's main distribution board and subsequently to the equipment distribution boards are physically segregated as far as possible to avoid points of common failure or simultaneous exposure to hazards. Furthermore, the routes taken by these in-feeds and distribution cables shall each be securely protected against external hazards. 6.14.3 Diesel Generator Room/Enclosure The diesel generator must be located in a position that is that is above the worst case possible flood water levels. In any case, a purpose built construction is necessary to ensure low noise outputs and minimal transmission of vibration and the ready removal of exhaust without disruption or discomfort of persons in the area.
6.14.4 Uninterruptible Power Supplies A single room may be used to house the UPS system's rectifier/chargers and inverters provided that there are arrangements to by pass the UPS room, otherwise the UPS shall be segregated by a fire wall. It is expected that forced ventilation will be required to cool the UPS equipment room. This shall be in the form of multiple fans (e.g. 3 with 2 capable of providing adequate ventilation). 6.14.5 LV Distribution Panels Separate LV distribution panels shall be provided for the Main Equipment Room and Control Rooms as well for all equipment forming part of the SCADA/EMS or Telecommunication systems and the equipment assigned to supply redundant or duplicated devices from different boards. The general services LV distribution shall be separate from these. Cable routing shall ensure protection from hazards and segregation to prevent common exposure to hazards. 6.14.6 UPS Battery Room Where Nickel Cadmium or Lead Acid batteries are used the rooms shall meet the requirements for ventilation, flameproof electrical fittings, drainage facilities, basins, eye baths etc Air cooling for this room shall be provided to ensure they operate at a temperature that does not cause deterioration and reduction in service life. 6.14.7 DC Supplies Separate duplicated battery backed 48V dc supplies shall be provided and these may be housed with the 415Vac UPS system and its batteries providing that he same design criteria and constraints are applied. 6.15 ACCESS CONTROL
An access control system is required that restricts access to persons into the building and to certain parts of the building. The system shall provide access control points from the reception area and car parks for external access and internal control points for access to the Control Room and Equipment Rooms. Separate access control points shall be provided to the LV intake, UPS area and the diesel generator. CCTV shall be provided to give views of the outside grounds, car parks, lifts, reception, Control Room lobby and other doors with access to the control room. The CCTV viewing console shall be located in the Control Room. 6.16 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM
A fire detection system shall be provided that enables smoke or fire to be detected in zones of the building. Unmanned areas such as LV intake rooms, under floor or ceiling cavities shall be independently fitted with detection devices. Fire fighting facilities shall be provided in accordance with local regulations. Provision shall be made for fire fighting equipment in electrically hazardous areas and for sensitive computer and communication equipment. 6.17 LAN
The offices shall be fully wired for an office LAN to normal office standards. This is separate to LAN equipment that is to be provided as part of the SCADA/EMS system. 6.18 HVAC
Air conditioning systems shall be provided for the building in general to normal office standards. For the control and equipment rooms duplicated systems shall be provided with 2 x 100% cooling systems and fans. In other words each of the systems shall be able to satisfy 100% of the air conditioning requirements allowing one to be out of service for maintenance. To ensure faults are revealed in good time each 100% system shall automatically switch over operation to the second system on a daily basis. The control room and equipment rooms shall be air-conditioned to provide both a comfortable working atmosphere for the operators and the correct operating environment for the equipment. To achieve secure operation of the air conditioning system, it should either comprise of duplicated units or incorporate standby units.
In the event of a power failure where the only supply is from the batteries of the UPS system (i.e. the diesel has failed to start) some form of emergency cooling may be required to ensure the SCADA/EMS Master Station continues to function. The design shall provide for sufficient air cooling, ventilation and dehumidification to be run from the UPS backed power supply. 6.19 LIGHTING
Lighting shall be designed to be glare free, avoid reflections on VDU screens and the rear projection screens. The luminosity levels shall be to normal office standards for the offices. For the Control Room controls shall be provided to enable the lights to be dimmed to set a comfortable working environment where viewing of screen based data is not impaired. Equipment rooms shall be illuminated to normal standards for working with machinery. In addition to any statutory emergency lighting a set of luminaries shall be provided in the Control Room that have sufficient luminosity to allow Operators to continue work at their control room desks in the event of supply failure. These luminaries shall be feed from the UPS system. 6.20 MATERIALS
Generally materials used for the construction and fitting out of the building shall be of high quality and to the required national or international standards. In support of preventative maintenance all surface materials within the control centre including ceilings, floors, and wall coverings should be selected to prevent the generation of static electricity and should be non-dust producing. 6.21 MAINTAINABILITY
It is vital that the control centre facilities have an inherently high level of availability. It is important that the design of the building and its services supports principles that are conducive to rapid repair times with minimum disturbance to other control centre functions. The design of the control centre, particularly the control and equipment rooms, needs to be undertaken with this requirement in mind. It shall include the provision of ready access to all items of equipment, cabling and connections so that they can be easily repaired in situ, removed for repair elsewhere, or replaced. This may be achieved by providing ample free space around items of equipment and by the use of a raised 'computer floor' or channelling to accommodate cables.
7. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
It is a fundamental requirement that the System (and individual items of equipment within it) shall be designed for high reliability and that hardware and standard existing software used within the System shall have been proven in service. The basic equipment life expectancy shall be at least fifteen years provided that normal routine maintenance is carried out. The equipment shall be designed to operate safely, reliably and efficiently over this period. The replacement parts necessary to achieve this reliability shall be defined in the Bid. The overall System design shall incorporate redundancy to enable the System to continue to operate, without loss of any SCADA/EMS functionality and without degradation of System performance, following the failure of single items of media or subsystems. In this context, the System includes mains power supplies and the communication links that are used by the SCADA/EMS Master Station for communications with subsystems (principally Outstations) located remotely from the NSCC. It shall not be possible for the System to enter a state whereby loss of data is not deterministic (i.e. the System must always be able to determine if data has not been received successfully). The System shall incorporate facilities to automatically recover lost data. In operation, the System shall automatically carry out sufficient self-checks to ensure that the overall availability of the System is not impaired due to the occurrence of unrevealed faults. For example, standby equipment and standby database information shall be automatically checked to ensure that successful changeover can take place when required. The Bidder shall describe the self-checks carried out by the System offered and provide an estimate of the proportion of possible faults revealed by such checks. Error detection, correction and message retry mechanisms shall be provided to overcome soft errors, random errors and burst data errors. Calculations shall be presented to show the probability of single and multiple bit errors in messages escaping detection and possibly causing an incorrect response. The System's response to all corrupted message types shall be defined. 7.2 AVAILABILITY REQUIREMENTS For the SCADA/EMS Master Station - 99.98%, assuming a 4 hour Mean Time To Repair (MTTR) For Outstations supplied under this contract 99.99% and a MTTR of 12 hours. For communication channels to each Outstation 99.995 and a MTTR of 12 hours 7.2.1 SCADA/EMS Availability
The System availability shall be at least:
The following SCADA/EMS facilities are the minimum that shall be available with a probability of 99.98%: a) All real time functions for which the System is designed, including: i. ii. iii. iv. Communication with at least 98% of in service Outstations Data acquisition, including the compilation of historical data records Supervisory controls EMS applications
b) One less than the normal complement of User Interfaces in control rooms c) One less than the normal complement of hardcopy peripherals provided for real time output in the control rooms d) Mains supply from the UPS system e) Adequate environmental control (e.g. air conditioning) to ensure continuous operation.
7.2.2
Communication System Availability
A communication channel is considered unavailable when no routing to an Outstation is available or end to end service is not available. 7.2.3 Outstation Availability
An Outstation is considered unavailable when: a) Software malfunction affecting normal operation b) Any function is lost for all points of a single type c) More than one input card or output card of the same type fails d) One input card or output card of each type fails e) Communication with the Master is not possible because of Outstation failure f) 48Vdc power supply failure. 7.3 AVAILABILITY CALCULATIONS
Theoretical and practical figures shall be given in the Bid Schedules for the reliability of each individual unit of the System in terms of Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF). Reliability figures of existing equipment shall be supported by evidence from operational experience at similar types of installation. The reliability calculation for constituent printed circuit boards shall be based on ML-HDBK-217 or other comparable standard. Calculations for the availability of the System shall be included in the Bidder's offer. These shall be based upon the Mean Time Between Failure of items of equipment and a Mean Time To Repair stated above. The overall assessment of System reliability shall be provided in the form of an overall System block diagram with each main item shown, complete with its reliability data. The calculation of overall reliability shall be provided with this diagram, together with information on the source of any theoretical or practical data used. The Bidder shall state the methodology of the analysis and the source of the reliability figures. This shall include: a) All assumptions made b) Assumed failure distribution, e.g. exponential, normal, etc. In addition to the overall System reliability block diagram, the reliability in terms of MTBF shall be shown for other specific failure modes detailed by the Bidder. The Bidder shall describe in detail the failure modes of the entire System, clearly stating the effects of any subsystem or media failure on the availability and response of the essential SCADA/EMS functions. The Contractor shall update availability calculations, reflecting the increasing depth of design detail, as the design phase of the project proceeds. 7.4 VERIFICATION
The verification of reliability and availability of the system shall be realised by maintaining a register of all failures and restoration times which will be compared with the guaranteed characteristics for MTBF/MTTR and the specified criteria. The method to be applied for defined system availability shall include: a) Comparison of the availability of the system (as defined above) with the specified requirements all failures that cause the loss of the defined essential functions will be considered as failures regardless of their nature (e.g. random hardware, systematic software, environmentally induced, unidentified causes) b) Faults shall be categorised according to their nature c) Unrevealed faults causing loss of essential functions (once identified) shall be considered a serious non compliance
d) The calculation of availability of the essential functions shall be the sum of the unavailable times for one or more of these functions divided by the total time expressed as a percentage. This method shall be adopted to monitor the reliability and availability during the Site Acceptance procedures and until the end of the Defects Liability Period. During this period the Contractor shall also keep a register and provide written reports of all identified faults (whether they cause loss of essential functions or not), that explain their causes, action taken and any implications for the future operation of the system.
8. INSPECTION AND TESTING PHILOSOPHY 8.1 8.1.1 GENERAL Approach to Testing
The testing for the SCADA/EMS System, Outstations, Telecommunication Equipment and Power Supplies shall ensure that the equipment functionality is thoroughly exercised and validated at the Contractor's premises before delivery and commissioning. The test methodology shall complement the design methodology and the two shall be developed in parallel. The principle of testing shall be that, at stages throughout the work, formal tests shall be performed and recorded against written test specifications, to provide a high level of confidence to the Contractor and the Employer (or the Employers designated and authorised representative) that subsequent stages can proceed. The responsibility for specifying, conducting and recording tests shall be with the Contractor, but all aspects must be to the satisfaction of the Employer. The degree to which the Employer intervenes in the process will depend upon the level of confidence built up during the project. This document does not constitute a Test Specification or Test Procedure for any part of the system, rather it sets out the stages at which tests are required and the subjects, location and purpose of each stage. All Test Documentation for all tests shall be written by the Contractor and submitted to the Employer for approval at least 12 weeks before they are first used. Inspection of incoming goods and components, and subassembly testing, shall be undertaken by the Contractor in accordance with the procedures set out in the Contractor's own Quality Plan and are not described here. This Specification covers the higher levels of complexity, namely: Type testing Subsystem testing System testing.
Type testing is required to verify that the equipment meets with the specified environmental conditions. 'Subsystems' are defined as single items or small groups of closely related equipment (including software) such as Printers, Workstations, Operator consoles, UPS System, etc. The 'System' is defined as the interconnection of all Subsystems and any other equipment which will eventually comprise all of the equipment supplied under this contract (with the exception of spares). In the context of interfacing, testing and setting to work the System includes the existing Outstations, Communication System and network media (OPGW, PLC etc) and their interfaces as well as new Outstations that are put into service under other projects during the currency of this contract. The Contractor under this Contract shall undertake to coordinate the System testing (and Subsystem testing, if necessary) in collaboration with the Employer and related contractor(s). 8.1.2 Responsibilities
The Contractor's responsibilities shall include but not be limited to requirements to: Produce written Test Plans, Schedules, Procedures, method statements, test record sheets and procedures for fault reporting, for all tests All test documentation associated with a subsystem or system test shall be submitted for approval by the Employer at least 12 weeks prior to the commencement of the associated test Ensure that all test documentation associated with any testing has achieved Category I approval (See Clause 11.7 ) from the Employer prior to the commencement of the corresponding testing Provide the equipment, test equipment, test software, personnel and facilities to conduct the test (described further in the next Clause) Successfully carry out all tests according to the approved test procedures and correct any errors prior to the witnessed acceptance tests
Provide facilities for the Employer to witness any Factory tests Produce permanent records of all test progress and results in a formal systematic manner Carry out all remedial work and re-testing necessary for the equipment to pass the tests
Each of the above responsibilities shall be discharged to the satisfaction of the Employer, but approval by the Employer shall not imply any diminution of the Contractor's responsibilities. It is expressly the responsibility of the Contractor to satisfy himself that items 'supplied by others' are in a satisfactory condition for the Contractor's tests to be conducted. 8.1.3 Test Equipment and Facilities
The Contractor shall provide all equipment and services required for testing, including, but not limited to: Laboratory test instruments Special test equipment, emulators, simulators and test software, to permit full testing of System functions and performance Other items of the System, specified elsewhere as being part of the Contractor's supply, even if not part of the Subsystem under test Consumables.
All test instruments shall be subject to routine inspection, testing and calibration by the Contractor. All test instruments shall be subject to approval by the Employer and, if required by the Employer, shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by an approved standards laboratory. All test software shall be subject to formal quality assurance requirements stipulated elsewhere in the Specification. 8.1.4 Testing Stages
Inspection of incoming goods and components, and subassembly tests, shall be performed in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Plan. Software production and integration testing shall be performed in accordance with the Software Requirements of this specification and the Contractor's Quality Plan. The stages of testing to be performed at higher levels shall be based on the following:
a) Type Testing
To prove that the equipment supplied meets with the specified environmental conditions
b) Subsystem Factory
To prove the design of a Subsystem prior to the Subsystem being used in the System FAT
c) System FAT
To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements
d) Site Installation Tests

To check the operation of equipment, subsystems, systems following installation
e) Site Update Period

To update and verify the SCADA/EMS database Point to Point testing of each outstation signal
f) System SAT
To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in accordance with the Contract requirements and interacts correctly with equipment supplied by others and interfacing to the Works
g) Tests on Completion
500 Hour Trial Period 'Hands on' test period (following System SAT) to demonstrate the reliability, stability and robustness of the SCADA/EMS System
8.1.5
Notice & Witnessing of Tests
The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Programme of Work documentation, a master plan showing the scheduled dates of testing and shall provide updates to this plan, when any changes are known, at least six weeks in advance of the tests. The Contractor shall advise the Employer in writing of the actual date of commencement of every test in Clause 8.1.4(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f)and (g), at least 10 working days before the commencement. The Employer shall have the right to witness any tests whether conducted at the Contractor's premises or elsewhere. Records of every test, whether witnessed or not, shall be taken by the Contractor and copies sent to the Employer within three weeks of completion of the tests. 8.1.6 Test Procedures and Result Sheets
The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and result sheets for all tests. He shall also prepare a cross reference listing to show that all of the requirements of the Functional Design Specification have been included in the tests. Separate test procedures and result sheets shall be provided for factory and site acceptance tests. All test procedures and result sheets will be subject to review and approval by the Employer. Test result sheets will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. 8.1.7 Contractor's Prior Tests
The Contractor shall successfully complete a prior run of all tests, using the test procedures and result sheets described in Clause 8.1.6, before the commencement of the formal tests. Any revisions to the test documents found necessary as a result of the prior tests shall be made before the commencement of formal tests. Test results from the prior tests shall be made available to the Employer on request, to indicate the readiness of the equipment for tests to commence. 8.1.8 Conduct of the Tests
The Contractor shall conduct the tests in accordance with the approved test procedures, and shall enter the results in the result sheets. For each test, the Employer will determine whether the test has passed or failed. In general, the test will be considered to have failed if either: The result of the test is not in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure, or The result of the test is in accordance with the expected result described in the test procedure, but some other unexpected or unexplained event occurred which the Employer considers to be a fault
Full use shall be made during the tests of operator manuals and other documentation provided by the Contractor, to provide a series of tests of their accuracy. 8.1.9 Failures
The Contractor shall correct all faults found during testing, and shall arrange for the test to be repeated. The test shall only be repeated when the fault has been remedied and the equipment demonstrated to function correctly.
Where remedial measures involve significant modifications that might, in the Employers opinion, affect the validity of earlier tests then the Contractor shall repeat the earlier tests and obtain satisfactory results before repeating the test in which the fault was first identified. The Employer shall have the right to order the repeat or abandonment of any test in the event that results demonstrate that the equipment is significantly non-compliant with the Contract requirements, without in any way prejudicing his rights under Clause 8.1.11 of this Section. The Employer shall have the right to suspend any test in the event that errors or failures have become unacceptable. The Employer shall also have the right to suspend any test in the event of a fault being detected by the Contractor but not reported to the Employer within 24 hours. In this event, the suspension shall remain in effect until reporting has been brought up to date to the satisfaction of the Employer. 8.1.10 Fault Categories The Employer will allocate a category to each fault, which shall determine the future conduct of test. Test categories shall be as defined in Table 7.1. 8.1.11 Repeat Tests The Contractor shall correct and re-test every fault detected during the tests. Time spent by the Employer and his representatives witnessing re-tests, or waiting at the Contractor's premises or the test site while corrections are made prior to re-test, shall be charged to the Contractor at the standard hourly rate for the personnel concerned. All other costs incurred by the Employer as a result of such re-tests, including accommodation, subsistence and travel charges, will be charged to the Contractor at cost. If the Employer is required to return to the Contractor's premises or the test site to witness such re-tests then time spent by the personnel concerned in travelling to the site of and witnessing such re-tests, and all charges incurred by them in so doing, will be charged to the Contractor. 8.1.12 Fault Log The Contractor shall maintain a fault log throughout each series of tests. Every fault detected during the tests will be entered in the log, together with the actions taken to clear and re-test the fault. The fault log will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied. 8.1.13 Hardware Failure Reports For each hardware failure that occurs at any stage of testing, the Contractor shall investigate the failure and prepare a report on its cause(s) and design implications. The report shall clearly show: The most likely cause of the failure An analysis of any stress that may have been caused to other components of the equipment being tested as a result of the failure Whether the failure is a result of any component operating outside its design range Whether any design changes should be made to avoid further failures All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the equipment supplied.
8.1.14 Software Failure Reports For each software failure that occurs, once the software has been approved for inclusion into the system and is subject to configuration control, the Contractor shall generate a software failure report. The report shall clearly show: The observed symptoms The likely cause The fault category (from Table 1)
The report shall also clearly show the following information that shall be entered when the failure has been investigated: The actual cause of the failure, The corrective action taken, All software modules affected.
All such reports will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the SCADA/EMS system.
TABLE 8.1: FAULT CATEGORIES
Category 0
Definition An item recorded as a fault during testing, and subsequently considered to be a normal acceptable occurrence. Testing may continue. Minor fault. An event not affecting the functionality being tested in that session; testing may continue. Repeatable fault not affecting the functionality being tested in the session. Testing may continue at the discretion of the Engineer. Repeatable fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. The fault must be rectified before retest of the affected test sessions or sessions. Testing may proceed on other sessions if permitted by the Engineer. Major fault affecting the functionality being tested in the session. The fault must be rectified before recommencing testing. Non-repeatable fault affecting functionality being tested in the session. The action taken will depend on the severity of the fault. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate course of action. Documentation error or deficiency. The error will usually be amended during the test and the test will continue. The documentation shall be corrected before the tests are considered complete. Deficiency in the ability of the test or test equipment to demonstrate the function being tested in the session. Discussion is needed to establish the most appropriate action. Other fault not covered above, but requiring explanation and, in some cases, correction.
1 2 3
4 5
8.2
TYPE TESTS
Full details of type tests performed on equipment identical to that being offered shall be submitted with the offer, accompanied by a proposed schedule of tests to be performed for each item of equipment. If the submitted type test results are satisfactory then the type tests specified may, at the discretion of Employer, be waived. In general, type test results shall show that the equipment being proposed for this Contract will perform in accordance with its design specification in the environments to which it will be subject in its application on this Contract. The environmental factors include climatic (temperature humidity, wind, rain etc.), electromagnetic (radiated and conducted), mechanical (transport vibration, handling knocks, earthquake stresses) and chemical (salt laden atmosphere). Where appropriate, the type tests should also demonstrate that the equipment does not exceed accepted standards in terms of its impact on its environment (noise, mains harmonics etc.).
8.3 8.3.1
FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS Subsystem FAT
A Subsystem Factory Acceptance Test shall include the inspection, hardware test and software test of any clearly identifiable Subsystem, prior to use as a component in a System test. The test shall prove that the Subsystem meets its particular physical, functional and performance specification. All corresponding inspection, and component and subassembly test documentation shall be complete and available for inspection prior to the commencement of a subsystem FAT. The tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. 8.3.2 System FAT
The System FAT shall combine all Subsystems and shall include other equipment that shall represent, emulate or simulate those parts of the System to be eventually provided. The System FAT shall commence only if all associated subsystems have successfully completed their individual FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Contractor shall have completed his own internal system integration tests prior to commencement of the System FAT. The System shall be inspected to ensure that all interfaces mate correctly and that the System is complete. The System shall then be tested as a whole to prove that it meets the Specification in all aspects of function, performance, capacity, maintainability and operability. It is required that the results of the test shall demonstrate System reliability and availability consistent with the values specified and those guaranteed by the Contractor. The test shall be carried out at the Contractor's premises. Upon satisfactory completion of the test, the System will be ready for delivery to site. The FAT shall not commence until all documentation associated with the FAT including Test Plan, Test Specifications, Test Procedures and Test Record Sheets have achieved Category I approval. The System equipment will not be allowed on site until the FAT has been successfully completed and the Employer has reviewed the corresponding test records. Partial shipment may take place, by agreement with the Employer, of equipment that has been successfully factory tested (and the corresponding test records have been reviewed by the Employer) and is not required to form part of the System FAT. 8.3.3 General FAT Requirements
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the FAT to the satisfaction of the Employer. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to, the following: (a) Order of Tests. Tests shall be conducted to prove the integrated functioning of the system as a whole and shall include (but not be limited to) the following: 1. Hardware inspection 2. Hardware functionality including firmware and operating system level software tests on CPU, disks, I/O interfaces etc. (The extent of this testing will be dependent on the extent and nature of the subsystem tests) 3. Integrated system tests to prove the functionality of all applications software in the context of the complete integrated system, equipment and software configuration 4. System performance tests to demonstrate that the integrated system can achieve the guaranteed levels of response and to determine the limits of the response envelope 5. System performance in the face of various contingencies 6. Soak test to give an indication of system reliability, stability and robustness (b) Inspection.
Prior to commencement of the tests, the equipment shall be inspected to ensure: 1. Correct standards of workmanship and quality 2. Correct identification labels, cabling, tagging, housing and mounting etc 3. Adequate accessibility 4. Compliance with the Specification and reviewed drawings (including compliance with fire safety and materials requirements) 5. Verification of model numbers, quantities of items etc (c) Test Conditions. The conditions of the tests shall be no less rigorous than: 1. All subsystem components shall have been successfully inspected and tested, as necessary, and all corresponding documentation shall be complete and available for inspection. 2. All necessary maintenance and adjustments shall be carried out before commencement of the test so that the tests can continue uninterrupted by routine operations. 3. The equipment shall be complete at the start of the tests and no interchange of modules or equipment shall be allowed. 4. All parts subject to wear, such as electromechanical peripherals, may be omitted from the tests if agreed by the Engineer. The printing and recording equipment needed for conducting the test shall be run throughout the test. 5. Each subsystem and/or each module shall be tested cyclically at least once per hour whilst all other parts are functioning normally. 6. No repairs or adjustments shall be carried out during the test period unless agreed by both parties. 7. The test shall run for at least 200 hours continuously. It need not be permanently manned throughout this period provided that a comprehensive log of operations tested and faults occurring is printed. 8. Where there is redundancy in the equipment the test period shall be divided equally between the redundant parts. Automatic changeover is not permissible. All modules must remain powered up for the duration of the test 9. Test equipment and test software shall be provided to load the equipment to a greater extent than the worst case predicted for the complete system. Online loading and all functions shall be tested under these worst case conditions. Sufficient hardware (e.g. remote terminals) and/or simulation devices shall be provided by the Contractor to ensure that the Design System Loading conditions can be achieved and System performance demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer 10. The tests shall be carried out at the prevailing ambient conditions of temperature and humidity, no special conditioning is required (d) Computer Equipment. The Contractor shall provide all the software necessary to carry out the tests. Tests shall include: 1. CPU tests 2. RAM write/read tests 3. Disc write/read tests 4. Data highway loading tests
5. Peripheral tests 6. Workstation equipment test Tests shall exercise communication ports and shall overload ports so that queuing of messages occurs. The tests shall use a simulated network, or where practical, a real network. (e) Communication (i) Tests shall include, where appropriate: 1. Data integrity in the presence of noise 2. Loss of Link procedures 3. Demonstrate that communication systems do not interfere with each other (e.g. cross-talk) or with other systems 4. Demonstration of network management functions 5. Programming, control and configuration of the network. The tests shall use a simulated network or, where practical, a real network. (f) Power Supplies (i) Tests shall include: 1. Loading 2. Supply Quality 3. Switching and automatic switchover sequences 4. Efficiency 5. Availability and functionality of alarm and indication facilities Tests shall use simulated loads that present similar characteristics to those in the finally integrated system. (g) Soak Test Each subsystem soak test shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment comprising the subsystem. The initial System soak test shall have a minimum duration of 100 hours. The time shall be calculated as the number of hours continuously connected and running. All errors or problems shall be printed out. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. (h) Functional Tests During the functional tests, every function specified for the system in the Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. Both positive and negative tests shall be carried out. Before commencement of the functional tests, all software for which source code is supplied under the Contract shall be reassembled and/or recompiled from source. The resulting object code shall be re-linked and used for the tests. Similarly, all configurable databases, screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. All of these activities shall use compilers, assemblers, linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract.
(i) Performance Tests The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements. (j) Unstructured Tests In addition to the structured tests described above, all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing, during which the Employer shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. (k) Outstations For the purposes of FAT and, in particular, system loading tests, the Contractor shall include at least one Outstation of each type to be supplied. Suitable simulation shall be provided for Outstation types that are existing and that will be interfaced with. Simulation shall be used to represent the remaining Outstations, for the fully extended system. All simulations must be substantiated to show that they provide a realistic simulation of the associated Outstations and the Master Station / Outstation communication process and data acquisition processing. 8.3.4 Specific Test Requirements
8.3.4.1 Master Stations For this Factory Acceptance Test, each Master Station to be supplied, as part of this Contract shall communicate with Outstations and/or equipment that can simulate their functionality and performance. The master station SCADA database shall be configured and populated with all system specific data. All system graphic displays, tabular displays, log reports etc shall be constructed for the test. As a minimum the following shall be tested: 8.3.4.2 Outstations For this Factory Acceptance Test each type of Outstation to be supplied as part of this Contract shall communicate with a master station or a master station simulator that can simulate the functionality and performance of a master station. As a minimum the following shall be tested: Data acquisition and processing Alarm and Event Processing Measured and Metered Value Processing Calculated values Operator Interaction Authority Control and Processing Graphics Displays Tagging and hand dressing Reporting and Archiving Performance - data handling capacity and response times Data and graphic display management Multi-processor management including power fail/auto start-up Hardware and software diagnostics ICCP functionality Other data exchange facilities
Analogue and digital inputs and outputs Command outputs Pulse inputs Scanning, time tagging, de-bounce filtering and time synchronisation Communications processing including multi-porting functions Data management Hardware and software diagnostics Compliance with communications protocols IEC 60870-5-101 and 104
8.3.4.3 Energy Management Software The EMS network model shall be configured and parameterised and the database populated with all system specific data. Prior to the tests the EMS network model shall be validated using the results of a 'bench marked' off-line load flow program. As a minimum the following shall be tested: All Network Analysis Applications All Forecasting and Scheduling Applications All AGC functions All Hydro Chain Control functions All Study Mode Network Analysis Applications Operator Training Simulator All Network Management Applications
8.3.4.4 Telecommunication The telecommunication network shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. For this test the complete telecommunication network equipment shall be staged at the supplier's premises including the core system, the peripheral network, and the network management system. As the system will be integrated with the existing SDH and PLC equipment these shall be suitably simulated or emulated in order that the interface and interaction with these may be proven. Links shall be set up with the maximum design optical budget loss and tests carried out to show that minimum levels of service quality are maintained. The test set up shall include a test SCADA Master Station and a number of Outstations. Tests shall be carried out to demonstrate that the telecommunication network is entirely compatible with the Master Station and the Outstations and that it provides the required level of service. Where appropriate the automatic re-routing of circuits shall be demonstrated and the levels of disturbance to the directly affected services and services on the alternate route assessed. The functionality of the Telecommunication Management System (TMS) shall be thoroughly tested including the circuit and hardware configuration, and alarm and event handling and archiving. The routing of all circuits, anticipated in the field, shall be verified. The FATs shall be arranged to represent working conditions as closely as possible. All functions of the test equipment offered shall be tested fully. During the FATs, the Contractor shall demonstrate that: a. The units operate correctly when connected as a system in its operational configuration. The performance is in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The equipment meet the following EMC requirements with respect to: o Radiated immunity to a 5 W hand held VHF transceiver operating at distance of 0.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place.
b. c.
Radiated immunity to a GSM (Global System for Mobile communication) phone operating at distance of 0.25 m from the equipment with cubicle door closed or protective cover in place. The power supply limits and tolerances are complied with. High frequency test (VDE 0435/T303, class III). Electrostatic discharge (IEC 60801-2, class III). Electromagnetic fields (IEC 60801-3, class III, ANSI C37.90.2) Rapid transients (IEC 60801-4, class IV).
o o o o o
During the functional tests, every function specified for the system in the Contractors Functional Design Specification shall be thoroughly tested. Similarly, all configurable databases, screen displays and reports shall be regenerated from source. All of these activities shall use compilers, assemblers, linkers and generation/startup utilities identical to any of those supplied under the Contract. The performance tests shall demonstrate that the performance and response times of the equipment are in accordance with the specified requirements. In addition to the structured tests described above, all factory acceptance tests shall include a 48 hour period of unstructured testing, during which the Employer and/or its representatives shall be at liberty to instruct the Contractor to carry out such additional tests as may be required to test the reliability and robustness of the system. FATs shall include the following telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components: a. b. c. d. e. f. 8.3.4.4.1 SDH communication system. Telecommunication management system. Digital power line carrier system. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone PAX equipment. Voice recording equipment. SDH Communication System
The tests on the SDH communication system shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. Transmission rate. Nominal operating wavelength. Bit error rate measurements with optical attenuation representative of the link design budgets and also at the equipment design limits. Optical output power measurement. Laser diode bias current measurement. Receiver sensitivity. Channel capacity. Digital, electrical and optical interfaces. User interfaces. VF channel measurement. Data channel measurement. Analogue and digital service channels.
d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.
m. n. o. p. q. r. 8.3.4.4.2
Engineers order wire equipment operation. System redundancy and programming. Different failure modes such as main and standby changeover. Alarm and network management functions. Integration interfaces with existing network. Power supply limits. Telecommunication Management System
The tests on the telecommunication management system shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 8.3.4.4.3 Performance monitoring and fault co-ordination facilities. Interfaces with other telecommunication sub-systems or equipment components. Alarm and network management functions. Failure modes and recovery. System configuration and channel assignment. End to end circuit management. Automatic reconfiguration of traffic requirements and channel re-allocation. Reports and system archiving. Power supply limits. Digital Power Line Carrier System
The tests on the power line carrier system shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 8.3.4.4.4 Transmission rate. Bit error rate measurements. Channel capacity. Transmitter output level. System programming. User interfaces. Engineers order wire equipment operation. Alarm functions. Power supply limits. Teleprotection Signalling Equipment
The tests on the protection signalling equipment shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. d. e. Transmission time. Transmitter output level. Signal boost facility. Receiver dynamic range. Alarm facilities.
f. g. 8.3.4.4.5
In service loop test. Power supply variations. Telephone PAX Equipment
The tests on the administrative telephone PAX equipment shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. 8.3.4.4.6 Traffic handling capacity. Telephone network signalling system. Analogue and digital interfaces. VF and E&M signalling levels. Tie line interface. Switching facilities. Extension facilities. Operator console functions. Transmission performance. System configuration functions. Redundant processors functions. Alarm and network management functions. Power supply limits. Voice Recording Equipment
The tests on the voice recording equipment shall, as a minimum, include: a. b. c. d. e. Automatic call logging functions. Search and play back functions. Interfaces with PAX equipment. Alarm functions. Power supply limits.
8.3.4.5 Power Supplies The UPS System and Diesel Generator shall undergo Factory Acceptance Testing. These tests may be carried out in the respective manufacturers works. Equivalent loads shall be used for the tests. The tests shall comprise: a. b. c. d. e. Full rang of loading tests with efficiency and supply quality measured Response to step load changes Switchover sequences Failure modes and configuration tests Tests for charging batteries
It will not be necessary to test the batteries to be delivered under this contract although inspection may be carried out at the option of the Employer. Batteries used duting the FAT shall be those provided by the manufacturer at their test facilities. 8.4 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
Site Acceptance Testing shall comprise the following stages:
Site Installation Tests Site Update Period System Integrated Tests System Performance Tests Tests on Completion
After equipment has been erected and connected up on site, the Contractor shall carry out to the satisfaction of Employer such tests as may be required to prove compliance with the Specification, independent of any factory tests. In support of the Site testing activities, the Contractor shall prepare an overall test plan that covers all testing to be carried out on Site. The test plan shall indicate test precedence and dependencies and should be co-ordinated with the Contractors general programme of work. It shall conform to the relevant requirements for test documentation set out in Section 11, Documentation, in this volume of the Bid Documents. The test plan will be subject to the approval of the Employer and should be closely coordinated with the Employer in terms of the availability of plant for testing and the timely provision of the associated permits to work. The Employer shall have the right, to waive some tests and require additional tests to be carried out if findings on Site indicate additional or alternative tests are required to properly demonstrate that the works comply with the requirements of the Contract. The general requirements for testing and factory testing set out in preceding clauses of this Section are applicable to Site testing. 8.4.1 General SAT Requirements
It must be emphasised that all testing that requires an interface to operational equipment must only be carried out after prior agreement with the Employer and adequate advance notice shall be given to the Employer by the Contractor of their intent to conduct testing involving operational equipment. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the Test Documentation for the SATs to the satisfaction of the Employer. They shall meet the appropriate requirements for the Factory Acceptance Test specified in Clause 8.3.3(General FAT Requirements) of this Section of the Specification. In addition, the following requirements shall be met: a) Commissioning It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, within the scope of definite work, to fully commission the System in such a manner as to enable trained operators to use the System. b) Duration and Downtime Each stage of the testing shall be carried out over a period of time sufficient to fully prove the correct functioning of the equipment. All errors or problems shall be printed out. Messages shall also be output periodically indicating continuing successful operation. The equipment shall perform successfully without errors or failures that are inconsistent with the reliability and availability criteria of the System design. c) Testing to Plant Initial setting to work and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by Employer, and carried out jointly by Employer and the Contractor and third parties responsible for the Telecommunications and Outstation Works. Tests shall be subject to the Employers standard safety procedures, and the Employer will carry out all operational switching in accordance with a programme that will be prepared and agreed in advance between the Employer and the Contractor.
8.4.2
Site Installation Tests
A site installation test shall be conducted on each part of the system comprising: SCADA/EMS Master Station. Once an Outstation installation is complete and has been configured, it shall be tested without connection to plant or to the Master Station. Fibre optic communication system. Telecommunication management system. Digital power line carrier equipment. Digital teleprotection signalling equipment. Telephone system. The communication installed at the NSCC, DCC, CEB HQ and each substation and generating station location. UPS System
The purpose of these tests is to prove that the equipment or subsystems have not been damaged during packaging, delivery and installation on site, to prove that the equipment or subsystem is operating correctly and interfaces correctly to equipment and services on that site. On completion of the tests, the equipment or subsystem shall be considered ready for the next stage of testing. The scheduling of Site Installation Tests shall be subject to coordination with the installation and testing schedules of equipment of other suppliers, to which the Subsystem is designed to interface. 8.4.3 Site Update Period
During this period the SCADA/EMS database will be brought up to date and the correct connectivity from the Master Station to plant shall be verified. 8.4.3.1 SCADA/EMS Database The Contractor shall work in coordination with the Employers staff to complete and verify the SCADA/EMS database. The activities shall include but not be limited to: Completion and verification of network modelling fixed and variable data. Coarse tuning of EMS applications. Setting up of reports with live data/inputs. Setting up of Load Forecast application with live data/inputs.
8.4.3.2 Point To Point Testing Site acceptance test procedures for the new SCADA equipment shall ensure that the SCADA database and displays are correctly mapped onto the Outstation input output connections to the plant. The process of testing this mapping may take up to 6 months to complete for existing stations and will be an ongoing task as new Outstations under other projects are ready for service. Therefore, the Contractor shall establish, to the satisfaction of the Employer, quality procedures that ensure the validity of the results of previous testing are systematically reviewed following subsequent changes in the database, displays and or the system code. These procedures should identify when previous test results may no longer be valid due to subsequent changes on the system. If test results are invalidated by subsequent actions then re-testing will be necessary. The scope of the re-testing shall be agreed with the Employer on a case-by-case basis. Test procedures for point to point testing shall be agreed in detail with the Employer and must include a plan for the phased change over from any existing remote control and monitoring systems to the new system with the minimum of interruption to the Employers operational capability. They will typically include the following steps: a) Local Tests for new Outstations
On completion of plant adaptation works in a substation or generating station the correctness of the works shall be tested by activating each connection on the plant and checking the correct signal is received at the cross connection terminals in the Marshalling Cubicles. Similarly, output signals from the Outstation should be simulated at the cross-connection terminals and correct receipt by the plant confirmed. Testing to / from the Outstation shall be carried out using a local GUI or Laptop test device that emulates the master station. b) Safe Plant Tests Data communication to the master station shall be established for an Outstation following satisfactory completion of local testing. Once robust and stable communications have been established and proven between an RTU and the master stations the plant should then be placed in a safe situation for personnel and for the power network according to the Employers safety rules. This will allow all RTU input and output connections to be closed at the cross connections in the Marshalling Cubicles. Direct end to end or point to point testing shall then be carried out to demonstrate the correctness of the mapping between the Master Station database and displays and the connections to the plant. Once this testing is complete and all problems remedied and retested, the links in all input circuits may be left closed but output circuits shall be opened. c) Stability Tests Each Outstation should operate for at least two weeks monitoring only mode. If the Outstation and Master Station are stable and operate correctly during this period then with the agreement of all parties those Outstations for which full point to point testing is complete can be transferred to full SCADA monitoring and control. Conditions and constraints on site may require a different approach to the regime outlined above and a detailed procedure will have to be agreed with the Employer prior to the testing being undertaken. Those outstations involving substation automation or DCS schemes will also require slightly different approach although the overall objective will be the same. Where necessary to complete the work the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating point-topoint testing activities with third parties responsible for the supply of existing Outstations and new ones provided under concurrent projects. 8.4.4 System Site Acceptance Tests - SCADA
The System Site Acceptance (System SAT) Tests for the main SCADA system shall be conducted on all the interconnected equipment forming the Contractor's scope of supply, together with equipment of other suppliers to which the System is designed to interface. The System SAT shall be conducted after all the various elements of the System have been installed in the field and have all successfully completed their individual Site Installation Tests and the Site Update activities are complete. With the agreement of the Employer the System SAT may commence once a predefined number of Outstations have had their point to point testing completed. This test shall demonstrate that the overall design of the System meets the functional and performance requirements of the Specification in the field, using the actual communications network and including equipment supplied by others, to which the System is designed to interface. The Contractor's test plan shall take due account of the requirement to coordinate testing with third parties responsible for equipment to which the SCADA Master Station is designed to interface. The Contractor shall satisfy himself by testing and other necessary means that the physical communication links between locations supplied by others meets the Contractor's requirements. To ensure prompt remedial action to be instigated the Contractor shall report any deficiencies in such equipment to the Employer fully in writing on their discovery. The correction of deficiencies in such equipment shall not be the responsibility of the Contractor, provided that the deficiencies have not resulted from inadequate definition and specification of requirements on the part of the Contractor. 8.4.5 Site Acceptance Tests - EMS
Site acceptance test procedures for the EMS applications software shall include tests to demonstrate the functionality and performance of all EMS applications. These tests shall be undertaken once the SCADA system is fully tested and operating in a stable and reliable manner.
The order of testing shall be as follows: a) First all Network Analysis Applications including Study Mode b) Then all Power Applications c) And finally all Forecasting and Scheduling Applications 8.4.6 Acceptance Tests - Telecommunications
The Contractor shall test the telecommunication system as a standalone system prior to connection to the Master station and the RTUs. The tests shall include but not be limited to proving: a. b. c. d. The system is complete and configured according to the design. Functionality testing of the telecommunication system. Communication end to end circuit testing. The correct routing, and where appropriate, the correct automatic re-routing of all circuits. System performance tests to demonstrate that the new telecommunication system will give satisfactory service under normal working conditions. System functional and performance tests under abnormal conditions such as disturbances. System trial operation and availability test over a period of 1 month.
e.
f.
g.
Once the system is put into trial operation and availability testing, the Contractor may not work or make changes to any part of the system without first obtaining permission from the Employer. 8.4.7 Readiness to Commence Tests on Completion
The Contractor may apply to commence the Tests On Completion when the Employer is satisfied that the Site Acceptance Testing and commissioning has shown that the works as a whole comply with the specification and that: a. All test documentation and records are complete in order and signed off by the Contractors test engineers The spare parts and test equipment are complete, in working order and available for use The initial issue of technical documentation and copies of marked as built drawings have been provided Training has been completed as required by the Contract The arrangements for support during the warranty period have been agreed
b.
c.
d. e. 8.5
TESTS ON COMPLETION
Once the Employer has approved the SAT test results and the requirements of the previous Clause have been fulfilled the Contractor may proceed to apply to start the tests on completion. The tests on completion comprise a 500 hours trial period during which the System shall perform to the requirements of the Employer and in accordance with the specification. The trial period is the 'hands on' part of the Site Acceptance Testing and is to confirm the reliability, stability and robustness of the SCADA/DMS System. The Contractor shall have a minimum of one suitably qualified engineer in attendance during the trial period. If any fault or unexpected event occurs during the 500 hours trial period, the Employer shall determine whether it constitutes a minor or a major fault. If the Employer determines that a major fault has occurred then the Contractor shall rectify the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer and the 500 hours trial shall restart from the beginning. The costs of
any such re-testing shall be borne entirely by the Contractor. The re-testing shall take account of all aspects of the System performance and functionality that might be affected by the remedial work. Minor faults that do not stop the system as a whole from functioning in accordance with the requirements of the Specification shall be remedied in a manner and to a timetable agreed with the Employer. If the System as a whole is not available for normal operation due to a fault, but the fault is still judged by the Employer to be minor, the trial period shall recommence from the point at which it was interrupted, as soon as the Contractor has cleared the fault to the satisfaction of the Employer. 8.5.1 System Acceptance
The System will be accepted by the Employer in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract and if both: a. The System and all items of equipment have successfully completed all the specified tests All failures, problems and reservations noted during the tests have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Employer
b.
If either of these conditions has not been complied with, then the necessary corrective action shall be agreed between the Contractor and the Employer. 8.5.2 Partial & Operational Acceptance
Depending on the scope and outcome of the Tests on Completion Partial and or Operational Acceptance Certificates shall be issued in accordance with the stipulations of the General Conditions of Contract. 8.6 NON-CONFORMANCE
In the event that the equipment fails during testing, the Contractor shall provide full details to the Employer of the reasons for the failure and the proposals for overcoming the failure. If such a failure occurs as a result of any deficiency on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for taking steps to rectify the situation in an agreed timescale. Any proposed modifications to previously approved designs shall be approved in accordance with relevant provisions in the Contract documents before implementation. All costs associated with non-conformances and re-tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
9. SPARES AND MAINTENANCE 9.1 GENERAL
The System purchased will be required to function for a minimum of fifteen years. It is therefore of prime importance that the Contractor shall guarantee the availability of spare parts to facilitate the continued availability and performance of the System for that period of time. In addition, the System design shall be such as to minimise equipment failures and optimise fault-finding and maintenance. 9.2 MAINTENANCE PHILOSOPHY
It is the intention of the Employer to ultimately undertake first line maintenance with assistance from the Contractor being provided through suitable maintenance contracts for problems that cannot be resolved by the Employer's maintenance technicians. This objective will be achieved by a combination of a maintenance agreement covering Master Station hardware and software, the provision of maintenance courses for the Employer's technicians and by the purchase of suitable spares holdings. Where the Contractor purchases modules, subassemblies or complete items of equipment from other parties, the Contractor shall obtain statements from those parties confirming that their policy with respect to support of their product(s), as relevant to his Contract, complies with the requirements detailed in this Clause or take such other steps as may be necessary to ensure that the objectives of this Clause are achieved. The requirements for spares and maintenance contracts to meet these objectives are detailed in the following Clauses. 9.3 DESIGN TO FACILITATE MAINTENANCE
As the System is required to operate continuously, equipment shall be designed to facilitate maintenance. Down-time must be reduced to a minimum. Peripheral equipment shall be easily removable from service and either replaced by standby equipment or spare equipment without the loss of System operation. Comprehensive maintenance documentation, including fault-tracing and clearance procedures, shall be provided by the Contractor. Diagnostic and test facilities shall be provided, as part of the Works, for the main equipment and all peripheral items. Comprehensive provision of self diagnostic facilities is an essential part of this scope of supply. The Bidder shall specify, as an option, any special equipment, including tools and instruments, required to enable first line maintenance to be carried out by the Employer. 9.4 SPARE PARTS
The maintenance philosophy that will be adopted will generally be for fault finding to card level and module replacement, with the faulty modules being either scrapped, if damaged beyond repair, or returned to the Contractor for repair, as appropriate. The Contractor shall operate a module repair and replacement scheme, details of which shall be provided with the Bid, including turn around times. The Contractor shall supply as part of the Contract a set of spares that comprises 5% of the total number of each type of installed replaceable units/modules (with a minimum of one unit of each type) to be supplied. These spares shall include but not be limited to: 1. RTU I/O modules, Power Supplies, Processors, communication interfaces and ancillary items 2. Processors, main memory, discs, power supplies and ancillary items 3. VDU screens, LED Video Wall board lamps and ancillary items 4. One complete 48Vdc charger unit, battery cells, charger components, UPS modules etc 5. SDH equipment and interfaces 6. PAX modules, interfaces and ancillary items 7. Teleprotection signalling units and interfaces
In order to assist in the ordering of additional spare parts, the Bidder is required to recommend a spares holding to cover the first four years, following the end of the Defects Liability Period, and to provide a cost breakdown. The Contractor shall not have access to spares held by the Employer during the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall base the list of recommended spare parts on the above maintenance philosophy. This list shall be submitted as an optional price and shall include a cost breakdown. Prices for the supply of spares shall include all associated charges and shall remain valid for orders placed within the term of the Defects Liability Period. The Employer shall be at liberty to order quantities of spare parts at variance with those listed by the Bidder. The prices shall remain valid for any such variation of quantities, unless stated otherwise in the Bid. The cost of spare parts shall not be used to calculate the cost of any variations to the Contract. The spare parts recommended shall be identical functionally, electrically and mechanically, to the corresponding parts in the equipment supplied under the Contract and shall be suitably packed and clearly marked, ready for reception at the Employer's stores. Any special handling instructions shall be clearly marked on the packages. The Contractor shall supply equipment lists of the recommended spare parts which include the names and addresses of the individual manufacturers of the listed items. The recommended spares holding shall be quoted on a unit basis, as an option, for selection by the Employer at any time up until the end of the Defects Liability Period. The availability of spare parts to the Employer, at a reasonable cost, shall be guaranteed by the Contractor as follows: a) The Contractor shall maintain an adequate stock of spare parts for a minimum period of ten years (or until the end of the equipment's specified life) after the product has been removed from quantity production, declared obsolete or officially removed from sale b) Where a component, which is not under the Contractor's control, has become unavailable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to offer a compatible alternative at reasonable cost c) Design improvements or changes made to a product during its production run shall be carefully assessed such that component interchangeability shall not be affected. This requirement shall apply to equipment manufactured by the Contractor and also to equipment purchased from other suppliers. 9.5 MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
A maintenance agreement shall be offered to cover Master Station hardware, system software and all application software maintenance and support. The maintenance agreements shall provide the requirements detailed in the following Clauses. The Bid shall provide the costs of providing such agreements as Optional Works considering mandatory spares offered. The prices shall incorporate escalation formulae to provide a means of adjustment during their period of validity (5 years from the end of the Defects Liability Period). Prices quoted shall include the costs for providing guaranteed attendance within 24 hours of callout. Costs for providing a quicker response shall also be stated. 9.5.1 Scope of Agreements
The Contractor shall fully support all Master Station hardware and software supplied under the Contract for the life of the System or until such support is no longer required by the Employer. The level of support provided shall be defined in the maintenance agreement. The Bidder shall provide details of the maintenance agreement including elements supported by suppliers of proprietary equipment. The details shall show a breakdown of each type of service for each part of the overall Master Station system 9.5.2 Period of the Maintenance Agreement
The maintenance agreement shall come into effect on the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. It shall be extended each year on the anniversary of that date for a further period of 12 months unless and until the Employer terminates the Agreement.
9.5.3
Charges for the Maintenance Agreement
During the Defects Liability Period, all the conditions of the maintenance agreement shall apply without additional cost to the Employer. The charge for provision of services under the maintenance agreement shall be calculated from a formula to be stated in the maintenance agreement. This formula shall remain in force for a period of five years commencing from the day after the expiry date of the Defects Liability Period. The terms of the formula may include local labour and materials indices and currency exchange rates but the formula itself shall not be changed during the five year period. Two months before the expiry date of the current annual maintenance period, the Contractor shall calculate the maintenance charge that will apply for the following year, using labour and materials indices and exchange rates that are current at that time, and may submit an Application for Payment of that amount. The Employer will check the amount claimed and, if satisfied with its correctness, will pay the Contractor the amount due within 28 days of the date of the Application for Payment. The terms of the maintenance agreement may be renegotiated at the expiry of the five year period. 9.5.4 Maintenance Services
The maintenance agreement shall include provision of the services defined below. The charge for these services shall be stated in the maintenance agreement. Where indicated below, the provision of services shall be included within the annual charge, such that no additional maintenance charge shall be incurred by the Employer when they use these services. Costs of any routine maintenance shall be included within the annual charge. 9.5.4.1 Telephone Support The Contractor shall provide verbal telephone support to the Employer personnel during normal the Employer office hours to provide advice on the use of system facilities and to assist with any problems that may arise. This service shall not be subject to a use charge. 9.5.4.2 Remote Access Support The Contractor shall offer, as an option, to provide facilities for remote support and maintenance of the SCADA/EMS System via a dial-in modem link (or equivalent) back to the original supplier of the System or other appropriate organisation. The amount by which the annual maintenance charge would vary for inclusion of this option in the agreement shall be clearly identified in the Schedule of Prices. This facility shall incorporate appropriate measures, to the satisfaction of the Employer, to ensure the System is secure against any unauthorised use of the link. The facility shall also prohibit the initiation of commands via the link port that may interfere with the Employer operations, e.g. prevent the issue of SCADA control commands. It shall be possible to configure which of the System's facilities are prohibited to be used via remote access. 9.5.4.3 Fault Rectification The Contractor shall rectify all faults identified by the Employer. When a fault occurs, the Employer will advise the Contractor of the nature of the fault and confirm the date and time of reporting it. The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and experienced maintenance engineer on site within the guaranteed response time stated in the maintenance agreement. The Contractor shall ensure maintenance personnel are available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week for repair of high priority faults. Lower priority faults may be repaired during normal working hours. 9.5.4.4 New Software Releases New software releases may take place during the life of the System to provide solutions to identified problems, or enhancements to System functionality and or performance. The Contractor shall notify the Employer of all such releases of software. The maintenance agreement shall include the issue, installation and testing of new software releases, as necessary, to resolve identified problems and to ensure continued software support by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Employer (all costs shall be covered by the annual charge).
New software releases that are not essential to resolve identified faults and are not necessary in order for the Contractor to maintain software support may also be available. The Employer shall be entitled to purchase these optional updates at their discretion. The costs of any such upgrades are to be separately negotiated between the Employer and the Contractor. A decision by the Employer not to purchase such upgrades shall not effect the obligation of the Contractor to continue to provide System support under the maintenance agreement. After any new software has been installed on the Purchase equipment, the Contractor's maintenance personnel shall test the software at least as thoroughly as it was tested during Factory Acceptance Testing. 9.5.5 Termination of the Agreement
The Purchase may terminate the maintenance agreement at any time. Such termination must be in writing and will take effect from the expiry date of the current maintenance year. 9.6 PRODUCT CHANGES AND ENHANCEMENTS
Changes in the design of items of equipment may make items supplied for this contract obsolete and may therefore affect the future spare parts availability. The Contractor is therefore required to have a company commitment to product enhancements in order to avoid obsolescence, while taking advantages of new technology in an evolutionary manner. Design changes and product enhancements should therefore be made such that they are directly compatible with the present items. The Contractor is therefore required to: a) Fully document and forward to the Employer details of product improvements that are made during the marketing period of the equipment, as soon as it is incorporated on the product line. This documentation shall clearly identify changes to be made and reasons for the change. This requirement shall also apply to the Contractors sub-suppliers. b) Notify the Employer 12 months prior to ceasing production of replacement parts (for spares inventory purposes). c) Notify the Employer within 2 months after a design change has been implemented (after expiry of the Defects Liability Period) on equipment supplied for this Contract. 9.7 CONSUMABLES
All consumables such as printer paper, printer toners and cartridges, cartridge tapes, discs, etc., sufficient for one year of normal operation of the System shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Scope of Work. These items shall be delivered in accordance with an agreed programme, but the initial consignment shall be available to the Employer at the start of the Defects Liability Period. The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a proposed list of consumable items suitable for two years operation of the system. The list shall include itemised prices, valid for purchase in quantities at the discretion of the Employer at any time up to the end of the Defects Liability period. 9.8 COMMISSIONING PERIODS
The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary spare parts and consumable items up to the time of Handover, including those required for the site commissioning period and for the Reliability Test Period. The Contractor shall note that spares and consumables purchased by the Employer will not be available for use by the Contractor during site acceptance testing and commissioning, or during the trial period. 9.9 TOOLS AND TEST APPARATUS
Specialised tools and test apparatus listed below, that is required for maintenance and fault finding including that used for setting, measuring and maintaining performance levels shall be supplied as part of the scope of works for each of the equipment types or subsystems supplied under the Contract. The types of tools and apparatus shall be defined in the Price Schedules and the Bidder shall state the recommended numbers of each device. 9.9.1 SDH/PDH tester
The SDH/PDH tester shall have the following minimum features:
Transmission test functions such as optical power measurements at 1310nm and 1550nm wavelengths, BER testing, end-to-end error performance etc Already built-in interfaces such as E1 balanced, E1 unbalanced, STM-1/4/16 etc Full PDH support from 1.5Mbps to 140 Mbps including nx64kbps User configurable setup and automated functions Anomaly generation and analysis Line bit rates up to 2.5Gbps Overhead byte capture capability Intrusive, non intrusive and monitor modes capability Automatic protection switching with resolution of 1ms Round trip delay measurements Service disruption measurements Alarm and error resolution better than 100ms Rugged and light weight Touch screen display User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.2 Datacom tester
The datacom tester shall have the following minimum features: Support V.24/V.28, X21/V.11, V.35/V.36 and 10/100Mbps Ethernet interfaces DTE/DCE emulation and bidirectional monitoring capability Support data rate up to 10Mbps Self loop testing capability User configurable setup and automated functions Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.3 Digital multimeter
The digital multimeter shall have the following minimum features: Voltage (ac & dc), current, resistance continuity with beeper, frequency, diode test USB connectivity for data transfer to PC/flash disk Minimum 0.03% dc accuracy Rugged and light weight Large display screen User friendly Long battery life for continuous testing Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.4 Signal generator
The signal generator shall have the following minimum features: Flexible signal generator capable of analogue, digital and mixed signals Real-time sequencing capability for infinite waveform loops and pattern length generation Minimum of 4 channels Minimum of 14 bit resolution Minimum of 1.2 GS/s sampling rate User friendly Rugged and light weight Long battery life for continuous testing Built-in data storage capability
Data transfer to PC/flash disk Reports and print outs Complete with hard protective case and accessories 9.9.5 Maintenance laptop computer
The laptop computer shall have the following minimum features: Minimum dual core Pentium processor Minimum 4Gb RAM Minimum 250 Gb HDD Built-in USB, RS232, ethernet & wireless LAN interfaces Qwerty keyboard and optical mouse Complete with necessary operating and applications software Complete with protective bag and accessories 9.10 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
9.10.1 General There shall be a Defects Liability Period that shall apply to the entire Works provided under the contract. The Defects Liability Period for each part of the Works shall commence on the date that the associated Operational Acceptance Certificate is issued and will cover the Works or portion thereof covered by the Certificate. The Contractor shall provide Spares and Maintenance support during this period including the provision of Master Station hardware and software support specified for the Maintenance Agreement. Where any item of equipment has an original suppliers warranty that extends beyond the Defects Liability Period then that warranty shall be effective up to its expiry date. 9.10.2 Attendance During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall attend to and clear all defects within a reasonable time of being notified of the defect in writing. All critical faults that have an operational or security impact upon the System shall be attended to within 2 hours of notifying the Contractor of the fault. Less critical faults shall be attended to within 24 hours. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary field staff to enable these targets to be met. If the Contractor does not attend to the defect within the stipulated period (from notification) and thereafter remedy the defect within an agreed period, the conditions of contract shall apply in respect to the 'failure to remedy defects'. 9.10.3 Quality Control The Contractor's actions during the Defects Liability Period shall be subject to quality assurance and the Contractor's Quality Plan and Procedures shall reflect this requirement. The quality control shall ensure full documentation of the following: a) Record of dates of defect notification and attendance b) Full report on the nature of the defect c) Reasons for the defect d) Recommended remedial actions e) Agreement with the Employer on recommended actions, testing by the Contractor to prove efficacy of remedial actions and timetable for implementation f) Results of corrective actions and any associated tests. 9.10.4 Access The Contractor shall comply with and make due allowance for the Employers access control and Permit to Work system when attending to defects.
9.10.5 Replacement Parts Where the agreed remedial action is replacement of defective parts, then these shall be replaced within 48 hours of the requirement being identified. The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Scope of Work, a spare parts holding sufficient to ensure that equipment repair times are consistent with the specified, or otherwise approved, availability target figures, for the duration of the Defects Liability Period. The Contractor shall supplement the initial spares holding, if omissions or inadequacies become apparent during the Defects Liability Period. The Employer will hold the spare parts for use by the Contractor. All surplus spare parts remaining at the end of the Defects Liability Period shall be retained by the Employer.
10. TRAINING 10.1 GENERAL
The Employer considers that a programme of training for all staff expected to be involved with various aspects of the Project is particularly important if the SCADA/EMS System is to be effectively utilised. The Contractor shall run a programme of courses to cover all the Works to be supplied under the Contract, the various grades of personnel involved and at times to suit phases of implementation of the Project. The programming shall ensure that the Employers personnel are fully trained in operational, maintenance and system engineering aspects prior to initial commissioning. The programme shall also be arranged to minimise the time between completion of training and commencement of system commissioning. Training shall include but not be limited to the following areas: a) SCADA/EMS System SCADA/EMS System Overview Operations Database and Display Maintenance SCADA Applications EMS Applications Other Applications Administration
b) Outstations Outstations Plant Modifications and Interfaces
c) Telecommunication System Telecommunication System Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Digital power line carrier equipment Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system
d) UPS and Battery Charger Systems e) Building Services and Diesel Generator The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Employer, a synopsis of all training courses offered at least eight months prior to initial commissioning. Generally courses should be scheduled to take place on Site. However, courses necessary for personnel involved with data base building may take place at the Contractors works. Additionally, where specialised equipment is only available at the suppliers works courses may be held at these works. The Employer wishes to introduce a number of their engineers into the project at an early stage. There shall therefore be provision for incorporating the Employers engineers into the SCADA/EMS System integration, database population and display building, and pre-acceptance testing activities at the Contractors works. It is anticipated that this work would involve up to four engineers from the Employer, for training in system administration, SCADA database and display maintenance, EMS database maintenance and EMS applications tuning. The Contractor shall arrange for all travel and accommodation as well as travel visas for the Employers engineers when attending this training at the Contractors works. The Contractor shall provide in his offer for the air fares, hotels, subsistence and local travel for the Employers staff while they are attending this training at the Contractors works, relevant training materials and training notes and training facilities including the use of any test instruments and equipment during the training period.
10.2
CONTENT
The syllabus of each course shall contain the following types of information: a) Course name b) Duration c) Locations for the training d) Types of staff who would benefit from the course e) Pre-requisite skills of course attendees f) Objectives, i.e. the skills the course is intended to develop
g) Aims, i.e. how the skills developed can be used h) Description of course activities i) Description of course documentation.
The scope and content of courses should ensure a systematic and comprehensive coverage of all the operational functionality and maintenance requirements identified in both the design and the operations and maintenance documentation for the Works delivered under the Contract. This shall include all third party products such as operating systems and their associated utilities and diagnostics. The Contractor is therefore requested to provide a number of different courses to accommodate the requirements of the different skills each group of personnel will need to acquire in the context of the Employer's actual operating environment. All courses shall consist of a series of lectures, discussions and demonstrations and, particularly for operators, engineers and maintenance staff, hands-on experience of the equipment involved. All relevant equipment documentation shall be available during the training courses. Pre-recorded video presentations shall not be used as the primary means of training. The training shall be to such a level that on completion of the courses, the Employers staff shall be able to operate and maintain the all equipment provided under the respective sections of work and in the case of the SCADA/EMS System to supervise (control and monitor) the operation of the electrical system in all operating modes using all facilities. They shall also be able to maintain and trouble shoot the equipment up to the point where, due to the nature of the fault, the Contractor recommends calling out specialist service agencies. As a minimum, the courses shall include, but not be limited to, the specific topics listed in the following sub-clauses, or equivalent topics, depending on the detailed design of the products supplied under the Contract. All training courses, notes and documentation shall be in the English language. 10.3 SCADA/EMS SYSTEM COURSES
10.3.1 Overview Course The SCADA/EMS Overview course shall include an overview of the functions and facilities of the system and an appreciation of the operational and maintenance aspects of the system. As a minimum the course shall include: a) Hardware and Software Architecture b) Operating Systems and Associated Utilities c) Applications Architecture and Deployment d) Database Systems, Deployment and Maintenance Utilities e) User Interface, Access Control and Security f) Data Acquisition
g) Alarm and Event Handling h) Supervisory Control i) Historical Data Recording and Reporting Facilities
j)
Printing
k) EMS Applications l) Common Applications
m) System Status and Management 10.3.2 System Operation Courses The SCADA/EMS operations courses shall equip Operations staff with a detailed knowledge of the system operational functionality and how it may be applied in the day to day operation and management of the network. As a minimum, these courses shall include: a) Workstation Access and Security b) Navigation of the User Interface c) Network and S/S User Displays d) Network Colouring and Tracing e) Display Data Presentation Conventions f) Real Time and Study Mode Views
g) Alarm and Event Presentation, Searching, Sorting and Filtering h) Supervisory Control i) j) Manual Entry/Hand Dressing EMS Applications
k) Common Applications l) Job Management
m) Switching Schedules n) Safety Documentation Facilities o) Tagging p) Trending q) Printing and Printer Management r) Historical Data Access and Report Generation
s) Log books and Scratch Pads 10.3.3 Database and Display Maintenance Courses Database and display maintenance engineers will require a detailed appreciation of the tools for populating and editing the databases and building and amending user graphical displays. As a minimum the database courses shall include: a) SCADA Database Architecture b) Database Rules and Naming Conventions c) Data Categories and Attributes d) Data Entry and Modification e) Mapping Data points to Outstation Addresses f) Outstation Data point Addressing Conventions
g) Switching Between Databases h) Historical Database Architecture i) j) Historical Database Management Historical Data Archiving and Retrieval
k) EMS Database Architecture
l)
EMS Database Data Entry and Modification
m) Data Consistency and Integrity n) Database Verification o) Database Update And, as a minimum the display courses shall cover: a) Display Construction Conventions b) Defining Layers and Levels of Detail c) Using and Amending Graphics Libraries d) Drawing and Editing e) Linking to Dynamic Data f) Defining Display Navigation
g) Updating and Distributing Displays 10.3.4 EMS Applications Courses Power systems analysis engineers will require a thorough understanding of the theoretical underpinnings of the EMS applications and how to configure, run, tune them and verify the results. As a minimum, these courses shall cover. a) Basic functionality of each application b) The displays associated with each application c) Use of tuning parameters d) Power system model parameters e) Verifying and Interpreting Results 10.3.5 System Administration Courses The system administrator is the key to the secure and efficient operation of the Master Station. The system administration courses shall provide an introduction to the task of managing the system hardware, operating system, local area network and the SCADA/EMS applications software. As a minimum, they shall cover: a) Managing the SCADA/EMS applications software b) Building the operational system from source code c) Running diagnostic routines d) Managing user accounts e) System Backup management f) Rebooting servers and workstations
g) Managing trace files and crash dumps h) Adding/Changing hardware i) j) 10.4 LAN management and TCP/IP addressing Operating system administration
TELECOMMUNICATION COURSES
Training courses to be provided include: a. b. c. d. Fibre optic communication system. Telecommunication management system. Digital power line carrier equipment. Teleprotection signalling equipment.
e.
Telephone system.
The courses shall provide the attendees with a sufficient understanding of the functionality of each part of the system and its operation and maintenance requirements. As a minimum the contents shall cover: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. System overview and architecture. Interfaces and standards supported. System operation and configuration. System design/budget calculations. System hardware and software. System expansion and upgrade capability. Cabling requirements. Installation, testing and commissioning techniques. Fault finding and trouble shooting. Repair and routine maintenance.
The telecommunication training courses carried out at manufacturers works shall be conducted in two sessions at different time so to enable the Employer to plan his staffing resources accordingly. The Employers staff will be present during the installation/commissioning period and it is essential that they are fully involved in any on-site corrections/modifications to hardware. 10.5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COURSES
Personnel who will be responsible for maintaining equipment will require a significantly different type of training to enable them to undertake fault finding to lowest replaceable unit level. Maintenance courses of appropriate content and duration shall be provided for the Employer personnel that cover: a. b. c. Computer, data communications and Outstation equipment Test gear Fault diagnosis to module level including the use of online and, if applicable, offline diagnostic software Preventive maintenance Calibration of equipment Fault finding exercises
d. e. f.
It is anticipated that these courses will be conducted on the Contractor's premises or at the locations of the subject equipment's manufacture prior to the equipment's delivery. There shall also be maintenance courses for all auxiliary systems and subsystems supplied under the Contract, e.g. the UPS System. 10.6 COURSE ATTENDEES
The Bidder shall provide prices for each of the above courses, based on the following numbers of personnel per course, together with the cost per additional attendee for larger numbers.
SCADA/EMS Courses
No of Trainees
Duration (days)
Location
SCADA/EMS Courses System Overview Course System Operation Courses Senior Engineers; 2 sessions for 5 persons System Operation Courses 3 sessions for 5 persons Database & Display Maintenance Courses EMS Application Courses System Administration Courses System Maintenance Courses Telecommunication Courses System Overview Course Fibre optic communication system 2 sessions for 4 persons Telecommunication Management System 2 sessions for 4 persons Digital PLC equipment system 2 sessions for 4 persons Teleprotection signalling equipment system 2 sessions for 4 persons Telephone system 2 sessions for 4 persons Outstation Courses Outstation Functionality Outstation Architecture Outstation Hardware Outstation Software Maintenance and fault finding Expansion procedures Power Supply Systems Other Equipment NSCC UPS System Building Services Equipment
No of Trainees 20 10 15 6 6 4 6
Duration (days) 1 10 5 10 10 10 10
Location Sri Lanka Works Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works
20 8 8 8 8 8
1 10 5 5 3 10
Sri Lanka Works Works Works Works Works
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1 1 2 2 2 1 1
Works Works Works Works Works Works Works
2 2
5 5
Works Sri Lanka
Attendees of all courses shall be provided with sets of relevant course materials. The times at which the various training courses will take place shall be stated, and fully documented notes shall be available to the Employer no later than 2 months before the commencement of the course. The prices for the complete courses quoted in the Bid shall cover all the Works delivered under the Contract. The Bidder may be required by the Employer to make a video recording of any of the formal
training courses run by the Contractor to be used in the future for in-house refresher training and training additional the Employer personnel. The prices of the training courses shall be detailed in full such that additions/deletions to personnel/courses can be calculated by the Employer without recourse to the Contractor. 10.6.1 Course Duration The courses shall be of sufficient length and pace and include sufficient practice exercises to ensure that the subject matter is covered thoroughly and the trainees are able to demonstrate their understanding of what they have been taught. Each course shall be reviewed on completion to determine if the trainees have achieved an acceptable level of take up. Additional training on specific topics shall be provided if the required take up of knowledge and skills has not been sufficient to meet the goal of the course. The Bidder shall include in their offer an outline proposal in terms of content and duration for the formal part and for the on the job training at the SCADA/EMS suppliers premises. It is expected that a period of three months at the Contractors works will be necessary for a trainee to gain maximum benefit from this type of training.
11. DOCUMENTATION 11.1 GENERAL
The following details the document requirements for the Works covered by the Specification Document. Documentation and drawings shall relate solely to the actual equipment supplied. They should not include any irrelevant or superfluous information, e.g. information relating to variants not supplied under this Contract and options that are not potential future extensions to the supplied System. All drawings, manuals, specifications, component lists, etc., shall have a unique document identification number that conforms to an approved numbering scheme, along with an issue or revision number and a record of modification. System documentation shall comply with the relevant sections of ISO 6592 (or an equivalent national or international standard). 11.2 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE BID
The Bidder shall provide sufficient information to fully describe their Bid in all aspects and to clearly demonstrate the compliance of their offer with this Specification. Any additional features offered that have not been requested in this Specification shall be clearly identified in the offer. The Bidder shall provide clear distinction in their Bid between the main offer and any alternative offer(s) or options that are not included in the Bid Price for the main offer. All information shall be presented in a format that enables the Bid to be assessed and compared with other Bids. All Schedules shall be fully completed in all respects and a copy provided in electronic form, where this is requested. An overview drawing shall be provided that clearly shows the architecture of the SCADA/EMS Master Station, all interfaces to other systems and how all items of equipment are interconnected (e.g. workstations, printers, Outstations, etc.). An overview drawing of the Telecommunication System shall be provided that clearly shows the topology of the SDH system, the connections to the Master Station, Outstations, PLC links, the Network Management System and the PAX. Drawings that illustrate the general appearance, size and layout of the NSCC building shall be provided with sufficient detail to enable the proposal to be evaluated and compared to other offers. One sample copy of a set of operating manuals supplied for a similar contract shall be provided with the Bid. This may be submitted electronically in CDROM. One copy of the Bidder's current QA Manuals and an appropriate sample of a Project Quality Plan shall be supplied with the Bid. These may be submitted electronically in CDROM. The following specific items of documentation shall be included in the Bid: Table 11.1 Items to be Provided with the Bidders Offer Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Deliverable Documents SCADA/EMS System Overview SCADA/EMS Master Station Equipment and Applications Telecommunication Overview Fibre optic communication system Telecommunication management system Power line carrier Teleprotection signalling equipment Telephone system Optical budget calculations Specification Reference 2 2 3.2 3.2.4.4 3.2.5 3.5 3.2.6 3.7 3.3.2
Item 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 11.3 Outstation equipment
Deliverable Documents
Specification Reference 4 5 6 6 2.2.3 2.12 7 17 17.4 Vol. 1 PART I Section 3 11.3.4 2.4.7.1
Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems & 48Vdc systems Proposed control room design NSCC Building Conceptual design System sizing calculation System Performance calculation System Availability calculation QA Manuals Sample Quality Plan and Procedures Project references where offered system(s) are in service. Detailed Project Implementation Programme Hydro optimization algorithm DOCUMENTATION TO BE PROVIDED DURING THE CONTRACT
11.3.1 General The documents and drawings to be supplied after the award of Contract are specified below. During the design phase, the Contractor shall provide sufficient information to enable the Employer to be assured that the design is proceeding satisfactorily. This information shall be provided via the regular meetings and reports. The Employer shall make available to the Contractor, upon written request, information in the form of drawings and documents relating to the existing operational transmission SCADA system, the electrical network and associated plant including substation plans. The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting information in a timely manner to meet their programme requirements. Before proceeding with the manufacture of equipment, design documentation and drawings, including the Functional Design Specification, shall be submitted by the Contractor for review by the Employer by the dates and in the numbers and types specified. The submissions shall be sufficiently detailed to enable the design to be assessed for compliance with the Specification with respect to design, manufacture, installation, operation and maintenance. The Contractor shall also provide, as part of the Functional Design Specification (FDS), a traceability assessment that shall provide cross references between each Clause within this Specification (and other pertinent documents) and the clauses, paragraphs or sections within the FDS prepared by the Contractor that uniquely address each specified requirement. A column shall be included to indicate how closely the proposed design meets the specified requirements. A further traceability assessment shall also be provided that cross references the clauses, paragraphs or sections within the FDS to the relevant tests within the factory and site test procedures to verify that all aspects of the supplied System are tested against the approved design. The documentation listed in, but not limited to, Table 11.2 below shall be supplied after Award of the Contract.
Table 11.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item 1 Deliverable Documents Programme of Work Reference 11.3.4 General Requirements Vol. 5, Chapter 4 Section 6 Part C 11.3.3 2.8.4.1 Detail any information or actions required for Contractors work to proceed Detail power supply requirements at sites where equipment is to be installed. Detail any requirements for interfacing to equipment outside of contract supply. Detail for equipment to be supplied. 11.4.1 11.3.2 3 months after the Effective Date of Award Not less than 8 weeks before tests are scheduled to be conducted. Latest Date for Submission 4 weeks from effective Contract start date. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date. 4 weeks from effective Contract start date.
Quality Plan and Procedures Schedule of Contractors Documents and Drawings Specification of Configuration Data
3 4
Civil Works Requirements
Power Supply Requirements
2 months after the Effective Date of Award
Specification of Communication Requirements
8 9 10
Weights, Dimensions & Environmental Requirements for all Equipment All Functional Design Specification Documents Control Centre Designs,Control and Equipment Room layouts Test Plan, Schedule and Procedures for Factory Acceptance Testing Details of Delivery Arrangements Draft Design, Operation & Maintenance Manuals Detailed Installation Programme Test Plan, Schedule and Procedures for Tests on Completion Test Reports
11
11.5.1& 11.5.2
12 13 14 15 16
11.6 11.3.4 11.5 11.5.3
4 weeks before delivery of system to site
Not more than 12 weeks after test(s) performed 1 months prior to commencement of training 3 months after hand over.
17 18
Synopsis of all Training Courses All As Built Documentation
10.2 11.8
Table 11.2 Items of Documentation to be Deliverable during the Contract Item Deliverable Documents Reference Latest Date for Submission Each Month commencing end of first complete month following contract start date.
19
Monthly Progress Reports
11.3.5
11.3.2 Specific Requirements for NSCC Building The Contractor shall provide the detailed drawings, specifications of materials and equipment, design calculations and a design analysis for the project for item 5 in Table 11.2. The design documentation shall consist of the following as a minimum: a) Architectural Drawings b) Foundation Plans with location of piles and columns c) Slab thickness with steel reinforcement d) Slab control joints e) Elevation view of wall sections f) Roof plan and roof framing system
g) Concrete masonry details h) Concrete masonry wall expansion joints i) j) Details of foundation connections Beam to beam, beam to girder and beam to column connections
k) Detailed electrical drawings that include load design l) Detailed drawings and specifications of each of the services provided (Access control, fire detection and protection system, climate control-air conditioning)
m) Detailed lighting design calculations and layout drawings n) Detailed plumbing design drawings o) Detailed lightning and earthing protection design. 11.3.3 Schedule of Contractor's Documents and Drawings A Document Schedule shall be submitted to the Employer for approval that lists all the documents and drawings to be submitted by the Contractor, showing the scheduled date of first submission and expected date of final issue. Documents and drawings shall be subject to review and approval by the Employer. The Contractor shall correct and resubmit drawings and documents that are rejected or returned with comments or corrections. The sequence of submission of the drawings and documents shall be such that all relevant information and data is available to the Employer for examining each document on the date it is received. As the design process proceeds, it is inevitable that amendments will occur which will impact upon previously submitted and reviewed documents. It is an essential part of the design phase of the project and the approval procedure that documents and drawings should be updated periodically to reflect those amendments and the increasing depth of detail available. The Contractor's Document Schedule shall
indicate those drawings and documents due for periodic update and resubmission, together with the anticipated dates. All documents and drawings shall have a title, document/drawing number, revision number and issue record and a graphic scale, where appropriate. The title block and system of serial numbering shall be approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall include the Employer's drawing number on all drawings. numbers will be issued to the Contractor for this purpose. Blocks of drawing
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. When folded, the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. 11.3.4 Programme of Work The Contractor shall submit a Programme of Works soon after Award of Contract. This shall be the programme submitted with the Bid, modified and updated as required to correspond to actual Contract start date and any agreed amendments. A detailed Programme of Work shall be submitted following the site surveys and as part of the Functional Design Specification documentation. The detailed programme shall be in the form of a PERT or other approved type of chart and shall indicate for each Section and Sub-section of the Works, the commencement and completion dates for the principal activities and the critical path for the whole of the Works. The following activities shall be identified: a) Design activities b) Provision of information by the Employer c) Data engineering d) Submission of design documents and drawings for review e) Receipt of final design documents and drawings f) Placing of purchase orders
g) Receipt of materials h) Fabrication and manufacture i) j) Submission of test documents for review Testing at manufacturers' premises
k) Delivery l) Installation
m) Commissioning n) Site testing o) Training p) Delivery of final documentation For software production, the Programme of Work shall show clearly, on the PERT chart, the design, coding and testing activities for each software module design. The dependencies between tasks and the critical path for software production shall also be identified. Finally, the PERT shall identify the latest dates for supply to the Contractor of data and interface details.
The programme PERT chart shall be updated monthly to reflect any significant changes that may have occurred during the previous month and to indicate progress to date. The Contractor shall produce a detailed Installation Programme for each part of the Works, showing deviations with respect to previous programmes and the logical sequence of works, inter-relationships with other contractors, particularly in relation to the completion of any dependent works, and interfaces to other works. The Installation Programme shall show all site activities, including delivery of equipment to site, installation, testing, placing into service, training of the Employer personnel, etc. 11.3.5 Monthly Progress Report The Contractor shall monitor the Programme of Work on a continuous basis and shall submit a monthly report to the Employer giving the latest status of progress. Notwithstanding this requirement, any change that could adversely affect the Installation Programme shall be advised immediately to the Employer. The first report shall be due one month after the Effective Date and monthly thereafter throughout the period of the Contract. The Monthly Progress Report shall include the latest issue of the Programme of Work PERT chart (or equivalent) and a Monthly Progress Schedule that shall indicate progress made the preceding month, showing cumulative progress towards scheduled completion, expressed as a percentage, of all items shown in the Schedule of Work. The report shall also include a narrative section in which any problems encountered during the month are described, their impact on the works and programme are identified and the actions taken by the Contract to correct the problems are stated. 11.4 DESIGN DOCUMENTATION
11.4.1 Functional Design Specification The Functional Design Specification (FDS) shall detail the design for the full scope of Work being performed under this Contract. The FDS shall specifically demonstrate how the requirements of this Specification are realised within the Contractors design, based on their range of standard products. It shall also cover the design of features that are being delivered as part of the Contractors standard product that have not been requested in the Specification. The FDS shall include, but not be limited to: a) Description of the design in sufficient detail to demonstrate compliance with the Specification, indicating where development work is required that is specific to this Contract b) A reliability and availability study (this shall include Failure Modes and Effects Analysis) c) Documentation for existing standard elements/modules within the overall design d) A traceability reference between this Specification and the Functional Design Specification e) A traceability reference between the Functional Design Specification and the Test Procedure documents For ease of handling and review, it is preferred that the FDS be partitioned as follows: Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) Master Stations Hardware Functional Design Specification (HFDS) - Outstations Software Functional Design Specification (SFDS) Communications Functional Design Specification (CFDS)
The design shall be fully described at a functional level. A functional overview of the complete System shall be provided that shows (preferably in diagrammatic form) each functional element in the System and all the interfaces of those elements with each other and with the external environment.
A complete description shall be provided for each functional element that includes its function, its interfaces to other functional elements and its user interfaces, e.g. operators. The design capacity (e.g. data rates, database size, number of I/O ports, RAM, etc.), both as installed and expansion limits, and performance criteria (e.g. display call up time, scan rates, etc.), both as installed and ultimate system expansion, shall be provided for each functional element, where applicable, and for the System as a whole. In the HFDS, functional elements will generally equate to items of equipment with their associated signal and power supply interfaces. For the SFDS, functional elements will generally be individual programmes and databases with their associated data exchange interface specifications. The functional elements of the CFDS will include the communication equipment provided under this Contract and its interfaces with other communications systems, e.g. Master Station LANs, links to the Outstations and SAS gateways, links to other systems. The protocols employed by each communication link or network shall be included in the CFDS. The design description must address all the requirements of this Specification and provide adequate qualitative and quantitative information to support the design. Design measures incorporated to improve System integrity, availability and reliability shall be clearly described. 11.4.2 Specific Requirements for Communication Documentation Where communications equipment and systems are included in the scope of work then the following specific requirements shall apply to the corresponding documentation. The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system, as applicable. Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms
11.4.3 Software Design Documentation The documentation, whilst being fully detailed, should also be in a form that will permit maintenance staff and programmers to readily obtain an overall appreciation of the operation of the System and individual programs. The Employer shall have the right to make available to third parties documentation supplied as part of this Contract. This right would be exercised for the purpose of obtaining software development/amendment services from Contractors other than the supplier. 11.4.3.1 Standard Operating Software
The standard operating software documentation will normally consist of the manuals and handbooks supplied by the software producer/publisher or a computer manufacturer. Copies of these shall be supplied in a durable hard copy format. e.g. loose-leaf file holders.
11.4.3.2
Applications Software Description of the Contractors standard (existing) software (including software from third party suppliers) Listings and diagrams for all bespoke software (which includes new and customised software specifically for this project)
This design document shall comprise two parts, namely,
Copies of each shall be supplied bound in durable folders and shall include the following information: a) Overall System description b) Memory allocation and utilisation maps c) Detailed program descriptions of all programs including executive and standard programs with a Pseudo-code (Structured English) listing, or alternatively a flow chart, of each level from the top down to individual module d) Program listings of all program code, including suppliers' standard programs. These shall have clear and unambiguous descriptive comments, written in the English language, such that they can readily be understood. Each procedure or subprogram shall be preceded by a block of comments which describe the operation of that subprogram. If any programs are written in low level language, then comments shall be included at logical points within the code. e) Data specification including definitions, dictionary, flow and database organisation f) A complete description of all standard software not covered by the above but necessary to gain a full understanding of the system.
11.4.4 Design Control Document The design control document shall include the change control status of each software package (down to individual modules). The purpose of this document is to provide the history of each software module and the final version number in the delivered software such that the Employer can include additional notes as they makes further changes to the design. This document shall also include the software procedures followed during the design and testing phase, thereby providing the means for uniform continuity in the System design and design changes. 11.5 DOCUMENTATION FOR ACCEPTANCE TESTS
11.5.1 Test Plan and Schedule The Contractor shall submit a Test Plan and Schedule for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date for the first Factory Acceptance Test (FAT). The purpose of the Test Plan is to provide an overview of all testing to be carried out on the System. It shall describe the approach the Contractor plans to take with regard to factory and site acceptance testing. It shall clearly define the breakdown of the System into separately testable sub-systems. It shall also describe the overall sequence of tests, the planned configuration for each test, expected duration, databases and test data to be used, facilities for simulating external plant, etc. The Test Plan shall also show any proposed parallel testing activities. The Test Schedule shall show, on a Gantt or other approved type of chart, the estimated start and completion dates for each test. The Contractor shall keep the Test Schedule up to date, showing revised dates as appropriate and the status of each test. The current Test Schedule shall be submitted each month with the Contractor's Monthly Report while testing activities are in progress. 11.5.2 Test Procedures A detailed Test Procedure for each system or sub-system test shall be forwarded for approval by the Employer prior to the scheduled start date of each test.
The Test Procedure shall clearly indicate how each System element, down to an agreed level, will be tested and the criteria that will be used to assess the success or failure of the test will be determined. Each Test Procedure shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a) Test objectives b) Test conditions and test configuration including support facilities, i.e. hardware and software that will be required to run the test c) Test sequence d) Duration of test e) Step by step instructions f) Expected results including the interpretation of test data for tests to be performed
g) Acceptance criteria based upon conformance to the Specification h) Standard forms to record test results for evaluation 11.5.3 Test Reports Following the completion of the hardware and software acceptance tests (factory and site), the Contractor shall submit a test report that shall be a complete record of the actual tests carried out, the results obtained, lists of any reservations noted during the tests and the manner in which they were corrected. 11.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall submit the draft Operation and Maintenance Manuals (O&M manuals) for approval before plant erection commences. These manuals shall include complete instructions for operation and maintenance of all hardware and software supplied under this Contract. The manuals shall be subject to amendment as required by the Employer. The manuals shall be subdivided, as follows, so that they cover the various portions of the equipment supplied, and they shall be indexed and cross-referenced. All manuals shall be supplied in durable binders and shall be identified with the title of the Project. 11.6.1 System Manual A System Manual shall describe the System configuration, function, facilities and any specific maintenance requirements. The aim of this document is to provide a first line introduction and summary description of the System and to provide references to more detailed description of the operation and maintenance of the System contained in the other manuals. 11.6.2 Operators' Manual The Operators' Manual shall describe the Operator facilities and use of the System. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the actual utilisation of the System facilities from the Operators viewpoint. 11.6.3 System Engineer's Manual The System Engineers' Manual shall describe the configurable elements of the System. This shall be a detailed point by point description of the facilities and methods of configuring them from the System Engineers viewpoint. 11.6.4 Hardware Manual The Hardware Manual shall describe the construction, interconnection, location and details of all standard hardware. This shall include all handbooks, instruction manuals, final versions of drawings etc., of equipment either manufactured or purchased by the Contractor. 11.6.5 Maintenance Manual The Maintenance Manual shall describe routine maintenance requirements, fault-finding and repair. The Maintenance Manual shall provide all the information required for a competent technician to diagnose faults and carry out repairs down to a lowest replaceable unit level. The design principles, circuit
operation, test procedures and fault analysis shall be included. Complete circuit diagrams, with component layout details and normal signal levels superimposed, are to be supplied. Simple first line fault diagnosis and module replacement procedures based on flow charts shall be included, complete with any safety or other restrictions that are placed on these procedures. 11.6.6 Equipment Manual A log book shall be supplied with each set of equipment giving the manufacturing and testing history of the equipment. Equipment instruction manuals shall include circuit diagrams for each unit, sub-unit and plug-in board used in the complete equipment. Equipment drawings shall show the layout of equipment in racks or cubicles and the essential mechanical features of all racks, cubicles, units and sub-units. The circuit diagram for any one unit shall be completely self-contained, self-explanatory, readily related to other diagrams and shall include such information as supply voltage values, test point values/waveforms and interconnections. Components external to a unit or sub-unit, but essential to its operation, shall be shown on the circuit diagram enclosed in dotted lines and appropriately identified. All component symbols shall be marked with their circuit references and the nominal value of components shall be marked on the circuit diagram. The function of all controls, switches and indicating devices shall be indicated in accordance with the inscriptions on the equipment. Spare contacts fitted to relays and switches shall be shown on the diagram. Component lists shall state the value, tolerance, rating, type number, manufacturer and the Contractor's circuit reference number. 11.6.7 Programmer's Manual The programmer's manual is primarily intended to describe software development/amendment. The manual shall provide the user with the necessary instructions to load the System software, modify and/or reprogram the System and reline and compile the programs. The programmer's manual shall also describe the testing and debugging processes. 11.6.8 Communication Documentation The communications documentation shall describe the proposed communication links and networks and shall address the following topics for each communication system, as applicable. Communication System Architecture Media requirements Connectivity and routing Modes of Operation Communication System Elements Error Control Protocol Fault Tolerance Communication System Performance Throughput/capability calculations Availability calculations Communication Error Messages & Alarms
11.7
DOCUMENT SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL
Five (5) copies of each drawing and document shall be submitted for approval after review by the Employer, the Contractor will be informed of the category into which each drawing or document is to be placed. These categories are as follows: Category I - Approved. Category I shall mean that the Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works in accordance with respective document. Category II - Approved except as noted. Category II shall mean that the drawing or document shall be modified to the extent noted by the Employer and re-submitted to the Employer to reach Category I. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works subject to the modification noted by the Employer. Category III - Not approved - returned for modification. Category III shall mean that the Contractor must revise the drawing or document and re-submit it to the Employer to reach Category I. The Contractor may not proceed with the relevant part of the Works. Category IV - Information noted. Category IV shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document and that it is a detail not required to be classified into Category I. The Contractor may proceed with the relevant part of the Works. Category V - Design drawings not forming part of the final design. Category V shall mean that the Employer has noted the information on the drawing or document. Documents in this category may be equipment wiring diagrams, manufacture data sheets etc. that are related to the Contractors detailed design. Drawings and documents in Category II or III shall be revised and re-submitted to the Employer for his approval within 14 working days calculated from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the Employer's comments. All revisions to drawings and documents by the Contractor shall be plainly marked together with the date when the changes were made. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and keeping up-to-date a contract document and drawing list showing the numbers and titles of each drawing and document and the current status of approval by the Employer. The list shall be included in the monthly report prepared by the Contractor. Copies of revised pages of the list shall be distributed to the Employer whenever a drawing or document is included, revised or deleted. Additional copies of particular drawings or documents shall be supplied by the Contractor in response to specific requests by the Employer. Once a drawing or document has been approved, the Contractor shall not make further alterations without the agreement of the Employer. All drawings submitted shall be folded to either A3 or A4 size. When folded, the drawing title block shall be clearly readable without needing to unfold the drawing. 11.8 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION
All design documents, drawings and manuals shall be revised, as necessary, to reflect the As Built condition of the Works and submitted to the Employer in three copies. All online help files shall also be updated to the As Built condition before issue of the Operational Acceptance Certificate.
12. DRAWINGS The drawings referred to in the Specification are listed below in Table 12.1 and contained in Section C of the Bid Documents. Table 12-1 List of Drawings Associated with the Specifications
Drawing Number TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NET-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/HES-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/SCA-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/TEL-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-001 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-002 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-003 TD/CE/1/82/D/ NSCC-004 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-005 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-006 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-007 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-009 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-010 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-011 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-012 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-013 TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-014
Revision Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0
Title 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram - 2012 220/132kV Network One Line Diagram - 2016 Sri Lanka map showing Location of sites CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex - Laxapana CEB Hydroelectric Power Complex - Mahaweli NSCC SCADA System Architecture Overview of the New Telecommunication Network-2012 Available Fibre Optic Links Proposed SDH Network Topology Proposed Telephone Network Existing Telecommunication System Existing Telephone Network Site Plan - NSCC at Sri Jayewardenepura Indicative Ground Floor Plan st Indicative Control Centre 1 Floor Plan nd Indicative Control Centre 2 Floor Plan Indicative Control Centre Front Elevation Indicative Control Centre Section Indicative Control Centre Power Supply System Gabion Wall Chain Link Gate Chain Link Fence Layout Plan, Longitudinal and Cross Section Indicative Control Centre Finishes Schedule Engineering Survey Plan for Proposed Control Centre Sectional Drawings for Proposed Control Centre
13. SITE SURVEYS 13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMEMNTS
The Contractor shall conduct comprehensive surveys at each site where work under this Contract is to be carried out. The findings of the survey shall be used by the Contractor in his detailed design and implementation plan. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed survey report describing the work and materials required to complete the installation and put the equipment into operation. The survey report shall include but not be limited to: 1 2 3 Condition of existing equipment to which the Contract Works must interface or may affect. The report shall identify where existing equipment is unsuitable or requires modification The environmental conditions and condition of any environmental control (e.g. Air Conditioning, Ventilation, Lighting, cleanliness and exposure to dust, moisture etc.) and any remedial action required. Limitations for connection to existing equipment Available space, access and routing Location of new equipment Planned routing of cables Implementation plan Final list of signals and corresponding transducers and interposing devices to be implemented
4 5 6 7 8 9
The survey report shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. 13.2 PRELIMINARY SURVEYS
Preliminary surveys of a selection of sites have been carried out by the Employer and the details are provided in Part D Appendix 1. These surveys are intended as a guide and as a set of preliminary information. It shall be the Contractors responsibility to verify any information that is used in the design and implementation of the works. 13.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SIGNAL LISTS FOR OUTSTATIONS
A single line diagram of the existing and a signal list for the planned configuration at 2012 has been provided in Part D Appendix 2 for each of the locations. The approach when defining these signal lists was to identify a standard set of signals applicable to all plant at each voltage level. In practice this may vary because of the particular plant in question and the survey shall identify such variances. The survey report shall detail the work required depending on the age and original specification of each switchboard, transformer etc. identify those signals that must be provided and those that, due to the anticipated problems and difficulties of providing them, could be omitted. The Contractor shall be responsible for the plant interface design and the undertaking of any modifications to existing equipment necessary for establishing the plant interfaces for the signals included in the lists. However, this shall not extend to replacement or retrofitting of auxiliary contacts on switchgear and Current or Voltage Transformers (CTs & VTs). Where such work would be required to implement the signals or controls identified in the signal lists, the Contractor shall detail this in the survey report. For bidding purposes the Bidder shall assume that unless stated otherwise that interposing equipment is required at a substation for all I/O listed in the Schedules. The Bidder shall complete the schedule of unit rates for additional transducers, repeat relays, interposing relays, etc. The final cost for the outstation works will be against a measured amount of installed material, equipment and devices and calculated in accordance with the unit rates defined in the schedule of rates. 13.4 EXISTING PLC SYSTEM
For existing analogue PLC links which are to be upgraded to digital PLC links, the survey shall establish whether the existing line traps, coupling capacitors, line matching units including coaxial cables to be retained are in satisfactory condition, compatible with the new digital PLC equipment and that the
coupling bandwidth is correct for re-use. The report shall detail the survey finding and any anticipated duration of power outages required for the installation of the digital PLC equipment. 13.5 EQUIPMENT TO BE INSTALLED
The site survey shall determine where each item of Telecommunication, Outstation and Power Supply equipment is to be installed, cabling requirements, routing, termination and any other works necessary for completion and putting into service. In many cases the installation of new equipment will require that existing equipment be removed. Where this equipment is still in service the report shall detail the implementation process that will ensure the continuity of service associated with that equipment during its replacement or the transfer of service. All equipment that is to be removed including equipment that is already out of service and located in the communication rooms where new equipment is to be installed, shall be removed by the Contractor and delivered to the Employers stores for subsequent disposal by the Employer.
14. REFERENCE DOCUMENTS AND STANDARDS 14.1 GENERAL All services and equipment supplied under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Specifications, ISO Standards, IEEE Standards, International Telecommunications Union (ITU) Specifications and the General Technical Specification. Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Employer. The applicable standards include but are not limited to those listed below: 14.2 GENERAL STANDARDS IEC BS/Other BS 159 ISO 14000, 1 ISO 9000, 1 BS 3643 BS 4190 BS 4872-1 BS EN 1435 BS 182 BS EN 12540 BS 1133 BS EN 837 BS 2765 ISO 1460 ISO 1461 ISO 1463 ISO 2178 Description Specification for high voltage busbars and busbar connections Environmental Management Systems Quality Management Systems ISO metric screw threads ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not required. Fusion welding of steels Non-destructive examination of welds Galvanised wire for telephone and telegraph purposes Chromium plating Packaging Code Bourden tube pressure and vacuum gauges Dimension of temperature detecting elements and corresponding pockets Metallic coatings Hot dip galvanised coatings on ferrous metals Determination of the mass per unit area Gravimetric method Metallic coatings Hot dip galvanised coatings on fabricated ferrous products Requirements Metal and metal oxide coatings Measurement of coating thickness Microscopical method Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates Measurement of coating thickness Magnetic method Standard Voltage High voltage test technique Environmental Testing Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) Recommended graphical symbols Pollution classification
60038 60060 60068 60529 60617 60815 14.3
PROTECTION, METERING AND CONTROL IEC BS/Other EATS50-18 Description Design and Application of Ancillary Electrical Equipment
IEC 60051 60255 60297 60514 60521 60947 61000 60282 60289 60044 60076 60186 61010 61036 14.4
BS/Other
Description Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories Electrical relays Dimensions of Mechanical Structures of the 482.6 mm (19") Series Acceptance inspection of Class 2 alternating current watt hour meters Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour meters Low voltage switchgear and control gear Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) High voltage fuses Reactors Instrument transformers Power Transformers Voltage transformers Safety requirements for equipment for measuring, control and laboratory use Alternating current static watt-hour meters for active energy (Classes 1 and 2)
SCADA/EMS AND COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60038 60050 60060 60068 60130 60255 60304 60326 60332 60353 60358 60481 60495 60529 60651 60664 60693 60708 Description IEC Standard voltages International Electro-technical Vocabulary High-voltage Test Techniques Environmental Testing Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz Measuring relays and protection equipment Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires Printed boards Tests on electric cables under fire conditions Line traps for ac power systems Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers Coupling devices for power line carrier systems Single sideband power line carrier terminals Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Sound level meters Insulation co-ordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems Dimensions of optical fibres Low-frequency cables with polyolefin insulation and moisture barrier polyolefin sheath
Standard IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 60793 60794 60825 60834 60870 60870-5-101
Description Optical fibres - Measurement methods and test procedures Optical fibre cables Safety of laser products Teleprotection equipment of power systems RTU centralised and distributed solutions Tele-control equipment and systems Part 5: Transmission protocols Section 101: Companion standards for basic tele-control tasks Tele-control equipment and systems Part 5: Transmission protocols Section 102: Companion standard for the transmission of integrated totals in electric power systems Tele-control equipment and systems - Part 5-103: Transmission protocols Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment Tele-control equipment and systems - Part 5-104: Transmission protocols Companion standard for basic tele-control tasks Telecontrol equipment and systems , Telecontrol Protocols compatible with ISO standards and ITU recommendations, TASE 2 Services and protocol Connectors for optical fibre and cables Calculation of thermally permissible short-circuit currents, taking into account non-adiabatic heating effects Safety of Information technology equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Safety standards Electricity metering Tariff and load control Particular requirements for electronic ripple control receivers Data Exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control Direct local data exchange Programmable controllers Fibre optic communication subsystem test procedures Optical Amplifier test methods Optical Amplifier
IEC
60870-5-102
IEC
60870-5-103
IEC
60870-5-104
IEC
60870-6-503
IEC IEC
60874 60949
IEC IEC IEC IEC
60950 61000 61010 61037
IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC
61107 61131 61280 61290 61291
IEC IEC IEC IEC
61300 61334 61753 61850
Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components Distribution automation using distribution line carrier systems Fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive components performance standard Communication networks and systems in substations
Standard IEC IEEE ISO/IEC ISO/IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC 61970 Parts 1/2/3/4/5 1003.1-2008 X Windows 27001/1/2/5/11, NERC CIP 9075-1/10/13/14 62005 62051 62056 62148 62149 62367 CISPR 11
Description Application Interfaces Application Software Information security Information security Reliability of fibre optic interconnecting devices and passive optical components Electricity metering - Glossary of Terms Electricity metering Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control Fibre optic active components and devices Fibre optic active components and devices Safety aspects for xDSL signal on circuits connected to telecommunication networks Industrial, scientific and medical radio-frequency equipment Electromagnetic disturbance characteristics Limits and methods of measurement Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre cable Characteristics of a dispersion-shifted singlemode optical fibre cable Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of optical amplifier devices and subsystems Digital hierarchy bit rates Physical/electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048, 8448 and 44736 kb/s hierarchical levels Frame alignment and cyclic redundancy check (CRC) procedures relating to basic frame structures defined in Recommendation G.704 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (merged version of G707, G708 & G709). Sub STM-0 network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN) Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies. Transmission performance characteristics of pulse code modulation channels. Primary PCM multiplex equipment for voice frequencies.
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.652 G.653 G.661
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.702 G.703 G.704
ITU-T
G.706
ITU-T
G.707
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.708 G.709 G.711 G.712 G.731
Standard ITU-T ITU-T G.732 G.735
Description Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s. Characteristics of primary PCM multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s. Characteristics of asynchronous digital multiplex equipment operating at 2048 kb/s. Characteristics of an external access equipment operating at 2048 kbit/s and offering synchronous digital access at 384 kb/s and/or 64 kb/s. General considerations on second order multiplex equipments Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive justification. Second order PCM multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s Second order digital multiplex equipment operating at 8448 kb/s and using positive/zero/negative justification Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission systems Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission systems Synchronous digital hierarchical (SDH) management information model for the network element. Synchronization layer functions Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipment functional blocks. Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management. Characteristics of a flexible multiplex in a plesiochronous digital hierarchy environment Architecture of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC) Timing requirements at the outputs of slave clocks suitable for plesiochronous operation of International links Error performance of an international digital connection operating at a bit rate below the primary rate and forming part of an integrated services digital network. The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy
ITU-T ITU-T
G.736 G.737
ITU-T ITU-T
G.741 G.742
ITU-T ITU-T
G.744 G.745
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.772 G.773 G.774
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.781 G.783 G.784 G.797 G.803 G.813 G.812
ITU-T
G.821
ITU-T
G.823
Standard ITU-T G.825
Description The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) End-to-end error performance parameters and objectives for international, constant bit-rate digital paths and connections Management capabilities of transport networks based on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures Interworking of SDH network protection architectures Management aspects of the optical transport network element Digital sections based on the 2048 kb/s hierarchy Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for use on optical fibre cables Digital transmission system on metallic local lines for ISDN basic rate access Connection characteristics Low frequency interference due to unbalance about earth of telecommunication equipment Principles of protection against overvoltages and overcurrents Induced voltages in cables with plastic-insulated conductors Provision of a metallic screen in plastic-sheathed cables Performance limits and objectives for bringinginto-service and maintenance of international SDH paths and multiplex sections Bringing-into-service international multi-operator paths, sections and transmission systems International multi-operator paths, sections and transmission systems fault detection and localization procedures Operational procedures for the maintenance of the transport network Overview of TMN recommendations Principles for a telecommunication management network Considerations for a telecommunication management network TMN security overview TMN interface specification methodology Generic network information model
ITU-T
G.826
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
G.831 G.841 G.842 G.874 G.921 G.957 G.958 G.961 G.1430 K.10 K.11 K.13 K.14 M.2101
ITU-T ITU-T
M.2110 M.2120
ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T
M.2130 M.3000 M.3010 M.3013 M.3016 M.3020 M.3100
Standard ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T M.3120 M.3200 M.3400 Q.16 Q.23 X.150
Description CORBA generic network and network element level information model TMN management services and telecommunication managed areas: overview TMN management functions Maximum permissible value for the absolute power level of a signalling pulse Technical features of push-button telephone sets Principles of maintenance testing for public data networks using Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) test loops Outstation data networks Standard for local and metropolitan area networks Private Branch Exchange (PBX) switching Equipment for Voice Applications. LAN Cables EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment Emissivity (Industry) Immunity (Industry) Electrical Protection Relays
IEEE IEEE EIA EIA EEC EN
1613, 61850 802 RS- 464 568 89/336 55022
EN EN BS 14.5
50081-2 50082-2 142
AUXILIARY POWER AND CONTROL CABLES IEC BS/Other BS 2484 BS EN 50262 VDE 0278 ESI-09/13 60060 60183 60227 60228 60230 60270 60287 60304 60332 Description Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers Metric cable glands For Thermal Short-circuit, Humidity Test on Terminations a Dynamic Short-circuit Performance of Heat Shrink Joints and Termination Kits components shall conform to High Voltage Test Techniques Guide to the selection of HV cables Specification for PVC insulated cables (non armoured) for electric power and lighting Conductors of insulated cables Impulse Tests on cables and their accessories Partial Discharge Measurements Electric cables - Calculation of current rating Standard colours for P.V.C. insulation for low frequency cables and wires Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC 60502 60507 60840 60885 14.6
BS/Other
Description Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV up to 30 kV Artificial pollution tests on high voltage insulators to be used on A.C. systems (applicable to outdoor termination only) Tests for power cables with extruded insulation for rated voltages above 30 kV up to 150 kV Electrical test methods for electric cables
LVAC SWITCHFUSE BOARDS IEC BS/Other BS 381 C 60269 60439 60898 60947 61008 Description Specification for colours for identification, coding and special purposes Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Circuit Breakers for household and similar installations Low voltage switchgear and control gear Residual current circuit breakers
14.7
DC BATTERIES AND CHARGERS IEC 60146 60269 60439 60623 60947 IEEE 1184-2006 BS/Other Description Battery chargers Low voltage fuses Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies Batteries Low voltage switchgear and control gear
14.8
EARTHING SYSTEMS IEC BS/Other BS 7450 IEEE 80 IEEE 32 Description Code of practice for earthing Guide for safety in substation grounding Neutral grounding devices
14.9
INSPECTION AND TESTING IEC 60068 BS/Other Description Environmental testing
14.10
ANCILLARY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT BS/Other Description General requirement machines for rotating electrical
IEC 60034
IEC 60072 60085 60947
BS/Other
Description Rotating electrical machines Dimensions and Output Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation Low voltage contractors switchgear and control gear:
15. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 15.1 INDOOR INSTALLATIONS It is expected that the SCADA/EMS system(s), Outstations and Telecommunication equipment will be located in suitably air-conditioned buildings/rooms. However, the temperature and humidity may rise significantly in the absence or failure of air-conditioning or ventilation (see Climate Conditions). The indoor equipment to be provided under this Contract shall be suitably protected from these elevated levels of temperature and humidity. The Contractor shall fully detail the environmental suitability, performance and reliability of the equipment to be supplied. 15.2 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS Site outdoor operating conditions are as tabled below, unless otherwise stated in the Specific Technical requirements in the contract document. Site Operating Condition Altitude Ambient temperature: Maximum outdoor shade Maximum outdoor daily average Maximum outdoor yearly average Minimum outdoor yearly average Maximum ground at depth 1 m Relative Humidity: Maximum Minimum Yearly average Maximum wind velocity: Rainfall per year: Maximum Minimum Maximum in one day Yearly average Atmosphere: Average no. of days per year of thunder storms 30 500 mm 50 mm 65 mm 150 mm 92% 12% 38% 145 km/h +22C for approximately 6 hours per day +35C +35C +8C +21C Value(s) Up to 2500 meters above sea-level
16. ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY 16.1 GENERAL
The electromagnetic environment comprises: a) Conducted emissions and susceptibility b) Radiated emissions and susceptibility c) Conditions leading to electrostatic discharge. The Works shall conform with the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the above listed phenomena. 16.2 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY
The Works shall be immune from the effects of: a) 5 W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0.25 m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place) b) cell phones when operated in the 900 MHz frequency band (or future frequency bands utilised by Third Generation mobile phones) within the same rooms as the equipment (0.25 m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers in place) c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals d) An electromagnetic field with a field strength of 10 V/m measured by the method specified in IEC/BS EN 61000-4-3. 16.3 PRODUCTION OF RADIATED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY
Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and no interference to the operation of similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent rooms. 16.4 SUSCEPTIBILITY TO CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC ENERGY
The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the following types and levels of conducted electromagnetic interference: a) Impulse Voltage Withstand b) High Frequency c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 50 Hz d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shall be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz 16.5 PRODUCTION OF CONDUCTED ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
The Works shall not introduce conducted interference that disturbs its own internal operation or generates interference on the incoming power supply that causes maloperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others. 16.6 ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
During normal operation, the Works shall be immune from the levels and types of electrostatic discharge (ESD) which can be found in a typical office environment. The Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any special precautions to be taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are under maintenance. 16.7 EMC STANDARDS
The Bidder shall indicate: a) With which, if any, standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with such standards exists b) Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EEC directive on EMC, i.e. Directive 89/336/EEC amended by Directive 91/263/EEC, Directive 92/31/EEC and Directive 93/68/EEC.
17. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND MANAGEMENT 17.1 GENERAL
The Contractor is required to control the quality of all equipment within his scope of supply. This activity shall be documented in a manner that provides a high degree of assurance that the required level of product quality has been achieved. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with sound quality and environmental management principles, and in particular shall have management systems which conform to the requirements of the ISO 9000 family of standards for Quality Management and the ISO 14000 family of standards for Environmental Management. In addition to covering the manufacture of all equipment, this control shall encompass hardware and software design activities and, where applicable, site installation and commissioning. For the required level of quality assurance to be achieved, the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has a functional and adequately documented Quality Management System formulated to satisfy the requirements of the ISO 9000 series of standards. In addition, the Contractor shall supplement his Quality Management System with the requirements detailed hereunder where they do not already form part of his standard Quality activities. The Contractor shall ensure that all the requirements detailed hereunder are applied to his Subcontractors such that the Employer and/or his representative can perform the same level of surveillance stated hereunder at the Subcontractors works, as necessary. All corrective actions and remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractor's cost, to agreed time scales. 17.2 ACCESS FOR THE EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE
The Employer and/or the Employer's Representative reserve the right to visit both the Contractor's and any of their Subcontractors' premises, at mutually agreed times, in order that the Employer can gain objective evidence that the level of quality control is adequate to meet the Contract requirements. These visits may be in addition to those necessary to undertake product audits, manufacture progress, inspections and witness tests on equipment or software. 17.3 SUB-CONTRACTORS
Where proprietary items are purchased from a Subcontractor, the Contractor shall take responsibility for such items. If the Subcontractor has a suitable Quality Assurance Scheme complying with the ISO 9000 series of standards, then inspection of records will normally be sufficient to establish compliance. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the items upon receipt and ensuring their fitness for purpose. However, all design activities undertaken by Subcontractors will be subject to all the requirements stated within this Section. Subcontractors shall not be used except by prior written approval of the Employer, unless named and proposed in the Bid. 17.4 QUALITY PLAN
A final Quality Plan shall be submitted for the Employer's approval within two months of Contract Award. The Quality Plan shall cover all test and deliverable equipment and software, and testing, installation and commissioning activities. Flow charts, supplemented with brief explanatory text are the preferred method of presenting information that identifies the various stages of control, and when and by which organisation, they will be applied. The Plan shall also identify the Employer's approval activities and make due allowance for the time involved in these activities. In addition, the Plan shall make provision for the Employer to witness test and final inspection stages at the appropriate Manufacturer's works. The Contractor shall submit the Quality Plan revised to include a complete list of all site personnel detailing names, positions and responsibilities complete with an organisation chart. The Contractor shall provide for approval full details, including curriculum vitae, of all engineering, technical and other key staff to be employed at site. Personnel shall not mobilise to Site prior to approval being given.
17.5
AUDITS
Correct functioning of the Contractor's Quality System will be verified by the application of an internal audit programme at various critical stages in the progress of the Works. These audits will review quality records and associated documentation relating to each element of the Works in order to gain assurance that work is being carried out to the required level of quality. The quality records and associated documentation shall ultimately cover all stages of design, manufacture, testing, installation and commissioning associated with each element of the Works. The frequency and depth of ongoing surveillance activities by the Employer and/or the Employer's Representative will be dependent upon the results of initial audits. Should major deficiencies be found in either the product or in the methods for the control of quality, then due notice will be given to the Contractor that urgent remedial or corrective action is required. This shall be carried out by the Contractor to agreed time scales, at the Contractor's own cost. 17.6 QUALITY RECORDS
In order to maintain control over the quality of all Works during design and manufacture, a System of Quality Record sheets, shall be put in place by the Contractor. Normally, there shall be one Record Sheet for each piece of equipment (Line Replaceable Unit) or software module. It will be necessary for all major hardware items and assemblies to have unique serial numbers and for all software modules to have version numbers. All quality records must refer to these numbers, as applicable. Records generated to substantiate the attainment of performance and design standards must be retained, by the Contractor, for at least 5 years following completion of commissioning of the Works and shall be filed in such a manner that retrospective review by the Employer can readily be effected. At the end of this 5year period, the documents shall be delivered to the Employer, at no extra cost to the Employer. Each item of equipment must have a unique Certificate of Inspection and Testing, detailing results of inspections and delivered tests. However, batch-produced items may be covered by a Batch Certificate, providing all serial numbers of equipment are shown and an appendix to the certificate details the acceptance parameter bands within which the controlled parameters have been found to conform. Inspection and Test plans shall be generated for both equipment and software production. The latter shall permit inspection of module definition, coding and testing. Software Quality 17.7 ORGANIZATION
Software quality management shall be clearly described by the Contractor. There shall be particular emphasis on the allocation of authorities and responsibilities in respect of the detection, evaluation and rectification of quality related problems during all phases of the contract. 17.8 PLANNING
The Contractor shall prepare a Software Quality Plan (SQP) that meets all quality requirements. The SQP shall state the software practices and procedures to ensure conformance with all software requirements of the Contract. The SQP shall identify and describe the organisation, responsibilities, and authorities for its execution and all key functions as described in succeeding paragraphs. The SQP shall also identify and make timely provisions for special needs (controls, tools, facilities, skills, etc.) required for its execution. The SQP shall also identify the methods to be used for detection, reporting, analysis, and correction of software problems and deficiencies. 17.9 REVIEWS
The Contractor shall reference or document the procedures to be used for reviews to ensure that the software meets the contract requirements. The Design shall be subject to review prior to release for coding. These reviews shall be carried out independently of the designer of the particular part under review. The procedures shall include: Descriptions of the objectives of each review Identification of key milestones in the software life cycle for reviews Methods for specifying non-scheduled reviews Identification of the function of the personnel involved Provision for the recording of analyses and recommendations for reviews
Methods to ensure that the recommendations arising from reviews are monitored to ensure that timely corrective action is taken TESTING
17.10
The Contractor shall identify all Software Quality measures related to software integration and testing. These measures shall ensure that an adequate range of procedures are in place and that they are rigorously enforced. The measures shall include: Software Checks to determine if the software requirements and design have been analysed for testability Review of test documentation to ensure it has been produced in accordance with the requirements of the associated quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract, with particular emphasis on ensuring that all, and only, authorised changes have been incorporated in the design Verification that tests have been carried out in accordance with the requirements of the quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract with particular emphasis on the identification of software tested Review of test records to ensure all witnessing results, validation and certification have been carried out in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and the requirements of the Contract Identification and review of any software, test data, test files and hardware used as a tool for software testing to ensure it has been documented, verified, calibrated, tested in accordance with the relevant quality procedures and requirements of the Contract Maintenance of test-related documentation to allow test repeatability Where appropriate, approval by the Employer of the content of test plans, specifications and records shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Inspection and Test requirements. The validation and verification modules and sub-modules shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the relevant quality procedures. The results of such validation and verification exercises shall be fully documented. CORRECTIVE ACTION Adoption of a System to report problems and deficiencies to the appropriate management level. Analysis of data and examination of problem and deficiency reports to determine the causes and to propose corrective measures. Analysis of deficiency trends to prevent the development of non-conforming software. Review of corrective measures to determine their effectiveness. Provision for defining all necessary re-testing to validate modifications to any item of software. Provision for ensuring that timely corrective action is taken by reviewing deficiencies and tracking their clearance. Provision for controlling and accepting non-conforming software. This shall require the Employer's approval. CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT
17.11
The Contractor shall reference and document Software Quality procedures that shall include:
17.12
A Software Configuration Management (CM) Plan shall be produced defining the manner in which the changes to software are controlled and logged during the lifecycle of the project. The Contractor shall identify the CM procedures to be applied to software development. Specifically, the Contractor shall ensure that procedures exist to identify, document, control and maintain all software design changes. The procedures shall include a method for:
17.13
Program and/or module version identification, registration and updating. Obtaining approval to implement a modification. Producing build documents at baseline. Ensuring that modifications are properly integrated. Keeping secure masters at separate locations. The provision of validated copies. The proper marking, storage and handling of software media. The control of the identification inspection status. The control of support software. Ensuring that non-conforming software is identified and segregated. ACCOMMODATION AND ASSISTANCE
The Employer shall have the right to appoint a Quality Assurance Representative (QAR) to monitor the Contractor's software quality as applied to this project. The Contractor shall provide the QAR with the accommodation and facilities required for the proper accomplishment of his work, and shall provide any assistance required by the QAR for assessing the state of the quality control aspects of the Contract material. The QAR shall have the right of access to any area of the Contractor's or their Subcontractor's premises where any part of the Work is being performed. The QAR shall be afforded unrestricted opportunity to verify conformance of the software with Contract quality requirements. The Contractor shall make his support tools available for reasonable use by the QAR for verification purposes. The Contractor's personnel shall be made available for operation of such support tools as required. If the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Employer that the required level of software quality is being achieved during the course of the Contract then this Clause would not normally be invoked.
18. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 18.1 GENERAL
In complying with the requirements of this Specification, and the particular equipment or system specification, both with respect to arrangement and detail, equipment or system design is to conform to the best current engineering practise. The equipment shall be of the manufacturers standard design, provided that this design is in accordance with this Specification and particular equipment or system specification. The equipment offered in this Contract shall have been proven by satisfactory operating experience. Equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection, repairs and maintenance. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at the site and under such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system. Particular attention shall be given to ease of maintenance and fault finding. Test points and components requiring testing, adjustment or anticipated replacement shall be readily accessible. The design shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of those concerned in the operation and maintenance of electronic equipment and systems, and of associated equipment. All equipment shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals, reptiles, birds, insects, mites, rodents or micro-organisms. All equipment shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts. All equipment shall be designed to operate without undue vibration and with the least practicable amount of noise. All equipment shall be designed to minimise the risk of fire and any damage that may be caused in the event of fire. The material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the highest quality and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. All bolts, nuts and screws shall comply with the appropriate international standards for metric threads. Equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall take all reasonable precautions to minimise the susceptibility of their equipment to electromagnetic interference produced by other equipment and plant. Where it is necessary to take specific measures on site in order to achieve the desired degree of immunity (e.g. special earthing or screening arrangements), full details of these measures shall be submitted for approval. Electro-mechanical armature type relays shall not be employed in any sequencing or timing functions. Printed circuit cards shall be clearly labelled and the associated sockets shall be coded in an approved manner to prevent incorrect assembly. 18.2 SYSTEM OF UNITS
Technical Data dimensions, quantities, etc. throughout this Contract shall be in the SI-system of units (International System of Units). 18.3 DESIGN, STANDARDIZATION AND INTERCHANGEABILITY
The works shall be designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning, maintenance and repair. Continuity of supply is of prime concern. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works. The equipment shall be designed to operate satisfactorily under all variations of load, pressure, and temperature that may be met in normal usage under the variation in climatic conditions given in the Specifications. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation in all atmospheric conditions prevailing at the sites and during such sudden variation of load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system, including those due to faulty synchronising and short circuit. The design shall include all necessary interlocks for the operation and maintenance of the equipment in accordance with the Employers safety rules and system operation/maintenance practices of the Contract Works and of associated works supplied under other contracts. All outdoor apparatus and fittings shall be designed so that water cannot collect at any point. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment that is in tension or subject to impact stresses.
Kiosks, cubicles and similar enclosed compartments shall be equipped with anti condensation heaters actuated by hygrostat and thermostat to restrict condensation. All contactors or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short circuit due to animals, birds, insects, mites, rodents or micro-organisms. Corresponding parts throughout shall be made to gauge and shall be interchangeable. All equipment performing similar duties shall be of the same type and manufacture in order to limit the stock of spare parts required and maintain uniformity of plant and equipment to be installed. 18.4 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Materials used in the manufacture of the specified equipment shall be of first class quality and of the kind, composition, and physical properties best adapted to their various purposes in accordance with the best engineering practice. All equipment shall conform to the applicable standards as to material, workmanship, design and tests. Tolerances, fits, and finishes shall conform to the best modern shop practices in the manufacture of finished products of a nature similar to those covered by the Specification. All equipment shall be of rugged & durable construction, designed for frequent operation. The materials used for the construction of the plant shall be selected carefully for the purpose intended and with due consideration of site conditions and tropical environment. Higher grade material shall be used in every case where ordinary material may be insufficient. If the Contractor desires to use stock material or components not manufactured especially for works under this contract, he shall submit evidence by presentation of respective certificates, to the Employer's satisfaction, that such material or components comply with the requirements stated in the Specifications and to an approved standard and that the quality of such material is adequate for the intended use. The Contractor shall indicate in the respective Technical Schedules the proposed materials and their applicable standards for all major items of the supply. Material specifications, including grade of class, shall be shown on the appropriate detail drawings submitted to the Employer for approval. All works shall be performed and completed in a thorough workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modern practice in the manufacture of high grade equipment. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in their respective trades. The Contractor shall guarantee for the quality of all materials, paints, treatments, as well as for the efficiency, losses and technical performance of the equipment in strict compliance with the Contract Documents and particularly with the provisions of the Scope of Works and Specifications. 18.5 EQUIPMENT LIFE
Unless otherwise specified in the particular equipment or system specification, equipment shall be designed for a minimum working life of 15 years in the specified environment and application, taking into account functions such as duty cycle, frequency of operation, etc. Components, component ratings and all other factors determining equipment life shall take this into account. Normal routine and breakdown maintenance shall be assumed and it is accepted that certain consumable components and modules may need periodic replacement or adjustment. However, the Bidder shall state the expected frequency of such replacement or adjustment and the life expectancy. Where life expectancy is limited by the availability of replacement components, it may be acceptable to meet the design life by the use of a replacement sub-unit using different components but having the same or better (but fully compatible) overall performance. To enable maintenance to take place during the working life of the equipment, the Contractor shall state the period for which production of the equipment is likely to continue and give guarantees regarding the time period for which he will hold spares. 18.6 RELIABILITY
Where a quantitative requirement for reliability is specified in a particular specification, but no particular method of demonstrating it is called for, the Contractor shall show that the equipment he is offering meets the requirement in one or more of the following ways:
1. Where the equipment offered is identical to that already in use, the Contractor shall state inservice failure rates. Such information must be accompanied by details of the environment in which the equipment is used and total operating hours accumulated. Full details of how the inservice data was collected and processed should be given. 2. Where the equipment offered is an updated version of equipment already in use, then inservice failure rates shall be given as above, but in addition, the Contractor shall supply details of design changes and show how these could affect reliability. 3. Where in-service data is not available for the equipment offered, the Contractor shall calculate a reliability assessment based on the reliability figures of the individual components, and shall verify this calculated reliability against the actual performance in the field over a given trial period. 4. Where the Contractor includes within his equipment or system specially designed components, for example transformers, or bought-in items of equipment, such as power supply units (PSUs), he will be required to state the methods he adopts to achieve a reliability consistent with the specified overall reliability of the equipment or system. The Contractor shall undertake to provide upon request failure distribution data for all components, assemblies and units which, on failure, could cause loss of a function or malfunction of a particular system. 18.7 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. For multi-phase supplies, each phase shall be switched simultaneously. The electricity supplies for auxiliary supply are as follows: 415 volts 3-phase 50 Hz 4-wire 240 volts single phase 50 Hz 110 volts dc for essential indications, alarms and HV circuit breakers closing and tripping supplies. 110 volts dc for power operated isolators and earthing switches. 110 volts dc for facia type, multi-window alarm schemes. 48 volts dc for supply of communication and telecontrol equipment
Unless otherwise specified or a wider operating range is specified in relevant international standards, the plant provided under this Contract shall operate reliably between eighty percent (80%) of the nominal voltage and 110% of the maximum of the nominal and float voltages. 18.7.1 Alternating Current (ac) All mains supplies shall be switched and fused. Double-pole switches shall be used to break singlephase ac mains supplies. For multi-phase supplies, each phase shall be switched simultaneously. All mains circuits shall be protected only in the phase-lines by fuses of suitable rating or by other suitably approved protective devices. The neutral shall be connected by a removable link located near the protective devices. All mains transformers shall have an electrostatic screen which shall be earthed. Except where prior approval is obtained, wires external to the equipment shall be colour coded in accordance with the current IEC Recommendations. 18.7.2 Direct Current (dc) If electronic equipment or system require the use of local internal batteries approval must be obtained. Where approval is given, batteries used inside equipment shall be of the totally sealed, leak-proof type.
18.7.3 Power Supply Units (PSUs) PSUs shall be of approved design and such that they do not impose parasitic or harmonic voltages on the station battery system or electronic equipment. Protection circuits incorporated into PSUs shall be such that any overload of the output or short circuit current does not damage any components within the PSU. PSUs shall incorporate over-voltage protection devices to protect the components that comprise the output load. 18.7.4 Protection 18.7.4.1 Fuses and Links
Carriers and bases for fuses and links shall be in accordance with IEC 269 standard and colour coded to permit identification of the circuit rating. All incoming circuits in which the voltage exceeds 110 V shall be fed through isolation fuses or circuit breakers and/or links. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is withdrawn. Main supply fuse links shall, unless otherwise specified, be of the high rupturing capacity cartridge type. Where fuse carriers are mounted vertically, the incoming (supply) circuit shall be connected to the bottom terminals. Where fuses are used the Contractor shall ensure that proper discrimination between main and sub-circuits is maintained. 18.7.4.2 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Miniature or moulded case circuit breakers, hereafter called circuit breakers, shall be designed and tested in accordance with IEC 947 and supplementary requirements of this specification. They shall be suitably rated for both the continuous and short circuit loadings of the circuits they are protecting under all service and atmospheric conditions stated in the specification and ensure that correct discrimination is maintained between main and sub-circuits. Where circuit breakers are used in circuits containing inductive loads, e.g. operating coils, it is essential that they are suitable for satisfactory operation in the circuit in which they are used, i.e. account is taken of the circuit time constant. All moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with an auxiliary contact(s) for remote indication of circuit breaker operation and interlocking purposes. Means shall be provided to prevent the circuit breakers being inadvertently switched to the OFF position. Circuit breakers shall be mounted in such a manner so as to give easily visible indication of breaker position and shall be grouped and spaced according to their function in order to facilitate identification and easy replacement. 18.8 CUBICLES, CABINETS, RACKS AND CONTROL PANELS
18.8.1 General All the apparatus of solid state type shall be mounted on plug-in cards in cubicles. Similar racks or cubicles shall, as far as possible, be employed for all apparatus. Cubicles, cabinets, racks and control panels shall all conform to applicable IEC 297 Standards. The general design of racks and cubicles shall be subject to approval. They shall be of the free standing type, fabricated steel construction, and provided with shelves. Neither racks nor cubicles shall, unless otherwise approved, exceed 2300 mm in height. All cubicles shall be fabricated with metal pockets to hold the equipment drawings and termination diagrams. The cubicles shall be equipped with lighting fittings of an approved type. Swing frame gates for mounting equipment shall be avoided as far as possible but where essential the wiring to the mounted equipment shall be flexible, of adequate length, adequately protected and run for a distance along the hinge length of the swing frame to allow the wires to be twisted rather than bent when the gate is swung.
Where regulated supplies are made available on panels for operating test instruments, or other apparatus for which regulated supplies are required, special sockets shall be provided on the panel to prevent portable tools, hand lamps, etc being plugged into such supply. Cubicle doors shall be provided and arranged to lie flat back when open and not restrict access to the apparatus contained within the cubicle. The cubicle doors shall be of the lift-off type, secured with integral handles provided with locks and duplicate keys to an approved system, and shall be flush fitting and sealed with a gasket of rubber or other approved material to prevent the ingress of dust. Cubicles and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand twisting without distortion. The lowest mounting point, plug-in group or terminal block shall be not less than 400 mm above floor level. The equipment installed in the cubicle/panels shall be easily accessible. Racks and cubicles shall be complete with all necessary tag blocks, terminal blocks, cable glands and gland plates for small wiring and multi-core cables, and earth bar with earthing connection. These items shall be located in an approved, easily accessible, position and so arranged that the terminals face the access direction for convenience during maintenance. The design and construction of all racks, cubicles, junction boxes, etc shall be such that cable terminations are arranged suitably for top or bottom cable entry for all cables. The gland plates shall be removable and in the case of floor mounted bottom entry cubicles, shall be not less than 200 mm above the base of the cubicle to allow access for applying the cable gland. All cubicles shall be adequately ventilated to restrict condensation and where necessary shall incorporate anti condensation heaters. If the equipment in the cubicles/panels is of the nature to dissipate heat, the cubicles shall be equipped with the proper and approved cooling and ventilation system. Forced ventilation shall not be used without approval. Where forced ventilation is approved, fans shall be duplicated to provide 100 per cent standby capacity and shall initiate remote alarms in the event of failure. The Bidder shall state the time for which the equipment can remain operational after failure of the forced ventilation system. Fans shall comply with the noise limitations imposed by the international standards. The cooling air for the cubicles and cabinets must be cleaned and free from dust. All filters shall be accessible and easy to clean. Air filters shall be renewable and arranged for ease of replacement. Within the cubicles and racks, precautions shall be taken to exclude dust from individual groups of equipment. 18.8.2 Cubicle Wiring Cubicle wiring shall be insulated with polyvinylchloride to IEC 228 standard. Wires shall not be joined or teed between terminal points. Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately from one another along the top or bottom of the cubicle. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all circuits in a cubicle, except a lighting or heating circuit, to be isolated from the bus wires. It shall be possible to work on small wiring for maintenance or test purposes without making the cubicle dead. Circuits working at different voltages shall be adequately segregated and labelled. Power supply busbars in cubicles shall be carefully routed and each busbar shall be shrouded. It shall not be possible to inadvertently short busbars either between themselves or to earth. 18.8.3 Marshalling Cubicles Including SCADA Interface Panels Marshalling cubicles shall be of fabricated steel construction of minimum thickness 2 mm, galvanised and painted, dustproof, vermin proof and so designed that condensation shall not affect the insulation of the terminal blocks or cables. Marshalling cubicles shall be complete with all necessary terminal blocks, wiring, washers or tags, wiring ferrules, labels and door locks. All marshalling cubicles shall accept a common key for locking. In each marshalling cubicle circuits shall be grouped and labelled according to function (i.e. system control, alarm and tripping circuits, telephone circuits, etc) with the labels attached to the fixed portion of the terminal boards. Where appropriate, terminals shall be provided for connecting the screens of screened twisted pair cables.
18.8.3.1
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall be of non-flammable insulating material with a comparative tracking index of not less than 500 in accordance with IEC 112 standard. They should be mounted vertically and set not less than 100 mm apart with a minimum distance of 200 mm between the top or bottom and the gland plates. Sufficient terminal blocks shall be provided to allow individual cores to be connected to separate terminals together with a further 20 per cent spare terminals. All terminals shall be numbered. Terminals for stranded wire conductors shall normally be of the insertion clamp type incorporating captive pressure screws which do not bear directly on the wire but on a serrated clamping plate. Not more than one wire may be terminated at each insertion type terminal. Terminals other than those described above may be permitted but the type and arrangement of termination shall be to approval. For multi-core cables, terminal blocks shall be provided with links to isolate individual circuits for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. For telephone type multi-pair cables, terminal blocks shall be of the insulation displacement type. Links shall be provided to isolate individual circuits or groups of apparatus for maintenance purposes whilst the rest of the apparatus is functioning normally. Where connections are to be made between multi-core cables and multi-pair telephone type cables, the terminal blocks shall comprise an insertion type terminal for the multi-core cable and insulation displacement for the telephone cable joined by withdrawable or U links to facilitate isolation. These terminals shall also be provided with facilities for the insertion of test probes on both sides of the link. Covers of transparent insulating material shall be provided on terminal blocks on which connections for circuits at 110 V or higher are terminated. Suitable warning labels shall be provided. The use of terminal blocks as junction points for wires that are not required in the associated cubicle shall be avoided. 18.8.3.2 Connectors
Multi-pole connectors shall be provided with means whereby each free plug or socket can be locked in the match positions. They shall also incorporate means for clamping the incoming cable so that the conductors are relieved of any stress. The design of clamps shall be such that the cable is not compressed sufficiently to cause creep in the insulation. The design and arrangement of connectors shall be such that incorrect mating cannot occur. PCB connectors shall incorporate reliable means (e.g. polarising slots) to prevent incorrect mating, boards being inserted upside down, or a board being inserted into the wrong socket. Where the use of snap on connectors is agreed, they shall be of a type that provides gripping and support for the insulation as well as the conductor. The type of insulation displacement connector (IDC) chosen shall be one that grips the insulation or employs a strain relief clamp. Where possible, IDC headers should employ ejector latches. Other methods of connection such as taper pin connectors, wire-clamp connectors, fibre optic connectors, etc, shall be to specific approval. 18.8.4 Equipment, Components and Terminal Identification All equipment, components and terminal fields shall have suitable identification labels affixed. Each item shall have a unique reference for identification and this shall be consistent on local labels, drawings, control panels mimic diagrams, etc. All cubicles shall have an identification label affixed externally. Cubicles containing a working voltage in excess of 110 V shall carry a prominent electrical shock symbol and a DANGER label in English, Sinhalese and Tamil on the door of the cubicle. Internal component label lettering shall be not less than 4 mm high and any supplementary detail on the same label shall be differentiated by employing a lettering size of at least 1 mm less than that used for primary information. Identification labels shall not be affixed to wiring trunk covers nor shall they be affixed to removable or interchangeable covers.
All labels and safety signs shall be affixed using screws or bolts with captive nuts, adhesive fixing shall not be used. Identification labels shall be securely fixed to steel work and wiring and other items shall not obscure the label. A schedule of proposed labels and safety signs detailing size, position, fixing arrangement, colour and size of lettering shall be submitted for approval during the design phase. 18.8.5 Degrees of Protection Equipment degree of protection shall be provided in accordance with IEC 529 standard. For outdoor applications the degrees of protection shall be to Ingress Protection (IP) 65 or higher. For indoor applications where purpose built accommodation is provided, (e.g. equipment, switch, control and relay rooms in auxiliary plant buildings) the degrees of protection shall be to IP 42. Where dust can adversely affect equipment within the enclosure, this equipment should be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 52. For indoor applications where the equipment is housed in the same building as that enclosing water and steam operated equipment, the degree of protection shall be to IP 44. Where the equipment can also be adversely affected by dust within the enclosure, this equipment shall be separately housed with a degree of protection of IP 54. 18.8.6 Painting and Finishing All cubicles, marshalling boxes, junction boxes and distribution boards shall be afforded adequate protection against corrosion, mechanical damage, deterioration etc. All ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned using dry blast cleaning and a suitable anti-rust treatment applied prior to the application of the final protective finish. All paints shall be applied in strict accordance with the paint manufacturers instructions. Paint colours shall be to the approval of the Employer. The Contractor shall make good using the same coating to the satisfaction of the Employer any deterioration of protective coatings, paintwork, etc which may have occurred during transportation, erection and commissioning. 18.9 CONTROL AND INDICATING DEVICES
18.9.1 Keys and Push Buttons The type, colour and shape of keys and push buttons shall be to approval, but generally in compliance with the requirements of IEC 1020. All non-locking keys and push-buttons shall be spring loaded and so designed as to avoid inadvertent operation. 18.9.2 Indicating Instruments All analogue indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 51 standard industrial grade, and shall be of an approved type and size. Digital indicating instruments shall conform to IEC 485. All instruments shall be back-connected and their cases shall be earthed. The instruments with associated circuits, shall not be damaged or have their accuracy impaired by the passage of fault currents, equivalent to 20 times full load current for not more than 0.5 seconds through the primary of their corresponding instrument transformers. Approved means shall be provided for zero adjustment without dismantling the instrument or removing the instrument from the panel. In two-directional circuits, centre zero instruments or displaced zero instruments shall be employed as approved. Analogue instruments shall be of an approved moving coil type, with a dead beat mechanism. Digital indicators shall be to approval. The display shall not hunt about an average value at a rate that renders it illegible. 18.9.3 Indicating Lamps Indicating lamps and lamp-holders shall be of approved types, ergonomically suitable for the function that they have to perform, and arranged for ease of replacement and maintenance. To reduce heating and fouling of the control boards, lamps shall have the minimum power consumption, consistent with good visibility of indication in a well lit room. Where light emitting diodes (LEDs) are used, they shall preferably be high output, wide angle type.
The colour of lamps shall be to approval, but generally in accordance with IEC 73 standard. Illumination of fascias and legends and all indicating symbols shall be clear and distinct and shall be subject to approval. The clarity of these fascias and legends shall not be impaired by the incident or transmitted light. 18.9.4 Plug-in Cards The number of different types of plug-in cards shall be kept to a minimum. All similar plug-in cards shall be interchangeable. The cards shall be colour coded and also provided with an approved form of interlock to prevent them being inserted in an incorrect shelf position. The design and construction of plug-in cards shall be such that they shall not distort. Plug-in cards shall be spaced such that an electrical short circuit to adjacent cards cannot occur during insertion. Insulation and protective levels for printed circuit modules shall as a minimum be in accordance with IEC 870-3 Class II. Printed circuits shall be to approval. They shall be clean and free from flux likely to cause particles to adhere to the board and cause short circuits. Printed circuit boards shall be tinned and varnished or otherwise protected against corrosion and all connectors (plug or edge type) shall be plated with gold. Suitable extender cards shall be provided to enable plug-in cards to be tested in circuit. All special tools for withdrawing plug-in cards shall be provided. 18.10 SECONDARY WIRING AND CABLES
18.10.1 General The cable installation to be provided shall include all cables required for the supply, control, indication and monitoring of all plant provided under this Contract. The installation shall be complete with all cable terminations, cable trays & covers, cable ladder racks, junction boxes, glands, ferrules, lugs, numbered ferrules, cable markers, clips and all fixings, fittings, brackets, cleats, piping and accessories. All ducts and covers shall be sealed after installation of cables. The Contractor shall undertake all relevant design and engineering of the cable systems for equipment in its scope of supply, and shall submit for review the cable connection schematic diagrams, terminal diagrams, cable lists, cable schedules and the cable route plans. Any screening and cable segregation necessary to prevent spurious signals being induced between cables shall be shown on the block cable diagrams. All cables provided must comply with the latest applicable IEC standards. 18.10.2 Cable Types LV power cables shall be 1000 V grade, single core or multicore XLPE insulated, steel wire armoured (aluminium in the case of single core cables) and sheathed with LSF. Cables shall comply with the relevant parts of IEC 60502 and IEC 60811. The Contractor shall submit design calculations to demonstrate that the maximum continuous current carrying capacity of any power cable will not be exceeded after taking installation dependant de-rating factors into account and short circuit currents. LV power cables with compacted or compressed type stranded conductors will not be accepted. All control and small power wiring and cabling (except fibre optic cables) supplied under this Contract shall have multi-stranded copper conductors complying with the requirements of IEC 60228 and IEC 60228A, thermoplastic insulation and thermoplastic inner sheath, steel wire armouring and PVC outer serving. Where routed outside buildings or enclosures and where no other overall mechanical protection is afforded, cables shall have galvanized steel wire armour with a thermoplastic waterproof over sheath. Methods of mechanical protection, other than steel wire armour, shall be subject to approval. The minimum conductor size shall not be less than 2.5 mm2. In special cases for light current installations, single strand annealed copper conductors with a cross sectional area of 1.5 mm2 may be used. Also for telephone type cables conductors of cross sectional area of 0.6 mm2 may be used. All multicore control cables having more than 7 cores shall have approximately 20 per cent spare cores, but not less than two cores for future use. Terminals shall be provided for all cores.
Where twin or quad make-up is required in any cable, the cores shall be uniformly twisted and the lays arranged such that cross talk is reduced to a minimum. Cable cores, twins, quads and individually screened multi-pairs shall be colour coded. Each core of a multi-core cable shall be readily identified by a number impressed into the insulation every 100 mm. Individually screened pairs or overall screened multicore cables shall be provided where it is necessary to provide immunity from interference and reduce the effect of induced extraneous voltages. The screen single core cables shall be earthed at one end only. All cabling and wiring shall be flame retardant Low Smoke & Fumes (LSF) type complying with IEC-332 Part 3 and during combustion shall emit no halogen gases and produce minimal smoke. Cabling and wiring shall be designed and the installation arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage. The outer LSF sheaths of cables shall have reduced flame propagation characteristics in accordance with IEC 60331, 60754, 61034 and be anti-vermin and anti-termite impregnated. All sheaths shall be free from defects and impervious to water. Cables that are likely to be exposed to sunlight during operation and maintenance shall have ultra-violet safe insulation. 18.10.3 Cable Laying, Termination and Identification All cables shall be installed above ground level or in trenches, supported on trays and racks. All cables shall be mechanically protected throughout the installed route, and the cable support system, where considered necessary shall also incorporate a sunshade to protect the installation from the damaging effects of UV radiation. Cables running inside buildings or concrete trenches shall be laid on trays. The trays shall be of adequate strength and size to carry in one layer, the weight, number and configuration required for each tray plus additional cables, not less than 25% by weight and dimensions, in excess of those installed. All cables shall be installed and terminated in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Cable cores shall be terminated without the addition of separate tails. Cables shall be marked at each end of the run with a marker consisting of a label attached to the cable with two straps. Cables shall be neatly laid throughout and in such a manner as to avoid any undue sagging of cables. Where run on trays or racking, the cables shall be securely fastened at intervals of not more than 1 m with clips, straps or saddles, or in the case of telephone cables with cable ties. Three single core cables forming one three-phase circuit shall be installed in trefoil formation. In order to maintain this formation, the cables shall be clamped together at intervals not exceeding 1 metre. The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire-risk areas and to minimize the risk of damage from any source. Running equipment cables along the same route as power cables shall be avoided. Where this is not possible, the cables shall be segregated as fully as possible. Precautions shall be taken to ensure physical contact does not take place anywhere throughout the run. Each cable shall be identified by means of indelibly marked identification labels fixed adjacent to the cable gland at each end of the cable. The labels shall be made of material which is resistant to the effects of corrosion, moisture, UV radiation, vermin, termites and also mechanical damage. Sufficient slack shall be provided near the ends of the cable runs to allow for disturbance during maintenance or repair. All cables shall be glanded at both ends with glands of type/material suitable for the application. Nonferrous glands shall be used for single-core cables. Glands appropriate for use with Steel Wire Armoured (SWA) type cables are to be provided and arrangements for multicore SWA type cables are to be taken into account in the switchboards. Where SWA cable is not used then provision must be made to protect the cable from damage due to physical abuse and attack from vermin. These measures shall be subject to approval. Equipment that is required for emergency use shall be cabled using routes that are different to, or segregated from, the routes used for normal running equipment. The emergency equipment shall be connected with fire-resistant cables. Wherever cables pass through floors, walls or other partitions a suitable method of sealing shall be used. This sealing shall consist of one-hour fire resisting materials such that a maximum of 100C is
maintained on the cold side of the seal with 1000C applied to the hot side. All seals shall be vermin and termite proof. Seals in damp areas, or areas with water spray fire protection, shall be waterproof. The whole installation shall be arranged to prevent the spread of fire, smoke and fumes through each partition. 18.11 EARTHING
18.11.1 General Earthing of electronic equipment is required to reduce the effects of interference and for the safety of operation and maintenance staff. Where there is a conflict between these two, personal safety shall always take precedence. 18.11.2 Safety Earthing All non-current carrying metallic parts of plant, equipment, components, enclosures, racks, etc, shall be earthed by connection to the earth bar in an approved manner and all earthing terminals and connections shall be of adequate dimensions. When apparatus or instruments are accommodated on panel, cubicle doors or swinging frames, flexible cable or braid shall be used for earthing these items; the door hinges will not be accepted as a means of earthing this part of the equipment. Except where otherwise approved, a stud type terminal of diameter not less than 12 mm or a tapped boss of equivalent size shall be provided on the outside of each cabinet or structure for the purpose of making the connection to a convenient local earth point. 18.11.3 Cable Screens and Armouring The design of equipment shall be such that cable screens and cable armouring are kept electrically separate throughout the equipment installation so as to avoid the introduction of earth loops and minimise interference pickup. Cable armouring shall not be used as a protective screen. Equipment shall be designed so that the armouring of all incoming and outgoing cable and can be connected together externally, but shall be electrically isolated from the enclosure. The cable armour shall be connected to the site earth at a single point. Protective screens around insulated cables shall be insulated from field instruments, connected through any field junction boxes, and be continuous up to the earthing point in the destination cubicle or desk. Cubicles, desks etc, shall be equipped with a clean instrument earth comprising an insulated copper earth bar for the connection of cable screens. All clean instrument earth bars shall be clearly labelled as such. Connection of the instrument earth to the site earth shall be by separate conductor to the equipment safety earth.
19. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 19.1 GENERAL Functionality Performance Reliability and availability Quality assurance standards SCADA/EMS applications shall comply to Common Information Model (CIM) and Generic Data Interface (GID) standards as defined by IEC 61970.
All software provided shall meet the following requirements, as stated in this Specification:
Words used in this Specification to describe categories of software shall have the meanings defined below. Software For the purposes of this Specification, Software shall mean all coded instructions and data that are processed by a computer or other processor controlled device. Existing Software Existing Software means any existing software forming part of the Contractor's standard product that has been proven in use at several sites over a period of at least one year. This, for example, includes operating systems, compilers, standard software for data acquisition, display and control. It does not include any software that requires development or modification to meet the requirements of this Specification. New Software New Software means any software that is developed or modified to provide facilities required for this project, whether such facilities are explicitly specified or not. Configuration and Source Data Configuration and Source Data includes any software configuration tables or data entered to define the characteristics of plant, instrumentation or the process being monitored and/or controlled, or to cause the software to function according to project requirements. Entry of this data shall not require any alteration to program coding. 19.2 THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
Standard third party software that was originally designed for purposes unrelated to this project, such as operating systems, programme development and management utilities, and embedded software on proprietary equipment such as network interface cards and printers, are not required to meet the design or coding requirements of this Specification. However, the Contractor shall warrant that such items are suitable for the purpose for which they are supplied, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the integration of all hardware and software supplied, including third party software items, into a single integrated package that meets the requirements of this Specification. This waiver shall not apply to any third party software that has been modified in any way by the Contractor or his subcontractors. Such modification shall be subject to the design control and quality assurance provisions of this Specification.
19.3
CODE AND DATA STANDARDS
19.3.1 Programming Languages The SCADA/EMS system and all new software shall be written in a standard high-level language that is suitable for implementation of real-time systems. The Bidder shall provide details of all programming languages used. 19.3.2 Database Structure In order to ensure the integrity of all data held by the System, there shall effectively be one master System Database in which each item of data is stored only once. The System Database may comprise a number of databases, for example containing the real-time data, plant records, geographical data, etc., but such distribution of data storage shall be transparent to the user. The System Database shall be structured in such a way as to simplify maintenance of data and programs and it shall not be necessary for the user to enter the same data into the System more than once. Real-time and calculated data shall be held within the system database in a manner that makes them readily accessible to all programs that require this information. Mechanisms shall be provided to ensure consistency between the master system database and any online or backup copies, and to notify and correct errors, where possible. The mechanisms shall operate automatically and shall include periodic cyclic checks. Database protection at both field and record levels shall be provided to prevent inadvertent corruption of the database. 19.3.3 Program and Data Security The software design shall ensure the integrity and safety of all code and data at all times so that, for example, they cannot become corrupted due to interrupted transfers or inadvertently over-written. 19.4 APPLICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE
This Section defines how the Contractor's quality assurance procedures shall apply to the different categories of software. 19.4.1 New Software All new software (if applicable) shall be produced in accordance with the software quality assurance procedures described in this Specification. The Employer reserves the right to audit the quality control procedures used by the Contractor for the production of new software. 19.4.2 Existing Software It is recognised that existing software may not have been developed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, and it is not intended that quality assurance procedures should be applied retrospectively. Where the software is of a proprietary nature and not of the Bidder's design, the Bidder shall provide evidence of their experience with the software and its performance in similar applications. They shall make documentation for that software available for inspection during the Bid evaluation period. 19.4.3 Configuration Data The Contractor shall establish quality control procedures to ensure that configuration data is in accordance with Clause 17 and any subsequent updates to such data are correctly entered into the SCADA/EMS system. 19.4.4 Software Validation, Verification and Testing The level of software validation, verification and testing to be applied shall be clearly identified by the Contractor.
19.4.5 Change and Issue Control The Contractor shall implement procedures for controlling the issue of all software and related documents. They shall also implement procedures for controlling all changes to issued software and documents. These procedures shall ensure that work is only carried out on the latest version of all software and documents. The Contractor shall keep backup copies of all issued software. 19.5 SCADA/EMS SOFTWARE
19.5.1 General The following requirements shall apply to all, proprietary application software provided by the Contractor and their subcontractor that forms the complete SCADA/EMS System and its associated ancillary systems. 19.5.2 Software Life Cycle Quality assurance controls and verification shall be applied to each phase of the software system life cycle. 19.5.3 System Development Methodology All software development shall be carried out in accordance with a recognised System Development Methodology (SDM), which shall be subject to the Contractor's quality control procedures. 19.5.4 Documentation Documentation for each phase of software development shall be produced, reviewed and approved in accordance with the approved SDM. Documentation shall be an integral part of each phase and not a separate activity. 19.5.5 Functional Design Specification For each function to be realised using software, the Contractor shall prepare a formal written Functional Design Specification (FDS) fully describing: The functionality that will be provided The methods and algorithms used to realise the functionality Details of the user interface Details of the data inputs and outputs of the function
The FDS shall not include the coding for any function unless the inclusion of segments of code would be useful to describe the functionality of a particular function. The FDS shall state which functions will be implemented with existing software and which functions require the development of new software or modification of existing software. The FDS shall be produced in accordance with the approved system development methodology and shall be submitted for review. The Contractor shall not purchase any specialised hardware for this Contract nor commence the production of any software until the FDS has been approved. The Employer will not be held liable for any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of changes to work carried out before approval of the FDS. The Contractor shall provide a traceability reference with the FDS, as specified in Section 4 Documentation. 19.5.6 Detailed Design For each new software function defined in the FDS, the Contractor shall prepare a detailed design document that shall describe how the function is to be implemented. The detailed design shall include data flow diagrams, program structure charts, module interface definitions, structured English or pseudo code specification of module logic and such other documentation as is specified in the approved SDM.
19.6
OPERATING SYSTEMS
19.6.1 General Each computer system shall be provided with a real-time, multi-user, multitasking operating system that provides a suitable environment for executing the software intended to be utilised on each system, especially for real-time functions. UNIX or LINUX solutions are preferred rather than WINDOWS. If WINDOWS solutions are offered the Bidder shall describe in detail the specific means of mitigation of risks to reliability and security. It is preferred that each processing base unit, e.g. workstations, servers, front-end processors, shall use the same operating system and the same version/upgrade of that operating system. The number of different operating systems shall be kept to a minimum and, preferably only one operating system should be used for all computers. The Contractor or their subcontractors shall have made no customisation to the supplied operating system(s). A priority system of resource allocation shall allow both real-time and other tasks, such as system configuration and maintenance, to execute in the same environment while maintaining absolute priority for real-time tasks. A memory protection system shall prevent any task from writing into a memory partition that is allocated for the exclusive use of any other task. Facilities shall be provided to monitor the correct release of memory when tasks terminate and no longer require the memory allocated to them. The operating system shall fully support the hardware, both in its initial configuration and in any expanded configuration that the Employer may purchase from the Contractor, and shall provide software control of all functions of the hardware. 19.6.2 Security The Operating System shall support multiple users simultaneously exercising its resources and the resources of the computer system (e.g. disk drives, etc). Identification and password security shall be implemented for each user and a file protection scheme supported. Access by any user to any file, package or system facility shall not be granted unless the user is known to the system and has the required authorisation level for the operation they wishes to perform. The following access authorisation levels are required for files: Execute only Read only Read/write/update Modify the file definition (e.g. name, password, etc).
19.6.3 System Utilities The operating system shall include the following utilities as a minimum: An intelligent file backup utility that will only backup files that have been modified since the previous backup was made A copy utility to copy files from one medium to the same or a different medium A utility to dump an image of an entire hard disk, e.g. to another hard disk or tape, and to restore such images back to a hard disk A utility to undelete files that have been previously deleted A utility to check the integrity of a disk, to diagnose any problems and lock out any faulty areas of a disk A utility to de-fragment all the files on a disk A utility to view the contents of a file, either in ASCII text or hexadecimal format, without changing the contents of the file A directory sort utility, enabling the directory to be displayed with the listing sorted in ascending or descending order of file name, file size or file date
A sort/merge utility that can sort or merge a number of files of any size according to one or more sort keys Facilities to dump nominated areas of memory and the CPU registers to disk, particularly for investigation after a task crash All utilities shall include context sensitive help.
19.6.4 Text Editor At least one text editor shall be supplied with the operation system and the following facilities are required for all text editors provided: Windowed and full screen operation of the facilities defined below The ability to edit files formatted for input to all language translators provided, files formatted for printing and free text Horizontal scrolling facilities to allow editing of files with line lengths that are longer than the screen width The ability to edit files that are larger than the amount of free memory available to the editor The ability to work on a copy of a file without affecting the original The ability to locate text containing a specified string of characters, and the next occurrence thereof, including the optional use of wildcards The ability to search for, insert or delete variable length strings of data The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to another part The ability to move or copy an identifiable string of data from one part of a file to a specified location in a different file The ability to merge text from several files The ability to display text either as ASCII characters or in hexadecimal representation, or in both formats on the same screen Context sensitive help
19.6.5 Software Configuration and Maintenance Facilities Facilities shall also be provided for the maintenance of the System software, whether or not the source code is provided with System. 19.6.5.1 Diagnostics and Fault Monitoring
A complete package of diagnostic programs shall be provided with the System that will allow testing of all system devices, including inter processor links and communications with RTUs, to determine whether or not a problem exists and to isolate a problem to a certain area in the device. Both online (self diagnostic) and offline diagnostics shall be provided. Facilities shall be provided to run diagnostics on all relevant subsystems of the SCADA/EMS System. 19.6.5.2 Error Detection and Reporting
Malfunctions to be reported shall include excessive program execution time, communications errors and identification of faults in each hardware device provided. Any malfunction shall cause a message to be generated in clear English text and brought to the attention of the operator, so that remedial action can be taken. It is not acceptable to merely generate an error number that must be looked-up in a manual or elsewhere. Facilities shall be provided to display the status of all flags and devices on demand.
19.6.5.3
Online Performance Measurement
An online performance measurement and analysis tool shall be provided to check system operation and to enable tuning and optimisation of the system as a whole. This tool shall measure overall CPU utilisation and identify the resources used by individual users and tasks. 19.6.5.4 Telemetry Communications Statistics
The system shall continuously calculate and update statistics on telemetry scans and errors, and provide facilities for this information to be displayed on request. The following information shall be provided for each outstation (RTU or SCS) and for the total of all outstations on each data line: a) b) No response Invalid response The number of times an outstation failed to respond to a request from the Master Station The number of invalid replies received from an outstation in response to a request from the Master Station, tabulated by error type (e.g. incorrect message length, CRC error, address error, etc.) Total number of scans (valid and invalid) carried out during the reference period
c)
Number of scans
The above information shall be accumulated as follows: Current hour Previous hour Current day Previous day Current month Previous month
In each case, the 'current' figures shall be updated continuously. At the end of each hour, day and month period respectively, the 'current' figures shall be transferred to the 'previous' figures and the 'current' figures shall be reset to zero. An historical record of communications statistics shall be maintained by the system complete with a long term archiving facility. 19.6.5.5 Software Maintenance Facilities shall be provided for generating the Systems executable code from source code. These facilities shall be the same as the facilities used at the Contractors factory or completely compatible with them. It is anticipated that these facilities will be used by the Contractor onsite to build and integrate any software fixes or updates received from the factory, or prepared onsite, into the System. Any modifications prepared onsite shall be managed under the overall software quality procedures. It is not intended that these facilities be used routinely by the Employer but they are required in order to safe guard the Employer against the loss of software support, for any reason, from the Contractor. In that case these facilities would permit the Employer or others, to effect any necessary software maintenance, modification or addition. 19.6.5.5.1 Language Translators
The following facilities are required for all language translators (compilers and interpreters) provided: Separate compilation/assembly of subprograms Clear statements to be produced, in plain English, of error conditions that are encountered during the translation process and execution Optionally produced source listings Optionally produced cross reference listing, providing an alphabetical listing of all program variables showing where in the program each variable is defined and used
Optional trace and debug facilities in accordance with the requirements of Clause 19.7.9 Optional code optimisation to produce code for normal or fast execution. Source code processed and object code produced in each case shall be compatible, for example, a subprogram compiled for fast execution shall correctly link to a subprogram compiled for normal execution A make facility that shall check the date and time when each source code file for a specified program was last modified against the date and time when the associated object code file was created, and automatically recompile all source files that are more recent than the associated object file A build facility that shall recompile all source code files for a particular program regardless of the relative date/time of source and object files. Linker
19.6.5.5.2
The linker shall be able to accept one or more object modules produced by an assembler or compiler, resolve symbol and procedure references between them and produce an executable image. If more than one language translator is provided then the linker shall be capable of linking object modules produced by any or all language translators into a single executable program. The linker shall optionally be able to produce a storage map of all linked modules, including library modules, and a tree-structured map showing the calling structure. 19.6.5.5.3 Program Maintenance Libraries
Program maintenance library facilities shall be able to create and update program libraries of source and object programs and provide the following facilities: Support for any number of source or object program libraries Facilities for the creation, deletion and copying of individual libraries Facilities to add source or object modules to a specified library Facilities to delete source or object modules from a specified library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library, modify it and re-insert it in the library Facilities to extract a source or object module from a specified library and insert it in another library A facility to display a directory listing of individual libraries, showing the name and version number of each member and the date it was last modified Trace and Debug Facilities
19.6.5.5.4
Trace and debug facilities suitable for debugging programs written in any of the languages used on this project shall be provided with the System. Both source code and machine code debugging shall be supported as described below. Source Code Debugging Source code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the source code of any of the languages provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection: Search for variable length text strings in the source code Display values of program variables, that are identified to the debugger by using their source code variable names, in decimal, binary or hexadecimal format Change the values identified as in (b) above Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger
Run the program one source code line at a time Skip over lines of source code and whole subprograms without tracing through them Display the call stack, showing by name the hierarchy of subprogram calls that brought the program to the current instruction Context sensitive help
Machine Code Debugging Machine code debugging facilities shall be able to set, remove and locate breakpoints in the machine code produced from any of the language translators provided. While the program is halted at a breakpoint, the following facilities shall be available and displayed for selection: 19.7 Search for variable length binary or hexadecimal strings in the object code Display the values of nominated memory locations in binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal or hexadecimal format Change the contents of a nominated memory location by entering a new value in binary, decimal or hexadecimal format Clear breakpoints and optionally set new ones Run the program to the next breakpoint or program termination and return control to the debugger Display the contents of all registers and flags whenever a set breakpoint operates or the program is halted Run the program one machine code instruction at a time Display the call stack, showing the hierarchy of subprogram calls which brought the user to the current instruction Display and optionally change the contents of CPU registers Assemble instructions entered as assembler mnemonics at a specified location in memory Disassemble machine code at specified locations in memory Jump to a specified memory location and execute the code there, and run to the next breakpoint or program termination Convert numbers between binary, fixed point decimal, floating point decimal and hexadecimal formats Context sensitive help PATENT AND COPYRIGHT
19.7.1 Patent Rights The Contractor shall indemnify the Employer against all claims of infringement of any patent, registered design, copyright, trade mark or trade name or other intellectual property right provided that all of the following conditions are satisfied: The claim or proceedings arise out of the design, construction, manufacture or use of the Works or any Plant supplied by the Contractor The right was protected at the date of award of the Contract in the Contractor's country or the country in which the Plant is to be manufactured or erected The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by any use of the Works otherwise than for the purpose indicated by or reasonably to be inferred from the Specification The infringement or allegation of infringement was not caused by the use of any Plant in association or combination with any plant not supplied by the Contractor, unless such association or combination was disclosed to the Contractor prior to the date of the Bid
19.7.2 Claims in Respect of Patent Rights The Contractor shall be promptly notified of any claim under this Clause 19.7 made against the Employer. The Contractor may, at their own cost, conduct negotiations for the settlement of such claim and any litigation that may arise from that claim. The Employer shall not make any admission that might be prejudicial to the Contractor unless the Contractor has failed to take over the conduct of the negotiations or litigation within a reasonable time after having been so requested. The Contractor may not, however, conduct such negotiations or litigation before they have given the Employer such reasonable security as the Employer may require. The security shall be for an amount that is an assessment of the compensation, damages, expenses and costs for which the Employer may become liable and are the subject of the indemnity under Clause 19.7.1. The Employer shall, at the request of the Contractor, provide all available assistance for the purpose of contesting any such claim or action and shall be repaid all reasonable costs incurred in so doing. 19.7.3 Backup Copies of Software The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to make backup copies of all software and firmware supplied under the Contract for their own use without in any way relieving the Contractor of his obligations. 19.7.4 Right To Modify The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer shall have the right to modify any of the software supplied under the Contract without in any way relieving the Contractor of their obligations. 19.8 LICENCES
The bidder shall provide full details of the licence requirements for each item of software included in the system. The details shall include any restrictions in number of users or platforms on which the software is installed. In general licences are required for all users of the system when fully expanded and these shall be valid indefinitely. Users shall include all those with access via equipment provided under this contract including the office PCs.
20. CIVIL WORKS 20.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20.1.1 Civil Engineering, Building works and Services Standards and Codes of Practice The works shall be executed in accordance with the latest version of the following standards and codes of practices commonly used in Sri Lanka. However, the Contractor may use equivalent standards and codes of practice subject to the approval of the Employer. : BS 308 BS 5950 BS 1192 BS 5628 BS 5720 BS 5588 BS 8300 & Part M NBS BS 5930 BS 5964 BS 6031 BS 6399 CP 3 CP 102 BS 5400 Part 5 BS 5390, 5618 part 3 CP 143 BS 8004 BS 8110 SLS 522 BS 1474 BS 476 Part 8 ISO 898-1 ISO 630 BS/DIN EN 10027-1 BS 4449 BS 4483 BS 4466 Engineering drawing practice The use of structural steel in building Construction drawing practice Code of Practice of the structural use of masonry Code or Practice for mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings Code of Practice for fire precautions in the design of buildings Disabled access Code of practice for Site Investigations Methods for setting out and measurement of buildings: permissible measuring deviations Code of Practice of Earthworks Code of Practice for dead and imposed loads Code of basic data for the design of buildings Waterproofing of buildings. Composite construction in structural steel and Concrete Walling Sheet roof and wall coverings Foundations The structural use of concrete Water for Concreting Aluminium Sections Fire Resisting Doors Bolts & Nuts Hot rolled structural steel sections Designation system for steels Characterization of waste Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete. Specification
BS 1881 BS 6319
Testing concrete. Methods of testing hardened concrete for other than strength Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for use in construction. Method for preparation of test specimens
BS 5481 BS 6651 BS 4660 BS EN 752 BS EN 124 BS 6297 BS 1722 BS 4102 BS 6399 ICTAD Publication No. SCA/4 (Volume I) ICTAD Publication No. SCA/4 (Volume II) ICTAD Publication No. SCA/3/2 Revised Edition 20.2
Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe and fittings for gravity sewers Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning Specification for unplasticized PVC underground drain pipe and fittings Drain and sewer systems outside buildings. Generalities and definitions Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas. Design requirements, type testing, marking, quality control Code of practice for design and installation of small sewage treatment works and cesspools Specification for fences Specification for steel wire for fences Loading for buildings. Code of practice for dead and imposed loads Specification for BUILDING WORKS (Volume I) 3rd Revision July 2004 Specification for BUILDING WORKS Volume 2- October 2001
Specification for WATER SUPPLY, SEWERAGE AND STORM WATER DRAINAGE WORK
PRELIMINARY WORKS
20.2.1 Site Survey After the award of the contract, the Contractor must make his own site surveys to collect all the information to prepare layout drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out, irrespective of any checking by the Employer. The Contractor shall inform the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out peg is established or an existing one destroyed, and shall regularly furnish the Employer with layout plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations. The Contractor shall keep duplicate copies of all his field books and survey calculations written in the English language for inspection by the Employer. The tolerances shall be ruled BS 5606 and BS 5964. The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary. The Contractor shall survey the site to obtain the following. (1) (2) (3) Location of datum of setting out and levelling. Establishment of site boundaries and reduced site datum level. Position and condition of any approaches, bridges and access roads to and over the site, including highest recorded flood level (from local knowledge).
(4) (5)
Existing site levels on a 5 meters grid; and resultant contours at a meter vertical interval. Drainage pattern of the area
The Contractor shall survey the site of the Control Centre location to obtain details of the above items and shall prepare a site survey plan at a scale of 1: 500 showing the survey results and the proposed layout of the new works. The plan shall be sent to the Employer for his approval. The Employer will issue a copy of a survey recently carried out to the Bidder for information. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify correctness by making his own site surveys prior to preparing layout drawings. After completion of the work contractor should do a complete detail survey of the including all the parts completed to the date of handing over. Employer should provide 3 hard copies and a soft copy. 20.2.2 Soil Investigations A sub soil Investigation has been arranged by the Employer and a copy of the investigation report will be made available to the Bidder The safe bearing capacity of the sub-strata may be modified at his final design stage when the full site survey and investigation have been completed and the final layout, structural details etc. agreed. No variation in contract price will be made due to any variation in the bearing capacity leading to modification of foundation design at the final design stage. Special attention shall be paid to the Ground water table and chemical composition of the ground water and soil in the area. Appropriate laboratory tests shall be carried out on all soil and ground water samples to an extent approved by the Employer. All tests shall be in accordance with an approved standard, e.g. British Standard 1377. 20.2.3 Site Clearance 20.2.3.1 Cutting and removing trees & shrubs
The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. All unwanted materials, debris, etc. shall be removed from the employers premises. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road construction and to existing surfaces, buildings and other facilities in the area which do not need to be demolished. Bushes, undergrowth, trees and hedges which are not specifically noted on the drawings or in the contract for preservation shall be uprooted and burnt or otherwise disposed of. Holes left by uprooting shall be promptly filled with suitable material and compacted. 20.2.3.2 Removing existing equipment, dismantling steel structures
Equipments and support steel structures, which are to be removed shall remove carefully and handed over to the Kotugoda stores. Removing, dismantling, handling, transporting and handing over shall be done by the contractor as instructed by the Employer Any damages or losses shall be rectify by the contractor at his own cost. 20.2.3.3 Demolishing & removing of existing masonry/concrete structures
Un wanted foundations shall be demolished or up-rooted. The Contractor shall clear all areas required for the work. All unwanted materials, debris, etc. shall be removed from the employers premises. But shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damages to the other structures. 20.2.4 Site formation and up keeping 20.2.4.1 Cutting and filling earth Excavation
20.2.4.1.1
The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths, lengths and depths shown on the approved drawings and in accordance with BS CP-8004 and BS 6031. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted. If top layer of soil is not suitable for the construction it shall be removed or stabilised as recommended by the investigator.
The Contractor may excavate by any method considered suitable, subject to the Employers approval, and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for excavation in any location and at any time. The Contractor is to provide all strutting and shoring necessary for the safe execution of the Works. The Contractor shall allow for risk meeting while excavating through any sort of soil, which may be encountered, including rock. Materials from the excavation may, if approved by the Employer, be used by the Contractor in the construction Works. Other excavated material shall be back filled where required or deposited where directed anywhere on site. Surplus materials shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials, rubbish and offensive matter. In foundation bottom 150mm layer of excavation in thickness shall be left undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed in order that softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area by exposure may be avoided as far as possible. The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed, levelled and well rammed. Concrete shall not be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the Employer. 20.2.4.1.2 De-watering
All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean, in order that work is not affected or interfered with by water entering the excavations. The Bidder is to allow in his Bid for the costs of pumping, de-watering or other methods of dealing with the water during and after excavation. Arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations shall be approved by the Employer. They must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during the placing of concrete or the execution of any other works, which could be affected by water in excavations. Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement and concrete or to prevent the work being disturbed in any way. Water from pumping or other dewatering methods shall be properly drained away from the site or disposed of by tankers, so as not to inconvenience users of adjacent properties or sites. No concrete, masonry, brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properly drained. 20.2.4.1.3 Filling and Reinstatement
If it is required to fill the land to level the formation level contractor shall get approved the filling material and method of construction before the commencement of the work. Material to be used as fill or backfill shall be well graded granular material and shall have a following grading curve. SIEVE SIZE 75mm 37.5mm 10mm 5mm 600 m 75 m Note The material shall have a PI < 6 100 85- 100 40-70 25-45 8 - 22 0 - 10 % PASSING
Filling for trenches, excavations and levelling of the site shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm un compacted thickness, each layer watered when necessary and well rammed or otherwise
compacted to within 95% of the maximum dry density obtained by the use of a Proctor Standard Compaction Test. Any fill material used within 500 mm of concrete structures cement bound materials shall have a soluble sulphate content not exceeding 2.5 g per litter when tested in accordance with BS 1377, special precautions shall be taken to protect the concrete or cement bound materials to the approval of the Employer. Where excavations whether in rock or other material, are made to a greater depth than detailed, the intervening space shall be brought up to the proper level in plain concrete at the Contractors expense. Any formation encountered in the excavations which, in the opinion of the Employer is not sufficiently strong to carry the loads which will be imposed on it, shall be excavated to an adequate load bearing stratum and replaced with mass concrete. All equipment for determination of the density of filled areas shall be supplied by the Contractor. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer. The tendered price is deemed to include for this. Unless otherwise described, directed or permitted, imported filling shall consist of pervious naturally occurring material, free from mud, silt, clay, peat, vegetable or injurious matter and water soluble salts harmful to copper and other metals. Filling shall be imported only from approved areas. 20.2.4.1.4 Stability of Fill and Embankment
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of embankments, which formed either by cutting or filling, and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from deterioration under adverse weather conditions. Wherever applicable the recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed in calculations, detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage: Earthworks - British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031. Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously forming the founding surface, on which the fill material will be placed, to a benched profile. All top surfaces of earthwork shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings and embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes. The soil stability of such slops etc. shall be ensured. The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked, raked and stabilised as protection from erosion to the approval of the Employer. The Contractor shall construct where necessary open ditches, bunds, culverts, etc., to divert and protect the site in both the short and long-term form flash floods. If any slips occur in the excavations, banks or filling during the execution of the Works or during the period of maintenance form any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall execute the necessary remedial work in such manner, and with such materials as approved by the Employer, at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall make good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the end of the period of defects liability at his own expense. 20.2.4.2 Explosives
Explosives may only be used when specified or approved by the Employer. If approved, their use shall comply with the following: (1) All local by-laws and regulations.
(2) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a separate compartment for detonators. Explosives shall be handled only by currently licensed shot fires. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no unauthorised issue or improper use of explosives brought on the Site. (3) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the manufacturers. The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use more than 5 kg of explosives in one blast. Such approval shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of Contract. (4) When blasting is carried out the Contractor shall ensure, by adherence to proper safety distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary, to prevent the dispersal or material,
that no damage is caused to persons, animals or property on or off the Site. Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that individual explosions are reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any buildings or structures. 20.2.4.3 Earth retaining structures
Retaining structures or turfing to be done to side slopes as specified in BS 6031. 20.2.4.4 Anti Termite soil treatment
Anti termite treatment with more than 10 years guaranty shall be done for the control building area including 3m to either side of the building 20.2.4.5 Land escaping & tree planting
Suitable trees shall be planted in available vacant areas where necessary grassing to be done to protect erosion. 20.2.4.6 Surface chipping
Stone chipping used for surfacing are to be clean hard crushed stone graded from 16 - 40 mm. The formation in areas where stone chipping are to be used shall be well compacted to the approval of the Employer, and treated with an approved total weed killer, used in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Stone chipping shall be laid and lightly compacted to a minimum finished thickness of 100 mm. 20.2.5 Cable Trenches & Ducts 20.2.5.1 Control and power cable trenches & ducts
The Contractor is responsible for all civil works required for cable runs between switchgear and building in concrete cable trenches. Main cable trenches shall be rack types with sufficient working space. Cable entries into buildings shall be through ducts or in concrete cable trenches. Trench covers outside buildings shall be of reinforced concrete designed for he maximum likely imposed loads appropriate to their location. Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately sloped and adequate capacity of drainage system shall be provided to soak water. Expansion joints shall be provided in suitable lengths. Power cable which pass under roads, car parking areas, hard standing areas or where they would otherwise be at risk shall be laid in ducts. A 100% additional capacity shall be installed for future use and the whole surrounded in a minimum of 150 mm C15 concrete. Conduits provided shall be sized to suite the cables provided. All other main cable trenches shall have additional capacity of 30% future use. Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of any water, dust, vermin, etc., using suitable materials. Cable entry to the control building shall be provided for future requirements. All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits, as directed. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth, debris and other obstructions during and after laying. Cable ducts may be pitch fibber, PVC, plastic or other material approved by the Employer and obtained from an approved manufacturer. After the cable ducts have been completed, a cleaning rod shall be drawn through each duct and a No. 8 gauge galvanised iron-fishing wire drawn in after the rod. The ends of the ducts shall be plugged with a wooden plug and the fishing-wires left in the ducts. 20.2.5.2 Concrete Beds and Casings
Concrete beds and casings to cable ducts and under roads, buildings, floors and foundations shall be of lean concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. Elsewhere the ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material of 150mm minimum bed thickness and 300 mm minimum cover. 20.2.5.3 Cable Pits
Cable pits shall be provided at interval not exceeding 100 meters and also at the bends of all cable ducts. Cable pits may be constructed of bricks; concrete blocks, in-situ concrete or precast concrete chamber rings and cover slabs. In each case, the material shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of this Specification. Cable pits shall be sized according to their depth, to provide sufficient working space
and access for maintenance. When constructed of block work, they shall be rendered internally with sand/cement mortar finished with smooth vertical surfaces. Where precast concrete rings are used they shall be surrounded with concrete 150 mm thick. Galvanised malleable iron steps are to be provided in all cable pits over one meter deep and built in as work proceeds. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc. Power cables shall be laid on and surrounded with sand fill in unlined trenches. Pre-cast concrete cable protection covers & PVC marker tape shall be provided over the full width and length of cables in sand filled trenches. Pre-cast concrete marker posts shall be provided along cable runs at 5 meters centres and changes in direction. Rates shall include for all necessary crossings shifting existing any obstructions etc. 20.2.6 Concrete Work, Foundations & Piling Work 20.2.6.1 Concrete Work Concrete Trial Mixes:
20.2.6.1.1
The Contractor shall submit not less than 3 weeks before the commencement of manufacture of preliminary trial design mixes the following information to the Employer in respect of each grade of concrete. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Grade of concrete Title of particular trial mix. The grading of the aggregates. The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete. The expected compacting factor and slump. Full details of the proposed site quality control. Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing.
The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance criteria for the Preliminary Trial Mixes. If the proposals not be approved by the Employer, and then the Contractor shall comply with the paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs. At least four weeks before commencing any Concreting in the Works, the Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be used. If possible, the Concreting plant and the means of transport to be employed in the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and to transport them a representative distance. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and the first batch shall be discarded. Preliminary test cubes shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows: For each grade a set of 6 cubes shall be made from each of 3 consecutive batches. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven days and three at an age of 28 days. The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory shall be approved by the Employer. If it is proposed to use an admixture in the mix then for each grade of concrete a batch shall be made with a double dose of the additive. For each of these batches 3 cubes shall be made and one tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days to determine the likely effect of error in dispensing. The trial design mix proportions shall be approved if the average strength of a set of 9 cubes tested at 2 28 days exceeded the specified characteristic compressive strength by current margin less 3.5 N/mm . The results of the seven-day cube tests shall be used to given an indication for future use of the strengths likely to be achieved at 28 days. They shall not be used to satisfy the 28 days preliminary test cube strength requirements. The current margin for each particular type of concrete mix should be determined; it may be taken as having the smaller of the values given by (1) or (2).
(1) 1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than 1/6 of the characteristic strength for 2 concrete of grade 7, 20 or 15, or 3.75 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. (2) 1.64 time the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but not less than 1/3 of the 2 characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7, 10 or 15, or 7.5 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (1) or (2) above, the margin for the initial mix design should 2 be taken as two-thirds of the characteristic strength for concrete of grade 7, 10 or 15, or 15 N/mm for concrete of grade 20 or above. This margin should be used as the current margin only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (1) or (2) above. However, when the required characteristic strength approaches the maximum possible strength of concrete made with a particular aggregate, a smaller 2 margin but not less than 7.5 N/mm may have to be permitted for the initial mix design. At each test no cube strength shall fall below the appropriate minimum specified in the Contractors designs. Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval full details of the mixes he proposes to use, with their anticipated average strength, which must be based on the satisfactory results of these preliminary tests. The Employer shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests. The Contractor shall inform the Employer of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of the tests at least 24 hours before they take place. Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required to take account of permitted variations in the materials. Such approval shall be subject to the execution, to the Employers satisfaction, of trial mix procedures set out herein. 20.2.6.1.2 Ready-Mixed Concrete
Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5328, which batched off the Site, may be used only with the agreement of the Employer and comply with all requirements of the Contract. The concrete shall be carried in purpose made agitators operating continuously, or truck mixers. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates, unless a longer time is agreed by the Employer. The time of such introduction shall be recorded on the delivery note together with the weight of the constituents of each mix. When truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision, either at the Site or at the central batching plant, as agreed by the Employer but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer, truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328 part 3. 20.2.6.2 Materials Cements
20.2.6.2.1
The type of cement to be used shall depend on the constructional circumstances and on the prevailing local conditions. Portland cement, Type I, may be used at places not exposed to chemical aggressiveness, whereas Portland cement, Type V, shall in general be used for all concrete work in foundations and plinths and in concrete structures covered by soil. Moderate sulphate resistant cement as per ASTM C 150, type 2, may be used only after the Employers explicit written approval to replace the type V cement. Cement shall be of recent manufacture and shall be used within a period of 3 months from production. Total cement contents in the mix shall be limited to avoid excessive risk of thermal and shrinkage 3 cracking. It shall always be in the range of 350 - 400 kg/m unless otherwise approved by the Employer. The proportioning of mixes for durability will be primarily controlled through the specified limits on free
W/C ratio. The W/C ratio shall always lie in the range of 0.36-0.45. Appropriate use shall be made of approved admixtures to simultaneously meet the requirements for W/C ratio and workability. Before supplying cement to Site or receiving ready-mixed concrete, the Bidder/Contractor shall submit to CEB, the manufacturer's statement of Specification and test certificate together with date of manufacture of any cement to be used. the Employer reserves the right to take samples and order any additional / retests in accordance with BS EN 196-7 : 1992, BS EN 196-6, BS 4450 and ASTMC 186. In mix designs with an emphasis on durability, ground granulated blast furnace slag as per BS 6699 or EN 197 or micro-silica may be incorporated in the mix. Proportions of slag shall normally not exceed 60%, those of micro-silica shall not exceed 8%, for items thicker than 1.2m these proportions shall not exceed 10%. The Bidder shall indicate on the schedule C the brand name, manufacture and source of the cement which he proposes to use in the Works and the method of delivery. The Contractor shall not place the order for cement before the Employers approval is obtained. All cement shall be obtained form the same source for any particular part of a structure. The Contractor shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until any further trial mixes required by the Employer have been made and tested and shown to comply with the specification. The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with ASTM C114-69 (Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement) or BS 4550: Part 2 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall be calculated from the formula given in BS 5328 part 4 The equivalent weight of sodium oxide shall not exceed 0.6% of the weigh of cement. The above restriction shall be waived if the proposed aggregate is proved without doubt to be nonreactive. The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers, of which there shall be 20 to the ton, bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the consignment. The approximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each bag. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for deliveries to be made sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficient quantities to ensure that there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time. The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk; delivery arrangements shall be to the Employers approval and each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturers test certificate. Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient time to allow any tests to be carried out before the cement is used. Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and weatherproof building used exclusively for this purpose. The floor of the building shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an air space shall be left between the floor and bottom layer of bags. If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used. Each consignment shall be stacked separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record shall be kept so that each consignment may be identified. Storage shall be arranged so that the cement is used in order to delivery. 20.2.6.3 Test Certificates and Samples
All cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the requirements of the appropriate specification. The Contractor shall, when required by the Employer, obtain for him the manufacturers test certificate for any consignment as soon as possible after delivery. For every 50 tones of cement delivered to site and whenever required by the Employer the Contractor shall take samples, under supervision, from the cement stored on, or delivered to the site. The Contractor shall test such samples as specified in this document. 20.2.6.4 Aggregates
Before the Employer can approve any aggregate source, the Contractor shall furnish the following data. (1) Petrological group of rock
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Rock type within the group Shape Surface texture Silt content Grading curves Specific gravity Impact value Water absorption Soundness Salt content Alkali reactivity
The fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with BS 882. The sources for all aggregates shall be approved by the Employer. Physical Requirements for aggregates shall be as follows: (1) (2) (3) (4) The weight of voided shells in fine aggregate shall not exceed 5%. The weight of the clay and fine silt fraction (smaller than ASTM sieve No. 200) shall not exceed 5% by weight of coarse aggregates or 10% by weight for fine aggregates. Absorption of fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed 5% as measured in accordance with BS 812 or similar standard. The soundness of all aggregates shall be proved by a sodium sulphate test in accordance with ASTM C88-73, from which the loss over 5 cycles shall not exceed 10% for fine aggregates or 12% for coarse aggregates. The apparent specific gravity of aggregates as determined by an approved test, such as in BS 812, shall not be less than 2.5. Los angles abrasion shall not exceed 37%.
(5) (6)
Where quarries with aggregate from bedrock, especially limestone of the Dolomite type, the rock shall be checked for surface alteration to hardpan. This may affect the surface for well over a meter depth and result in salt concentrations near the surface. Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristics including pockets of clay, salt, chalk or other friable material. Rigorous initial physical inspection is essential. The Chemical Requirements for aggregates shall be: (1) (2) (3) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis, and shall be tested in accordance with BS 812. Fine and coarse aggregates shall not contain more than 0.5% by weight of acid soluble sulphates (as S03). Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0.1% by weight of chlorides (as NaCl) and coarse aggregate more than 0.03%. Should these figures be exceeded the aggregate may still be considered acceptable in this respect provided the total sodium chloride concentration is not greater than 0.32% by weight of cement in the mix, irrespective of the origin of the chloride.
The aggregates shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling of different sizes and types of aggregates is prevented. The stockpiles are to be protected from rubbish or windblown dust. Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable of draining freely. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until, in the opinion of the Employer, it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement ratio.
20.2.6.4.1
Sampling and testing
The Employer shall have the right to request the Contractor, at any time, to draw samples of aggregates from stockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated by the Employer. All sampling and testing shall be in accordance with BS 812 or to American standards when no appropriate BS exist. For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be used sampling and testing shall be done at the rate of six samples and set of test for each new source and each new class. The Contractor shall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out. For routine sampling and testing from an approved source the rate shall be sample per 50 cubic meter of aggregate to be used or sample per month whichever is greater. Such testing shall include those tests form BS 812 as are considered useful by the Employer for comparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor shall allow for the full range to carried out. Testing is to be carried out at an independent laboratory approved by the Employer or else on the site in the presence of the Employers where approved by the. 20.2.6.5 Water
The water used for making concrete, mortar and grout shall be clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of soil, vegetable or organic matter or any other dexterous substance in suspension or solution. The mix water shall be continually monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total salt content. The water should comply with the requirements of SLS 522. 20.2.6.6 Admixtures
Admixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Employer. Before the use of any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures that the concrete will in no way be adversely affected even when twice the recommended dose is batched. 20.2.6.7 Plant
The concreting plant shall be suitably in type, capacity and design for its purpose. The performance of the plant and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the Employer. The plant shall be maintained regularly and stand by plant shall be available to avoid any delay in the progress of the works. 20.2.6.8 Concrete Strength Requirements
All concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 5328 and BS 8110 as designated on drawings approved by the Employer. At least 7 weeks before concrete construction is programmed to commence the Contractor shall submit for approval all the details of concrete mix designs for each proposed grade of concrete. No concrete construction may be commenced until this data is approved by the Employer. The strength requirements for each grade of concrete proposed in the design shall be proven by means of preliminary trial tests as specified in BS 5328 and BS 1881. The minimum cement content and the maximum free water-cement ratio shall be in accordance with BS 8110 and BS 5328. The Contractors designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic strengths, and permissible deviation proposed for each grade of concrete to be used. The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction of the Employer to check the relationship of the strength of concrete cured under site conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions. 20.2.6.9 Mixing
All concrete except where specifically permitted by the Employer in writing shall be mixed in weigh batch mixing machines. The machines shall have a large water storage tank with a gauge or that a predetermined quantity of water can be injected direct into the mixer drum. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed until a uniform colour is obtained after the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed for a further 4 minutes or until a uniform colour is achieved. The total water in the mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trial mix. In computing the quantity of water to be added, due account must be taken of the water contained in the aggregates. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure through hydration, good workability and high strength.
The contractor shall take all precautions to the satisfaction of the Employer to protect the concrete from the injurious effects of the elements. 20.2.6.10 Workability
The concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the corners and angles of the framework and around reinforcement without segregation of the materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. On striking the framework it shall present a face, which is uniform, free from honeycombing, surface crazing or excessive dusting, and which shall not, in the opinion of the Employer, are inferior to the standards laid down in later clauses in this section. In order to satisfy the Employer that adequate for the requirements of the Specification, the Contractor shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes required elsewhere in this Section. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881, or such other procedure as approved by the Employer. The samples to be tested shall be obtained from the batches used for the preliminary test cubes. In addition the Contractor shall supply for each of the grades of concrete a section of framework complete with reinforcement fixed in position and generally representative of the sections commonly to be employed in the Works. The capacity of this trial section of formwork shall be at least half a batch of concrete but in any case not less than 1/4 cubic meter. The formwork shall comply with the requirements of this Specification for formwork. The mould shall be filled in the presence of the Employer with concrete of the same mix and batch from which the preliminary test cubes are made and shall be compacted in the same manner with the same equipment as are proposed for the Works. This procedure shall, if necessary, be repeated with modified mixes until the appearance of the concrete after striking the mould is acceptable to the Employer, after which it shall be used as the standard for that grade. When specific workability is called for a check it shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate of one test for each 10 cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of concreting. 20.2.6.11 Transportation
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixer and transported to the Works by means that shall be approved by the Employer and which shall prevent adulteration, segregation or loss of ingredients, and ensure that the concrete is of the required workability at the point and time of placing. The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved drawings, in the Specification or as directed by the Employer, within one hour of mixing. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from standing water, immediately before the placing of concrete. The Employer shall be given 24 hours notice in order that he may check the work. Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the Employer is present or he has previously examined and approved the positioning, fixing and condition of the reinforcement and of any other items to be embedded, the cleanliness, alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces, and the adequacy and condition of plant. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoid segregation displacement of the reinforcement, formwork or other embedded items. Placing shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints. All small concrete pours shall normally be carried out in the late afternoon unless otherwise permitted by Employer. Where chutes are used to convey the concrete, their slopes shall not be such as to cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles should be provided to obviate segregation during discharge. Concrete shall not be allowed to fall freely more than 1.5 meters except with the approval of the Employer. Where pneumatic placers are used the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where necessary, to prevent segregation damage and distortion of the reinforcement, other embedded items and formwork, caused by impact. Upon arrival at the place of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the Employer a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of concrete, (b) the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and (e) time of batching of the concrete. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall again be obtained from the Employer. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over the area between construction joints. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours, or less as directed by the Employer
depending upon the mix, type of cement and weather conditions, no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours. Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5 C and not more than 32 C. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer when the time shall be within 2 hours of the introduction of cement to the mix and within 20 minutes of discharge from the agitator. Except where otherwise agreed by the Employer, concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compact depth not exceeding 450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases. When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation. 20.2.6.12 Compaction
0 0
The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. It shall be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around reinforcement and other embedded items, without displacing them. Successive layers of the same lift shall be thoroughly worked together. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer, it shall be compacted with the assistance of vibrators. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable conditions shall be on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns. Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided, so far as is practicable. Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 1 and 10 hours after compaction. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer, approved power driven vibrators of the immersion type shall be used. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete being placed. Vibrators shall penetrate the fully depth of the layer and where concrete is placed over previously placed concrete not more than 4 hours old the vibrators shall enter and revibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are well knitted together. Over-vibration, causing segregation, surface laitance or leakage through formwork, shall be avoided. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to prevent the formation of voids. Vibrators shall not keep damage to formwork or other parts of the structure, or displace the reinforcement or other embedded items. Internal vibrators shall be capable of producing not less than 10,000 cycles per minute and external vibrators not less than 3,000 cycles per minute. 20.2.6.13 Construction Joints
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position and arrangement of which shall be indicated on the drawings and approved by the Employer. When not indicated on the drawings the following generally rule shall apply: Joints in columns are to be made at the underside of floor members and at floor levels. Haunches and column capital are to be considered as part of and continuous with the floor or roof. Floors joints in the floor system are to be located at or near the quarter points of the span in slabs and beams, except where otherwise instructed. Walls Vertical joints away from corners. Horizontal joints above sprays or openings. Whenever the placing of the concrete is discontinued other than at the exposed faces, this discontinuity shall form a construction joint. Construction joints are to be made only along a horizontal or vertical plane except that in the case of inclined or curved members they shall be at right angles to the principal axis. Care shall be taken to prevent offsetting of the joint and to ensure water-tightness. The joints shall in every way satisfy the requirement of the Employer, and be fully detailed on drawings prior to submission for approval. When work is resumed adjacent to a surface, which has set, the whole surface shall be thoroughly roughened. It shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and laitance and washed with Water immediately before placing the fresh concrete, which shall be well compacted, against the joint.
20.2.6.14
Construction Bays
The Contractor shall agree with the Employer, prior to the commencement of Concreting, upon the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints, whether shown or not on the drawings. In general, slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and wall exceeding 6 meters in length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent bays shall not be concreted within 7 days. The 2 maximum area of any pour shall be 100 m . In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive and will have the authority to reduce them. As an alternative to alternate bay construction, shrinkage gaps of up to 0.1 meter in width may be left at 6 meters intervals; the shrinkage gaps shall not be concreted until concrete on all sides is at least 7 days old. Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings before submission for approval. Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen impregnated fibber board to full depth and width. The infilling will be permitted to use as permanent formwork only for second casting. Where the fibber board is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least 2 cm from the chambered edge, filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulphide polymer sealant to the manufacturers instructions. Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint, they shall be held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during Concreting. Dowel bars shall be plain mild steel bars conforming to BS 4449. They shall be straight and coated with approved bond breaking compound, which shall consist essentially of 66% of 200 penetrating bitumen blended hot with 14% light creosote oil and, when cold, brought to the consistency of paint by the addition of 20% solvent naphtha, or other approved compound. Plastic caps used in expansion joints shall be rigid and securely fixed to the dowel to prevent the ingress of concrete during casting of the slab. The packing used within the cap shall be an inert, compressible material. All dimensions must be shown on Drawings prior to submission for approval. 20.2.6.15 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing
Existing concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scrabbled to form a suitable key for the new concrete. Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed, cleaned and bent to its correct shape. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the existing. Immediately before new concrete is poured, a cement wash shall be applied to the existing concrete faces. 20.2.6.16 Curing
Concrete shall be protected during the first stages of hardening from the harmful effects of sunshine, drying winds, cold, rain or running water. The protection shall be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by a method to be approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Employer for approval, before any Concreting work commences. On vertical surfaces, the curing membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork. No concrete shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry. The temperature of curing water shall 0 be same as the concrete + 5 C. General concrete shall be wet-cured for at least 7 days with a further 4 days of dry protection. 20.2.6.17 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather In hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Employers approval his proposals for dealing with the following problems: (1) (2) (3) (4) Reduced workability Excessive Plastic shrinkage Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength Rapid drying-out of concrete
20.2.6.17.1
Mixing
Aggregate stockpiles shall be shielded from the direct rays of the sun or cooled by spraying with water; and water tanks and pipes shall be insulated to ensure that the temperature of concrete when deposited 0 shall not exceed 32 C. With the approval of the Employer admixtures may be employed to retard setting time or enhance workability, or induce early bleeding etc. Concrete batched off-site shall be transported to site by truck mixer. The mixer rotating only after it arrives on site. Alternatively, the aggregates and 80% of the required water may be batched off-site with the cement and remaining water being added on site not more than 15 minutes before the pour commences. Concrete transporters shall be kept as cool as practicable. 20.2.6.17.2 Placing
Placing shall not commence until sufficient standby pumps and vibrators are on site to cope with breakdowns. No concrete shall be batched until formwork is ready and all reinforcement fixed in place approved by the Employer. The area of each concrete pour frontage shall be kept to a minimum and suitable means shall be provided to avid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with hot dry surfaces. Where necessary the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the concrete is to be placed, shall be shielded from the rays of the absorption by the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete. In hot weather concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm and internal mechanical vibrators shall be used. Due to rapid stiffening in hot weather all clean-up operations such as application of resin cure membranes and dust reducers, and surface finishing, etc. shall follow closely behind final tamping. 20.2.6.17.3 Curing
All concrete shall be covered for at least 14 days after placing and kept continuously wet for the initial 7 0 days. The temperature of curing water shall be within 5 C of that of the concrete. Air shall not be permitted to circulate between concrete and curing materials. 20.2.6.17.4 Testing
Initially, the Contractor shall double the number of test cubes made. Half of them shall be cured under site conditions in order to ascertain the relationship between site-cured samples and lab-cured samples. The number of slump tests shall initially be twice that normally required. Air temperature shall be measured every two hours, and the temperature of every batch of concrete shall be recorded as it is deposited at the work place. Testing methods are to be in accordance with the relevant BS or ASTM standard except as approved or requested by the Employer. The Employer shall have the right to order that any materials which, do not meet with his approval shall not be used in the work. The Contractor shall have the right to sample, test and give his opinion on such materials. If after this, the materials which rejected by the Employer shall be immediately removed from the Site by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with facilities for materials testing on Site. The facilities may be those normally used by the Contractor. All testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the Employer, and whenever deemed necessary by the Employer. 20.2.6.17.5 Works Test Cubes
Before commencing any Concreting work the Contractor shall submit for approval his proposed testing regime for the Works concrete. If the proposals are not approved by the Employer, the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. For the first 10 days that a particular grade of concrete is produced, or where there is a lapse of two weeks or more between successive pours of the same grade of concrete, three samples shall be taken
on each day and three cubes shall be made from each sample. Two shall be tested at 7 days and the other at 28 days. After the initial 10 days, samples of designed mixed shall be taken at the reduced rate given in Table bellow, with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken on each day that concrete of that grade is used. Three cubes shall be made from each sample, one being tested at 7 days and the remaining two at 28 days. Testing of concrete delivered to or mixed at site shall include: One set of at least six (6) test cubes for every 20 m or every daily pour of concrete or as directed by the Employer. The compression strength tests shall be carried out after seven (7) days for the first two cubes of each set, and after 28 days for the second two cubes of the set, and if requested - the last two cubes of each set may be tested in case of failure of a cube. Slump tests are to be executed for every truck load supplied during concreting and as per the Employer's instructions, provided concreting is proceeding. Concrete temperature is to be recorded at the arrival of concrete at Site. Bimonthly or for every 750 m of concrete cast, the Bidder/Contractor shall prepare the following for durability testing, which - after approval of the Employer - may be carried out through the concrete supplier: Rapid test for chlorides Rapid test for sulphates A Trial panel, from which at 28 days 3 Nos. Cores, 75mm diameter and 75 mm long, shall be taken for water absorption testing (to BS 1881) 3 Nos. blocks, 200x200x120mm thick, for water penetration testing (to DIN 1048) 4 Nos. cubes, 150 mm, for rapid chloride permeability testing (to AASHTO T-277) /curing of samples shall be as close to the current Site practice as possible.
3 3
The cubes shall be made, cured, stored and tested in compression in accordance with BS 1881. The tests shall be carried out in a testing laboratory approved by the Employer. The laboratory must provide evidence that its equipment and procedures comply with BS EN 10002 and BS 1881.The calibration test reports of testing machines and details of the qualifications of all laboratory staff shall be submit for approval if requested by the Employer. Reports of all tests made shall be supplied direct from the laboratory to the Employer within 24 hours of the cubes being tested. The Employer on site shall have the authority to stop all further concrete work until acceptable test results are forthcoming. Up-to-date records shall be kept by the Contractor at the Works of positions in the Works of all batches of concrete, of their grade and of all tests cubes, cores and other specimens taken from them. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Employer at weekly intervals or upon request by the Employer. 20.2.6.17.6 Compliance of Works Test Cubes with Specification
When submitting proposed testing regimes the Contractor shall also detail his proposed acceptance criteria for the Employers approval. When this is not forthcoming the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. The rules of compliance for Works cubes are different to those for Trial Mixes. Compliance with the characteristic strength shall be assumed if the conditions given in both (1) and (2) are met: (1) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above (i.e.) characteristic strength = 20 N/mm ). 2 N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below (i.e.) characteristic strength = 15 N/mm ). (2) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic strength minus. 3 N/mm for concrete of grade C20 and above
2 2 2 2 2
N/mm for concrete of grade C15 and below.
The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test results shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken together with all intervening batches. When a test result fails to comply with [2), only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk. Compliance criteria remain the same irrespective of varying rates of sampling of the same grade concrete in different structures. Where a minimum or maximum cement content of a designed mix is specified and compliance is assessed by observation of the bathing or from auto graphic record, the cement content shall not be less than 95% of the specified minimum or more than 105% of the specified maximum. Where compliance of cement content is assessed from the results of analysis tests on fresh concrete, the cement content shall not be less than 90% of the specified minimum or more than 110% of the specified maximum. If the strength of the specimen is less than the appropriate specified minimum crushing strength or if, in the opinion of the Employer, the concrete fails to meet the specified requirements in other respects, the concrete in that part of the Works of which, it is a sample will be considered not to comply with the specified requirements. As and where directed by the Employer, cylindrical core specimens shall be cut from the hardened concrete in the Works for the purpose of examination and testing. The Employer shall approve the cutting equipment and the method of doing the work. Prior to the preparation for testing, the specimens shall be made available for examination of the Employer. Testing of the core shall be in accordance with approved standards. The Employer also makes recourse to such non-destructive means of testing as ultrasonic pulsing and Schmidt rebound hammers. If the specified requirements have not been met the Contractor shall propose such remedial action as may be required. Such action is subject to the Employers satisfaction and approval. If no satisfactory remedial measures are proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer then the Employer shall order the removal of all work not complying with the Specification at the Contractors expense. Before proceeding with similar work the Contractor shall submit to the Employer for his approval details of action proposed to ensure future concrete to be placed in the Works would comply with the Specification. 20.2.6.18 Formwork
Forms shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly compacted. The forms shall conform accurately to the required shape; position and level, subject to the tolerance specified and to the standards of finish of hardened concrete as specified later this Section. The Employer may request the Contractor to provide sample panels of formwork for approval, at the Contractors expense. When concrete is to be vibrated, special care shall be taken to maintain the stability of the formwork and the tightness of the joints during vibrating operations. The materials and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be approved by the Employer. The whole or part of the ties shall be capable of being removed so that no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the surface of the concrete than the specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled unless otherwise directed by the Employer with concrete or mortar of approved composition. All forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete. The use of mould oil or other material to facilitate this shall be subject to the approval of the Employer. All formwork for pits, ducts and holding down boltholes must be so constructed that it can be easily collapsed to facilitate withdrawal after the initial set of the concrete. The Contractors proposed method for the construction and fixing of the formwork for bolthole pockets shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before construction. The top of the shuttering shall be suitably covered to prevent entry of excess grout, materials used for curing, etc.
Solid timber must not be used for forming holding down boltholes. Bolthole former may be made of plywood, expanded metal, polystyrene or other method approved by the Employer, who may require the Contractor to carry out a test pour, using the proposed bolthole former. The Employer shall be informed in advance when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork. The time at which the formwork is struck shall be Contractors responsibility. The formwork may be struck when the concrete has in the opinion of the Employer attained a compressive strength of not less 2 than 10 N/mm or twice the stress to which it will then be subjected whichever is the greater. In the absence of cube test results the minimum periods before striking form work for concrete made with ordinary Portland cement shall be according to the table 6.6 of BS 8110. Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without disturbing the soffit forms and if props are to be left in place when the soffit forms are removed these props shall not be disturbed during the striking. The Contractor shall state precisely on his plans which of the type of finished described hereunder he intends to use in the various locations. Any defective concrete finish will be rejected. The Employer may at his discretion order the defects to be cut out and made good. Plastering of defective concrete, as a means of making good will not be permitted, except that in the case of minor porosity in the surface the Employer may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand mortar of the same richness as in the concrete. This treatment shall be made immediately after removing the formwork. 20.2.6.18.1 (1) Type F.1 Formed Finishes for Concrete
This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete will be placed. Formwork shall consist of sawn boards, sheet metal or any other suitable material, which will prevent the loss of grout when the concrete is vibrated. (2) Type F.2
This finish is for surfaces, which are permanently exposed to view but where the highest standard of finish is not required. Forms to provide a Type F.2 finish shall be faced with wrought and thickened board with square edges arranged in a uniform pattern. Alternatively, plywood or metal panels may be used if they are free from defects likely to detract from the general appearance of the finished surface. Joints between the board and panels shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed. This finish shall be such as to require no general filling of surface pitting, but fines, surface discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by methods approved by the Employer. (3) Type F.3
This finish is for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good appearance and alignment are of special importance. To achieve this finish, which shall be free of board marks, the formwork shall be face with plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged in an approved uniform pattern. Whenever possible joints between sheets shall be arranged to coincide with architectural feature, sills, window heads or drainage in direction of the surface. All joints between panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed. Suitable joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the plane of the sheets. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish or mark is imparted to the finished surface. Unfaced wrought boarding or standard steel panels will not be permitted for Type F.3 finish. Permanent forms shall be constructed of slabs or blocks of precast concrete, natural stone, brickwork or other approved material as directed. Such slabs or blocks shall have an exposed surface of the quality shown on the Drawing sand as specified. They shall be fixed to the structure by approved means and the joints between them shall be made tight with mortar or other means of preventing leakage. The use of internal metal ties shall not be allowed. (4) Type F.4
This finish is identical to Type F.3 except that internal metal ties are permitted.
20.2.6.18.2 (1) Type U.1
Uniformed Finishes to Concrete
This is a screeded finish for surfaces of roads or of foundations, beds, slabs and structural members to be covered by backfill, subsequent stages of construction, bonded concrete, topping or cement mortar beds to receive paving and on exposed surfaces or paving where superior finish is not required. It is also the first stage for finished Type U.2 and U.3. The finishing operations shall consist of levelling and screeding the concrete to produce a uniform plane or ridged surface, surplus concrete being struck off by straight edge immediately after compaction. (2) Type U.2
This is a floated finish for surfaces of beds and slabs to received mastic paving or block or tile paving where a hard smooth steel-trowel led surface is not required. Floating shall be done by hand or machine. Care shall be taken that the concrete is worked no more than is necessary to produce a uniform surface free from screed marks. (3) Type U.3
This is a hard smooth steel-trowel led finish for surfaces of concrete paving, topes of walls, exposed surfaces of engine and plant foundations and in the vicinity of holding down bolt chases, copings and other members exposed to weathering, surface bed and slabs to receive thin flexible sheet and tile paving bedded in adhesive and seatings for bearing plates and the like where the metal is in direct contact with the concrete. Troweling shall not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being worked to the surface. The surface shall be troweled under firm pressure and left free from trowel marks. 20.2.6.18.3 Surface Treatments
Where concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust preventive coating this must be carried out within 14 days of the Concreting of the foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 20.2.6.19 Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following: (1) (2) (3) (4) High Yield steel bars complying with BS 4449 (or 4482) or Hot rolled or cold deformed bars complying with BS 4449, or approved by the Employer. Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved. Bars greater than 32 mm diameter will not generally be used.
Reinforcement shall be stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of 0the bars. Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately. The Contractor shall supply the Employer with a certificate for each consignment from the steel manufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification. One tension test and one bond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tones of less supplied for the permanent Works. Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease, mortar earth, paint or any material which may impair the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement, or which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. Reinforcement may be bent on site, or alternatively off the site, by an approved method. The Contractor shall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. 0 0 Mild steel shall be bent at temperatures in the range 5 C to 100 C. High tensile steel shall only be heated or welded when the manufacturer given written guarantees as to its subsequent performance. The shapes of the bends and lengths must comply as specified on the Drawings and Bending Schedules as approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall provide any chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep the reinforcement in its correct position. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be less than that over the reinforcement generally. The Contractor shall provide adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operation.
Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas indicated on the approved drawings. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at least 300 mm. Loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential for fitting into small confined parts of the Works. Areas of fabric reinforcement shall be net with no allowance included for laps or waste. Fabric reinforcement shall be delivered to site only in flat sheets. Bends, cranks and other shapes of reinforcement shall be to the dimensions specified; otherwise all bars shall be truly straight. Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of at least four times the diameter of the bar. The bending dimensions shall comply with BS 4466 unless otherwise specified on the bending schedules. Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type approved by the Employer. They shall be rigid, inert and capable of supporting the reinforcement in its correct position with the required cover without deforming. They shall not impair the finish on the concrete no cause the formwork to deform locally. Steel templates shall be used to position the anchor bolts. Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 SWG soft pliable annealed steel wires. Immediately prior to Concreting all reinforcement shall be wire brushed to remove all wind-blown contaminates such as salt. Concrete cover to all reinforcement (including stirrups) shall be as specified in BS 8110 and BS 8004. In addition, the cover should never be less than the diameter of the main bar or nominal maximum size of the aggregate. The Employer shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement for testing in accordance with the relevant approved standard. The Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned bending Schedules giving the location and bending of every bar shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise stated on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will be dimensioned in accordance with the national or international standard to be approved by the Employer, e.g. British Standard 4466. 20.2.6.20 Foundation Bolts
The foundations bolts shall be mild steel or High strength steel of an approved manufacture and shall be fitted with tubes, washer plates, anchor angle, flats, double nuts etc. Drawing showing the foundation bolt arrangement shall be approved by the Employer and sent to site with the foundation bolt assemblies and template in good time for being built into the foundations. 20.2.6.21 Prevention of Corrosion below Ground
The Contractor is to ascertain whether or not the sub-strata contain any corrosive qualities, which will have a deleterious effect on reinforced concrete. If such conditions are evident, only an additive approved by the Employer is to be incorporated in the concrete mix in the proportions according to the manufacturers recommendations. 20.2.6.22 Grouting of structural steel works and plant
No grouting shall commence without the written approval of the Employer. At least 12 weeks before and grouting is due to commence, the Contractor shall submit full details to the Employer for his approval. Before plant grouting commences the Contractor shall check that the proposed methods and materials are acceptable, and that no special resin additives or similar are necessary. 20.2.6.23 Grout under Base Plates
Only non-shrink, non-gaseous grouts, which shall be either cementitious or epoxy grouts, may be used. Grouts deriving their non-shrink properties from metal oxidising (i.e. an increase in volume due to oxidation) shall not be allowed. Minimum compressive and flexural strengths of the non-shrink grouts shall be as follows:
Type of grout
Consistency
Compressive strength N/mm 7 days 28 days 65 >80
Flexural strength N/mm 7 days 8 25
28 days 10 >25
Cementitious Epoxy
Flowable High flow
45 80
Compressive strength shall be in accordance with BS 1881, Part 116 and BS 6319, Part 3 (epoxies), the cubes size shall be 100 mm, and the flexural strength shall be tested in accordance with BS 4551. On receiving confirmation from the Employer that the final alignment check has been completed, the Contractor shall complete the grouting under the steelwork and/or plant base plates, ensuring that the grout completely fills the space and that it is thoroughly compacted and free from air pockets. Grout or concrete shall be cured by covering with moist hessian for a period of five days. The hessian shall be wetted at least twice in each 24 hours. Exposed surfaces of grout and concrete beneath items of plant shall be prepared and given two coats of oil and alkali resistant coating. Grout or concrete shall not be placed when the air temperature or the 0 temperature of the concrete is lower than 5 C. Edge formwork shall be fixed around each base plate generally to the level of the top of the plate unless specified to the contrary by the Employer. The clearance space between the formwork and the base plate shall normally be 75 mm but exact clearance shall be decided on the site for each operation. On the site from which the grout is to be poured forms shall be at least 150 mm high in order to provide a head to placing. The exposed edge of the grout or concrete shall be chamfered or bull nosed with a steel trowel where so indicated on the drawings. The formwork shall to be struck without the approval of the Employer, and normally this will to be given within 24 hours of grouting. Any grouting that in the opinion of the Employer is defective shall be cut out and replaced at the Contractors expense. 20.2.6.24 Foundations and Piling Work
20.2.6.24.1 General Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to Specifications for Bored and Cast in Situ Reinforced Concrete Piles - first Edition April 1977 ( ICTAD Publication No.ICTAD/DEV/16 ), published by the Institution of Construction Training and Development (ICTAD) Sri Lanka. ( This publication can be purchased at the Institute located at Sawsiripaya, 123, Wijerama Mawatha, Colombo-07.) This Article applies to the foundation design/static analysis in view of necessary piling works. Piling works shall be based on the findings of the soil investigations and/or information given in writing by the Employer. Piles shall be designed for the required design loading (uplift, compression and horizontal loads) in line with the approved foundation design. Design work shall be certified by a qualified person(s) and information and calculations relevant shall be submitted for the approval of the Employer Earthwork as well as all concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be as specified under the relevant items. The static analysis/pile design shall normally be in accordance with DIN EN 1536, DIN 1045, 1054, 1055, 4014 and 4026, or BS 8004, BS 8110 and other applicable DIN or British Standard. 20.2.6.24.2 Materials
All materials to be used for the piling works shall meet the requirements as specified below. Cement to be used for concrete piles shall be selected according to the recommendations of the soil investigations report. Sulphate resistant Type Cement (SRC), or under certain conditions, 'Moderately Sulphate Resistant Cement' (MSRC-type II to ASTM-C150) based on the recommendations of the Geotechnical authority and approved by the Employer, shall be used. All cements are to be in accordance with either DIN 1164, DIN EN 196, BS or the American Standards ACI, ASTM C150.
20.2.6.24.3
Reinforcement
Only deformed high tensile steel shall be applied. 20.2.6.24.4 Execution of Work
Generally, cast-in-situ (bored) piles with temporary casing method as per DIN EN 1536, DIN 4014, DIN 1054, BS 2004 and BS 8004 will be permitted for execution. Immediately after drilling, the reinforcement has to be placed, ensuring a minimum concrete cover of 75 mm, and the pile has to be cast. Spacers to be used shall be of the concrete type only. Other materials shall only be used upon explicit approval of the Employer. 20.2.6.24.5 Drilling Operation
Where required, temporary casing pipes shall penetrate ahead of the removal of soil, likewise during drilling above the ground-water table. In the vicinity of underground water, additional water has to be filled up during the drilling. The hydrostatic head pressure shall be at least 1.0 m above the ground water table when filled boring tools are extracted. Casing shall extend to a sufficient depth below the stiff/solid strata to adequately seal off the unstable soil material. Casing pipes shall not be deepened by means of jetting. Immediately after the drilling, the reinforcement has to be placed, providing a concrete cover of 75 mm, and the pile has to be cast. Temporary casing shall be removed by vibration method. Other methods of casing removal shall not be permitted, except in some cases/piles, where casing removal by vibrator will affect the existing services/buildings. In such cases, the Employer may approve the rotation method for casing removal. Concreting is to be done through tremie-pipes or equivalent devices to prevent segregation. Concreting of each pile shall be a continuous operation and no (cold) joints shall be permitted. The continuous flow of concrete shall be ensured by using pumps or other suitable means to be approved by the Employer. Each pile shall be installed to the correct lengths as shown on the drawings or when the pile reaches the socket in the recommended bearing strata. Piles shall be installed accurately in their required locations. In vertical direction, piles shall not vary more than one (1) percent from the perpendicular. In plan, pile shall not deviate more than 75mm in any direction at piling platform level. The Bidder/Contractor shall submit to the Employer before start of piling works, a detailed description of the equipment, materials and procedures that will be used for the piling work. The description shall include equipment specifications, including catalogue data manufacturer's published specifications, loading capacities, protective devices, and test apparatus, detailed installation procedures test procedures, as well as references concerning previously completed piling work. Installation procedures shall be such that adjacent piles shall not heave or move laterally. All installation procedures shall be subject to the Employer 's approval. Permanently installed shells shall be cut off at the pile cut-off level. Daily records of each pile shall be produced by the Bidder/Contractor. The records shall give detailed information on the type, diameter, length, location, penetration into bearing strata, piling platform level related to zero level, date driven, date of casting volume of concrete consumed, depth from piling plat form level to toe, cut off level, top concrete level, length of temporary casing, length of permanent casing and details of any obstructions encountered. Records shall be submitted in duplicate to the Employer every following working day by 09 00 HRS. Each cast-in-situ pile shall be filled with quality concrete up to at least 60 cm above the cut-off level of the pile to allow for complete removal of slush and other foreign matters etc. from the main pile and thus obtain sound and uniform concrete. Pouring concrete into the pile shall be carried out using the tremie pipe method as well as the concrete pump. Pouring concrete into pile shall only be stopped once complete removal of slush and other foreign matter has been ensured, or as directed by the Employer. The heads of concrete piles shall be incorporated with in-situ concrete pile caps, etc. and the concrete in the head of the pile shall be carefully broken away from the reinforcement which shall then be cleaned
and straighten as shown on the Drawings or as directed. The pile shall be cut off at the specified level and the concrete surface must be horizontal, plane and free from all loose aggregate. The top portion of the pile reinforcement shall be protected with PVC pipes, polythene sheet wrapping or equivalent means to prevent damages to the epoxy coating of the reinforcement when trimming the pile heads. 20.2.6.24.6 Permanent Casings
For soils in areas classified as category 5 according to BRE Digest 363, permanent casings shall be provided. The permanent casing length shall be 2.0 m below ground surface. Should the ground water table be at 2.5 m below ground level, casing will be extended to become 3.0 m below finished ground surface. This procedure shall be applicable for areas not affected by tidal effects. For areas affected by tidal effects, casings shall project 0.5 m below the lowest water level anticipated. 20.2.6.24.7 Basics for Test Piles
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected. The results of the tests shall be submitted in a format for approval by the Employer. The following types of tests are to be considered: a) Piling Type Tests (Preliminary Pile Test) Prior to piling commencement the Bidder/Contractor shall install two test piles of each type of pile proposed. The piles shall be considered as acceptable in case the obtained load-settlement/heave- diagrams do not indicate movements beyond permissible limits as per Bidding Documents or the relevant Standards. Other (working) piles shall not be installed until the load tests have been conducted and the results evaluated. Type test piles shall not be utilised within the works and shall be treated in such a way that they do not obstruct the further works. b) Piling Foundation Routine Test (Working Pile Test) The Bidder/Contractor shall perform routine tests on at least 2% of the working piles, with a minimum of 2 tests for each pile type. 20.2.6.24.8 20.2.6.24.8.1 Loading Details for Pile Tests
The Bidder/Contractor shall execute the test piles using the same equipment, which he intends to use for execution of all the piles. The test piles should be of the same length and same type as the piles proposed for the project. Loads shall be applied in the direction of the resultant force acting on the pile. The loading tests of piles shall be in accordance with the procedure outlined in DIN 1054, DIN 4014 and DIN 4026 as well as ISSMFE recommendation on "Axial pile loading tests". Part 1, static loading. Type tests (preliminary pile tests) are to be loaded to either 250% of the anticipated design load, or to the ultimate bearing load. At least two load cycles have to be made during type testing, the first reaching from 0% to 100% and the second - after off-loading - to 250% of the design load. Load steps shall normally not exceed 25% of the design load. For routine tests (working pile tests) a loading to 150% of the design load is required. At least two load cycles have to be carried out, the first reaching from 0% to 100%, and the second - after off-loading to 150% of the design load. Load steps shall be worked out in line with the latest guide lines of the ICTAD, whereby following load steps/cycles shall normally be applied:
Table of Test Conditions OAD (%) 0 25 50 75 100 50 0 0 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 200 150 100 50 0 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 15 min 15 min 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 1 hr 24 hr 15 min 15 min 15 min 15 min 1 hr S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 S 0.25 OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING OFF LOADING TIME SETTLEMENT CONDITION
Vertical movements have to be measured by means of at least three dial gauges; horizontal movements have to be measured by two dial gauges only, with a precision of 1/100 mm. On every increment, settlements shall be recorded after 30", 2', 4', 8', 15', 30', 1h. Movement of the pile head shall be less than 0.25 mm within that hour, or until 2 hours have elapsed, whichever occurs first, before the application of the new load increment. 20.2.6.24.8.2 Test Reports
Reports on pile testing shall be submitted to the Employer and shall contain, among others, the following information: Layout of test equipment and description Pile identification, diameter and length Sketch of soil conditions and ground water location Complete records of level, load cell and dial gauge readings against date and time throughout the test, preferably in tabulation Graphs of load and settlement/heave versus time Graphs of settlement/heave versus load
Remarks concerning any unusual occurrences during the loading of the pile Test reports on integrity testing of piles shall include clear sample diagrams of acceptable signals for comparison purpose, as well as sample graphs indicating defects or doubts on the integrity of the pile.
th
Evaluation/Conclusion The settlement of preliminary piles shall not exceed 1/10 of the pile diameter after final test load is applied. In case, the pile shows higher settlement, the Bidder/Contractor must investigate the matter and accordingly, pile must be redesigned. Alternatively, the Bidder/Contractor may scale down the safe design load, and the pile layout shall be revised with the modified pile capacity. The settlement of Working Pile shall satisfy the following two conditions: Total settlement shall not exceed 12mm, and Residual settlement shall not exceed 6mm after final test load had been applied.
In case, the pile shows higher settlement, the Bidder/Contractor must revise the pile layout at that location and in addition, two more piles shall be selected and tested near the failed location. In case, the additional tests also do not show satisfactory results, safe design load shall be scaled down and accordingly, pile layout of the concerned area/ building shall be revised. 20.2.6.24.9 20.2.6.24.9.1 Driving of Piles
Pre-Cast Driven Piles
Driven piles shall be executed as per DIN 4026. Pile driving will not be allowed before the Employer receives from the Bidder/Contractor the following reports and calculations for approval: Calculation of refusal Proposal for the minimum penetrated depth of the piles through the ground Complete information about the driving and the hammers to be used.
Piles shall not be driven until the excavation has been completed to the grade required for footings or pile caps. Piles shall be driven in the exact locations shown on the drawings to be submitted by the Bidder/Contractor and approved by the Employer or as may be directed by the Employer. The Bidder/Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of location of each pile and the grade of the off-cut. Driving shall be done with fixed leads, which will hold the pile firmly in position and in axial alignment with the hammer. Driving tolerances shall not be more than one per cent out of plump and not more than 5 cm out of place. Driving of each pile shall be continuous without intermission until the pile has been driven to refusal or to total penetration for the last ten blows not exceeding the design penetration unless otherwise approved by the Employer. Any piles that are split, warped, buckled, damaged or imperfect in any way shall be removed and discarded. If any driven pile shall have been raised by the subsequent driving of any adjacent pile or by any cause, the raised pile shall be re-driven to its original penetration and resistance. The refusal shall be with HILEY formula or any other dynamic formula subject to the approval of the Employer. Debris from pile cut-offs and damaged piles shall not be buried in required fill under slabs at grade or in required embankments, but shall be disposed by the Bidder/Contractor off the Site of the work. A record of the driving of all piles shall be kept by the Bidder/Contractor, and a signed copy submitted to the Employer daily. The records shall show the pile type, length, location, penetration for driving stages and the results of any tests. After driving, the concrete heads of the piles are to be stripped off, to the elevation required, the binders removed, and the main reinforcement bent to form an anchorage into the concrete of the pile cap. Care must be taken in breaking out concrete that no damage is done to the lower section Driven Cast-In-Situ Piles Driven Cast-In -Situ Piles are created by driving a temporary tubular steel casing, closed by a removable steel shoe at its bottom end, to the required depth into the ground. The soil is thus both displaced and compacted and the void for the pile created. Reinforcing and concreting for the pile shall be done in line with the guidelines for cast in situ bored piles and the casing shall eventually be withdrawn.
20.2.6.24.9.2
Material Details
Casings shall be free from distortion and shall be strong enough to be driven without damage. Shoes to be used (and later remaining in the ground) shall be made from sufficiently strong and durable material. The shoe shall provide a watertight joint with the casing during driving. 20.2.6.24.9.3 Driving of Casings
Casings shall be driven at adequate spacing to prevent damages to piles, which have recently been cast and thus still contain un-set concrete. The length of driven piles shall be at least as per the design schedule. Any change in pile lengths shall immediately be brought to the Employer attention. Driving of each casing shall be a continuous, not interrupted operation. After unavoidable interruptions during driving, it has to be ensured that the casing is finally driven to the specified design depth and driving resistance. Sufficient information shall be provided on the efficiency and energy of the driving equipment. Dynamic evaluation and analysis shall be provided where requested by the Employer. Weight and fall of the hammer/ram and the number of blows for each 25 mm of penetration shall be recorded, as well as the "Set". Hammer blows shall only be applied along the line of the pile axis and the impact surface shall be perpendicular to the pile axis. 20.2.6.24.9.4 Set
Set limits shall be defined based on the working load, factor of safety soil condition and driving equipment. During measurement of the "set", exposed parts of the casing shall not be damaged or deformed and the dolly, helmet, etc., shall be in good condition. Set, i.e. the achieved penetration during driving and the temporary compression after completion of driving shall be measured and recorded for each pile. The set shall be recorded either as the number of blows resulting in a penetration of 25 mm or the penetration in millimetres achieved by imposing 10 blows. 20.2.6.24.9.5 Driving sequence and risen piles
The sequence of pile driving shall minimise any possible detrimental effect on other piles in the vicinity. The permissible uplift of any pile due to the driving of other piles shall be limited to 3 mm. Regular measurements (at least in weekly intervals) shall ensure that no adjacent piles have been effected detrimentally during piling work. If any pile has been displaced or indicates a higher than permissible uplift, load tests have to prove the design capacity of such piles. If the design capacity cannot be reached, the Bidder/Contractor shall propose remedial actions or design adjustments accordingly. Once the casing has been driven to the design depth, the reinforcement cage shall be installed. Reinforcement details shall be as for bored cast in situ piles. Concreting shall be facilitated by pump, flexible hose, tremie-pipe or by bucket, as per the approved method statement. Concrete quality and consistency shall be provided in line with guidelines for cast in situ piles. 20.2.6.24.9.6 Extraction of casing
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete within them remains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted. Vibrating casing extractors must only be used if their application has been accepted in the method statement. When the casing is being extracted, a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or soil is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated. Concrete shall be topped up as necessary while the casing is extracted until the required head of concrete to complete the pile in a sound and proper manner has been provided. No concrete is to be placed once the bottom of the casing has been lifted above the top of the concrete.
20.2.6.24.9.7
Basics for Pile Testing after Driving
The Bidder/Contractor shall carry out successful foundation load tests in order to prove the suitability of the pile foundation selected as detailed for bored piles above. The results of the tests shall be submitted for approval by the Employer. In addition, and after installation of the working piles, the integrity of all driven piles (100%) is to be checked successfully by means of sonic pile testing equipment. 20.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Approved earthed screens, shall be provided to protect the equipment from direct lightning strikes. The screens shall be of stranded hard drawn copper wires of not less than 35sq.mm total cross section, or stranded galvanised steel wires of not less than 7/3.5mm cross section and connected to provide low impedance paths to earth. The layout of the earth wires shall be such that generally, equipments to be protected lie within areas 0 bounded by lines drawn from the earth wire at 30 to the vertical in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the earth wire. Connections shall be made of copper strip of 30mm x 5mm cross-section between the overhead earthed screen wire and the main earthling system at each support. Earth wires shall be held in clamps with free, pin type joints between clamps and supports. Connections shall be provided for the terminations of the earth wires of the overhead lines including bimetal connectors where necessary. The necessary stays, fittings and anchors shall be provided under this Contract including, if required, flying stays and additional masts to ensure clearance of not less than 9144 mm (30 ft.) over roadways for breaker or transformer removal. 20.3.1 Lightning Protection for Buildings A complete lightning protection system for the buildings shall be constructed in compliance with BS 6651. An air termination network shall be installed on the surfaces of the roofs. No part of the roofs shall be further away than 10m from the nearest horizontal protective conductor. Salient points of the structure such as air conditioning installations, vent pipes railings, gutters, and steel constructions etc. shall be connected to the network. Down conductors shall be distributed around the outside walls of the building with a maximum distance of 20m and all main metal parts near the down conductors shall be connected there to. Each down conductor shall; be provided with test joints in such positions that periodic testing is easily possible. All connections and joints shall be installed mechanically and electrically effective (clamped, screwed or welded) to suit the local climatic conditions. For every building, at least, one ring of ground conductors shall be installed and interconnected. 20.3.2 Materials, Air terminations: Earth terminations: against corrosion Ground rods: Tinned copper 8mm diameter Copper 8mm diameter with lead coating minimum 1.2mm thick as protection Tinned copper weld or stainless steel 3000x30mm diameter
Potential equalizing bars: tinned copper 500x50x5mm All support and connections shall be made of best suitable materials. 20.3.2.1 Copper
Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved standard relevant to the form and use for which the material is intended. Copper components shall be placed so that neither in no case shall they come in direct contact with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or consideration to pass off copper on to aluminium.
20.4
WATER SUPPLY & DRAINAGE SYSTEM
20.4.1 Water supply system The Contractor will be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply serving the buildings. An overhead tank with a capacity of 2.0 cubic meters, shaded from direct sunlight shall be provided. A. space and ladder shall be provided for maintenance of overhead tank. Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to the relevant ICTAD specification. Water Supply and drainage system and the distribution network shall be designed by a qualified person and relevant drawings shall be submitted to the approval of the Employer The Contractor shall provide public water service An underground tank (2 m ) with proper insect tight venting & automatically controlled pump main stopcock shall be constructed to raise the water to a shaded roof tank Every tank or cistern shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fitting. Pipe to header tank shall not be less than 25 mm bore and pipes to wash basins and WCs shall be not less than 15 more bore. Every cistern, sink, basin etc., shall be provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fittings. Each basin and sink is to be provided with water. All drainage design, materials and workmanship shall be in accordance with approved standards and Codes of Practice. 20.4.2 Water Pipes PVC pipes shall generally be used throughout of an approved type. They shall be secured to the structure. Pipes to wash hand basins and WC cisterns shall be 15 mm bore and supply pipes to header tanks 25 mm bore. Plastic piping and fittings shall be permitted where adequately protected or where risk of impact is small. Overflow pipes shall be taken from the tops of cisterns and set to discharge in a prominent position. 20.4.3 Sanitary Fittings Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls or screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards, which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and lining soldered on, or alternatively, similar PVC fittings. Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards, which, shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall be 20 mm bore. Glazed ware shall be of best quality type and manufacturer shall be approved by the Employer. Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. Taps and all visible metal fittings shall be chromium plated, heavy-duty quality. Drinking fountain outlets shall be clearly labelled. All fittings shall be individually isolated with a stopcock in the water supply pipe. On completion of the works, all sanitary fittings shall be left in a clean and proper condition. After completion, drains shall be subjected to an air test, in which a pressure equal to 150 mm of water is to be applied for a period of five minutes without dropping below 125mm head. Any defects revealed shall be made good at the Contractors expense. 20.4.4 Waste Water Sewerage System 20.4.4.1 Drain Pipes
3
Drainpipes shall be PVC pipes and fittings of approved manufacture and shall be jointed with sleeves or sockets. PVC pipes provided should be black unplasticised PVC complying with BS 4660 or 5481, or equivalent standard. Concrete beds and casings to drain pipes under roads shall be of week concrete and of 150mm minimum thickness. Elsewhere the pipes and ducts shall be laid on and surrounded with approved granular material.
20.4.4.2
Manholes
Manholes shall be generally in accordance with BS EN 752. Galvanised malleable cast iron step irons are to be provided and built in as work proceeds. Manhole covers shall comply with BS EN 124 and in roadways or heavily loaded areas shall be heavy duty, area with non-vehicular access to be medium duty. 20.4.4.3 Septic Tank & soakage pit
The septic tank, where main drainage is not available, shall be constructed in an agreed position. The design shall be to recognised standards such as BS 6297 and approved by the Employer. The tank shall have separate fresh air inlet and outlet pipes and be provided with access openings. The effluent from the tank shall discharge, depending on the type of subsoil, to a soak away pit or either through evapour-transpiration beds or up flow filter, a soak away pit shall be covered by a concrete slab, with access through a manhole cover. In impermeable type soil, where a soak away will not function efficiently, either evapour-transpiration beds or uniflow filters shall be provided, for effluent disposal from the tank. The system shall be properly ventilated by continuing the soil pipe above the highest branch upwards above roof level. All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described. Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains. All drains shall be kept clear from earth, debris, superfluous cement and other obstructions during and after lying and shall be provided with eyes, inspection covers, etc. to ensure that every length can be rodded effectively in the event of a blockage.
20.4.4.4 20.4.4.4.1
Sewerage Treatment Plant General
It is required to treat the Black & Grey water from toilets and waste water from NSCC building to CEA Standards. Treatment Plant shall be designed to suit the average, maximum BOD & COD. Effluent from the treatment plant shall be discharged to the nearby Ela with the limits to comply with accepted standards. (i) Design, Supply and Install a suitable compact treatment plant for the treatment of the above Influent. A grease trap will be provided (by others) for the kitchen waste before discharging in to the collection system. The proposed system should be able to operate on both automatic & manual modes. The system should be such that the number of electrical pumps and other electrical equipment used should be a minimum to reduce power cost.
(ii) (iii)
(iv)
Running cost, maintenance cost and volume of sludge produced by the plant should be as low as possible. Maximum limits of standard of effluent discharge shall be complied with the standards specified by the National Environmental Protection Act of 1985 as amended by Act of 1988. The noise levels are required to be maintained as follows during the construction stage and operational stage. (a) At boundary of the land during the construction stage at or below 60 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 50dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs).
(v)
(vi)
(b) At boundary of the Premises during the operational stage at or below 55 dB(A) during the day (between 0600hrs to 1800hrs) and at or below 45dB(A) during night (between 1800hrs to 0600hrs). (vii) An Environmental Protection Licence shall require to be obtained for the proposed system to carry out operation in accordance with section 23(A) of the National Environmental Act No. 47 of 1980 and its amendments. The application for such Licence shall required to be submitted to the relevant Authority one month prior to commencement of the operation of the industry. (viii) The following details should be submitted along with the proposal (a) Design Assumptions and sufficient hydraulic calculations to demonstrate how the tank sizing was done. Give length, breadth and height, detention time, velocity etc. for each tank. Sizing of pumps with their characteristic curves indicating how the pumps were selected. Attach relevant catalogues. If aerators are used, the oxygenation capacity of the aerators and how they were selected should be indicated. Attached relevant catalogues. Annual estimated running cost including the breakdown of such cost. The bidder shall furnish the yearly cost of operation and maintenance of the plant and monitoring of plant performance for a period of 05 years after the free operation and maintenance period of one year. The yearly cost shall include the cost of chemicals, repairs and spare parts, labour cost of removal and disposal of sludge outside the premises at suitable location and any other incidental expenses. The Employer shall bear the cost of electricity, and water and provide accommodation to the Contractors operator. The bidder shall also furnish with the bid any other terms and condition applicable for the operation and maintenance of the plant for 5 years which shall be compatible with the requirement given above. (f) Method of Sludge disposal and this process shall require to be looked after by the people who will undertake the maintenance & operation. The details of previous experience of similar nature and testimonials from the respective Employers regarding their current performances. The Bidder shall indicate the modes of failure which are likely to take place under the environment in which the proposed works will perform including the performance under extreme events and how they have been taken into consideration in the design. In order to overcome an accidental failures additional equipment necessary for the continuously operation of the treatment plant should be kept as spare.
(b)
(c)
(d) (e)
(g)
(h)
20.4.4.4.2 The bidder shall give due consideration in pricing that the Client may at his discretion delete the scope of work for 5 years operation and maintenance work before or after the award of the Contract. 20.4.4.4.3
Guarantee
A minimum five years guarantee period for the equipment and maintenance of effluent quality from the plant to the required standard (after commissioning of the plant) is required. 20.4.4.4.4
Tests on Completion
The selected Contractor shall carryout all the required tests as directed by the Employer to obtain the approval of the relevant authorities before handing over of the plant to the client, normally provided for this nature of work. 20.4.5 20.4.5.1
Surface water drainage system

General
Embankments and cuttings shall have drainage facilities at their top or bottom. The formation level shall be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in 300 in the same direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding Area Provision shall be made for the disposal of surface water from roads. A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed. The system may be discharged to natural watercourses or to soak ways as approved. Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes connected with the site drainage system. The number of runs and out falls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest precipitation, with a factor of safety of 1.2. It is to be ensured by the contractor that the surface water discharge does not cause any damage to the properties through which such water is discharge up to natural water courses as approved. 20.4.5.2 Gradient
Drains shall have the following minimum gradient. Open ditch for storm water 1/200 Other drainage systems 1/400 The minimum velocity shall exceed 0.75 m/sec. The sectional shapes have to be determined by the water carrying requirements and must have the most favourable hydraulic qualities so as to remove the drain water in a proper manner without settlements. Manholes shall be provided at each place where changes in direction take place and at not greater than 80 m canters. 20.5 CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE OF ROADS
20.5.1 General The Contractor shall ensure that the roads are levelled graded, properly compacted with appropriate rollers, and surfaced with Macadam or concrete to ensure that the finished road is suitable for the maximum foreseeable imposed loads expected from vehicles transporting the various items of plant and electrical equipment. In detailing the layout of the roads and parking areas, special attention must be given to the travelling of vehicles delivering plant, stores, spares and other materials and equipment. Material for the hard-core shall consist of natural stone broken to pass a 100-mm ring. It shall be free from dust, rubbish, wood, vegetable or other injurious matter. Broken stones and aggregates shall consist of hard crushed natural stone or gravel of approved sizes. Bituminous Wearing courses shall be suitable for the extreme soil condition in the area and shall comply with an authoritative and approved standard appropriate to the locality of the work. The details and grading of the aggregate and the binder contents shall be submitted to the Employer for approval. Sealing grit will be applied as required.
20.5.2 Road carriage way 20.5.2.1 Preparation of Formation
The upper 300-mm of the formation shall be of suitable soil; otherwise the Contractor shall improve it to strength of greater than 15% CBR by blending it with granular materials such as gravel and sand. The formation shall be rolled to an even and uniform surface, which shall be parallel to the finished surface of the road or path. Rolling shall be carried out with a 4 to 7 ton power driven roller unless otherwise ordered or permitted by the Employer. 20.5.2.2 Sub-Base
After the formation has been properly made, rolled and approved by the Employer, a sub-base consisting of well graded natural sand, gravel or rock or mixtures thereof shall be laid in accordance with standards to give a finished thickness of at least 200 mm or as described or directed. 20.5.2.3 Prime Coat
2
For the prime coat 0.5 to 1.5 lit/m liquid bitumen shall be sprayed on in accordance with the best practice fitting to the locality of the work. 20.5.2.4 Bituminous Surface
Two layer of bituminous surfacing of 75 mm overall thickness shall be laid in accordance with the approved standard. 20.5.2.5 Roadsides
In-situ concrete kerbs or pre-cast concrete kerbs set on a concrete bed are to be laid on each side of the roads, to define the limits for vehicular access. All drains, sewers, cable ducts and other necessary work below road formation level shall be completed, inspected and passed by the Employer before any road work is started. Concrete paving slabs shall comply with a relevant approved standard. Trench covers shall be a minimum of 50 mm thick and provided with handles or holes for lifting purposes. They shall be reinforced to the approval of the Employer. The reinforcement shall be in the middle of the covers with 25mm cover to the edges. Trench covers shall comply with the relevant standard as approved. Where concrete covers are required for trenches crossing roads, these shall be designed for the heavy wheel loads expected on them and shall be reinforced with mesh fabric or mild steel bars as necessary. 20.5.3 Approach road The contractor shall construct or upgrade the approach to site that is the road from the main road to the gate of the site to allow heavy vehicles to site. The minimum flat form width shall be 7m and road shall surface with macadam or concrete. 20.5.3.1 Structures for approach roads.
Structures for approach roads (culverts, bridges retaining walls) shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the guide lines of the road development authority. 20.5.3.2 Access road and structures
Access roads are the roads within the switchyard area. Road shall properly graded, compacted and surfaced. Access roads shall be either concrete or bituminous wearing surface roads. The Contractors proposed site layouts shall allow for 5 m wide vehicular access to the control building and electrical equipment, for installation and subsequent maintenance. Roads shall be surfaced with concrete or macadam as approved by the Employer. All the cable trenches crossings canal crossings road side constructions shall be considered.
20.6
FENCE AND GATE
20.6.1 Chain link fence and Gate a) Chain Link Fencing Chain link fences shall be constructed of galvanised steel wire, in accordance with drawings and shall be of such manufacture that when any one segment is cut, remaining segments within the pattern retain their rigidity. The bottom of the fence shall be fixed down with staples to a continuous concrete sill, or to rocky ground, in accordance with BS 1722, Part 10. Steel wire for mesh and line wire shall comply with grade A of BS 4102. All mesh shall be of galvanised steel wire of 3.55 mm diameter.; with a length of side not exceeding 50 mm. Line wires shall be of galvanised steel wire of the same gauge to adequately support the mesh rigidly. Line wire shall be provided at the top and bottom of the mesh and at two evenly spaced intermediate levels. The line wires shall be strained tightly by eyebolt strainers or winders at each straining post and secured to intermediate posts of stirrup wires passed through holes in the posts. The top wire shall be doubled, Mesh and line wires shall comply with BS 4102. Chain link mesh shall be strained between straining posts by means of stretcher bars and tied to line wires in accordance with Clause 3.5 of BS 1722, Part 10. Straining posts and struts shall be of Galvanised steel to the same standard as above. The posts shall 0 be set in concrete in the ground. The posts shall have cranked tops set at 45 to the posts, to which shall be attached three strands of galvanised barbed wire to BS 4102. Barbed wires shall be strained between straining posts with eyebolts and fixed to intermediate posts with stirrup wires. Droppers shall be fitted at the centre of each Bay of the fence to prevent the wires being bunched together. Intermediate posts shall be provided at centres not exceeding 3 meters. Corner posts and struts shall be provided at all ends, corners, changes in direction, adjacent to gateposts and at intervals not exceeding 35 meters. All fence fittings shall be galvanised. b) Gates Gates shall be accordance with the drawings. The gates shall be fitted with a vertical drop bolt on each leaf, a sliding bar lock with padlock eyes and a padlock to prevent movement of the sliding bar lock. The padlocks shall be included in the overall locking system. All these fittings shall be galvanised. The vertical drop bolts are to drop into galvanised steel tubes cast into the road, to secure the gates when in both closed and open positions. Gateposts shall be made from galvanised steel RHS shall be capped and set in concrete in the ground. Gate hinges (pivots) shall be heavily galvanised. They shall comply with Clauses 2.8.5 and 2.8.6 of BS 1722, Part 10, or other approved details. 20.6.2 Galvanized Barbed wire fence & Gate a. Galvanized barbed wire fencing The straight spans are to be erected with intermediate posts which are spaced at 10 ft. centre to centre where the number of intermediate posts in a straight span exceeds ten (10) a strutted post shall be placed. Two corner Posts, supported with 02 strutted posts on either side of the spans shall be used in every corners. Barbed wire shall comply with the requirements of BS 4102.
b. Casting of the Posts Contractor may cast fence posts either at site itself, or at any other place convenient to him. Contractor has to inform the Employer the place he intends to cast the posts and shall allow. All the fence posts shall be cast as per the give drawing. Contractor shall maintain type F.3 finishes as per the specification given under concrete. The Employer shall approve the formwork and reinforcement before concreting. The contractor shall get approved the posts before transport to the site. No pole shall be erected before 28 days from the date of its casting
After the excavation of the foundation, post should be placed in it and aligned so that the straight portion of it is exactly vertical and outside face should be exactly in line with the other posts in the same span. Placing of concrete in the foundation shall be done only after the alignment of the Post/Posts are approved by the Employer. Each strand of barbed wire should be sent through the holes provided in the posts and struts, and tensioned by the turnbuckles. Turn Buckles shall be fully galvanized to the satisfaction of the Employer. Turn buckles shall be connected to each of barbed wire on both sides of each straining post and set of corner posts at each corner i.e. 22 Nos. of turn buckles for each straining post and each set (02) of corner posts. Each strand shall be adequately tensioned to the satisfaction of the Employer c. Gate A gate consisting of two sashes complete with gateposts & locks, bolts and other accessories as per Drawing shall be supplied and erected at the entrance to the land. The fence of the gate shall be terminated with two corner posts just adjacent to the gateposts, with suitable adjustments to the foundations of the two corner pots. Both sashes of the gate and all other accessories of it including bolts, locks & hinges shall be fully galvanized, to the satisfaction of the Employer. It is preferable if the gate sashes could be galvanized after the fabrication. However, if it is not possible, welding, cuts and any other form of connections done after the galvanizing The gateposts shall be concreted at site, as. Concrete used for posts should be grade 25 while that for foundations shall be Grade 10. Gateposts shall be plastered to a semi rough finish with cement mortar not less than 15mm thick, and applied with two coats of weather sealed paint of which, make and colour to be approved by the Employer. Galvanised barbed wire shall conform to BS 4102 or similar approved material. 20.7 MISCELLANEOUS WORK
All miscellaneous work shall be carried out according to the relevant clauses of this specification and in accordance with the relevant standards. 20.8 CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDINGS
20.8.1 General Items not covered in this specification shall be referred to the relevant specifications of ICTAD. The Contractor shall be required to produce full design calculations for the foundations, building structures, etc. and detailed working drawings and bending schedules, etc., certified by a qualified person in the field of work. He shall be responsible for the detailed design, strength and safety of the structures, to meet the structural, acoustic and environmental requirements of the buildings and other works. He will be responsible for ensuring that the design satisfies the requirements of all authorized local and national bodies. Design calculations and detailed drawings must be submitted to the Employer for approval before the relevant construction work is carried out and at least six weeks before the relevant drawing is required at site. Design calculations shall be in accordance with an approved method of computation and should take account of the most unfavourable combination of dead load, live load, and wind load. Live loads shall be in accordance with BS 6399. Wind loading shall be analysed in accordance with BS CP 3: Chapter V, Part 2. It is essential that no part of the ground floor or access routes to the building are liable to flooding even in the severest flooding conditions. The Contractor shall demonstrate how this is achieved during the detailed design stage. Civil engineering works and services shall be designed and constructed in accordance with British Standards or Sri Lanka Standards and Codes of Practices where BS is not available The Bid shall include a schedule of standards and codes to be followed in design and construction of the works. Copies of these codes and standards shall be made available to the Employer and Employer during the design and construction period on site, The Standards and/or Codes of Practice employed throughout the Works, where they do not conflict with the local by-laws.
As far as practicable the standards or codes adopted shall be consistent throughout any section of the works except in meeting superior specified requirements. The Contractor shall investigate the existence of any regulations and local by-laws governing the proposed works in Sri Lanka and he shall be deemed to fully comply with such requirements, which are effective 30 days prior to the date of Bid submission. The buildings are to be designed with ease of operation and maintenance as a major factor. Materials, workmanship and finishes must be of an appropriately high standard. In considering the various materials, details, construction methods, etc., The Bidder must investigate the availability, delivery and transportation to the sites of all materials, plant, labour, etc., to enable the program to be maintained. The new building shall have reinforced concrete frames, If the Bidder wishes to propose an alternative form of construction, any combination of reinforced concrete, structural steelworks, etc. will be considered, provided that the buildings are completely weatherproof and satisfy all other requirements of this specification. All walls and roofs shall be fully insulated, to produce maximum thermal transmittance 2 0 U. values of 1.14 (watts/m / c for walls and 0.57 for roofs. Architectural treatment of the new buildings shall be satisfied the requirement of relevant local authority or Urban Development Authority of Sri Lanka. 20.8.2 Fire criteria Non-combustible or fire-resistant components shall be used in the construction. To provide resistance to the collapse of the structure in the event of a fire, and also to avoid a fire occurring in one room to spread in to adjacent rooms all structural elements of the building shall have the following minimum fire resistance: Single Storied Structures; External walls and columns Internal walls and columns Roof Ceiling Three story building; External walls and columns Internal walls and columns Roof Ceiling 2 hrs 2 hrs Non-combustible 2 hr 1 hr 1 hr Non-combustible 1 hr
Doors and windows shall have a minimum fire resistance equal to the walls in which they are located. 20.8.3 Super structure (Structural frame & walls) Shall have reinforced concrete frames with walls of brickwork. 20.8.4 Brick work Brick work shall comply with chapter 6 of ICTAD Specifications for Building Works Volume 1 (ICTAD Publication No SCA/4 -Volume 1). 20.8.5 Lime Lime for mortar shall be hydrated grey-stone lime in accordance with BS 890 for hydrated calcium lime. The Contractor shall forward copies of Manufacturers certificates to the Employer, which in addition to certifying compliance with BS 890 shall give details of the type of lime. If lime is delivered as lime putty, the certificate shall state whether quicklime or hydrated lime was use in its manufacture. All lime shall be efficiently protected against deterioration during transport and whilst stored on site. Different types or brands of lime shall be stored separately in dry conditions in a manner that allows it to be used in the order of delivery.
When lime putty is to be used the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Employer of his arrangement for transport handling and storage. Precautions shall be taken to prevent contamination and drying out of lime putty stored on site. Lime putty made from hydrated lime (powder) should stand for at lest sixteen hours before use. 20.8.6 Lintels The brick work over all openings in walls shall be supported on reinforced concrete lintels All lintels shall be the same width as the block works into which they are being built. 20.8.7 Building in Frames Openings in masonry for doors, windows, air conditioning units ventilators and fans etc. shall be properly marked out and built in as the work proceeds with approved anchors. The fittings shall be propped and strutted where required. The back surface of timber fittings shall be coated with an approved timber preservative before fixing. The back surface of steel and galvanised fittings shall be coated with a bituminous paint before fixing. All fittings shall be bedded in 1:3 cement sand mortar 12 mm thick. 20.8.8 Cement, Brick work and Plaster When so described or directed internal surfaces of fair-faced brick plastered wall shall be prepared and painted with one coat of anti-suction primer, followed by one undercoat and one finishing coat of PVA based plastic emulsion paint. Exterior surfaces of fair faced block work walls and concrete columns at the new buildings shall be prepared and painted with two coats of an approved stone paint. All paint shall be of an approved type and suitable for its required purpose, with surface preparation and paint application being strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 20.8.9 Doors and Windows Doors and windows shall be as specified in the schedule of finishes. Particular attention must be given in the design of the buildings to fire prevention and safety of the personnel at all times. Access doors and escape doors shall be provided and fitted with panic bolts where necessary, so that operating and maintenance staff can always exit safely from the buildings in fire emergencies of any nature or location. Hydraulic door closures shall be fitted to all doors in air-conditioned areas. 20.8.10 Aluminium Windows and Doors Aluminium windows and doors shall be obtained form an approved manufacturer and of a type, design, colour and finish to be approved by the Employer. All opening windows shall be provided with integral fly-screens, which shall be removable for cleaning, and maintenance. Aluminium windows and door frames are to be formed of extruded aluminium sections to BS 1474 and of aluminium alloy type H9 or such other alloy approved by the Employer as being suitable for the climatic and atmospheric conditions prevailing at the Site. The construction of aluminium windows, including weather-stripping, hardware, etc., is to comply with the requirements of BS 4873 or other approved standard. Where possible, aluminium windows and doors shall be fixed after all structural and wet finishes are completed but in any case they shall be kept clean and protected from damage at all times. Splashes of cement, plaster, etc., which occur on the aluminium during the construction period shall be immediately cleaned off. Care shall be taken during dispatch and storage on site to prevent damage to the windows and doors. Allowance shall be made when fixing frames for expansion to aluminium members so as to prevent distortion of frames or cracking of glass. The perimeter of the frame shall be pointed with approved mastic. Aluminium doors shall be approved manufacturer and to be guaranteed against defects for 12 months.
20.8.11 Aluminium Patent Glazing The clauses above referring to approved type, finish, expansion, protection, etc., for aluminium windows shall also apply to patent glazing. The minimum patent glazing shall comprise extended aluminium bars of adequate section to suit the span required and incorporating such condensation channels, cord grooves, glazing rebates and continuous aluminium wings as may be necessary. Shoes or stops must be provided to prevent the glass sliding out. Glass shall be secured on the internal face against grassed asbestos cords in the performed channels and on the external face with continuous aluminium wings bolted through the bars. Approved proprietary trimming or sealing strips to be provided as necessary. 20.8.12 Other Materials Materials not herein fully specified and which may be offered for use in the Works shall be first class quality and of such kind as is generally used in first class work. The Employer shall have the right to determine whether all or any of the materials offered or delivered for use in the works are suitable for the purpose. External ferrous metalwork shall be galvanised. All plates and sections shall be true to form, free form twist and straightened before any fabrication work is started on them. Each piece of work shall be distinctly marked before dispatch accordance with a marking diagram to be provided by the Contractor. 20.8.13 Fire Resisting Steel Doors Where steel fire resisting doors are required they shall be fabricated from steel sheet covering a framework of angle sections. Steel doors shall be galvanised after fabrication. Doorframes shall also be galvanised steel all fire resistance doors shall be insulated and fitted with panic latches, which are lockable from outside. Steel doors shall be effectively sealed to reduce the leakage of heat ingress of dust as far as practicable using heavy duty seals which shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of five years from date of commissioning. Doors and seals shall be designed that replacement of worm seals can be achieved easily on site. Fire resisting doors, frames and furniture shall be of approved manufacture and satisfy the test requirements of BS 476 Part 8. 20.8.14 Timber Timber for carpenter or jointers work shall be hardwood of approved class 1 quality. All timber shall be subject to inspection by the Employer, piece by piece, both before and after finishing. The Contractor shall provide all necessary labour and facilities for the inspection of timber. 20.8.14.1 Preservative
Where appropriate, timber shall be treated with an approved preservative against rot or termite attack. The backs of frames to be fixed to walls and all other bedding surfaces shall be painted two coats preservative before fixing. All fixing blocks, pallets and other hidden timber shall be so treated prior to fixing. 20.8.14.2 Workmanship The quality of workmanship shall comply with BS 1186, Part 2. All carpenters work shall be left from the saw unless otherwise described or directed. All jointers work shall be wrought and finished with a clean, even, smooth surface. Any carpenters or jointers work which shrinks, splits, fractures, parts in the joints or shows any other defect shall be removed or replaced to the satisfaction of the Employer. 20.8.14.3 Timber Doors and windows
Doorframes shall be framed, rebated, rounded, moulded and grooved. The frames shall be fixed in by metal anchors, secured to timber pallets, nailed to grounds, or screwed and plugged to surrounds. Architraves shall be moulded and shaped and shall be greater in thickness than any skirting that abuts them. They shall not be installed until after the wall coverings have been formed. Flush doors shall be solid cored. Skeleton-framed flush doors will not be accepted but proprietary makes of cellular cored doors may be used if approved by the Employer.
Facings shall be either veneered or suitable for painting. Where hardwood veneers are used, these shall be specially selected and matched for figure of grain. All doors shall be limped and edged with hardwood strips. The core of solid core flush doors shall be of laminated timber strips laid alternatively with respect to grain. Alternatively, blackboard may be used. Particular attention shall be taken to select a timber for the core, which has a small ratio of movement with regard to moisture content. 20.8.14.4 Builders Ironmongery All necessary builders ironmongery shall be of patterns selected by the Employer from samples submitted by the Contractor. The selected items shall be provided and fixed by the Contractor in the best manner. 20.8.14.5 Pin Tumbler Cylinders
Pin tumbler cylinders shall be of a type approved by the Employer. The cylinders shall be made of brass and chromium plated. The lock manufacturer shall supply the cylinders required to comply with the locking system referred to below and shall supply the required special keys ready for use. The Contractor shall provide three keys for each individual lock and twelve master keys. All keys shall be labelled with the room number, building code or master key number, as appropriate, and shall be handed over to the Employer on completion of each building. 20.8.14.6 Door Closures
Door closures shall be of the overhead hydraulic type. They shall be of an approved type and provided with fine-adjusting facilities. The size of the door closer shall be relative to the weight of the door leaf and shall be approved by the Employer. 20.8.14.7 Door Fittings
All metal fittings such as hinges, locks, door handles, door bolts, etc. shall be made for heavy duty and mounted in adequate numbers. The brand of the selected fittings for doors shall be approved by the Employer. Sample shall be keep at site for future comparison. Hinges shall be of steel, brass or aluminium, with washers, selected appropriately. Where necessary, doorstoppers shall be provided. Cylinder mortise lock and. latch sets shall be fitted to all internal doors. Lever handles shall be fitted to both sides of internal doors. Panic latch sets with external cylinder locking shall be fitted to all single external doors and to one leaf of external double doors. These locks shall incorporate a finger pull or handle externally to facilitate opening. The other leaf of external double doors shall be fitted with internal bolts. Cylinder mortise lock and latch sets shall have a spring bolt operated by lever handles and a dead bolt operated by way. 20.8.14.8 Locking System
Door locks in the buildings on this Project shall be suited and master keyed to an overall locking system plan for doors and gates discussed and agreed with the Employer. Keys are to be supplied according to the agreed locking system plan and handed over to the Employer against receipt only. Written notice of this shall be given to the Employer, with one copy of all key receipts. 20.8.15 Glazing Glass used for control building and guardroom shall be wired cast clear sheet of 6 mm thickness, Glass shall be free from all defects, obtained from an approved manufacturer. Glass shall meet fire resistance of BS 476 part 22 for more than 60 minutes integrity .The Contractor shall show on his drawings the thickness of the glass proposed for the various locations. Obscured glass shall be roughcast; plain rolled or figured obscured glass. Glass used for Employers office shall be 5mm thick clear sheet. Glass in glazed internal doors shall be bedded in wash-leather. For external timber doors, approved genuine linseed oil putty shall be used. The edges of the glass shall be embedded in the back putty, and then secured by glaziers springs. The front putty shall stop 2 to 3 mm from the sight line of the back rebate, so that the paint can seal the edge of the putty to the glass without projecting. The surface
of the putty shall be painted within 28 days of glazing. No glazing shall commence until rebates have been painted with primer. Glazing compound for aluminium windows shall be generally of an approved polysulphide type. The glass shall be bedded against the frame on the external face with the compound and secured on the internal face with extruded aluminium bedding, screwed or clipped and studded to the frame in an approved manner so as to securely retain the glass. Glazing compound or an approved proprietary type of plastic trim shall be used where necessary to ensure a weatherproof seal. Allowance shall be made when fixing frames for expansion of aluminium members so as to prevent distortion of frames or cracking of glass. The perimeter of the frames shall be pointed with approved mastic. On completion of the works, all broken or cracked glass shall be replaced and all glass cleaned inside and outside, to the satisfaction of the Employer. 20.8.16 Trenches Building basement and cable trenches shall be waterproofed. A minimum of 1m width openings shall be provided in the falls bottom/cable basement etc. between Power Intake UPS Room, Battery Room, Communication Room, , and Switch Room, etc. to facilitate the cable running inside the building. In addition to this there should be sufficient space for cable entries (Power, Control & LVAC cables) between outdoor and Control Building depending on the cable sizes. 20.8.16.1 Indoor cable trenches
Indoor concrete lined cable trenches shall have reinforced concrete beams to support panels with openings to pass cables. 20.8.16.2 Checker Plate
Mild steel chequer plate (raised pattern) shall be fabricated from first grade mild steel with a minimum thickness over the plain portion of 6 mm. Weight of individual panels shall not exceed 60 kg. All mild steel chequer plate shall be galvanised after cutting to their required size. 20.8.17 Damp Proof Course (DPC) A damp proof course shall be laid in walls, above ground levels so as to exclude rising moisture. Damp-proof courses shall be from one of the following materials: (1) (2) (3) Lead and copper DPC complying with the requirements BS 6398. Asbestos base bitumen DPC complying with the requirements of BS 6398. Asbestos base lead cored bitumen DPC complying with the requirements of BS 743 Type F. Damp-Proof Membrane
20.8.17.1
Approved bitumen PVC waterproof membrane shall be placed on the blinding under concrete floor slabs, to exclude rising moisture. The membrane shall be taken up walls and lapped with the wall DPC. 20.8.18 Floor Finishes - General All floor finishes shall be protected from damage by following trades and other causes and any damage, howsoever caused, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expense to the satisfaction of the Employer. Floor finishes will be rejected if they prove to be defective, due to cracking, crazing, curling, uneven surfaces, or lack of adhesion. Rejected floors shall be replaced at the Contractors expense to the satisfaction of the Employer. 20.8.18.1 Screeded Beds
Concrete floors which are required to be surface with screed shall have a roughened surface, produced by hacking and wire brushing. The roughened concrete floor shall be clean, the surplus water shall be removing and: cement/sand grout shall be brush off. The screeded bed shall be 40 mm thick and shall be well compacted and levelled with a screeding board and steel towelled smooth. If the screed is the finished surface, it should be treated with an approved silicate of soda solution hardener to prevent dusting. The screed shall be mixed in the proportions of 1:2:4 (cement, sand, 10mm-pea shingle) by
volume with the minimum quantity of water necessary to given a good hard smooth, steel trowelled finish. The section concerning concrete applies, but the sand shall satisfy the requirements of BS 1199. Rigid screed battens shall be fixed on continuous beds of mortar to prevent movement when screed is being laid and compacted. The screed battens shall be fixed to true lines and levels. The bay sizes shall not exceed 15 square meters and the length of any one bay shall be limited to 1.5 times the width. The bays shall be laid alternatively, i.e. in chequer board fashion, a minimum of 24 hours being allowed to elapse between the laying of adjacent bays. The bays shall be separated by strips of hard plastic or other suitable material. Screeded beds shall be cured for at least seven days, using polythene sheeting or other approved methods. Glazed Ceramic Tiling The glazed ceramic wall and floor tiles shall be of nominal size 150mm x 150mm x 6mm and 300mm x 300mm x 6mm respectively. Colour and manufacturer shall be approved by the Employer. The ceramic tile fixing and grouting materials shall be obtained from the same source. The Contractor shall ensure that the rendering is accurately formed and has a true, plumb surface, which is free from all high spots and depressions. The floated coat shall consist of a 13 mm thick rendering of 1:1:6 mix by volume of Portland cement, lime and sand: it shall be finished with a wood float. The Contractor shall ensure that the floated coat is plumb and free from all unevenness. Sufficient time for complete drying shrinkage shall be allowed to elapse between the completion of the floated coat and the start of tiling. The work shall be properly wet out to the Employers satisfaction. The height of tile curses shall be set out properly by means of a tiling rod; all tiles and joints shall be accurately aligned both vertically and horizontally. Joints between the tiles shall be 2 mm wide. Continuous expansion joints shall be made at all internal wall angles. All tiles shall be dipped in water to ensure that they are completely clean prior to the application of the ceramic tile fix. All tiles shall be immersed in water in clean containers for at least half an hour before use. Tiles shall then be stacked lightly together on a clean surface to drain with the end tiles turned glaze outwards. They shall be fixed as soon as all surface water has gone - they must not be allowed to dry out more than this. The rendering backing for tiling shall be clean and will be wetted (just enough to prevent it from absorbing water from the fixing bed) immediately prior to tiling. The tiles shall be bedded in ceramic tile fix which shall be trowelled on to the wall with a plasters trowel having 6mm x 6mm notches at 25 mm centres: the tiles shall be tapped or pressed into position to a true plane. Approximately two days after the fixing of the tiles, all joints shall be pointed with neat grouting cement: the finish shall be flush and free from all voids and irregularities. All wall faces shall be finished plumb and flush throughout, free from unevenness and irregularities of plane: all angles shall be straight and true. The finished work shall be left clean and free from all materials; cleaning down must not be carried out with materials, which, will scratch or in any way impair the finished work. Final polishing shall be done with a dry cloth. The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequate protection of the tiling from all damage until the handing over. The Contractor at his own expense shall make any damage, which, occur, good. The whole of the work shall be left in a state satisfactory to the Employer. 20.8.18.2 Raised Modular Floors
Basement for raised modular floor shall be water proofed and should apply anti warming paint. Full access raised modular floors shall be comprised of 600mmx600mm panels, each and any of which may be easily removed to provide access to the area beneath. The panels shall be supported on adjustable props at 600mm centres. The props shall be of rust proof materials with a screw device to allow adjustment of level of not less than 119 mm. The heads of the props shall be such that no gapping or staggering can occur in the panel joints. The props shall fully support the floor panels without the necessity for intermediate members or stringers.
The panels shall be of galvanised steel with a core of special purpose high-density processed timber. The surface covering of the panels shall be PVC tiles complying with BS EN 649, edged on all four sides with carbon loaded rigid PVC lipping. Flexible PVC tiles will be preferred. The underside and edges of the panels shall be fire resistant and meeting the fire rating requirements of BS 6266. Panel lifting devices form the same manufacturer, as the flooring system shall be provided. The Complete system shall achieve a constant raised floor level within a tolerance 2.50mm in 12m. 20.8.19 Roof and ceiling All metals and metalwork components whether fabricated on or off site shall confirm to the requirements of the relevant British Standards or any other standards to the approved by the Employer. Metalwork articles shall have a good finish, and be free from scale, rust, damage or other defects. Components shall be properly assembled and jointed in a neat and functional manner. Welded connections shall be ground off as necessary to present a clean smooth finish without detriment to the strength of the connection. Particular attention shall be given to the protection of metalwork from degradation caused by the environment in which it is to be used. Galvanizing, surface coating or such other treatment suitable for the metalwork under consideration shall accomplish this.
20.8.19.1 20.8.19.1.1
Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheet Roofing Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheets
Zinc Aluminium Coated Profiled Steel Sheets shall be roll-formed from high tensile steel sheets to AS 1397- G 550 - AZ 150 or other approved international standard, Minimum yield stress 550 MPa and coating mass 150 g/m2. The sheeting shall have a baked paint coating of Epoxy primer/polyester paint or Epoxy primer/PVF2 paint on the top surface and Epoxy primer/polyester paint at the back surface. Base steel section shall be not less than 0.42 mm thick and total coated thickness not less than 0.47 mm. Type of profile selected shall be suitable for the internal and end support spacing and conform to the manufacturers printed literature. 20.8.19.1.2 Fixing Accessories
The sheeting shall be fixed to timber purlins using 12 x 50 mm Self-drilling hexagon washer head tap screws with neoprene washer and to steel purlins using 12 x 45 mm self drill thread forming hexagon washer head screw with neoprene washer. Fasteners shall be fixed on each rib on purlins at top, bottom and laps of sheets, and on every other rib on intermediate purlins. If insulation material is laid on purlins, the length of screws should be increased by 10 mm. 20.8.19.1.3 Other Accessories
Standard/non-standard Flashings, Ridge capping, Gable capping, Side Capping shall be provided in materials and finish to match sheeting specifications and conforming to manufacturers printed literature. However, the total coated thickness of flashing and capping material shall be not less than 0.60 mm. 20.8.19.1.4 Storage, Transport and Handling
Roofing sheets are normally delivered in strapped bundles which must not be allowed to get wet. If not required for immediate use, bundles should be stacked clear of the ground and, if left in the open, protected with waterproof covers. If bundles become wet, the sheets should be separated, wiped with a clean cloth and stacked so that air circulation completes the drying process. Long length bundles should be lifted using a spreader bar and fabric clings. To protect the surface, and for personal safety, roof sheeting should only be handled using clean, dry gloves. The sheets should not be dragged over rough surfaces of each other, nor should tools, etc. be dragged over the sheeting.
20.8.19.1.5
Workmanship a) Slope of Roof, Laps & Stop Ending
The slope of the roof shall be generally not less than 3. The slope of the roof shall however be not less than the minimum slope recommended in the manufacturers printed literature. The minimum end lap for roofs shall be 150 mm. End laps at roof pitches less than 5 should be seated effectively, either by riveting or using an approved sealant. Sheets should be stop ended, that is folded through approx. 60 at the ridge line of each length to prevent water entering, particularly on low pitch roofs. b) Installation of roofing sheets The installation of roofing sheets and other accessories should be carried out by the specialist manufacturer or under their strict supervision and direction. Before laying the roofing sheets it shall be checked that the roof framing is true to lines and levels. The specified protective coatings on the roof framing shall be completed before fixing of sheets is commenced. When cutting roofing sheets with a power saw care should be taken to protect the material. Whenever possible, cutting should be done on the ground and not over the coated materials. Sheets should be placed face down on padded supports to reduce damage to the surface caused by hot swarf. In power saws, metal cutting blades are preferred to carborandum discs as they produce fewer damaging hot metal particles and leave fewer burrs with no burnt edges on the cut sheets. c) Cleaning up Normal installation practices such as drilling, cutting etc. usually leave metallic swarf on or around the roof areas. This material and all other debris, including blind rivet shanks, nails, screws etc. should be swept away from the roof areas and gutters regularly, certainly at the end of each days work and particularly on completion of the installation. 20.8.19.1.6 Flashing
Unless otherwise specified, the junctions of all sloping roofs and walls are to be finished with No. 22 B.W.G. (0.71 m) galvanised iron sheet flashing, one edge dressed over the roof to a width of not less than 300 mm, the other edge turned up to a height not less than 150 mm and tucked into a chase cut in the wall and pointed in cement and sand 1:2. Lead flashing where specified shall be of milled lead sheets weighing not less than 24.4 kg. Per square meter, one edge dressed over the roof to a width of not less than 300 mm, the outer edge turned up to a height of not less than 150 mm and nailed to wooden plugs with copper nails. The upper edge shall be covered with an apron of the same material over-lapping it by 100 mm. The top edge of the apron to be tucked into a chase cut in wall 37 mm deep fixed with lead wedges and the joint finally filled with cement sand 1:2. 20.8.19.1.7 Aluminium Sheeting
Aluminium for profiled roof sheeting and flashing shall be manufactured from alloy in hard temper conforming to BS EN 485,515,573 NSW Specification not less than 0.7 mm thickness and with a colour coated surface finish. Profiled sheeting shall conform to BS CP 5427. Fastening shall be by means of aluminium hook bolts or other approved fixed in accordance with BS CP 143 Part and recommendations of the manufacturer. Laps shall be sealed as necessary. 20.8.19.1.8 Roof Insulation
Roof covering with Zn/Al Steel Sheets shall be with 0.47 mm TCT 0.762 m Cover Width on C purling (measured separately). The rate shall include for laying of 50 mm thick 16 Kg/m density glasswool blanket and 2 way Reinforced Single Sided Aluminium Foil for both sides, 3315 BRC mesh, 12 -14 x 68 HEX HEAD and any other accessories to complete the work as per the detail drawing and manufacturers specifications.
20.8.19.1.9
Costs for Roofing
The rate for roofing shall include the covering materials (sheets), steel or precast concrete framing. In case of steel framework, the steel purling including all trusses, beams and posts steel hips and steel valley rafters. 20.8.19.2 20.8.19.2.1 Gypsum board Ceiling P.V.C Laminated Gypsum Tiles Install on Standard Grid System
Gypsum ceiling panels shall conform to the following specifications: Class - 1, with the highest rating in terms of fire resistance as per BS-476: Part 7:1971. Natural Gypsum (CaSO4 2H_O) containing 21% chemically combined water in Crystal Form with 79% calcium sulphate. Size - 9 mm thick 600 x 600 mm (Calcium Sulphate) 20.8.19.2.2 Grid System
The ceiling will be suspended using a T bar system at 600 x 600 mmc/c, the main T bar dimensions will be 24 mm width, 38 mm height, cross T 24 mm width, 25 mm height and of 0.4 mm gauge. The T bar is manufactured of hot dip galvanized steel. The wall angle will be painted white, steel of size 20 mm x 20 mm. The complete suspension system will be supporting the ceiling assembly with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span. The suspension system will be hung from the soffit above using adjusting clips and 4 mm dia galvanized hanger rods. 20.9 FINISHES AND FITTINGS
20.9.1 Wall and ceiling finishes 20.9.1.1 Generally
All internal plastering shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5492 and external rendering with BS 5262. All proprietary brands of plaster or rendering materials shall be selected and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions regarding the different purposes and backgrounds for which they are intended. Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturers instructions regarding the time allowed to elapse between mixing and using. The plastering shall be carried out by persons experienced in this type of work and the whole of the work shall be finished to a true and even surface, free from all defects. Any cracks or other defects shall be cut out and made good. 20.9.1.2 Workmanship
Backgrounds for plasterwork or rendering shall be prepared by carefully brushing to remove dust and other adherent particles of any other material likely to impair the bond of the undercoat with the structure. If undue suction occurs on the background surface, this shall be sprinkled with water to prevent drying the applied plaster. Joints of block work, which is to be plastered or rendered, shall be raked out to a depth of 13 mm. Joints shall be introduced in plastered and rendered surfaces over all movement joints. Such joints shall be formed by inserting casing beds, plaster stops, etc., arranged one on each side of the joint, with the gap between them filled with a suitable mastic sealing material and covered with a metal astral strip. Plaster/render stops and angle beads shall be expanded metal and provided at corners, movement joints doorways, lower edge of rendering etc., all in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
20.9.1.3
Materials
Cement, sand, hydrated lime, gypsum plaster, galvanised expanded metal lathing, flat headed galvanised nails, galvanised staples and wires shall all comply with relevant British Standards and approved standards. Materials shall be carefully stored in a dry weatherproof store until required for use. 20.9.1.3.1 Interaction of Materials
In no circumstances shall cement be used in the same mix as gypsum plaster, nor shall the two materials be allowed to contaminate each other. Any materials inadvertently contaminated shall be rejected from the site. 20.9.1.3.2 Plasterwork
Care shall be taken in the selection of the type and strength of plaster mixes, to ensure that undercoats and finishing coats are compatible with each other and with the background, in order that bond failure, shrinkage and thermal cracking, etc. are minimised. Mixes may be based on cement or on gypsum. The first undercoat shall not be stronger than the background and each subsequent coat shall to be stronger than the previous coat. The total thickness of plasterwork shall not be less than 15 mm. Non-hydraulic or semi-hydraulic limes conforming to BS 890 shall be used in these mixes. Cement -based undercoats shall consist of Portland Cement, hydrated lime and sand to BS 1199, gauged in the proportions 1:1:6. The undercoats shall be keyed to take the subsequent coat and allowed to dry out completely before the latter is applied, but rapid drying must be avoided. Finishing coats for use on cement-based undercoats shall be the same mix proportions as the undercoats and shall be finished to a smooth, true and even surface. Gypsum based undercoats shall use retarded semi-hydrate gypsum plaster to BS 1191, Part 1, Class B, mixed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Each undercoat shall be 6 mm thick. The second under coat shall be applied immediately the first coat has hardened and will produce adequate suction. Gypsum finishing coats shall be gypsum to BS 1191, Part 1, Class B, mixed with clean water and used neat or mixed with up to 1/4 part lime and 1 part sand, all in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions, to thickness of 4 mm. Other plaster mixes will be considered by the Employer, but must be confirmed by the manufacturer as suitable for the background intended. External Rendering Where walls are to be rendered externally, the concrete frame shall be proud of the block work panel walls. External rendering shall be applied in two coats, with an approved waterproof agent added to the mixes. The walls shall be wetted before the application of the first coat, which shall be finished flat and vertical by straightedge, and scored to form a key. The second coat shall not be applied until the first coat has dried out completely. Immediately before application of the second coat, the surface of the first coat shall be wetted, and the second coat shall be applied by an approved method, to give a textured finish of uniform thickness. An approved plasticiser may be used in both coats. All external rendering shall be protected from rain and direct sunlight for a period of 7 days. Where backgrounds for plastering or rendering are different material, the joint between them shall be covered where necessary with a strip of building paper under expanded metal lathing, overlapping the joint by a minimum of 150 mm. Where the lathing crosses concrete columns between block work panels, the complete column widths should be bridged by the building paper under the lathing, which should then be fixed to the block work only, on each side of the columns. Expanded metal lathing shall be cut, fixed and jointed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Fixing shall be generally at intervals not exceeding 300 mm. Sheets of lathing shall overlap at least 25 mm at side and ends and wired together at 100mm intervals, using galvanised wire. After fixing, all cut edges and damaged nail heads etc. shall be painted with bitumen oil paint. 20.9.1.4 Hand railing
Hand railing shall be a 50mm diameter steel pipe and uprights shall be 50 mm x 50 mm mild steel angles. Handrails and uprights shall be galvanised and painted.
20.9.2 Painting All work shall be properly cleaned and rubbed down between each coat in a way, and using materials, recommended by the manufacturers of the paint concerned. No coat shall be commenced until the Employer has passed the previous coat as dry, hard and satisfactory. Each coat shall be of the distinct colour from the proceeding one and all colours shall be approve by the Employer. All paint shall be applied in accordance with the makers recommendations and shall not contain more than a minimum quantity of thinners or disperses necessary to permit the satisfactory application of the paint. Spray painting will not be permitted except for internal faces of walls and ceiling. All other paint shall be thoroughly brushed into and completely cover the surface. Ironmongery shall be removed before painting and refixed when the paint is dry. At the completion of all works, the Contractor shall clean down the premises; wash paving and steps; wash and leather down wall tiling, etc., clean all sanitary fittings; touch up paint work; examine all roofs and leave watertight; clean out all pipes and leave the whole of the premises in a clean, sound and perfect condition ready for immediate occupation. 20.9.2.1 20.9.2.1.1 Painting on Metal Surfaces General
This article cover, besides the painting of work fabricated at site, also repair painting have damaged surfaces originally corrosion protected at the manufacturers premises. 20.9.2.1.2 Pre-treatment and Paint System
All surfaces shall be carefully dried and cleaned prior to painting; in particular, removal of all foreign matters such as salt, grease, dust, sand, dirt, and rust (if applicable) is of utmost importance. On all metal surfaces of ferrous or non-ferrous material 3 coats shall be applied as follows; One-pack adequate primer, dry film thickness approximately 20 micron Intermediate coat, based on medium oil alkyd resin, dry film thickness minimum 40 microns Final coat based on medium oil alkyd resign (minimum 50% fatty acids), dry film thickness 40 microns.
Painting at Manufacturers Premises All metal surfaces such as for switchgear, cubicles and panels, structures and supports, casings, enclosures, frames and sub-frames, etc. i.e. all equipment or parts thereof incorporated in the work, shall be chemically pre-treated: Steel: zinc-phosphate Aluminium: chromating Other materials: adequately treated followed by a coating system (preferably powder coating)
The applied dry film thickness shall not be less than 100 microns, and shall be of an approved quality of anticorrosion paint. Extra amounts of paint sufficient for all repairs shall be made available and shall be applied to all surfaces after erection and before commissioning of equipment, if so required. The final coat shall preferably or as directed or approved otherwise by the Employer. In any case, at an early stage the Contractor shall explain in great detail all corrosion protection measures he intends to take, indicate the relevant standards for testing the applied measures, and apply for the Employers approval of the above-mentioned steps. 20.9.2.2 Paints and Other Materials
Paints for priming, undercoating and finishing shall be ready mixed paints of the best quality for the intended use and comply with BS 6150. All paints shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer who shall certify that the paint is suitable for the intended purpose. Paint for use on concrete or block work shall be of a type specially prepared for this purpose. Linseed oil should be best quality refined raw or boiled linseed oil. Turpentine shall be best quality. No substitutes shall be used unless approved by the Employer. Knotting shall be of the best quality to BS 1336, consisting of shellac dissolved in methylated spirits, and shall be free from resign and naphtha. Stopping shall be hard patent white lead
stopping, composed of one part white lead and two parts linseed oil putty with the addition of a small quantity of gold size. 20.9.2.3 Woodwork
Woodwork shall be given two priming coats and one under coat on the concealed surfaces. All woodwork shall have knots treated with two coats of a knotting solution and then painted with aluminium priming paint prior to priming the complete surface. The wood shall then be primed, stopped and painted with two undercoats and one high gloss-finishing coat. Hard wood which, is not required to be painted shall be made perfectly smooth, prepared and oiled twice with linseed oil. Alternatively, it shall be stained and wax polished, or treated with two coats of an approved varnish. 20.9.2.4 Iron and Steel works (Except Structural Steelworks)
All surfaces shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned of all loose scale, rust and grease before painting is commenced. Iron and steelworks which is to be built into or against block work masonry or concrete shall be painted with two coats of black Bitumastic paint. All other iron or steelworks, except galvanised metal, shall be painted with two priming coats, two undercoats and one finishing coat. One coat of primer shall normally be applied at the manufacturers works. Galvanised metal which, is to be painted shall be treated with mordant. Solution and primed with one coat calcium plumbate primer, followed by one undercoat and one finishing coat of oleo-resinous paint. 20.9.2.5 Bitumastic Painted Surfaces and Coated Pipes
Bitumastic painted surfaces and coated pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove grease, dirt or there deleterious matter, and then painted with one coat of sealer, one coat of leafing aluminium, one coat of undercoating paint and one coat of high gloss finish. 20.9.2.6 Copper Surfaces
Copper surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned with white spirit and then painted with two coats of undercoat and one of high gloss finish. All timber required to be built into, bedded or fixed against brickwork, masonry or concrete. 20.9.3 Waterproofing of Concrete Slabs & Masonry Walls in Toilet Areas 20.9.3.1 General
Waterproofing shall be carried out in specified area of the concrete floor slab and upto 300mm above the finished floor level on thinly plastered masonry walls in toilet areas. 20.9.3.2 Description of Work
a) The floor slab shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned to be free of dirt, loose mortar particles, paints, films etc. and should be dry and at least 28 days old. b) The waterproofing membrane shall be applied on the dampened surface in conformity with the waterproofing material Supplier/Manufactures printed literature and under the direction of the Supplier/Manufactures Representative c) After the waterproofing membrane is sufficiently cured the relevant area shall be ponded with water for at least 3 days for observation of leaks. If any leaks are observed the application of the membrane shall be repeated. d) If no leaks or dampness is observed in the slabs, or walls, floor tiling or other finish should follow as soon as possible thereafter, taking care not to disturb or damage the membrane in any way. 20.9.3.3 Materials
Materials used shall be a 2 part polymer cement waterproofing slurry (Master Builders Technologys Barralastic or equivalent approved) to 1.5mm thickness with adequate flexibility and sound bond properties.
20.9.3.4
Execution
a. Surface Preparation Surface to be coated shall be structurally sound, even semi-smooth finish and free of dirt, loose mortar, particles, pain, films protective coatings, efflorescence, laitance etc, Concrete/Cement Screed to receive the application shall be carefully formed to provide an even surface free from marks and in a condition to receive the coating to manufactures printed literature. b. Application Apply all materials under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers representative and conforming to the Manufacturers Printed literature. 20.9.3.5 Certificate Warranty
The Contractor shall submit prior to acceptance of the work, written certificate starting that all materials and workmanship in connection with specified work have been furnished and installed in complete conformance with these specifications, and with the approved manufacturers requirement for this work. The Contractor shall jointly with the Manufacturer/Supplier of the specialist water proofing materials furnish a warranty to the Employer valid for a period of 10 years after handing over of the works, against dampness and/or moisture penetration through treated surfaces due to defective material and/or defective workmanship. The warranty shall provide not only the materials necessary to remedy a problem but also the labour and equipment to apply the material. 20.9.4 Waterproofing of water retaining Structures 20.9.4.1 General
Waterproofing shall be carried out on the inner face of the tank 20.9.4.2 Description of work
a) The areas to be water proofed shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned to be free of dust, loose mortar particles, paint, films etc. And should be dry and at least 28 days. b) All curing compounds must be removed prior to application. c) The waterproofing solution shall be applied on the surface in conformity with the water proofing material Suppliers/manufacturers specification under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers specification under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers representative. d) After the specified period of curing, the relevant area shall be ponded with water for at least 3 days for observation of leaks. Application to be repeated if any leaks are observed. e) If no leaks or dampness is observed in the slabs, or walls, floor tiling or other finish should follow taking care not to disturb the top surface of water proofing. 20.9.4.3 Materials
Material used shall be a cementious coating or a solution containing non toxic catalytic chemicals which migrate into the concrete using moisture present in the concrete as the migrating medium and which cause the moisture and the unhydrated cement in the concrete [free Calcium] to react causing the growth of non-soluble crystals of dendritic fibers or a calcium silicate hydrated gel in yhe voids and capillary tracks of the concrete that allow passage of water, thereby rendering the concrete it self water proofing.
20.9.4.4
Execution
a) Surface Preparation Surface to be coated shall be structurally sound, even semi-smooth finish and free of dirt, loose mortar, paint films protective coatings, efflorescence, laitance etc. Concrete/Cement Screed to receive the application shall be carefully formed to provide an even surface free from marks and in a condition to receive the coating to manufactures printed literature. Mortar fillets shall be constructed at slab/wall intersections. b) Application Apply all materials under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers representative and conforming to the manufacturers printed literature. 20.9.4.5 Certificate Warranty
The Contractor shall submit prior to acceptance of the work, written certificate starting that all materials and workmanship in connection with specified work have been furnished and installed in complete conformance with these specifications, and with the approved manufacturers requirement for this work. The Contractor shall jointly with the Manufacturer/Supplier of the specialist water proofing materials furnish a warranty to the Employer valid for a period of 10 years after handing over of the works, against dampness and/or moisture penetration through treated surfaces due to defective material and/or defective workmanship. The warranty shall provide not only the materials necessary to remedy a problem but also the labour and equipment to apply the material. 20.9.5 Waterproofing of Concrete Roofs 20.9.5.1 General
Waterproofing shall be carried out in specified areas of concrete roof slabs 20.9.5.2 Description of work
a) The areas of roof slab to be water proofed shall be thoroughly washed and cleaned to be free of dust, loose mortar particles, paint, films etc. And should be dry and at least 28 days. b) All curing compounds must be removed prior to application. c) The waterproofing solution shall be applied on the surface in conformity with the water proofing material Suppliers/manufacturers specification under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers specification under the direction of the Suppliers/Manufacturers representative. d) After the specified period of curing, the relevant area shall be ponded with water for at least 3 days for observation of leaks. Application to be repeated if any leaks are observed. e) If no leaks or dampness is observed in the slabs, or walls, floor tiling or other finish should follow taking care not to disturb the top surface of water proofing. 20.9.5.3 Materials
a. The waterproofing Materials The waterproofing solution shall be a non toxic, clear material which will penetrate into concrete and react with free calcium and water in concrete at ambient temperatures. The solution from a non water soluble calcium silicate hydrate gel complex which shall seal pores, capillaries and cracks upto 2.0mm width. b. Thermal Insulation Thermal Insulation shall consists of extruded polystyrene moulded roofing board with self interlocking 3 system, self extinguishing grade, density 32-35 kg/m , 25 mm thick.
20.9.5.4
Certificate Warranty
The Contractor shall submit prior to acceptance of the work, written certificate starting that all materials and workmanship in connection with specified work have been furnished and installed in complete conformance with these specifications, and with the approved manufacturers requirement for this work. The Contractor shall jointly with the Manufacturer/Supplier of the specialist water proofing materials furnish a warranty to the Employer valid for a period of 10 years after handing over of the works, against dampness and/or moisture penetration through treated surfaces due to defective material and/or defective workmanship. The warranty shall provide not only the materials necessary to remedy a problem but also the labour and equipment to apply the material. 20.9.6 Internal Finishes Internal finishes shall generally be in accordance with the following tables. The exact finishes and materials shall be agrees during the detailed design stage.
Revision 0
Table 20.9.1a Description Floor Walls Ceiling Control Room Raised modular anti static tiles. Emulsion painted Suspended dust free Fire proof wood with panic latches Equipment Room Raised modular anti static tiles. Emulsion painted Suspended dust free Fire proof wood with panic latches Tiled Offices
- Internal Finishes
Workshop & Store Tiled Emulsion painted Suspended dust free Other Areas (Reception, Rest Rooms etc) Tiled Emulsion painted Suspended dust free Tiled Emulsion painted Suspended dust free Toilets
Emulsion painted Suspended dust free
Doors
Aluminium or wood
Aluminium or wood
Aluminium or wood
Aluminium or wood
Windows
Aluminium with 6mm clear wired glazed shutters with curtain and solar lamination
Aluminium with 6mm clear wired glass shutters with curtain solar lamination
Aluminium with 6mm clear wire glass shutters with curtain solar lamination
Aluminium with 6mm clear wired glass shutters with curtain solar lamination
Aluminium with 6mm clear wire glass shutters with curtain solar lamination AC & Ventilation/Extractor Fans
AC & Ventilation
AC
AC & Ventilation
AC
AC & Ventilation
AC
Revision 0
Table 20.9.1b - Internal Finishes

Description Floor Intake & UPS Rooms Cement rendered painted with floor painted Emulsion painted Concrete Battery Room Cement rendered painted with anti acidic/alkaline floor painted Anti acidic/alkaline painted Concrete Diesel Room Cement rendered painted with floor painted Emulsion painted Concrete Tiled Kitchens Tiled Veranda Guard Room Tiled
Walls Ceiling
Emulsion painted Suspended dust free
Emulsion painted
Emulsion painted Concrete
Doors
Fire proof steel with panic latches
Aluminium or wood
Aluminium or wood
Asbestos with insulation
Windows
Aluminium with 6mm clear wired glazed shutters with curtain and solar lamination AC & Ventilation/Extractor Fans
Aluminium with 6mm clear wired glass shutters with curtain solar lamination AC & Ventilation/Extractor Fans
Aluminium with 6mm clear wire glass shutters with curtain solar lamination
Aluminium with 6mm clear wire glass shutters with curtain solar lamination Timber with glazed shutters
AC & Ventilation
AC & Ventilation
AC & Ventilation
AC & Ventilation
20.10
OTHER STRUCTURES
20.10.1 Site office Site office shall be either temporary or permanent as requested in scope of work. Contractor shall provide all services, fittings and shall maintain it until the date of handing over the project. The site office 2 shall have a minimum floor area of 40m . This site office shall be erected immediately as the Contractor commences operations on the site in a position as directed by the Employer. The office shall provide for all the services (e.g. Water, Electricity, Air conditioning, Broadband internet and Telephone, pantry and sanitary facilities) to the satisfaction of the Employer. Service connections shall be provided for all the facilities by the Contractor. Toilets shall be draining to a suitably sized septic tank with overflow to an enclosed soak away. The office shall have a damp-proof floor and be provided with lockable doors and windows as appropriate and a roof with adequate insulation. The maintenance of site office including cleaning and security services shall be provided by the contractor to the Employers satisfaction. The services and maintenance shall be provided until the taking over date of the work. Contractor shall also provide two executive tables, four chairs, two cupboards, one conference table with eight chairs and all necessary equipment (pantry cupboard with kitchen sink, dining table and 4 chairs) for the pantry. 20.10.2 Temporary Works The Contractors site offices, stores etc., shall be temporary structures. The contractor should demolish it and clear the site as directed by the Employer. Any temporary approach or access roads, Drainages or any other temporary structure required by the contractor for the successful completion of the work shall include under this item, 20.10.3 House for Diesel Generator The housing for the diesel generator shall be a permanent structure designed to meet the building and planning requirements stipulated in this specification document and the diesel generator manufacturers recommended requirements and to be complementary in appearance to the Control Centre building. The structure shall be above the severest flooding level so that the diesel generator will be available to run in the worst predictable flood conditions. 20.10.4 Car parking Covered car parking shall be provided as indicated on the specification drawings. The construction shall be Zinc Aluminium roof supported on permanent steel or concrete structural framework. 20.10.5 Guard House A guard house shall be constructed at the entrance to the site. It shall be a permanent structure design in accordance with the requirements of this specification document and complementary in appearance to the Control Centre building.
20.10.6 Gabion Wall 20.10.6.1 General
This specification covers gabions and gabion mattresses produced from metallic coated welded wire fabric, and metallic coated wire for spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners used to assemble the product. The metallic coated fabric may be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated after fabrication. The spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners may be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated after metallic coating.Polyvinyl chloride hereinafter will be designated as PVC. Welded wire fabric for gabions and gabion mattresses is produced in five styles, based on kind of coating, as described in Section 20.10.6.4.
The values stated in inch-pound units are regarded as the standard. The SI values shown in parentheses are provided for information purposes only. The text of this standard references notes and footnotes which provide explanatory material. These notes and footnotes (excluding those in tables and figures) shall not be considered as requirements of the standard. 20.10.6.2 Referenced Documents
ASTM A 90/A 90 M Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coating ASTM A 185 -Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 370 - Mechanical Testing of Steel Products ASTM A 428 - Test Method for Weight of Coating on Aluminum Coated Iron and Steel Articles ASTM A 641 - Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ASTM A 809 - Specification for Aluminum Coated (Aluminized) Steel Wire ASTM A 853 - Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use ASTM A 856/A - Specification for Zinc-5% Aluminum-Mischmetal Alloy-Coated Carbon Steel 856M Wire ASTM A 902- Terminology Relating to Metallic Coated Steel Products ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Apparatus ASTM D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D 746 Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact ASTM D 792 Test Method for Specific Gravity (Relative Density) and Density of Plastics by Displacement ASTM D 1242 - Test Methods for Resistance of Plastic Materials to Abrasion ASTM D 1499 - Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With Type) for Exposure of Plastics Practice ASTM D 2240 - Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness
ASTM G 23 - Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials 20.10.6.3 Terminology
20.10.6.3.1 Definitions - Refer to Terminology A 902 for general terminology relating to metalliccoated steel products.
20.10.6.3.2 a)
Descriptions of Terms Specific to this Standard:
gabion, na wire fabric container, uniformly partitioned, of variable size, interconnected with other similar containers and filled with stone at the site of use, to form flexible,permeable, monolithic structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings,revetments, and weirs for erosion control. (Figure 1-TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008). Typical gabion sizes are shown in Table 2.
b) gabion mattress, na gabion with relatively small height in relation to the lateral dimensions, generally used for lining channels. (Figure 2 -TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008). Typical gabion mattress sizes are shown in Table 3 below. c) lacing wire, nfor gabions and gabion mattresses, a metallic coated steel wire or metallic coated steel wire with PVC coating used to assemble and interconnect empty gabion units, and to close and secure stone filled units, used as an alternate to spiral binders. spiral binder, nfor gabions and gabion mattresses, a length of metallic coated steel wire or metallic coated steel wire with PVC coating preformed into a spiral, used to assemble and interconnect empty gabion units, and to close and secure stone filled units, used as an alternate to lacing wire.
d)
e) stiffener, nfor gabions, a length of metallic coated steel wire or metallic coated steel wire with PVC coating used for support by forming a diagonal brace across the corners,inside of the gabion container. Stiffeners are produced using lacing wire for on site applications or shipped preformed using heavier wire gauge as shown in Table I below. f) welded wire fabric, nmaterial composed of a series of longitudinal and transverse steel wires arranged substantially at right angles to each other, and welded together at the points of intersection by electrical resistance welding to form fabricated sheets. Classification
20.10.6.4
Welded wire gabions are classified according to the coating as follows: a) Style 1 consists of welded wire fabric made from wire which is zinc coated before being welded into fabric. Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners are produced from zinc-. coated wire
b) Style 2 consists of welded wire fabric which is made from uncoated wire and the fabric is subsequently zinc coated after fabrication. Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners are produced from zinc-coated wire. c) Style 3 consists of welded wire fabric made from wire which is coated with zinc-5% aluminum-mischmetal alloy (Zn-5AI-MM) before being welded into fabric. Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners are also produced from zinc-5% aluminummischmetal alloy (Zn-5AI-MM). d) Style 4 consists of welded wire fabric made from wire which is aluminum coated before being welded into fabric. Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners are also produced
from aluminum coated (Aluminized) wire. e) Style 5 consists of welded wire fabric, spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners as Styles 1, 2, 3, or 4, and overcoated with PVC. Standard Specification for Welded Wire Mesh Gabions & Gabion Mattresses 20.10.6.5 Material Manufacture
20.10.6.5.1
The wire used in the manufacture of welded wire fabric for use in gabions shall conform specification shown in 20.10.6.5.1.1 as appropriate for the style ordered, except the tensile strength shall conform to 20.10.6.6.1 The wire may be produced from any grade of steel listed in ASTM A 853. 20.10.6.5.1.1 Style 1 welded wire fabric shall be manufactured from zinc-coated steel wire conforming to Specification A641. Style 2 welded wire fabric shall be manufactured from uncoated steel wire conforming to ASTM A 853, and the fabric subsequently zinc coated by the hot-dip process. Style 3 welded wire fabric shall be manufactured from Zn-5Al-MM coated steel wire conforming to Specification A 856/A 856M. Style 4 welded wire fabric shall be manufactured from aluminum-coated steel wire conforming toSpecification A 809
20.10.6.5.2
Spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners shall be made of wire having a tensile strength as stated in 20.10.6.6.1. having the same coating material as the welded wire fabric furnished on the order, and conforming to Specification A 641, A 856/A 856M, or A 809, as appropriate.
20.10.6.5.3
Wire for welded wire fabric shall be assembled by automatic machines or other suitable mechanical means which will assure accurate spacing and alignment of all members of the finished fabric. Longitudinal and transverse members of the welded wire fabric shall be connected at every intersection meeting the requirements of Section 20.10.6.6.2 by the process of electric resistance welding, which employs the principle of fusion combined with pressure PVC coating used in the manufacture of PVC coated gabions and gabion mattresses shall conform to the properties described in 20.10.6.7.2 and 20.10.6.7.3. PVC Coated welded wire fabric shall have the PVC coating fused and bonded onto the metalliccoated welded wire fabric after fabrication of mesh. No cutting of the panels closer than 14 " (6 mm 3.18 mm) to the weld shall be permitted after fabrication in order to prevent exposure near the welds. PVC-coated wire for spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners shall have the PVC coating fused and bonded or extruded and adhered, onto the metallic-coated wire. Gabions and gabion mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattress lid which is produced separately from the base (Figures 1 and 2 -TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC008). All gabions (Figure 3-TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008) and gabion mattresses (Figure 4TD/CE/1/82/D/NSCC-008) shall be supplied in the collapsed form, either folded and bundled or rolled, for shipping. Standard Specification for Welded Wire Mesh Gabions & Gabion Mattresses Mechanical Properties
20.10.6.5.4
20.10.6.5.5
20.10.6.5.6
20.10.6.6
20.10.6.6.1
Tensile StrengthThe tensile strength of the wire used for the welded wire fabric, spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners shall be soft or medium in accordance with the requirements of the specifications ASTM A 641(Style 1), ASTM A 856/A 856M (Style 3), and ASTM A 809 (Style 4) or Hard Drawn in accordance with ASTM A 853 (Style 2).
The cross sectional area of the test specimen shall be based on the diameter of the metallic coated wire. All the wires used in the fabrication of gabions and gabion mattresses must use the same temper wire per given order.
20.10.6.6.2
Weld Shear StrengthThe minimum average shear value in pounds-force shall be 70% of the breaking strength of the wire or as indicated in the table below, whichever is greater, when tested as described in 20.10.6.15 (reference ASTM A 185).Typical minimum average shear strengths as specified are shown below:
Wire Diameter in. (mm)
Min. Avg. Shear Strength lbs (newtons) 292 (1300) 472 (2100) 584 (2600)
Minimum Shear Strength lbs (newtons)
0.087 (2.2) 0.106 (2.7) 0.120 (3.05)
225 (1000) 360 (1600) 450 (2000)
20.10.6.6.2.1
Conformance to Requirement The material shall be deemed to conform with the requirements for weld shear strength if the average of the test results of the first four specimens tested complies with the value in 20.10.6.6.2, or if the average of the test results for all welds tested complies with the value in 20.10.6.6.2.
20.10.6.6.3
A Panel to Panel Joint StrengthThe minimum strength of the joined panels, when tested as described in Section 20.9.6.18, shall be as follows: Exterior Panels lbs per ft (kiloNewtowns per meter) Diaphragm Panels lbs per ft (kiloNewtowns per meter) 600 (8.7) 300 (4.35)
Gabions Gabion Mattresses 20.10.6.7
1400 (20.4) 600 (8.7)
Physical Properties
20.10.6.7.1
Metallic CoatingThe coating weights shall conform to the requirements of Specification A 641 Class 3 for zinc coating (including the zinc coating on the Style 2 fabric) or Specification A 856/A 856M Class 3 for Zn-5Al-MM coating, or Specification A 809 for aluminum coating.
20.10.6.7.2
PVC for CoatingThe initial properties of PVC coating material shall have a demonstrated ability to conform to the following requirements:
20.10.6.7.2.1
Specific Gravity In the range of 1.20 to 1.40, when tested according to Test Method D 792.
20.10.6.7.2.2
Tensile StrengthNot less than 2,275 psi (15.7 MPa), when tested according to Test Method D 638. Standard Specification for Welded Wire Mesh Gabions & Gabion Mattresses
20.10.6.7.2.3
Modulus of ElasticityNot less than 1,980 psi (13.7 MPa) at 100 Strain, when tested according to Test Method D 638.
20.10.6.7.2.4
HardnessShore "A" not less than 75, when tested according to Test Method D 2240.
20.10.6.7.2.5
Brittleness TemperatureNot higher than 15F (-9 C), or lower temperature when specified by the purchaser, when tested according to Test Method D 746.1
20.10.6.7.2.6
Resistance to AbrasionThe percentage of the weight loss shall be less than 12%,when tested according to Test Method D 1242, Method B at 200 cycles, CSI-A Abrader Tape, 80 Grit.
20.10.6.7.2.7 a)
Salt Spray Exposure and Ultraviolet Light Exposure.
The PVC shall show no effect after 3,000 hours of salt spray exposure according to Standard Practice B 117 The PVC shall show no effect of exposure to ultraviolet light with test exposure of 3,000 hours, using apparatus Type E and 63 C, when tested according to Practice D 1499 and Practice G 23. Evaluation of Coating After Salt Spray and Ultraviolet Exposure TestAfter the salt spray test and exposure to ultraviolet light as specified above, PVC coating shall not show cracks, blister, split, nor noticeable change of color. In addition, the specific gravity, tensile strength, modulus of elasticity and resistance to abrasion shall not change more than 6%, 25%, 25%, and 10% respectively from their initial values.
b)
c)
20.10.6.7.3
PVC Coating on WireThe initial properties of the PVC coating on the wire and welded 20.10.6.7.3.1 Wire fabric shall have a demonstrated ability to conform to the following requirements: a) AdhesionThe PVC coating shall adhere to the wire such that the coating breaks rather than separates from the wire when tested as described in 20.10.5.14 20.10.6.7.3.2 Mandrel BendPVC coated wire when subjected to a single 360 bend at -0 F (-18C) around a mandrel ten times the diameter of the wire, shall not exhibit breaks or cracks in the PVC coating.
20.10.6.8
Dimensions and Tolerances
20.10.6.8.1
The diameter of metallic coated wire shall conform to Table 1 below.
20.10.6.8.2
The minimum thickness of the PVC coating and the wire shall be as shown in Table 1 below.
20.10.6.8.3
Gabions shall have a mesh opening of 3 in. X 3 in. (76 mm X 76 mm). Gabion mattresses shall have a mesh opening of 112 in. X 3 in. (38 mm X 76 mm). Mesh opening shall be considered to be center-to-center distance between two consecutive longitudinal or transverse wires. The permissible tolerance is 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) maximum. Spiral binders shall have the maximum inside diameter of 212" (63.5 mm) and a maximum pitch of 3" (76.2 mm).
20.10.6.8.4
20.10.6.8.5
1
The width, height, and length of the gabion as assembled shall not differ more than 5 % from the ordered size prior to filling. Note 2 - The maximum brittleness temperature should be at least 15 F (8 C) below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or filled.
20.10.6.8.6
The width and length of the gabion mattress as assembled shall not differ more than 5 % and the height shall not differ more than 10 % from the ordered size prior to filling . Workmanship
20.10.6.9
20.10.6.9.1
Wire of proper grade and quality, when fabricated in the manner herein required, shall result in a strong, serviceable mesh-type product having substantially square or rectangular openings. It shall be fabricated and finished in a workmanlike manner, as determined by visual inspection and shall conform to this specification. Sampling
20.10.6.10
20.10.6.10.1
Samples for determining the mechanical and physical properties of welded wire fabric shall be obtained by cutting from the finished fabric a full width section of sufficient length to perform the testing. Samples for determining the mechanical and physical
properties of coated wire used for spiral binders, lacing wire, and stiffeners shall be selected at random in sufficient number to perform the testing. 20.10.6.11 Number of Tests
20.10.6.11.1
Perform a minimum of four tests for conformance to tensile strength of metallic coated wire, weld shear strength, wire and fabric dimensions, metallic coating weight, PVC coating thickness, adhesion of PVC coating, and mandrel bend from each 200,000 sq.ft. (19,000 sq m.) of fabric or remaining fraction thereof. Perform a minimum of four tests for conformance to tensile strength, wire dimensions, coating weight, PVC coating thickness, adhesion of PVC coating, and mandrel bend from the wire accessories used with each 200,000 sq ft (19,000 sq m) of fabric. Lot will be acceptable if the results of all four tests conform to the requirements. Test Methods
20.10.6.12
20.10.6.12.1
Metallic Coating WeightPerform coating weight tests as prescribed in Test Methods A 90/A 90M or A 428 as applicable. For coating weight tests on wire of the welded wire fabric, secure multiple lengths between welds, including both longitudinal and transverse wire, cut no closer than 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) from any weld. The combined length shall be 12 in. (305 mm) minimum, but preferably about 24 in. (610 mm). PVC Coating Thickness:
20.10.6.13
a) The thickness of the PVC coating shall be determined on an individual piece of wire removed from the fabric b) Determine the diameter of the metallic coated wire after stripping the PVC coating by chemical means. Determine the thickness of the PVC coating by scraping the coating from one side of the wire and measuring the reduced diameter with a micrometer. The thickness of the coating at this point is the difference between the measurement thus obtained and the measured diameter of the metallic coated wire. Determine the thickness of the coating at right angles to the first determination in a similar manner. When removing the PVC coating by scraping, take care not to remove any of the metallic surface. 20.10.6.14 PVC Adhesion TestMake two cuts parallel to the axis of the wire through the coating, approximately 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) apart, at least 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) long. With a knife peel back a section of the coating between 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) and 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) long to attempt to remove the 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) strip of coating by pulling the tab. The lot shall be acceptable if the coating breaks rather than separates from the core wire on all four specimens. Weld Shear Strength of Fabric:
20.10.6.15
20.10.6.15.1
ScopeThis test method covers the procedure for determining the strength of welded intersections of welded wire fabric.
20.10.6.15.2
Significance and UseThe weld shear strength is a measure of the ability of welds in wire fabric to resist the forces imposed on the wires tending to pull them apart.
20.10.6.15.3
Apparatus-Use a testing fixture such as shown in Figure 5, which is intended to stress the vertical wire close to its center line, and to prevent rotation of the horizontal wire. This fixture can be used in most tensile testing machines and should be hung in a ball
and socket arrangement at the center of the machine. This or a similarly effective fixture designed on the same principle, is acceptable (reference ASTM A185).
20.10.6.15.4
Test SpecimensTest specimens shall be obtained by cutting, from the finished fabric, a full width section including at least two transverse wires.
a) The transverse wire of each specimen shall extend approximately 1 in. (25 mm) on each side of the longitudinal wire. The longitudinal wire of each test specimen shall be of such length below the transverse wire so as to be adequately engaged by the grips of the testing machine. It shall be of such length above the transverse wire that its end shall be above the center line of the upper bearing of the testing device.
b) A test specimen shall consist of four welds selected at random from one transverse wire for weld shear strength. If the width of the fabric is such as to not include four welds that are suitable for testing, additional welds shall be taken from a second transverse wire to total four. (Welds at the edge wire are excluded from testing as there is no overhang to permit proper testing). If the average weld shear strength from the four specimens does not conform to the requirement of 7.2, test all the welds across the width (excluding edge welds) on one transverse wire, or on two transverse wires if some of the initial specimens were from the second transverse wire. Weld Shear Test Procedure Insert the long end of the vertical wire through the notch in the anvil. The vertical wire shall be in contact with the surface of the free rotating rollers while the horizontal wire shall be supported by the anvil on each side of the slot. The bottom jaws of the testing machine shall grip the lower end of the vertical wire and the load shall be applied at a rate of stressing not to exceed 100,000 psi/min. (689 MPa/min.)
20.10.6.15.5
20.10.6.15.6
ReportReport the test results to the nearest 5 pounds-force (25 newtons) for both individual results and the average of all tests.
20.10.6.15.7
Precision and BiasThe precision and bias of this test method for measuring weld shear strength are as specified in the test method included in Specification A 185.
20.10.6.15.8
Panel to Panel ConnectionA set of two (2) identical rectangular gabion panels, each with a width of 36" and a minimum length of 9", shall be joined by any of the following methods. a) Lacing wire - lacing wire shall be alternately single and double looped with spacing not to exceed 6". Ends shall be secured with two (2) complete revolutions and finish with a half (12) hitch. b) Spiral Binders - spiral binders shall pass through the openings and shall be securely tied at both ends to prevent unraveling when a load is applied per the minimum strength requirements of Section 20.10.6.6.3 Each of the two panels shall be mounted on a loading machine with grips or clamps such that panels are uniformly. Standard Specification for Welded Wire Mesh Gabions & Gabion Mattresses secured along the full width. The grips or clamps shall be designed to transmit only tension forces. The load then will be applied at a uniform rate not exceeding 50 lbs per second until maximum load is obtained. The maximum load is reached when a drop of strength is observed with subsequent loading.
20.10.6.16
Inspection
20.10.6.16.1
Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order, the producer is responsible for the performance of all inspection and test requirements of this specification. The producer may use his own or any other suitable facilities for the performance of the tests unless disapproved by the purchaser at the time the order is placed. The purchaser at their own expense shall have the right to perform any of the inspections and tests set forth in this specification when such tests are deemed necessary to assure that the material conforms to prescribed requirements Certification
20.10.6.17
20.10.6.17.1
When specified in the purchase order or contract, a producer's or supplier's certification shall be furnished to the purchaser that the material was manufactured, sampled, tested, and inspected in accordance with this specification and has been found to meet the requirements. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a report of the test results shall be furnished.
TABLE 1 Wire Diameters Minimum Nominal Diameter Metallic Coated Wire in (mm) A Wire for gabions PVC coated 0.106 (2.7) Minimum diameter PVC Coated Wire (Including Coating) in (mm) B 0.136 (3.5) Nominal Diameter PVC Coated Wire (Including Coating in (mm) C 0.146 (3.7)
Wire for metallic coated gabions Wire for gabion mattresses Spiral binders for gabions PVC Coated Metallic Coated Spiral binders for gabion mattresses metallic or PVC coated Lacing wire
0.120 (3.05)*
0.150 (3.8)*
0.160 (4.0)*
0.120 (3.05) 0.087 (2.2) 0.106 (2.7) 0.120 (3.05) 0.087 (2.2)
N/A 0.117 (3.0) 0.136 (3.5) N/A 0.117 (3.0)
N/A 0.127 (3.2) 0.146 (3.7) N/A 0.127 (3.2)
0.087 (2.2)
0.117 (3.0)
0.127 (3.2)
Stiffeners A) Lacing wire B) Preformed
0.087 (2.2) 0.120 (3.05)
0.117 (3.0) 0.150 (3.8)
0.127 (3.2) 0.160 (4.0)
*Option: Values designated by * indicate optional 11 gauge PVC coated wire
TABLE 2 Typical Gabion Sizes Length (cm) Width (cm) Height (cm) Number of Cells Capacity CU. Yds (CU m) 2.0 (1.53) 3.0 (2.29) 4.0 (3.06) 1.0 (.765) 1.5 (1.15) 2.0 (1.53) 0.66 (0.50) 1.0 (0.765) 1.33 (1.02)
6' (182.9) 9' (274.3) 12' (365.8) 6' (182.9) 9' (274.3) 12' (365.8) 6' (182.9) 9' (274.3) 12' (365.8)
3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4)
3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 3' (91.4) 1.5' (45.7) 1.5' (45.7) 1.5' (45.7) 1' (30.5) 1' (30.5) 1' (30.5)
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4
TABLE 3 Typical Gabion Mattress Sizes Length Ft. (cm) 9' (274.3) 12' (365.8) 9' (274.3) 12' (365.8) Width Ft. (cm) 6' (182.9) 6' (182.9) 6' (182.9) 6' (182.9) Height Ft. (cm) 6" (15.2) 6" (15.2) 9" (22.9) 9" (22.9) Number of Cells 3 4 3 4 Area Sq. Yds (Sq. m) 6.0 (5.2) 8.0 (6.69) 6.0 (5.2) 8.0 (6.69)
20.11
LABELLING
All the rooms shall be labelled. For emergency use Exit directions shall be indicated.
21. BUILDING SERVICES 21.1 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SERVICES This Section of the Works covers the supply, delivery, installation, commissioning and setting to work of the air conditioning and ventilating systems for the Control Centre buildings. 21.1.1 Contractors responsibilities Drawings showing the proposals for all air conditioning and ventilating installations shall be submitted with Bids. These drawings shall be listed in the appropriate schedule. Schedules giving technical details and particulars of all air conditioning and ventilating plant must be completed and submitted with Bid. 21.1.2 Project requirement Air Conditioners shall be in the form of direct expansion type air-cooled air-conditioners. The condensing units shall be remotely located outside the building. There shall be a minimum of two units for each of the room. One is for duty and other one is to stand by to ensure an uninterrupted service during 24 hours. Individual extract fans with ducts shall be provided for the Battery Room. The Battery Room extract fan shall be corrosion resistant throughout, with a 2 mm PVC lining. All civil works required associated with the air conditioning and ventilating installations shall be included within the supplying and installation of services. 21.1.3 Design and liaison of work 21.1.3.1 External design conditions
0 0
The external conditions for the calculation of air conditioning duties and loads shall be: 34 C DB / 30.5 C WB All items of plant and equipment shall operate without malfunction up to a maximum ambient condition 0 0 of 45 C DB and a minimum ambient condition of 10 C DB with instances of 100% RH. All plant and equipment installed externally, or which can be subjected to external conditions, shall be capable of withstanding without damage or deterioration the effects of solar radiation, rain, wind, dust, pollution from industrial plant, marine atmosphere, etc., appropriate to its location. 21.1.3.2 Internal design conditions
0
Air conditioning systems shall be in all air-conditioned areas within the following bands Temperature Humidity 22 - 25 C DB, 50-60 RH
Air conditioning systems shall be arranged to introduce a filtered fresh air quantity equivalent to 10% of the total air volume handled. In all rooms, excluding battery rooms, systems shall maintain a positive pressure internally. For mechanically ventilated areas air change rate shall be 10 air changes hour. All air conditioning and ventilation systems shall be designed for continuous operation. Plant shall be arranged to facilitate maintenance and future replacement of equipment. The Contractor shall calculate heat gains and losses under the specified conditions for each part of each building, taking into account solar radiation, thermal transmittance through roofs, walls, floors and windows, fresh air requirements, heat emission from installed electrical equipment and lighting, personnel, infiltration and any other sources. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the heat transfer coefficients for all materials used in building construction. In the event of any change in materials, design or method of building construction, the Contractor shall at all times be responsible for rechecking the design of all systems to ensure that they are capable of meeting the specified design requirement. 21.1.3.3 Internal Sound Levels
The maximum acceptable sound levels in all areas shall have a Noise Rating (NR) of 40.
All plant and equipment shall be suitably selected and installed to ensure that the maximum sound levels stated are not exceeded and where necessary attenuating devices shall be incorporated. 21.1.3.4 Vibration
All vibration producing equipment shall be isolated from the building by means of anti-vibration and noise isolators. The degree of isolation shall be such that noise criteria specified above are not exceeded and that no part of the building structure is subjected to vibration amplitudes in excess of the following values: Frequency Vibration (Hertz) Amplitude of Vibration (mm) (Mean to Peak) 0.2 0.07 0.02 0.008 0.002 2 5 10 20 50
All vibration producing equipment is to comply with BS6472 and BS8233. 21.1.3.5 Standards
All air conditioning and ventilating equipment shall conform to British Standards Chartered Intuition of Building Services Engineering (CIBSE) recommendations and the Building Regulations and certification to prove such conformity shall be submitted. 21.1.3.6 Design Calculations
The Contractor shall, submit to the Employer copies of all his calculations forming the basis for the selection of all air conditioning and ventilating plant, plant selection details and full working drawings. 21.1.4 Supplying and installation of services 21.1.4.1 Manufacturers
Wherever possible all air conditioning and ventilating plants shall be selected from a single manufacturers product range and origin. Where this is not possible, because of practical or technical constraints, then the number of different sources of origin shall be kept to minimum. The Contractor shall provide, with his submission, comprehensive illustrated technical literature covering all plant and equipment offered. The air-conditioning sub contractor shall be a recognised contractor that is a HVCA member Manufacturer shall have quality assurance certificate conforming to ISO 9001. 21.1.4.2 Split System Air Conditioning Units
Air cooled condensing units shall have isolated electrical supply be of the fully packaged type requiring only site connection of refrigerant pipe work, isolated electrical supply and input from the control system. Casings shall be of heavy gauge galvanised steel, weatherproofed with special corrosion resistant primer and finished in durable baked on enamel paint of a light reflective colour. Compressors used in the air-cooled condensing units shall be fully hermetically sealed complete with suitable control and protective devices. Coils shall be suitable for direct expansion refrigerant, manufactured from seamless copper tube mechanically expanded on to copper or aluminium plate fins. Condenser fans shall be of the axial flow type with weatherproof permanently lubricated bearings. Internal fan coil units shall consist of centrifugal supply fan, motor, cooling coil, electric heater battery, condensate drain pan assembly, filter and insulated cabinet with supply air head. Refrigerant suction and liquid lines to be insulated as specified bellow. Condensate drain lines shall be supplied and shall be suitably insulated where they pass through the building interior areas. They shall be arranged to discharge into land drains. 21.1.4.3 Thermal Insulation
All thermal insulation works shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5970 or equivalent international standard. Thermal insulation materials and finishes shall be proof against rotting, mould growth and vermin and shall be suitable for the ambient temperature and conditions prevailing. No insulation shall be applied to pipe work until hydraulic tests, approved by the Employer, have been carried out. Vapour barrier finishes shall have permanence not exceeding 0.01 per ms and applied finishes shall comprise two coats of: one brush coat pigmented PVA solution meeting BS 476 Part 7, Class 1 fire resistance One layer of canvas wrapped around the glass fibber secured with PVA solution along a 50mm overlap. Two brushes applied coats of vinyl-based vapour barrier, which shall be of a suitable quality for weather proofing.
Alternatively a vapour barrier for pipe work may be applied in the form of a PVC sheet cladding system with moulded fittings for bends, tees, etc. PVC sheet shall be not less than 0.5 mm thick and of a light reflective colour. Thermal insulation exposed to weather and solar effect shall be additionally protected against the weather by means of an external coating of aluminium sheet at least 0.8 mm thick pop-riveted into position and sealed at the joints with non-setting sealing compound. This aluminium shall be applied over the vapour barrier where applicable. Where insulated ducts or pipes enter a building through a roof or wall the insulation shall be included within the weathering flashing and sealed between the insulation and the flashing by means of non-setting sealing compound. 21.1.4.4 Mechanical Ventilation
Supply air handling plants shall consist of a fresh air intake louver, insect screen, filter, fan and distribution duct work. This Clause of the Specification deals with fans of all types as used in ventilation system of the packaged or site assembled type. The performance of fans shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance with the procedures specified in BS 848 Part 1 and Part 2 or equivalent for noise testing. Test certificates shall be submitted to the Employer. Fans shall be capable of the duties required to fulfil the specified design conditions. The Contractor shall calculate the system resistance using the frictional resistance of items of plant offered and/or duct runs as installed and shall be responsible for ensuring that the installed fan is capable of the required duty without exceeding the specified noise levels or driving capacity of the motor and drive. 21.1.4.5 Bifurcated fans
The exhaust air fans serving the battery room extract systems shall be axial flow, bifurcated type suitable for use in hazardous areas such as battery rooms, where corrosive fumes are expected. The control equipment for the battery room fans shall provide means for electrically interlocking with the battery chargers referred to under another section of this specification to prevent the chargers from operating if the fans are not running. The control equipment shall be capable of providing a signal of Fans running by means of two sets of volt free changeover contacts. Wiring between the fan control equipment and the point of interface with the battery chargers shall be provided. 21.1.4.6 Axial flow fans
Axial flow fans shall be of the single or multi-stage contra-rotating types. Axial fan casings shall be of continuously welded mild steel construction hot dip galvanised after manufacture. The lengths of the casing shall be sufficient to allow removal of the fan without disturbing the connected duct. The motor/impeller assemblies shall be fixed to the casings by mild steel threaded rods shall be directly fixed to motor casings for motors up to 25 kW. Axial flow fan impeller blades shall be of aerofoil section constructed from cast aluminium. The hub shall incorporate a cast iron blade fixing plate with keyed slots for the blades. The keyed slots shall permit the removal and readjustment of the blade pitch angle. The fan shall be clearly marked with the factory-set pitch angle and the maximum permissible pitch angle available with the motor fitted. Axial fan casing of 150mm diameter and above hall be fitted with an airtight inspection door. The fan casings shall be fitted with galvanised mild steel mating flanges, bolted mounting feet, coned inlets and upstream guide vanes as necessary. Electrical connections to the fan motor shall be taken to a terminal block enclosed in a terminal box welded to the fan casing. The terminal box lid shall be watertight. 21.1.4.7 Ceiling fans
Employer's approval shall be obtained for the Make. 21.1.5 Control Equipment The Contractor shall provide full wiring diagrams of all control circuits giving terminal connection references.
The control system shall incorporate all necessary safety interlocks for the successful operation of the mechanical plant and systems. All the individual control elements shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Room sensors shall be enclosed in a robust high impact plastic housing not larger than 90mm x 90mm x 25mm. Control equipment for battery room fans shall be install in control room. 21.1.6 Electrical Control Each item of plant shall be provided with local isolation and/or emergency stop buttons to facilitate maintenance inspection and emergency operation. In case of supply failure air conditioning plants shall be disconnected without switching directly after resuming power and shall be able to start manually. 21.1.7 Electrical Connections All electrical power, control cable and wiring associated with the ventilation system including all connections between control panels, valves, sensing probes and other like items shall be supplied, installed and connected up as a part of this Contract. The cabling and wiring system shall comply with the requirements of the relevant clauses of this Specification and be either surface or flush installation appropriate. Cables and wiring shall comprise either XLPE cables, laid in cleats or trenches, or PVC insulated wires drawn into galvanised conduits. Final connections to electric motor and all other items of plant subject to movement and vibration shall comprise flexible cable in flexible conduit. 21.1.8 Maintenance The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of all installations covered by this section of this Specification for the period stated in condition of contract 21.2 FIRE PROTECTION AND DETECTION FACILITIES 21.2.1 Fire Alarms A fire alarm system shall be installed in accordance with BS 5839: 2002 and shall be of the fully addressable type. A type L1/P1 system shall be provided throughout the building. Break glass call points shall be installed together with automatic smoke detection. Fire alarm sounders shall be of the bell type installed below the ceiling and shall provide sufficient audibility to enclosed cellular offices, toilets and other enclosed spaces. Locations of smoke detectors, luminaries and other ceiling mounted equipment shall be co-ordinated to provide a harmonised arrangement. A firemans override control shall be located adjacent to the fire alarm panel in the reception area for control of the ventilation plant. The main fire alarm panel shall be located in the Reception. Repeater panels shall be provided in the Control Room and other main entrances to the building. Remote signalling facilities shall be provided and interfaces provided with: Mechanical Control Panels Lifts Door Access Systems
The system shall be fully self-monitoring. The installation shall be carried out using suitably fire rated cabling. The design proposed for fire protection shall meet the requirements of the Sri Lanka Fire Brigade. The design shall be submitted for approval by the Fire Brigade.
21.2.2 Bulk Heads for Cables and Pipes Penetrations of electrical cables in fire resistant walls or ceilings shall be properly shut with an approved bulk head. Only fire resistant, asbestos and mineral fibre free mortar shall be used as sealing material. Except for cable penetrations which must be gas- and/or water-tight, approved cable transit systems may be proposed and installed. During construction works and for temporary use only, cable penetrations may be shut with noncombustible, flexible and approved fire resistant pillows. At penetrations of non-combustible pipes through fire resistant walls or ceilings, the remaining space between the pipes and the openings in the walls or ceilings shall be properly shut with an approved pipe seal. Only fire resistant, asbestos and mineral fibre free mortar shall be used as sealing material. At penetrations of combustible pipes in fire resistant walls or ceilings, approved bulk heads for pipes shall be installed. The remaining space between the pipes and the openings in the walls or ceilings shall be smoke-tight shut with non-combustible material. 21.2.3 Fire Protection Coating for Cables Electrical cables located in floors and escape routes or in covered trenches, vertical shafts, raised floors, suspended ceilings or any other areas with a mass of electrical cables, such cables as well as their trays and supports shall be coated with an approved fire retardant coating. Fire protection of the coating shall be performed by an intumescent action. The coating shall be non-hygroscope, non-aging and remaining flexible for easy removal of individual cables. Tests regarding electrical de-rating, short circuit threshold, aging and termite resistivity shall be certified. The coating shall be applied as wet material and the finish surface shall be dry and smooth. 21.2.4 Fire Detection and Fire Alarm System A centralised electronic fire detection and fire alarm system shall be designed, installed and commissioned with all necessary equipment, accessories and cabling in accordance with VDE 0833, DIN 14675 and V.d.S.-Form 2095 standards, latest edition. A complete system shall be provided with all components required for automatic operation. The main functions of the system shall be as follows: The actuation of any fire detection device shall be audible and visible displayed on a central fire alarm control panel and audible alarms shall be initiated throughout the building. The system shall differ whether the alarm was initiated by an automatic detection device or by a manual fire alarm station. Audible alarms may be silenced by pushing a silence button on the central fire alarm control panel. Any subsequent actuation of a detection device shall again sound the audible alarms. Fire doors, fire dampers, if any, air handling units or any other equipment or devices shall be released or shut down as required. Short circuit, wire break or any other system troubles shall be indicated on the central fire alarm control panel.
After restoration of the alarm detection device to its normal condition, the system shall be returned to normal stand-by condition. Should the system require any separate workstation on PC basis for central system supervision, programming or configuration, it shall be installed on the control room floor level. The scope shall also include complete installations with operator desk, printer, operator chair, etc. according to the manufacturers standard.
The fire detection and fire alarm system shall mainly consist of the following equipment. 21.2.5 Fire Alarm Panel A reliable central fire alarm control panel shall be supplied including all necessary electronic cards and equipment to receive, operate, supervise and display all detection and alarm installations and to release and initiate all other functions as described above. Additional potential free contacts shall be provided for connections to other general alarm or event recorder and security or indication systems. All detection devices shall be individually addressable and displayable. Actuation of any detection and release device shall be displayed and/or printed by a data recorder. The central fire alarm control panel shall be made of modular construction using solid state ICcomponents in a self-standing frame with openable glass front cover. The central fire alarm control panel shall be designed for 230 V AC primary power and 24 V DC operating power for detection and alarm circuits. Back-up batteries with an automatic charger and charging supervision shall be installed inside the panel frame. The batteries shall be maintenance free, gas tight and dry fit types with power supply sized for 24-hours system operation and adequate reserve power for sounding audible and visible alarm devices at the end of this period for at least 5 (five) minutes. The central fire alarm control panel shall be located in the entrance hall of the building. In any case, common signals for fire alarm and system troubles shall be audible and visible displayed in the control room. A visible alarm device outside the entrance hall shall be activated if an alarm occurs 21.2.6 Manual Fire Alarm Stations Manual fire alarm stations shall be of the break glass push button operated type and individual addressable and displayable on the central fire alarm control panel if activated. The boxes shall be painted red with white or black lettering in the local language and in English. When operating the manual station, the pushed button shall remain down and the alarm contacts closed until the station is reset by opening the front, replacing the break-glass and closing the front again. Inside the building, manual fire alarm stations shall be located on floors and at building exits following the normal exit paths. 21.2.7 Automatic Fire Detectors Automatic detectors shall be of the fixed temperature and/or rate-of-rise heat detectors, optical smoke and/or ionization smoke detectors and ultraviolet and/or infrared flame detectors, subject to approval. Rate-of-rise heat detectors shall be designed for a sensibility of 5C/min temperature rise and a fixed initiation temperature of +57C, +/-3C. For smoke detection, preferably only optical smoke detectors shall be installed instead of ionization type detectors. Ionization smoke detectors, if any, shall be of the dual chamber type, with a radioactivity radiation of less than 1.0 micro-Curie. Each automatic detector shall be addressable. Actuation of any detector shall be displayed individually on the central fire alarm control panel. Each automatic detector shall have continuous condition supervision by using pulsing, trend evaluating or equivalent system techniques. The detector spacing on smooth surfaces shall not exceed the distance recommended by the approving authorities.
In areas, where irregularities occur, the detector spacing shall be reduced in such a way as to obtain approved spacing. Detectors generally shall be connected in groups to the central fire alarm control panel. The number of detectors installed on any one signalling line shall be limited as recommended by the manufacturer. Signalling lines shall be designed as loop connections, unless otherwise approved. 21.2.8 Audible Alarms Audible alarms shall be installed inside the building. They shall have a minimum noise level of 110 dB(A) at a distance of 1 m and shall be different in sound from other sirens, if any, installed in the area for other purposes. The audible alarms must be audible throughout the entire building. 21.2.9 Visible Alarms A red flash light shall be installed outside the building next to the main entrance. The light shall have a frequency of 60 or 90 flashes per minute with an ample light energy. 21.2.10 Cabling Signalling and release lines shall be marked as "fire alarm cable" and be laid in conduits. Minimum wire size shall be 0.8 mm. Further requirements for cabling and wiring as specified under the relevant chapters for Electrical Works shall be considered. 21.2.11 Fire Protection Equipment All fire protection equipment shall be of types approved and listed by recognised approval authorities, or approved by the Employer. Acceptable approval authorities include national standard organisations, official testing laboratories, testing laboratories of the fire insurers, licensed private testing laboratories with specialised experience of fire protection, and recognised marine classification societies. The appliances shall comply with BS EN 3 or equivalent standard. All apparatus shall be suitable for operation by one person alone and shall be easily recharged. The discharge shall be non-corrosive and free of chemicals prone to give off toxic gases when heated. The Contract shall include supply and installation of all wall brackets and fittings. 21.2.11.1 Portable wall mounted extinguishers
Portable, wall mounted, hand held extinguishers shall be 5.5 kg pressurised control discharge CO 2 units. (a) Construction and operation The body of the extinguisher shall be seamless, welded or brazed as appropriate. The extinguisher shall be capable of being released by means of a lever-operated valve provided with a safety pin. Extinguishers shall be capable of controlled partial discharge. (b) Marking All extinguishers shall be painted and marked in accordance with BS EN 3 or equivalent standard. In addition, they shall be marked in the English language with clear instructions for use. (c) Housings for portable fire extinguishers Where extinguishers are provided in external positions or other areas where they may be subjected to the whether they shall be hung inside protective cabinets.
The protective cabinets shall be red in colour and marked with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHERS" in English, in white. The cabinet shall provide protection for rain and wind blown dust and have a pull off front cover allowing ease of access to the extinguisher. (d) Mounting Where extinguishers are provided internally they shall be wall mounted and attached in a manner affording quick release from the supporting bracket. They shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 1.5 meters above the floor. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom of the extinguisher and the floor is less than 0.1 meter. The extinguishers shall be positioned so that the instructions for operation face outwards. 21.2.11.2 Mobile trolley extinguishers
The extinguisher shall consist of a powder container to which shall be attached a cylinder of compressed inert gas for use as the propellant of the extinguishant. The powder shall be fed from the container to the discharge nozzle through a flexible hose. This equipment shall be mounted on a metal frame with wheels and handle to make it mobile and manoeuvrable. The dry powder container shall be of steel construction and shall have been pressure tested to at least twice its operating pressure. The container shall hold 45 kg of multi-purpose dry powder of ABC rating. The pressurising cylinder shall be externally attached to the powder container. The hose conducting the powder to the discharge nozzle shall be 10 meters long and made of braided synthetic flexible hose. The hose shall be permanently connected to the dry powder container. The hose shall be stored in a manner allowing easy removal for use. The unit shall have at least two wheels which shall have rubber or synthetic tyres and a minimum overall diameter of 300 mm. The overall width of the unit shall not exceed 800 mm. A single easily accessible valve shall be used to release the pressurising gas into the powder container. The nozzle shall control the discharge of the dry powder and shall be designed for controlled partial delivery. The unit shall be capable of discharging all the dry powder in at most 60 seconds. The extinguishers shall be painted and marked in the English language with clear instructions for use, which shall include the words "NOT FOR USE ON ELECTRICAL FIRES". Mobile fire extinguishers shall be protected from the prevailing climatic conditions, and shall be clearly visible and accessible. 21.2.12 Signs Electrical hazard warning signs in English shall be positioned on each entry door. Smoke detectors shall be provided in all the rooms. 21.3 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SUPPLY WORK 21.3.1 General The completed installations shall comply in all relevant respects with the Regulations issued by the Institution of Electrical Employers (IEE) with the Codes of Practice issued by the Chartered Institutions of Building Services, or International Electrical Committees Standards, or with such other 21.3.2 Contractors Responsibilities The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval copies of all his calculations forming the basis for the designs of the lighting and small power installation which shall be shown on the working drawings, also to be submitted for approval. Any approval shall not, however, relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibilities. The Contractor shall enter into the schedules, a fixed sum for the complete design work and construction works under this section of the Specification and no price variation will be considered. 21.3.3 Project Requirement This section of the Specification includes for the lighting and small power installations in new buildings and for extensions to the interior, exterior and emergency lighting and diesel generator small power installations where appropriate.
All civil works associated with this section of the works shall be deemed to be included either as part of the main civil engineering works or as part of the works in this section. No additional payments will be made for such requirements. The requirements of this section of the works are subjected to the Conditions and Specifications laid down in other sections and volumes of the Bidding Documents and any regulations that may be in force in Sri Lanka. The lighting installations shall be designed to give the standard service illuminations set out in the schedule appended to this section. Control and relay room and office room shall have the service illumination measured at 850 mm above finished floor level. All other areas shall have the service illumination measured at floor level. The installations shall also meet the limiting glare index requirements as set out in the specified codes of practice. The schedule gives proposals for the types of lighting fittings to be used in the area, type of control to be employed, number of socket outlets and the types of mounting expected to be suitable for the respective areas. When 3 phase lighting installations are to be used, contactor switching controlled by pushbuttons located in the areas to be illuminated are preferred. In all rooms and corridors having two entrances the lighting installation shall have two way switching, the switches / push buttons being located in appropriate positions adjacent to the entrances. Emergency lighting shall be arranged to illuminate all stairways, exits and entrance and provide some illumination in operational areas. 21.3.4 Design and liaison of work 21.3.4.1 Coding System
The Contractor shall when preparing drawings showing the respective designs using a code to identify each lighting fitting and socket outlet. The code shall comprise letters and figures so compiled that the following information can be readily identified; (1) (2) (3) (4) 21.3.4.2 The lighting distribution board to which the fitting or socket outlet is connected. If connected to the normal supplies or to the emergency DC supplies. The circuit numbers and phase of the distribution board to which the fitting is connected. The sequence of the fitting in a particular circuit. Schedule of Design Requirements
Key to Abbreviations to be used: L S1, S2, etc. PB TS C W P M D F S A PEC MAN Single pole local switches Socket outlet or fused spur circuits Push-button for remote control Time switch control Ceiling mounted Wall mounted Pole or earth mast mounted Recessed modular mounting Suspended Flush installation Surface installation Automatic on mains failure Photoelectric cell control Manual control
21.3.5 Supplying and installation of service 21.3.5.1 AC Distribution boards
Distribution board for substation supplies shall be of the single busbar, air insulated multi-cubicle or multibox factory built assembly type, incorporating air break, manually operated MCCB units, suitable for installation in the substation building on a 400-230 V, three-phase, four-wire, 50 Hz system, having the neutral earthed through earthing transformer. Unless otherwise specified, distribution boards shall be in accordance with IEC 60439 and to IEC 60947 and the degree of protection shall be not less than IP 41 to BSEN IEC60529 or better equivalent of the concerned standards. Incoming supplies to all distribution boards shall be protected at the point of supply by MCCB. All distribution boards should be suitably rated for a prospective short circuit breaking capacity of 25 kA at 600 V. Distribution boards shall each include three-phase busbars, one neutral busbar and an earth bar; all of high conductivity copper supported to withstand the normal and fault condition stresses. The neutral busbars shall have a rating not less than 50% of that of the associated phase busbars. Distribution boards shall have a busbar rating not less than 100 Amperes. Each distribution board shall consist of a fabricated steel busbar chamber having MCCB, in distribution boards and attached and mounted at a height convenient for the operator. The distribution board shall be of a type, which is readily extensible and suitable for use in a hot humid climate. Each circuit shall be clearly labelled to show the destination of the associated cable, the "ON" and "OFF" positions of the switches being clearly indicated. Cubicle type (metal-enclosed type) distribution boards shall be so arranged that the cubicles housing individual control units are grouped to form a multi-tier arrangement and a further part shall where possible constitute a cabling and wiring chamber of ample dimensions in which terminal boards, cable boxes and cable seal plates shall be located. The distribution boards shall be finished to the approval of the Employer and painted Munsell Colour 5Y7/1. Each MCCB unit shall be mounted on a metal panel and provided with a hinged metal door and key locked. The MCCB shall have a quick make and quick break action independent of the speed at which the switch handle is operated and shall be entirely suitable for switching the inductive loads associated with motor circuits. Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type for operation at a prospective fault level of 25 kA and conforming to BS 88, where applicable. The mountings of the fuses shall be such that they can be readily withdrawn and replaced whilst the associated busbars and circuits are live. Incoming circuits at distribution boards shall not be provided with fuses for prevention of lack of phase. MCCBs shall be of the high speed fault limiting, thermal/magnetic type to IEC, or BS 3871 or equivalent standard, with quick make and quick break trip free mechanisms, which prevent the breaker being held in against overloads or faults. Tripping arrangements shall be such as to ensure simultaneous opening of all phases. MCCBs on the incoming circuits shall have facilities for locking in the "off" position. The rupturing capacity of the MCCB shall not be less than that of the switchboard itself. ACBs or MCCBs shall be provided on the incoming circuits at the respective Substation Services, main distribution boards. These circuit breakers shall be equipped with thermal device shall have an adjustable IDMT characteristic and the magnetic device an adjustable short time delay. Earth metal of distribution boards shall be bonded and earthed to the main station earthing system. Approved MCCB or title labels shall be fitted externally on the front cover of each switch or distribution board giving the function of each circuit. A non-fading printed list of circuits shall be provided on each sub distribution boards, stating the location of the equipment served, rating of the protective unit and the circuit loading. The lists shall be mounted on the inside of the cover door and shall be protected by an acrylic sheet slid into a frame over the circuit list, the list and cover to be easily removable to permit circuit modifications.
The distribution boards for building services shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest standard and be capable of withstanding without injury the mechanical and electrical stresses set up by a fault equivalent to 25 kA at 600V for twice the period required to disconnect such on any circuit. Each distribution board shall have a dust proof metal case of sheet steel with either a galvanised or enamelled finish to IP 41.The colour of the enamel finish shall match the colour of other switchgear. The metal casing shall be provided with a number of knockouts or other approved form of cable entries corresponding to the circuit capacity of the distribution board and a suitable earth busbar. Distribution boards shall also meet the requirements of the appropriate sections of this clause. Distribution boards for exterior use shall be galvanized and weatherproof to IP 54. Distribution boards for use on direct current system shall be double pole types equipped with adequately rated fuses. Mixed capacity board shall be employed and all contactors and control switches associated with the respective outgoing circuits shall be accommodated within the distribution boards. 21.3.5.2 Cables
Cables designated PVC shall be polyvinyl insulated or polyvinyl insulated and sheathed types manufactured and tested to the requirements of BS 6004, 600/1000V grade or equivalent. Sheathed types shall be equipped with an earth continuity conductor. Cables designated XLPE shall be cross-linked polyethylene insulated filled and polyethylene sheathed or polyvinyl chloride sheathed overall and be manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of IEC60189, 600/1000 V grade or equivalent. The outer sheath to be coloured black. Jute fillings will not be permitted. Flexible type cable for pendant cords and final connections to fixed apparatus shall be butyl or silicone rubber insulated and sheathed manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements or BS 6500, 300/500V or 300/300 V grade as applicable. The conductor shall comprise multi-strand of 0.25 mm or more. The number of strands shall be not less than 30 and in all cases of a number suitable for the protection rating of the respective circuits. All cables used for lighting and small power shall have copper conductors. The Contractor shall select conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet the following conditions; (1) (2) That the minimum conductor size for lighting circuits shall be 1.5 sq. mm and for socket 2 outlets 2.5mm. That the size shall be adequate for the current to be carried as set out in the cable manufacturers specification.
That the size is sufficient to keep the voltage drop in the phase and neutral conductors to the farthest lighting or power point, under normal full load conditions, to within the final circuit limit specified in the IEE Wiring Regulations. Diversity will not be allowed. 21.3.5.2.1 Cable termination
Terminations for XLPE cables shall comprise compression type clamps and bonding clamps to meet the requirements of BS 6121 or equivalent and shall be designed to secure and to provide electrical continuity between the conductor and the threaded fixing component of the clamps. Earth bond terminal attachments shall be provided. Termination for PVC insulated and rubber insulated cables shall comprise compression type clamps as specified for the terminations for XLPE cables mentioned above. 21.3.5.2.2 Sealing and drumming
Drums and sealing and drumming of XLPE and PVC cables shall generally meet the requirements of the relevant clauses in Section 8. 21.3.5.2.3 Cable trays
Cable trays where required as part of the Contract supply shall be the perforated galvanized sheet type.
Trays shall have upturned edges and be of a width suitable for the number of cables to be supported and shall be supplied with purpose-made galvanized steel brackets suitable for mounting from the building structure. 21.3.5.2.4 Cable jointing
The Contractor shall be responsible for the sealing and jointing of all cables supplied and installed as part of this Section of the Contract. All jointing and terminations shall comply with the relevant clauses of Section 8. 21.3.5.3 Contactors
Contactors shall comply with BS 5454, IEC 518/1, IEC 518/1A or equivalent and shall be of the electrically held-in types contained in heavy gauge sheet steel case suitable for panel mounting. Each contactor shall be continuously rated and suitable for thirty inductive switching operations per hour and a utilization category of AC2. 21.3.5.4 Switches and Push buttons
Switches shall be rated for 16 or 20 amps. and shall be single pole types and be provided with an earth terminal. Switches for use in areas designated for surface installation shall be quick-make-quick-break fixed grid industrial types mounted in galvanized malleable iron boxes with protected dolly and arranged where necessary for multigang switching. Switches for use in areas designated for flush installation shall be micro-break types fixed to white plastic cover plates and mounted in galvanized steel flush type boxes. Two way and multigang variations shall be provided as appropriate. Push-button switches shall either be flush or surface types contained in galvanized steel boxes and are single pole rated for 5 Amps. or more. Push buttons shall be made of non-hygroscopic material be nonswelling and so fitted as to avoid possibility of sticking. The terminals for all switches shall be adequate to accommodate 2 conductors each 1.5 sq. mm in area. 21.3.6 Lighting Fittings Illustrations and/or samples of all lighting fittings, which the Contractor proposes to purchase, shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before issuing any sub-orders. Lighting fittings for interior and exterior use shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with the appropriate sections of BS 4533 or equivalent and together with all components shall be suitable for service and operation in the climate stated. Each fitting shall be complete with all lamp holders, control gear, internal wiring, fused terminal block, earth terminal and reflectors or diffusers as specified. The design of each fitting shall be such as to minimize the effect of glare and such that the ingress of dust, flies and insects is prevented. Where open type fittings are used it shall be impossible for insects to become lodged therein. The control gear for use with fluorescent lamps shall incorporate power factor and interference suppression capacitors. Chokes shall be impregnated and solidly filled with polyester resin or other approved high melting compound and shall be manufactured to restrict the third harmonic content to less than 25% of the uncorrected current value and shall be silent in operation. Control gear for discharge lamps shall incorporate power factor correction and interference suppression capacitors. Internal connections shall comprise stranded conductors not less than 0.75 esq. covered with heat resistant insulation to the requirements of BS 6500 or equivalent. All internal wiring shall be adequately cleated to the fitting casing with an approved form of cleat. The finish of fittings for interior use shall be impervious to deterioration by atmospheric reaction. Fittings for exterior use shall have a vitreous enamel, natural aluminium or galvanized finish according to the manufactures standard product. Fittings for housing tungsten lamps exceeding 150 watts rating shall be provided with an approved method of dissipating heat from the lamp cap and terminal housing. Lamp holders as applicable shall be suitable for the lamp specified. Flood lighting fittings suitable for 250W high-pressure sodium lamps are preferred.
Lighting fittings shall be of the type description as generally set out in the schedule appended to this Section of the Specification. The type references used shall be repeated in the Schedule and on the drawings. 21.3.6.1 Lamps
The Contract includes the supply and erection of all lamps and tubes necessary to complete the installation and these shall be included in the prices quoted for the supply and erection of fittings. Fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with British Standards 1853; IEC 81 or equivalent shall be bi-pin types and shall be warm white colour. Tungsten lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with BSEN 60064 or equivalent and shall be bayonet cap for lamps up to and including 100 watts. Lamps rated for 150 watts and higher shall have Edison screw caps. Low wattage lamps used in exit signs and emergency lighting units may be small or miniature Edison screw. Discharge lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with British Standard 3677 or equivalent. Mercury vapour lamps shall be fluorescent types having a 10% red ratio colour correction, whenever used. 21.3.7 Socket Outlets and Fused Spur Outlets The Contract shall include suitably located; heavy duty, weatherproof three phase and neutral interlocked switched socket outlets and plugs for supplying the transformer oil filtration units. Ample single phase outlets shall be located in convenient positions, and at least one three phase and neutral, light duty outlet with plug shall be located in each relay room. Each socket outlet shall comply with the requirements of the British Standard 1363 or equivalent and shall be the interlocked shuttered and switched types arranged for surface or flush mounting in single or multi gang units as appropriate. Each fused spur outlet shall be equipped with double pole isolator, a fuse to British Standard 1362 or equivalent and where required front entry for flexible connection. Each socket outlet and fused spur outlet shall be equipped with a galvanized metal box with earth terminal. Each group of five socket outlets shall be provided with matching fused plug top. All socket outlets for exterior use shall be galvanized and weatherproof and be equipped with screwed dustproof cap attached to the socket by means of a chain. 21.3.8 Conduit and Fittings Steel conduits shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 4568, Part 1 or equivalent, heavy gauge screwed and welded Class B and shall be galvanized, or an alternative price can be quoted for high impact heavy gauge PVC of similar dimensions. Fittings for steel conduits shall be manufactured of good quality malleable cast iron and of small circular pattern to BS 4568, Part 2 or equivalent, with internally tapped spouts minimum length 21 mm threaded to the correct length at inter-sections tees, draw through and stop ends. Conduit fittings of PVC shall be of the plain bore pattern suitable for a push-on compression type joint and shall be sealed with a hard setting vinyl cement to prevent ingress of vermin, water, dust, etc. 21.3.9 Poles Lighting poles shall be of tubular or polygon shaped steel with a base of sufficient section to house an inspection trap, lockable door, cable entry and terminations suitable for the incoming cables and the secondary cables feeding the light sources, all of which shall be supplied with the pole. All poles shall be suitable for burying to a depth of 1.5 m, shall be suitable for embedding in concrete and shall be adequate to withstand the local wind forces with a factor of safety of 2.5. Steel poles shall be galvanized and covered with a bituminous base preservative to cover both the inside and outside of the pole. 21.3.10 Interior Installations Wiring for the lighting and socket outlet installations shall comprise PVC cables drawn into conduits attached to walls, structural or roof steelwork or ceilings as appropriate.
All fixings shall be of a type approved by the Employer and all metal work used shall be galvanized. Fixings to structural steelwork shall be with purpose made brackets or clamps, the drilling of structural steelwork will not be permitted. Cleats with two screw fixings shall be used for supporting conduits at not greater than 2-m intervals. All switch boxes, socket outlet boxes and items of a similar type shall be fixed with two screws or bolts. Switches and push buttons for lighting circuits shall be mounted at 1,300 mm above finished floor level. Socket outlets shall be mounted 500 mm above finished floor level but those for use with workshop benches shall be mounted 150 mm clear of the bench working surface. Lighting fittings shall be attached to ceilings, walls, trunking or roof steelwork or suspended there from as appropriate. Where fittings are to be suspended, rod type suspension units shall be employed. Final connections to all suspended lighting fittings shall be with heat resistant flexible cable terminated in porcelain clad connectors in the ceiling or junction box which shall also terminate the main circuit cable. The cable length shall be such that the suspension unit supports the full weight of the lighting fittings. Where recessed type lighting fittings are to be installed suspension units shall be used to prevent the weight of the fittings being applied to the suspended ceiling. It shall be possible to carry out maintenance from the underside of the fitting without disturbing the false ceiling. To facilitate this need the final connection to each fitting shall be with heat resistant flexible cable from a plug in type ceiling rose mounted above the false ceiling. All cables not contained within conduit shall be terminated with a cable hole sealing to the requirements of Section 8. Where lighting fittings are mounted direct on walls or ceilings the main circuit cables may be connected into the fitting terminal block and where the fittings are mounted flush with the ceiling the final connection shall be taken through ceiling roses. Where terminal blocks do not exist within the lighting fitting flexible heat resistant cable shall be used connected to a separate junction box. Earth continuity shall be maintained throughout the entire wiring installation with separate insulated earth continuity conductors of adequate cross-section ultimately connected to a common earth terminal at the respective distribution board. Each and every trunking route shall be bonded across all joints with external copper bonding links supplied for the purpose. 21.3.11 Exterior Installation External floodlighting shall preferably be mounted on earth mast structures at a height of 11 meters above ground level and suitable access ladders shall be provided on the masts for maintenance of the lighting fittings. Where this is not feasible the floodlight fittings shall be mounted on poles also at a height of 11 meters above ground. Roadway lighting shall comprise roadway lanterns mounted on poles at 5.5 meters above the finished road level. All exterior lighting shall be controlled by photoelectric cell. Cables to exterior lighting shall be XLPE cables laid in concrete trenches or cleated to building structures or into steel conduits galvanized as appropriate to the route requirement. The cables shall be terminated at a cut out located at the base of each support. Wiring between the cut-out and the control gear or lantern shall be with PVC or PE multi-core cables run within poles or drawn into galvanized steel conduit attached to the supporting structure. This exterior lighting will be supplied by a diesel generator set during emergency. 21.3.12 Earthing and Bonding All equipment being supplied under this Section shall be effectively bonded to ensure earth continuity throughout the system. Continuity may be provided by means of steel conduits but a separate earth continuity conductor shall be included with all wiring in conduits. No reliance shall be placed on metal to metal joints in conduits for earth continuity. The earth continuity conductors shall as far as possible be in one continuous length to the furthest part of the installation from the controlling switchboard. The earth conductor shall connect all metal cases housing electrical equipment. The branches shall be connected to the main conductor by permanent exothermic fusion welded joints or crimped joints approved by the Employer.
21.3.13 Emergency Lighting Emergency lighting shall be installed in the new buildings. The emergency lighting shall be divided into two parts. (a) One part shall have fittings installed in strategic locations to ensure safe evacuation of the buildings, and shall switch on automatically following a power failure. This part shall not be connected to the Control Centre battery systems, but shall have dedicated batteries and chargers. (b) The other part shall be supplied from the 240V ac UPS system and shall be limited to lighting for the Control Room Operator desks. The lighting shall be controlled by switches located at the Operator desks. The illumination level shall be sufficient to enable an Operator to continue his normal work. At least two rechargeable hand lamps shall be installed in the Control Centre building. They shall normally rest on wall mounted brackets incorporating the chargers. Each lamp shall incorporate a small red light to facilitate location following a lighting failure. 21.3.14 Schedule of Lighting Fittings and Sockets Outlets Lighting fittings described in this Schedule shall also meet the general requirements of Clause 15.16 of this Specification. TYPE F1 Shall indicate a basic channel complete with control gear and lamp holders for one 40-watt fluorescent lamp, equipped with open-ended metal reflector having upward light slots. Shall indicate a fitting, which shall comply generally with the description for Type F1 but be equipped for use with two 40-watt lamps. Shall indicate a basic channel complete with control gear and lamp holder for one 40 watt fluorescent lamp, equipped with an opal sided diffuser having clear reeded bottom. Shall indicate a fitting, which shall comply generally with the description for Type F3 but be equipped or use with two 40 watt lamps. Shall indicate a dust-tight weatherproof and vapour resistant fitting, having a grey polyester fibre glass reinforced chassis containing the control gear and having lamp holders for one 40-watt fluorescent lamp. The fitting shall be complete with a vacuum formed acrylic diffuser, which is secured to the body with injection-moulded toggles and sealed with a neoprene gasket. Shall indicate a recessed modular fitting suitable for mounting in a suspended ceiling and equipped with an Aluminium louver with Matt mirrors. The material of fixture shall be coated steel. The fitting is to be equipped with a pre-wired removable gear tray and adjusting facilities to enable levelling relative to the ceiling to be carried out after erection. The assembly is to be complete with control gear and lamp holders for one 40-watt fluorescent lamp. Shall indicate a fitting, which shall comply generally with the description for Type F6 but be equipped for use with two 40-watt lamps. Shall indicate a surface mounted fitting suitable for mounting in a suspended ceiling and equipped with an Aluminium louver with Matt mirrors. The material of fixture shall be coated steel. The fitting is to be equipped with a pre-wired removable gear tray. The assembly is to be complete with control gear and lamp holders for one 40-watt fluorescent lamp. Shall indicate a fitting, which shall comply generally with the description for Type F8 but be equipped for use with two 40-watt lamps. Shall indicate a vitreous enamelled or spun aluminium over-lamp depressives type reflector with cover glass, cool wiring box and lamp holder all suitable for use with 60-watt tungsten lamp. Finished colour grey outside and white inside. Shall indicate a non-sustained emergency lighting unit comprising an enamel metal base with flame retardant PVC mounted body equipped with white
TYPE F2 TYPE F3
TYPE F4 TYPE F5
TYPE F6
TYPE F7 TYPE F8
TYPE F9 TYPE E1
TYPE E2
opalescent styrene moulded diffuser with the word "EXIT" in English added to the face in green characters. TYPE E3 Shall indicate a square shaped all insulated dust tight weatherproof fitting constructed of moulded polypropylene suitable for use with a 60-watt tungsten lamp. Shall indicate a semi-recessed fitting housing a 100-watt lamp and equipped with crystallite glass diffuser. Shall indicate 13 Amps one gang flush mounted switched socket outlet. Shall indicate 13 Amps one gang surface mounted switched socket outlet. Shall indicate a bench mounted 4-gang unit of 13 Amps switched socket outlets. Shall indicate a one gang 13 Amps fused spur unit. Shall indicate a bulkhead type fitting having a body cast from corrosion resistant aluminium alloy with light control by means of a prismatic glass held firmly in position in a hinged glazing ring, complete with lamp holder for 100 watt lamp, terminal block suitable for looping conductors and provision for cable entries. Mounting lugs are to be arranged such that fixing screws do not penetrate the fitting interior. Shall indicate a light fitting having a body and diffuser of polycarbonate, complete with internal reflector and porcelain lamp holder suitable for use with a 60 watt 230 volt lamp. Shall indicate forward throw floodlight fitting having a body moulded from glass reinforced plastic (GRP) with light control by means of a dimpled anodised aluminium reflector and 4 mm toughened soda lime flat glass secured in GRP frame hinged and secured to the main body by four stainless steel bolts, complete with lamp holder for 250 watt lamp and mounting bracket stirrup type.
TYPE E4 TYPE S1 TYPE S2 TYPE S3 TYPE S5 TYPE T1
TYPE T2
TYPE M1
TYPE J1
Shall indicate a street lighting fitting of the post top pattern comprising an opal prosper bowl with special spigot cap for mounting directly to the top of the pole and having a spun aluminium canopy held on to the bowl by means of stainless steel spring clips and neoprene sealing ring. The fitting shall be finished vitreous enamel white and suitable for one 250watt lamp with the control gear preferably mounted in the fitting.
21.3.15 Clocks Dry battery cell type clocks shall be installed in the control room, equipment room, rest rooms and reception. The clocks shall be a minimum of 450 mm in diameter for hand types or digital type and are subject to approval by the Employer. 21.3.16 Maintenance The Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of the installations comprising this section of the Specification for the agreed period as set out in this Specification. 21.4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 21.4.1 General Access control is to be provided to all external entrance doors into buildings and rooms specified by the Employer. The system shall be networked via an infrastructure to be agreed by the client, allowing the registration of cards and monitoring of the movement of visitors and staff from an IT workstation. The system shall provide a head count read out for the building in the event of fire alarm activation. The system shall record those entering the building and for those who have left the building.
The system shall be interfaced with the fire alarm system to release doors in the event of a fire. The basic requirement for each access controlled door is an external proximity reader, an internal push to release button and emergency push button and an over door magnetic lock. All of the door access equipment shall be supplied by manufacturers agreed by the Employer. The Contractor shall employ a specialised company to carry out all works associated with the door access control system. 21.4.2 CCTV System The proposal is to provide a site wide IP based CCTV system. The buildings shall be provided with cameras viewing the external perimeters, entrances, exits and sides of the buildings using discrete cameras, the Employer will advise of internal areas that require CCTV coverage. Camera locations are connected via a standard structured cabling RJ45 outlet. Cameras shall be wired in Cat 6 Structured cable and routed through IT Patch locations where they shall be routed via power over Ethernet switches. A colour CCTV system will be required to view the site perimeter and entrances / exits of buildings using discrete dome type cameras. All cameras shall be powered via the Ethernet connection. Internal cameras should be discrete dome type and located in entrance lobbies as indicated by the client. These shall have the following characteristics: Supplied via PoE IP addressable with integral web server Colour Minimum resolution 640 x 480 Fixed camera Discrete tamper resistant dome housing Recording activated on motion only Minimum illumination 0.2lux
External cameras shall be fitted within a suitable environment enclosure incorporating tamper proof alarm monitoring. They shall have, in addition of all of the above: Exterior housing IP66
The system is required to store the recordings for 7 days. A common software program will be required to allow that cameras all to be viewed as part of one site. The Contractor shall employ a specialist to supply, install, test and commissioning a new CCTV system 21.4.3 Refuge Alarms The Contractor shall supply, install and commission a refuge call system within the new building consisting of outstations on all refuge locations linked back to the main reception to provide two-way communication. The system will comprise a central control unit located adjacent to the fire panels with illuminated push switches for each refuge location and telephone handset, and a hands free call point outstations with push button and reassurance indicator. The system shall be wired in FP200 fire rated cable in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 21.4.4 Assistance Alarms The proposal is to provide assistance alarms in the disabled WCs/shower rooms and adjacent to lift access locations. The system is to be supplied via a 24v power supply unit.
The system shall comprise a pull cord with reassurance light, reset button within reach of a person on the WC or in the shower, audible and visual alarm unit outside the room above the door, power supply unit and central warning panel located in the Security room. 21.4.5 Panic Alarms Panic alarms are to be installed within the main reception area and the offices specified by the Employer during the detailed design phase. Door contactors are to be located on fire doors to be defined during the detailed design phase. The panic alarms and door contacts are to signal back to the Security office and should have local sounders both within the area of the alarm and surrounding areas. Wiring (to manufacturers requirements) is to be run on data cable trays or routes agreed by the Employer. 21.4.6 Window Actuator Control Panel The Contractor shall provide a power supply for the window actuator control panel. The window actuator panel, controls wiring and containment shall be carried out by a specialist mechanical services contractor. 21.4.7 Induction Loop Systems The Contractor is to provide audio frequency induction loop systems in accordance with part M1 of the Building Regulations, BS7594 and EN60118-4. Systems shall be provided at the main reception desk, and a portable system for use in offices and meeting rooms. Portable units stored at reception. The fixed systems will generally consist of Audio source - microphone Induction loop amplifier Loop wiring cable installed around the perimeter of the room or desk as appropriate Loop signage 21.4.8 Intruder Alarm System An intruder alarm panel is to be installed in the security room. The details of location shall be defined during the detailed design phase. 21.5 LIFT A lift shall be provided to serve the Ground, First and Second floors of the building. The design of the lift and its installation shall comply with the relevant industry and safety standards for offices.
21.5.1 Capacity All passenger elevators shall be of capacity 550kg and shall be of machine room less type with following specifications: Passenger Elevators Model / Type Duty kg Speed Stop/ Openings /Rise Control Operation Machine Location : Overhead Machine Room : 900kg, minimum : 1.5 m/s, approximately : Stops/ Opening in line please refer to architectural drawings for elevations : Manufacturers standard : Simplex Full Collective or Duplex Full Collective : Overhead
Power supply Car Enclosure: Front Panel Side Panel Rear Panel Handrail Ceiling Floor Car Platform Door Size Door Type Architrave Door Finishes Car Operating Panel
: 400V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz : Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish : Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish : Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish and Mirror : In two sides, Stainless Steel : As per manufacturers standard design : As per manufacturers standard design : Please refer to architectural drawings : 1000 (W) X 2100 (H), approximately : Two Panel Center Opening : Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish : Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish : On side, preferably of Hair-line Stainless Steel Finish or as per the manufacturers standard design
21.5.2 Erection The erection work shall be carried out under the continuous personal supervision of a manufacturers representative, who has the necessary experience and training in erection of the particular make of lift equipment. 21.5.3 Guarantee and Maintenance There shall be a defect liability period as provided by the General Conditions of the Contract after the issue of operational acceptance certificate. 21.5.4 Drawings The following drawings shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval before commencing erection work at site. General arrangements including steel work with dead loads on beam and structures. Winding gear complete with control panel. Car frame with safety gear. Doors and door operating mechanism. Details of builders work. All wiring diagrams and circuit diagrams. 21.5.5 Car Control The car station shall be equipped with emergency stop push button, floor pushes and door open and door close push buttons. The car shall be provided with an emergency escape hatch on the roof, in case of Passenger lifts. It shall have a minimum size of 450mm X 500mm and open outwards. A mechanics control station shall be provided on the cabin roof, which shall be fitted with switches for slow speed running in the up and down directions, a lamp and switch, a 5 Amp socket outlet with adequate protection. A three way interphones between lift car, machine room and point on the ground floor to be provided. Call push buttons and lift coming or call accepted signals shall be fitted at all landings. Audible indication of lift car arrival at floors to be provided. Position indicators and directional arrows shall be fitted in the lift car and all floor landings. A door operator shall be provided to open and close the car landing doors. Safety door edge running full height of car on both doors. Provision shall be made for moving the car to the nearest landing in the event of the lift becoming inoperative between floors. Hand winding equipment shall be painted yellow. A manual break lifting
device to be provided within easy reach of the hand winding wheel and the direction of winding corresponding to the raising and lowering of the lift car to be clearly indicated. The lift car shall be fitted with a weighting device to render the lift inoperative if the contract load is exceeded. Visual and audible indication of car over-load alarm shall be provided. Suitable buffers conforming to B2655 shall be provided for the car and counter weight. 21.6 PUBLIC ADDRESS AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM 21.6.1 General The contractor shall supply, install, test, connect and commission a high quality fast-acting Public Address and Voice Alarm System (PAVA) complying strictly to BS 5839 part8 and EN60849 and shall be TUV approved. The Public Address and Voice Evacuation System shall comprise of Audio Matrix Units, High quality speakers, Audio rack all mounted on a 19 Rack and fully connected and integrated on the fire alarm system. The system shall be used for Professional Sound Reproduction for all the areas where possible special events take place. Prior to placing order for any equipment, the contractor shall submit comprehensive document comprising working drawings, catalogues and descriptive literature of components, to meet with BS5839 part8 RASTI requirements of 0.5 on the STI scale and 0,7 on the CIS scale. The contractor shall be required to train and instruct Employers personnel in the correct use, operation and supervision of the system, preferably prior to the handing over of the project. The contractor shall ensure that all system components offered shall be manufactured by a reputed manufacturer and with a service centre within Sri lanka to provide a prompt service when required.. The contractor shall make sure that all power tapping of the speakers must be carried out as specified, even if the acoustic calculations indicates less power tapings. The contactor must endure minimum of 10dB above noise levels are achieved. The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice communication zones as indicated on the drawings and schematics. The system shall be configured to allow on site modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based software to facilitate future changes or alterations to the buildings. 21.6.2 System Description The system shall be de-centralized in nature, each distributed rack DAU (Distributed Amplifier Unit) shall have all the DSP, messages, amplifiers, monitoring in such a way that can work in a stand alone mode in case the master rack is faulty or down. The DAU shall utilize the latest DSP (Digital Signal Processing) capabilities in order to perform high quality and site programming flexibility, as well providing high fidelity music over 16 audio channels. The Man Machine Interface (MMI) shall be of touch screen type and connected back to the control room, to monitor and control the entire PAVA system, as well to start/stop any music programs, page any zone via touch screen buttons, route any message to any zone as required. The MMI shall be fully BS5839 part 8 and EN60849 compliant and TUV approved. Three Man Machine Interfaces shall be provided for redundancy. If the master fails, the other redundant microphone shall take over automatically and without any manual interference. The secondary MMI shall indicate the fault on the LCD of the microphone. Any button paging microphones or PC based paging console dose not comply with the above and hence deemed rejected.
The DAU shall play background / Foreground music and in case of Fire Alarm / Paging announcement, the system shall go to full power as programmed to provide the enough SPL levels to comply with BS5839 part8, with minimum of 10dB above the noise levels. All system components shall be digitally monitored including and not limited to, Messages, Amplifiers, and Speaker Circuits, Audio Matrix units, Paging Microphone, Battery Charger and the 240 V AC line. Each amplifier / line circuit shall be monitored individually and shall report any faults back to the Master Audio Matrix Unit as well as the Paging Microphone. The system shall be capable of sending messages automatically to any zone at any time interval, without affecting the music in the other areas. The system shall be delivered to have minimum of 16 audio channels, and able to broadcast up to 16 audio channels simultaneously. There shall be one back up amplifier for every four amplifiers, the system shall automatically change over to the back up in case of any amplifier failure, and the back up amplifiers shall be monitored as well. In case of any system component failure, the paging microphone shall override any defective unit and provide paging to the required zone. This Bypass feature shall comply to BS5839 part 8 The System shall provide any Cause & Effect programs after integrating with the Fire Alarm System, thus Alert/Evacuate messages can be programmed and delayed as well as played on any zone / floor as per the Cause & Effect approved by the Engineer. The Battery Back up shall provide 24 hours of back up and 30 min of alarm operation. The power supply / charger must comply with EN54 part 4 and shall be 19 rack mounted. Battery calculation must strictly comply with BS5839 part 8 and shall be based on the amplifier size and not the speaker circuit load. The PAVA system shall be properly integrated with the fire alarm system. The integrated PAVA system shall cover all normally accessible areas The system shall be capable of being used for everyday background music and public announcement and call to prayer duties with the fire alarm initiated emergency announcements overriding all other facilities. Initiation of voice alarm shall take immediate priority and shall cancel all other PA operations. The voice alarm system shall be capable of broadcasting pre-recorded emergency alarm messages and live speech in the event of fire detection system activating for up to 16 audio channels simultaneously. The systems shall be capable of broadcasting up to twelve different pre-recorded messages to different zones or group of zones simultaneously. Evacuate signal relates to a general evacuation message and alert message corresponds to standby instructions. In addition a FIRE DRILL, BOMB ALERT, EARTHQUAKE ALERT and an ALL CLEAR message shall be incorporated into the operation. A fire alarm broadcast signal shall cancel any public address operation and shall override it. When a touch screen firemans microphone is operated, this shall override any automatic voice alarm signal being transmitted to the zone selected. The Alert and Evacuate pre-recorded messages will be maintained in other zones while live voice fire announcements are being broadcast to selected loudspeaker zones. All amplifier gain shall be monitored and measured for open, short or earth faults.
The Entertainment Rack shall be located in the Control/Security Room enabling the operator to select music from the CD player, FM tuner or the double cassette deck to transmit music to selected zones or all the zones in the building from the touch screen paging microphone. A public address announcement shall override the music transmission to selected zones or all zones. Paging any zone shall not interrupt music in other zones.
21.6.3 Distributed Amplifier Unit (DAU) The DAU shall be a mains and battery backed unit and shall be installed (please refer the schematic for the locations). These units shall initiate the broadcast of live speech in the designated public areas using manual controls as well automatically. The use of these units shall be primarily for broadcast fire messages and other optional auxiliary messages as well the back ground music which is site and application specific, as well live evacuation messages and instructions from the operator or the fire brigade to direct the people to the safety points of the building. The DAU must comply with EN60849 for medium and large scale installations. It shall comprise the latest technology in Voice Evacuation through DSP (Digital Signal Processing) and shall have the capability to expand up to 256 channels through cascading master / salve configuration. The DAU shall be capable of playing back ground Music for up to 16 music/audio channels simultaneously, with high quality music features, fully programmable route from any source to any zone. The DAU shall be of 19 rack mount. From 5 to 256 audio inputs (0dB symmetric) Up to 32 touch screen paging microphone can be connected to the system. Each Master / Slave unit can support up to 4 speaker circuits of up to 500W per circuit speaker total of 2000W. All communication must be digital between the entire system components, except the output to the 100V line of the speaker circuit and the 100V output of the amplifier units. All components / lines / speaker circuits must be monitored according to EN60849. One back up amplifier for each four amplifiers Up to 12 digital messages total of 16min length. 16 channels digital audio bus between modules (master / salve) at bandwidth of 20 KHz. 3 band equalization on inputs, 7 bands on outputs. Individual digital control for each input and output level from the software 100 priority levels Programmable delay of 0 to 683 m sec. Digital measurements of (levels and impedance) of amplifiers and the speaker circuit, monitoring shall use these measurements for advanced monitoring technology. Up to 300 incidents can be stored in the system memory event. Internal clock and clock synchronization with the PC. The system shall support open protocols (MODBUS) for third party remote control. All messages shall be of WAV files directly can be downloaded to the system through a PC. Messages can be routed automatically to any zone at any specified time interval.
The DAU shall have the minimum following characteristic: 0dB input / outputs Audio input impedance: 10K Ohms Input sensitivity: 0dB Audio output impedance: 50Ohms Output levels 0dB Max input/output level +14 dBv Pass-band 10 Hz to 22KHz Sampling 48 kHz 24bit Distortion 0.02% to 1 KHz Output noise<84 dBu Lin, <88 dBu A-weighted
Output dynamic >98dBu Lin, >102dBu A-weighted
100V Inputs/Outputs Max power per Channel 500W, and four channel per AMS Amplifier gain measurement 1 kHz, 18 kHz Line impedance measurement 100V 1kHz, 18kHz Ground fault measurement
21.6.4 Linked Audio Processor The LAP must comply with EN60849 and BS5839 part 8 standards and shall route all the audio / security messages / audio through out the entire site via a fire rated fiber optic cable with up to 16 audio channels of simultaneously. The system shall be DSP driven of 24bits of 192 KHz capable of audio processing for quality sound reproduction for back ground as well as foreground music. The LAP shall operate on 24VDC to comply for the battery back-up required by fire regulation requirement. The system shall be able to provide centralized GUI (Graphical User Interface) and full audio control shall be provided. The LAP shall handle more than 20 parameter presets to control the values of the same system such as gains, Equalizations, Filters, Auto mixers, matrixes, feedback suppression, Cross Over for 4 ways system, etc... To be restored either from the PC software or the control inputs or the remote controllers. The LAP shall have up to 10 (0 to 5VDC) analogue control inputs. Each control can be associated to any of the variable audio processing functions of the LAP. The LAP shall have 8 Logical inputs and 8 logical outputs (GPIOs) can be associated with any parameters and can be used for third party integration with professional audio as well to activate or operate any function on the ARU for foreground music purposes. Each DAU must have one LAP. The unit shall comprise an Event Scheduler with true Windows Based Calendar features can be programmed to trigger the following events: Preset change, any internal control change like zone audio level, EQ, delay, matrix, auto-mixer, filers, and cross over, power On/Off, TTL logic output activations. The LAP clock shall synchronies with the external master clock system through RS232 serial link. The unit comprise the following in-built features, Gate Controls, Crossovers, Graphic EQ (16 bands on all inputs / outputs), Mixer, Automatic Microphones Mixer, Feedback killer, Delay, Compressor, Output Control and Page Control. The LAP shall be connected via Fire Rated Fiber Optic redundant Ring Topology. In case of fault on one side of the ring, the system shall continue in operation from the other side without disturbing the music and / or the communication route. The communication path must comply to the Critical Path definition as per EN60849 / BS5839 part 1.
The LAP shall have the following minimum Electrical Specification, Audio Inputs: o Audio input impedance: 10kOhms (symmetrical, screw terminal)
o Input sensitivity: 0dB, -24dB, -55dB (Software Selection) o Max input: +20dBU o Bandwidth: 18Hz to 22kHz o Phantom Power Soft Config 48VDC (Switch able to 24VDC via jumper) Audio Outputs: o Audio output impedance: 50 Ohms (Symmetrical, screw terminal) o Bandwidth 18Hz to 22kHz o Max output: +20dBU o Total Harmonic Distortion <0.02Z%, +10dBu, 20~20kHz, unity gain, 20kHz BW o S/N: 110dB, re+20dBu, unity gain, 22kHz BW o S/N:105dB, re+20dBu, 55dB gain, 22kHz BW o Dynamic range: 110dB, re+20dBu, 22kHz BW Serial connections o RS232port: for ATEIS or Third party equipment remote control o RS232 port: for Remote Controllers and Paging Microphones data control o USB slave: for PC control and setup +MP3 file download, the setup can be made from any unit. Fiber networking Interface o Connectors: ST o Fiber Cable: Fire Rated Multi-mode 62.5/125m o Optical power budget: 10dB o Max Fiber Length: 2000meters. GPIOs: o 8 TTL inputs, Normal or binary coding (up to 256 status) o 8TTL output 0 to 5VDC, contact NO,NC Analogue Control Inputs o 10 analogue inputs 0 to 5VDC Remote Controls LCD remote controls shall be provided as shown on the drawings and the located areas in the hotel. These units shall be capable of Music Selection, Volume Control and shall fit on a standard 3X3back box. The unit shall be fully programmable from the ARU. Amplifier Unit All power amplifiers shall meet Digital Amplifiers Class D complying to EN60849 requirements. Each amplifier module shall be fitted with its own 240VAC/24VDC power supply for increase of system reliability. No fan / forced cooling are required. The unit shall operate on minimum 85% efficiency, analogue amplifiers shall not be accepted. The amplifier must have the minimum following characteristics: 60W, 120W, 240W and 480W range of amplifiers Balanced 0dB input at 770mV 100V line output Thermostatic Ventilation Amplifier Status Led / contacts Frequency response 40-20KHz Distortion at nominal power <1% Signal/noise ration: >90dB
21.6.5 Man Machine Interface Unit (MMI) High end touch screen fire fighters microphone console is a man machine interface (MMI) which groups together all functions required by the EN60849 and BS5839 part8 regulations. Its back-lit touchpad makes simple and user-friendly operating. Can be configured either by the PC or by the AMS, with a password protection for access.
All parameters needed for site operating can be programmed: zone assigned to the different buttons, name of zones, zone groups, priorities, access to different messages, levels adjustments, pre-call chime, press to talk, music ON/OFF and Music routing. Its large LCD screen provides an overall view of busy zones and active sources. A VU meter controls the microphone presence and modulation level. A built-in loudspeaker makes it possible to listen to all system garneted messages and announcements. The entire unit is monitored (microphone capsule, power supply, touch screen, audio and RS485 connections). Any system faults are detected, located and indicated clearly on the screen. The system must have the minimum following characteristics: High Quality Omni directional microphone Back-lit touch pad, push buttons are not acceptable. Group calls and All calls functions fully programmable Press to talk or ON/OFF buttons Music ON/OFF Music routing Display all system incidents Buzzer which signals faults Remote control for digital messages with zone assignment LED system status display (evacuation, power supply and fault) Max distance between mic and system rack is 500m (1500m with local power supply)
21.6.6 Entertainment Rack The equipment panel shall consist of 1 no. CD player, 1 No. double cassette deck, 1 no. AM/FM tuner. All music transmitted from this position will be routed through the Central Equipment rack to the zone / zones selected though complete windows based programming. The equipment components shall comply with the following requirements: a) FM/AM tuner The tuner shall contain provision for up to six preset stations, two of which shall be dedicated to MW or LW. It shall have the following characteristics: Sensitivity Distortion IF rejection Nominal output Antenna Impedance Tuning method b) Cassette Deck The tape deck shall be double cassette sequencer accepting up to two M-track music cassettes with features like auto-music search, audio sensing, auto reverse and auto eject, power on/off of faulty tapes. It shall accept standard C60 and C90 music cassettes. The tape deck shall have the following characteristics: AC supply input Output Level Frequency Range Distortion Signal to Noise Ratio Tape Speed : : : : : : 220V, 50 Hz 0dBm (775mV) 600 ohms mono output 60 Hz to 12500 Hz 3dB < 3% THD at 1 kHz < 49dB 4.75 cm/sec : : : : : : : 3uV for FM channels 20uV for 26dBSNR for AM section 1% THD 70db 100mV 75 ohms Electronic, onsite adjustable with LED on station indicator
Fast forward / Rewind
< 140 sec to rewind C60 cassette
c)
CD Player The CD player shall be capable of loading up to six discs into a magazine to provide many hours of repeated play. All discs could be played sequentially or randomly by the use of a remote signal. Frequency response Signal to Noise Ratio Distortion Channel Separation Quantization : : : : : 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz 90dB 0.008 % THD @ 1 kHz 82dB 16-bit twin DAC
d)
Equipment Rack The equipment shall be housed in a standard rack of suitable height, with Plexiglas door or metal mesh and lock. Ventilation panels of 1U height shall be provided between each item of equipment. Details of the proposed equipment shall be forwarded to the Consultant with performance specifications, dimensions, construction and finish for approval. The site shall be fitted with man / machine interface terminal facilities, which shall allow live speech broadcasts to be addressed to selected areas of the site. The unit shall also allow initiation of stored messages and alarm signals.
Speakers
Ceiling Mounted Speakers :The speaker shall be suitable for flush mounting to a false ceiling of any configuration. It shall be equipped with a multiple tapping matching transformer to provide easy control of speaker sound volume. Supporting brackets to mount the speaker onto false ceilings of different configurations shall be provided. The speaker shall not have any screw fixing arrangement on its grill. The speaker must comply with BS5839 part 8 and having the EASE, CATT, ULYSSES files for sound acoustic calculation and sound modelling. All tapping shall be made to obtain SPL as per BS5839 part8 The speakers shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link. It shall satisfy the following performance characteristics: 6 two way speakers Effective frequency range according to BS6840 shall be 80-20,000Hz SPL @ 1m, 1Watt, dB, Test Signal Bandwidth 100Hz-10 KHz shall be 92dB SPL @ full power Octave Bandwidth shall be dB102 Rated Power, Watts 8 @ 10/5/2.5/1.25 tapings Acoustic Power (dB-PWL @ 1watt) 1 KHz/2KHz, 89/88dB Directivity Axial Q factor, 1 KHz/2KHz shall be 2.3/4.2 Dimensions, diameter 239mm Material shall be steel, white, RAL9016
21.6.7 Pendant Full Range Speakers The speaker shall be of premium low-profile, high-efficiency, high SPL speaker with Broad Beam coverage pattern technology providing high performance audio for sound reinforcement and security PA application.
The speaker must comply with BS5839 part 8 and having the EASE, files for sound acoustic calculation and sound modelling. The speakers shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link. The loudspeaker shall consist of a 304 mm (12.0 in) concentric coaxial coated fiber driver, 25 mm (1.0 in) compression driver with a 50 mm (2.0 in) titanium diaphragm and a frequency-dividing network installed in a dual-ported enclosure. The low-frequency voice coil diameter shall be 50 mm (2.0 in). Performance specifications of a typical production unit shall be as follows: Usable frequency response shall extend from 50 Hz 20 kHz. Frequency Response (-3dB) shall be 68Hz 20 kHz Frequency Response (-6dB) shall be 58Hz 20 kHz Max. Program Power 300W Max Continuous Power RMS 150W Max. SPL dB @1M shall be 121dB Sensitivity dB @1W/1M shall be 99dB Coverage angle (-6dB @ 2 kHz) shall be 120 Coverage angle (-6dB @ 8 kHz) shall be 90 Directivity Factor (Q) shall be 5.26 (100Hz to 10 kHz) 5.02 @ 2 kHz Directivity Index (DI) shall be 6.35 dB (100Hz to 10 kHz) 7.01 dB @ 2 kHz 12 2way high power ported (64 Watt transformer for 70/100Volt application with voice coil /8Ohm direct. The loudspeaker shall be available with a switch-able transformer/8 Ohm -input, and shall be equipped with corrosion resistant gold plated barrier strips -for both impedance modes. Taps shall be nominally tapped at 32 Watt RMS at 100V line. The frequency-dividing network shall have a crossover frequency of 1.8 kHz. The enclosure shall be constructed of roto-molded polyethylene. The grille shall be constructed of UV-resistant ABS plastic material. Installation for the speaker shall be by two hanging aircraft cable with a 1/4-2 studs into threaded insert on rear input panel.
22. OTHER SERVICES 22.1 TRANSPORT
The Contractor shall provide, maintain, and keep available at all times, the transport for the exclusive use of the Employers Representatives officers engaged in the project. In the event of unavailability due to repairs or overhaul, the contractor shall provide equivalent substitute. Failure to provide a suitable vehicle in time will result hiring a suitable vehicle by the employer and deducting the cost from the Contractor. The specification for the vehicles shall be as follows for the contract. a) Cars with engine capacity of 1500 cc, four door, 4 persons, petrol engine with air conditioning, power steering, seat belts, full air bag protection. CD/Cassette/Radio and all other standard fittings. Off Road four wheel drive (double cab) engine capacity of 2800 cc or less, four door, 4 persons, diesel engine with air conditioning, power steering, seat belts, full air bag protection, CD/Cassette/Radio, canopy and all other standard fittings. Four wheel drive JEEP/SUV with engine capacity of 2000 cc, diesel engine with air conditioning, power steering, seat belts, full air bag protection, CD/Cassette/Radio, and all other standard fittings.
b)
c)
All vehicles shall be brand new when supplied and shall remain property of the contractor throughout the duration of the contract. One month after the taking over certificate is issued the vehicles shall be handed over to the employer. They shall be in sound technical condition with new tires, including spares and complete set of tools. All damages shall be repaired and full technical service performed all to the satisfaction of the Employers Representatives. The contract rates for transport of the Employers Representatives personnel shall include for each vehicle the fixed cost of the vehicle; comprehensive all inclusive, insurance, registration, license plates, fuel oils, lubricants, repairs, maintenance and the provision of one full time competent driver and all other costs and charges not specifically mentioned but which may be incurred during running and good keeping of the vehicles throughout the contract. The employer shall have an option to request more vehicles against the same rate if it becomes necessary. The contractor not later than two months form the contract commencement date shall provide the vehicles as above. The vehicles shall be made available for full use during the period of the contract. 22.2 EMPLOYERS REPRESENTATIVES OFFICE
22.2.1 Main Project Office for Employers Representatives The Contractor shall rent out a suitable office between proposed site at Sri Jayewardenepura and Ceylon Electricity Board Head Office (easy access to Main Road) to be used and maintained as the main office of the Project for the exclusive use of the staff of Employer Representatives with a minimum 2 floor area of 150m . It shall be fully air-conditioned with at least two wash rooms and toilets, a kitchen with pantry, pipe borne water supply. The office location of shall be subjected to the approval of the Employers Representative. It should be suitably partitioned and designed to accommodate two consultants, the Project Director, two senior Engineers, five Engineers, four Electrical Superintendents and four office staff. Adequate parking facilities for at least ten (10) vehicles shall be provided. In addition it should be furnished with nine (09) computer tables with nine (09) chairs and filing cabinets -04 Nos. The office, kitchen with pantry, toilet facilities and the relevant services shall be provided and maintained to the satisfaction of the Employers Representatives until the end of the two months following the final taking over of the completed works.

Volume 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEYLON ELECTRICITY BOARD SRI LANKA CLEAN ENERGY AND ACCESS IMPROVEMENT PROJECT

(ADB Loan No. 2518-SRI)

PART 1: SYSTEM CONTROL CENTRE MODERNISATION PROJECT

Contents - Summary Description

Section 2 - Bid Data Sheet (BDS) --------------------------------------------------------- 2-1

Section 3 - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria (EQC) -------------------------- 3-1

VOLUME 2 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES

VOLUME 3 OF 8 PART I BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section 5 - Eligible Countries (ELC) ----------------------------------------------------- 5-1

VOLUME 4 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS

VOLUME 5 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS

VOLUME 6 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS

VOLUME 7 OF 8 PART II REQUIREMENTS

Section 6 - Employers Requirements (ERQ) --------------------------------------- 6E-1

VOLUME 8 OF 8 PART III CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND CONTRACT FORMS

Section 8 - Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) ----------------------------------- 8-1

Section 9 - Contract Forms (COF) --------------------------------------------------------- 9-1

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

CONTENTS CHAPTER No. 1. TITLE PAGE No.

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 1 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 2 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

2.5.5 2.5.6 2.6 2.7

Under Frequency Load Shedding ................................................................... 70 Load Shedding Schedules .............................................................................. 70

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 3 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 4 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 6 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 7 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 9 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 10 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 11 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 13 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 14 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications

Technical Specifications Bidding Document for CEAIP-Part 1-SCCMP-Package A

Page 6B- 15 Single-Stage: Two-Envelope

Section 6 - Employers Requirements Technical Specifications